GNU 'troff'
1 Introduction
  1.1 Background
  1.2 What Is 'groff'?
  1.3 GNU 'troff' Capabilities
  1.4 Macro Packages
  1.5 Preprocessors
  1.6 Output Devices
  1.7 Installation
  1.8 Conventions Used in This Manual
  1.9 Credits
2 Invoking 'groff'
  2.1 Options
  2.2 Environment
  2.3 Macro Directories
  2.4 Font Directories
  2.5 Paper Format
  2.6 Invocation Examples
3 Tutorial for Macro Package Users
  3.1 Basics
  3.2 Common Features
    3.2.1 Paragraphs
    3.2.2 Sections and Chapters
    3.2.3 Headers and Footers
    3.2.4 Page Layout
    3.2.5 Displays and Keeps
    3.2.6 Footnotes and Endnotes
    3.2.7 Table of Contents
    3.2.8 Indexing
    3.2.9 Document Formats
    3.2.10 Columnation
    3.2.11 Font and Size Changes
    3.2.12 Predefined Text
    3.2.13 Preprocessor Support
    3.2.14 Configuration and Customization
4 Macro Packages
  4.1 'man'
    4.1.1 Optional 'man' extensions
      Custom headers and footers
      Ultrix-specific man macros
      Simple example
  4.2 'mdoc'
  4.3 'me'
  4.4 'mm'
  4.5 'mom'
  4.6 'ms'
    4.6.1 Introduction
      4.6.1.1 Basic information
    4.6.2 Document Structure
    4.6.3 Document Control Settings
      Margin settings
      Titles (headers, footers)
      Text settings
      Paragraph settings
      Heading settings
      Footnote settings
      Display settings
      Other settings
    4.6.4 Document Description Macros
    4.6.5 Body Text
      4.6.5.1 Text settings
      4.6.5.2 Typographical symbols
      4.6.5.3 Paragraphs
      4.6.5.4 Headings
      4.6.5.5 Typeface and decoration
      4.6.5.6 Lists
      4.6.5.7 Indented regions
      4.6.5.8 Keeps, boxed keeps, and displays
      4.6.5.9 Tables, figures, equations, and references
      4.6.5.10 Footnotes
      4.6.5.11 Language and localization
    4.6.6 Page layout
      4.6.6.1 Headers and footers
      4.6.6.2 Tab stops
      4.6.6.3 Margins
      4.6.6.4 Multiple columns
      4.6.6.5 Creating a table of contents
    4.6.7 Differences from AT&T 'ms'
      4.6.7.1 Unix Version 7 'ms' macros unimplemented by 'groff' 'ms'
    4.6.8 Legacy Features
      AT&T accent mark strings
      Berkeley accent mark and glyph strings
    4.6.9 Naming Conventions
5 GNU 'troff' Reference
  5.1 Text
    5.1.1 Filling
    5.1.2 Sentences
    5.1.3 Hyphenation
    5.1.4 Breaking
    5.1.5 Adjustment
    5.1.6 Tabs and Leaders
    5.1.7 Requests and Macros
    5.1.8 Macro Packages
    5.1.9 Input Format
    5.1.10 Input Encodings
    5.1.11 Input Conventions
  5.2 Page Geometry
  5.3 Measurements
    5.3.1 Motion Quanta
    5.3.2 Default Units
  5.4 Numeric Expressions
  5.5 Identifiers
  5.6 Formatter Instructions
    5.6.1 Control Characters
    5.6.2 Invoking Requests
    5.6.3 Calling Macros
    5.6.4 Using Escape Sequences
    5.6.5 Delimiters
  5.7 Comments
  5.8 Registers
    5.8.1 Setting Registers
    5.8.2 Interpolating Registers
    5.8.3 Auto-increment
    5.8.4 Assigning Register Formats
    5.8.5 Built-in Registers
  5.9 Manipulating Filling and Adjustment
  5.10 Manipulating Hyphenation
  5.11 Manipulating Spacing
  5.12 Tabs and Fields
    5.12.1 Leaders
    5.12.2 Fields
  5.13 Character Translations
  5.14 'troff' and 'nroff' Modes
  5.15 Line Layout
  5.16 Line Continuation
  5.17 Page Layout
  5.18 Page Control
  5.19 Using Fonts
    5.19.1 Selecting Fonts
    5.19.2 Font Families
    5.19.3 Font Positions
    5.19.4 Characters and Glyphs
    5.19.5 Character Classes
    5.19.6 Special Fonts
    5.19.7 Artificial Fonts
    5.19.8 Ligatures and Kerning
    5.19.9 Italic Corrections
    5.19.10 Dummy Characters
  5.20 Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing
    5.20.1 Changing the Type Size
    5.20.2 Changing the Vertical Spacing
    5.20.3 Using Fractional Type Sizes
  5.21 Colors
  5.22 Strings
  5.23 Conditionals and Loops
    5.23.1 Operators in Conditionals
    5.23.2 if-then
    5.23.3 if-else
    5.23.4 Conditional Blocks
    5.23.5 while
  5.24 Writing Macros
    5.24.1 Parameters
    5.24.2 Copy Mode
  5.25 Page Motions
  5.26 Output Line Annotation
  5.27 Drawing Geometric Objects
  5.28 Deferring Output
  5.29 Traps
    5.29.1 Vertical Position Traps
      5.29.1.1 Page Location Traps
      5.29.1.2 The Implicit Page Trap
      5.29.1.3 Diversion Traps
    5.29.2 Input Line Traps
    5.29.3 Blank Line Traps
    5.29.4 Leading Space Traps
    5.29.5 End-of-input Traps
  5.30 Diversions
  5.31 Punning Names
  5.32 Environments
  5.33 Suppressing Output
  5.34 Host System Service Access
  5.35 Postprocessor Access
  5.36 Miscellaneous
  5.37 GNU 'troff' Internals
  5.38 Debugging
    5.38.1 Warnings
  5.39 Implementation Differences
    5.39.1 Safer Mode
    5.39.2 Compatibility Mode
    5.39.3 Other Differences
6 File Formats
  6.1 Device and Font Description Files
    6.1.1 'DESC' File Format
    6.1.2 Font Description File Format
  6.2 GNU 'troff' Output
    6.2.1 Language Concepts
      6.2.1.1 Syntax
      6.2.1.2 Argument Units
      6.2.1.3 Output Structure
    6.2.2 Command Reference
      6.2.2.1 Comment Command
      6.2.2.2 Simple Commands
      6.2.2.3 Graphics Commands
      6.2.2.4 Device Control Commands
      6.2.2.5 Legacy Compressed Encoding
    6.2.3 GNU 'troff' Output Examples
    6.2.4 Output Language Compatibility
Appendix A Copying This Manual
Appendix B Request Index
Appendix C Escape Sequence Index
Appendix D Operator Index
Appendix E Register Index
Appendix F Macro Index
Appendix G String Index
Appendix H File Keyword Index
Appendix I Program and File Index
Appendix J Concept Index

GNU 'troff'
***********

This manual documents GNU 'troff' version 1.24.1.

     Copyright © 1994-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     Copyright © 2018-2026 G. Branden Robinson

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
     no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
     section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".

1 Introduction
**************

GNU 'roff' (or 'groff') is a programming system for typesetting
documents.  It is highly flexible and has been used extensively for over
thirty years.

1.1 Background
==============

M. Douglas McIlroy, formerly of AT&T Bell Laboratories and present at
the creation of the Unix operating system, offers an authoritative
historical summary.

     The prime reason for Unix was the desire of Ken [Thompson], Dennis
     [Ritchie], and Joe Ossanna to have a pleasant environment for
     software development.  The fig leaf that got the nod from ...
     management was that an early use would be to develop a
     "stand-alone" word-processing system for use in typing pools and
     secretarial offices.  Perhaps they had in mind "dedicated", as
     distinct from "stand-alone"; that's what eventuated in various
     cases, most notably in the legal/patent department and in the AT&T
     CEO's office.

     Both those systems were targets of opportunity, not foreseen from
     the start.  When Unix was up and running on the PDP-11, Joe got
     wind of the legal department having installed a commercial word
     processor.  He went to pitch Unix as an alternative and clinched a
     trial by promising to make 'roff' able to number lines by tomorrow
     in order to fulfill a patent-office requirement that the commercial
     system did not support.

     Modems were installed so legal-department secretaries could try the
     Research machine.  They liked it and Joe's superb customer service.
     Soon the legal department got a system of their own.  Joe went on
     to create 'nroff' and 'troff'.  Document preparation became a
     widespread use of Unix, but no stand-alone word-processing system
     was ever undertaken.

   A history relating 'groff' to its forerunners 'roff', 'nroff', and
'troff' is available in 'roff(7)'.

1.2 What Is 'groff'?
====================

'groff' (GNU 'roff') is a typesetting system that reads plain text input
that includes formatting commands to produce output in PostScript, PDF,
HTML, or other formats, or for display to a terminal.  Formatting
commands can be low-level typesetting primitives, macros from a supplied
package, or user-defined macros.  All three approaches can be combined.

   A reimplementation and extension of 'troff' and other programs from
AT&T Unix, 'groff' is widely available on POSIX and other systems owing
to its long association with Unix manuals, including man pages.  It and
its predecessor have produced several best-selling software engineering
texts.  'groff' can create typographically sophisticated documents while
consuming minimal system resources.

   Like its predecessor "troff", the term "groff" affords two popular
pronunciations: as one syllable (like the surname), rhyming with
"trough", or as "jee-roff", in analogy to the Bell Labs pronunciation
"tee-roff".  Little risk of confusion exists; use whichever suits you.

   The architecture of the GNU 'roff' system follows that of other
device-independent 'roff' implementations, comprising preprocessors,
macro packages, output drivers (or "postprocessors"), and a suite of
utilities, with the formatter program 'troff' at its heart.

   The front end programs available in the GNU 'roff' system make it
easier to use than traditional 'roff's that required the construction of
pipelines or use of temporary files to carry a source document from
maintainable form to device-ready output.

1.3 GNU 'troff' Capabilities
============================

GNU 'troff' is a typesetting document formatting program; it provides a
wide range of low-level text and page operations within the framework of
a programming language.  These operations compose to generate footnotes,
tables of contents, mathematical equations, diagrams, multi-column text,
and other elements of typeset works.  Here is a survey of formatter
features; all are under precise user control.

   * text filling, breaking, alignment to the left or right margin;
     centering

   * adjustment of inter-word space size to justify text, and of
     inter-sentence space size to suit local style conventions

   * automatic and manual determination of hyphenation break points

   * pagination

   * selection of any font available to the output device

   * adjustment of type size and vertical spacing (or "leading")

   * configuration of line length and indentation amounts; columnation

   * drawing of geometric primitives (lines, arcs, polygons, circles,
     ...)

   * setup of stroke and fill colors (where supported by the output
     device)

   * embedding of hyperlinks, images, document metadata, and other
     inclusions (where supported by the output device)

1.4 Macro Packages
==================

Elemental typesetting functions can be be laborious to use directly with
complex documents.  A "macro" facility specifies how certain routine
operations, such as starting paragraphs, or printing headers and
footers, should be performed in terms of those low-level instructions.
One then calls the macro to make it perform its task.  Macros can be
specific to one document or collected together into a "macro package"
for use by many.  'groff' supplies versions of the widely used macro
packages 'man', 'mdoc', 'me', 'mm', 'mom', and 'ms'.

1.5 Preprocessors
=================

An alternative approach to complexity management, particularly when
constructing tables, setting mathematics, or drawing diagrams, lies in
preprocessing.  A "preprocessor" employs a domian-specific language to
ease the generation of tables, equations, and so forth in terms that are
convenient for human entry.  Each preprocessor reads a document and
translates relevant portions of it into GNU 'troff' input.  Command-line
options to 'groff' tell it which preprocessors to use.

   'groff' provides preprocessors for laying out tables ('tbl'),
typesetting equations ('eqn'), drawing diagrams ('pic' and 'grn'),
inserting bibliographic references ('refer'), and drawing chemical
structures ('chem').  An associated program that is useful when dealing
with preprocessors is 'soelim'.

   'groff' also supports 'grap', a preprocessor for drawing graphs.  A
free implementation of it can be obtained separately.(1)  (see
Preprocessor Intro-Footnote-1)

   Unique to 'groff' is the 'preconv' preprocessor that enables GNU
'troff' to handle documents in a variety of input encodings, including
UTF-8.  Unlike most preprocessors, 'preconv' operates on its entire
enput rather than transforming specially marked regions of a document.

   Other preprocessors exist, but no free implementations are known.  An
example is 'ideal', which draws diagrams using a mathematical constraint
language.

   (1) <https://www.lunabase.org/~faber/Vault/software/grap/>

1.6 Output Devices
==================

GNU 'troff''s output is in a device-independent page description
language.  An "output driver" translates this language into a file
format or byte stream that a piece of (possibly emulated) hardware
understands.  'groff' features output drivers for PostScript devices,
terminal emulators (and other simple typewriter-like machines), X11 (for
previewing), TeX DVI, HP LaserJet 4/PCL5 printers, Canon LBP
(CaPSL-using printers), HTML, XHTML, and PDF.

1.7 Installation
================

Locate installation instructions in the files 'INSTALL',
'INSTALL.extra', and 'INSTALL.REPO' in the 'groff' source distribution.
Being a GNU project, 'groff' supports the familiar './configure && make'
command sequence.

1.8 Conventions Used in This Manual
===================================

We apply the term "groff" to the language documented here, the GNU
implementation of the overall system, the project that develops that
system, and the command of that name.  In the first sense, 'groff' is an
extended dialect of the 'roff' language, for which many similar
implementations exist.  We say "the formatter" when speaking of behavior
that is generally true of 'troff' and 'nroff' programs.

   A tradition has arisen that GNU programs' names bear a prefix 'g'
where necessary to distinguish them from other implementations on the
host system (see Environment).  Thus, for example, 'geqn' is GNU 'eqn'.
On operating systems that lack a 'troff' of different provenance, this
prefix is omitted; GNU 'troff' is the only 'troff' available.
Exceptionally, 'groff' always retains its leading 'g'.

   We call non-GNU 'troff' systems AT&T 'troff' because that is the
common origin of almost all 'troff' implementations(1) (see Conventions
Used in This Manual-Footnote-1) (with more or less compatible changes).

   This manual employs Emacs names for non-graphic keycap engravings on
the alphabetic section of the keyboard.  "<RET>" is Return or Enter, and
"<SPC>" is the space bar.

   The 'roff' language features several major syntactical categories
within which many items are predefined.  Presentations of these items
comprise the name of the category followed by a colon and the form in
which the item is most commonly used.

 -- Register: \n[example]
     The register 'example' is one that that 'groff' _doesn't_
     predefine.  You can create it yourself, though; see Setting
     Registers.

   To make this document useful as a reference and not merely amiable
bedtime reading, we tend to present these syntax items in exhaustive
detail when they arise.  References to topics discussed later in the
text are frequent; skim material you haven't mastered yet.

   We use Texinfo's "result" (=>) and error-> notations to present
output written to the standard output and standard error streams,
respectively.  Diagnostic messages from the GNU 'troff' formatter and
other programs are examples of the latter, but the formatter can also be
directed to write user-specified messages to the standard error stream.
The notation then serves to identify the output stream and does not
necessarily mean that an error has occurred.(2)  (see Conventions Used
in This Manual-Footnote-2)

     $ echo "Twelve o'clock and" | groff -T ascii | sed '/^$/d'
         => Twelve o'clock and
     $ echo '.tm all is well.' | groff > /dev/null
         error-> all is well.

   Sometimes we use => abstractly to represent formatted text that you
will need to use a PostScript or PDF viewer program (or a printer) to
observe.  While arguably an abuse of notation, we think this preferable
to requiring the reader to understand the syntax of these page
description languages.

   We also present diagnostic messages in an abbreviated form, often
omitting the name of the program issuing them, the input file name, and
line number or other positional information when such data do not serve
to illuminate the topic under discussion.

   Most examples are of 'roff' language input that would be placed in a
text file.  Occasionally, we start an example with a '$' character to
indicate a shell prompt, as seen above.

   We encourage you to to try the examples yourself, and to alter them
to better learn 'groff''s behavior.  Our examples sometimes need to
direct the formatter to set a line length (with '.ll') that fits within
the page margins of this manual.  We mention this so that you know why
it is there before we discuss the 'll' request formally.(3)  (see
Conventions Used in This Manual-Footnote-3)

   We refer occasionally to man pages, in which aspects of the 'groff'
system or of its operating environment are further documented.(4)  (see
Conventions Used in This Manual-Footnote-4) When you see a citation like
'groff_man(7)', understand that you can type 'man groff_man' at the
command line to view it.  The numbered category distinguishes pages by
their purpose.  You can try 'man 'groff(1)'' and 'man 'groff(7)'' to
observe this distinction.(5)  (see Conventions Used in This
Manual-Footnote-5) Your system likely offers an 'intro(1)' page that
will help you make the most of this resource.

   (1) Besides 'groff', 'neatroff' is an exception.

   (2) Unix and related operating systems distinguish standard output
and standard error streams _because_ of 'troff':
<https://www.tuhs.org/pipermail/tuhs/2013-December/006113.html>.

   (3) See Line Layout.

   (4) 'roff' is the language of historical Unix manuals, and of man
pages to this day.

   (5) POSIX has not standardized a mechanism for the 'man' command to
distinguish pages by numeric category.  If 'man 'groff(7)'' produces an
error, attempt 'man 7 groff' or 'man -s 7 groff'.

1.9 Credits
===========

We adapted portions of this manual from existing documents.  James
Clark's man pages were an invaluable foundation; we have updated them in
parallel with the development of this manual.  We based the tutorial for
macro package users on Eric Allman's introduction to his 'me' macro
package (which we also provide, little altered from 4.4BSD). Larry
Kollar contributed much of the material on the 'ms' macro package.

2 Invoking 'groff'
******************

This chapter focuses on how to invoke the 'groff' front end, which
constructs a pipeline connecting desired preprocessors, the GNU 'troff'
formatter program, and a postprocessor.

2.1 Options
===========

'groff' runs the GNU 'troff' program and, normally, a postprocessor
appropriate to the selected device.  The default device is 'ps', unless
changed at 'groff''s build-time configuration.  'groff' can preprocess
input with any of 'pic', 'eqn', 'tbl', 'grn', 'grap', 'chem', 'refer',
'soelim', or 'preconv'.

   This section documents only options to the 'groff' front end.  Since
it passes many of its arguments to GNU 'troff', we describe many of the
latter's options here.  Arguments to preprocessors and output drivers
can be found in the man pages 'pic(1)', 'eqn(1)', 'tbl(1)', 'grn(1)',
'refer(1)', 'chem(1)', 'soelim(1)', 'preconv(1)', 'grotty(1)',
'grops(1)', 'gropdf(1)', 'grohtml(1)', 'grodvi(1)', 'grolj4(1)',
'grolbp(1)', and 'gxditview(1)'.

   A summary of 'groff''s usage follows.

     groff [-abcCeEgGijklNpRsStUVXzZ] [-d CS] [-d STRING=TEXT]
           [-D FALLBACK-ENCODING] [-f FONT-FAMILY]
           [-F FONT-DIRECTORY] [-I INCLUSION-DIRECTORY]
           [-K INPUT-ENCODING] [-L SPOOLER-ARGUMENT]
           [-m MACRO-PACKAGE] [-M MACRO-DIRECTORY]
           [-n PAGE-NUMBER] [-o PAGE-LIST]
           [-P POSTPROCESSOR-ARGUMENT] [-r CNUMERIC-EXPRESSION]
           [-r REGISTER=NUMERIC-EXPRESSION] [-T OUTPUT-DEVICE]
           [-w WARNING-CATEGORY] [-W WARNING-CATEGORY]
           [FILE ...]

   'troff' shares much of this interface; 'groff' passes relevant
options and operands to it.

     troff [-abcCEiRSUz] [-f FONT-FAMILY] [-F FONT-DIRECTORY]
           [-I INCLUSION-DIRECTORY] [-m MACRO-PACKAGE]
           [-M MACRO-DIRECTORY] [-n PAGE-NUMBER] [-o PAGE-LIST]
           [-r CNUMERIC-EXPRESSION]
           [-r REGISTER=NUMERIC-EXPRESSION] [-T OUTPUT-DEVICE]
           [-w WARNING-CATEGORY] [-W WARNING-CATEGORY]
           [FILE ...]

   Options that don't take arguments can be clustered after a
single '-'.  A FILE operand of  '-' denotes the standard input stream.

   All 'groff' commands accept a '--help' option, which summarizes usage
similarly to the foregoing, and '--version', which discloses release
information.  Both exit with a successful status after reporting.

   The rest of 'groff''s command-line options are as follows.

'-a'
     Generate a plain text approximation of the typeset output.  The
     read-only register '.A' is set to 1.  See Built-in Registers.  This
     option produces a sort of abstract preview of the formatted output.

        * Page breaks are marked by a phrase in angle brackets; for
          example, '<beginning of page>'.

        * Lines are broken where they would be in formatted output.

        * Vertical motion, apart from that implied by a break, is not
          represented.

        * A horizontal motion of any size is represented as one space.
          Adjacent horizontal motions are not combined.  Supplemental
          inter-sentence space (configured by the second argument to the
          'ss' request) is not represented.

        * A special character is rendered as its identifier between
          angle brackets; for example, a hyphen appears as '<hy>'.

     The above description should not be considered a specification; the
     details of '-a' output are subject to change.

'-b'
     Write a backtrace reporting the state of 'troff''s input parser to
     the standard error stream with each diagnostic message.  The line
     numbers given in the backtrace might not always be correct, because
     'troff''s idea of line numbers can be confused by requests that
     append to macros.

'-c'
     Disable multi-color output and 'color' request's ability to enable
     it.

'-C'
     Enable AT&T 'troff' compatibility mode; implies '-c'.  See
     Implementation Differences, for the list of incompatibilities
     between 'groff' and AT&T 'troff'.

'-d CTEXT'
'-d STRING=TEXT'
     Define 'roff' string C or STRING as TEXT.  C must be one character;
     STRING can be of arbitrary length.  Such assignments happen before
     any macro file is loaded, including the startup file.  Due to
     'getopt_long(3)' limitations, C cannot be, and STRING cannot
     contain, an equals sign, even though that is a valid character in a
     'roff' identifier.  See Strings.

'-D ENC'
     Set fallback input encoding used by 'preconv' to ENC; implies '-k'.

'-e'
     Run 'eqn' preprocessor.

'-E'
     Inhibit 'troff' error messages.  This option does _not_ suppress
     messages sent to the standard error stream by documents or macro
     packages using 'tm' or related requests.

'-f FAM'
     Use FAM as the default font family.  See Font Families.

'-F DIR'
     Search in directory 'DIR' for the selected output device's
     directory of device and font description files.  See Font
     Directories.

'-g'
     Run 'grn' preprocessor.

'-G'
     Run 'grap' preprocessor; implies '-p'.

'-h'
     Display a usage message and exit.

'-i'
     Read the standard input stream after all the named input files have
     been processed.

'-I DIR'
     Search the directory DIR for files named in several contexts;
     implies '-g' and '-s'.

        * 'soelim' replaces lines matching '.so FILE-NAME' with the
          contents of FILE-NAME.

        * 'troff' searches for files named as operands in its command
          line and as arguments to 'psbb', 'so', and 'soquiet' requests.

        * Output drivers may search for files; for instance, 'grops'
          looks for files named in '\X'ps: import ...'', '\X'ps: file
          ...'', and '\X'pdf: pdfpic ...'' device extension escape
          sequences.

     This option may be specified more than once; the directories are
     searched in the order specified.  If you want to search the current
     directory before others, add '-I .' at the desired place.  The
     current working directory is otherwise searched last.  '-I' works
     similarly to, and is named for, the "include" option of Unix C
     compilers.

     'groff' passes '-I' options and their arguments to 'soelim',
     'troff', and output drivers; with the option letter changed to
     '-M', it passes the same arguments to 'grn'.

'-j'
     Run 'gchem' preprocessor.  Implies '-p'.

'-k'
     Run 'preconv' preprocessor.  Refer to its man page for its behavior
     if neither of 'groff''s '-K' or '-D' options is also specified.

'-K ENC'
     Set input encoding used by 'preconv' to ENC; implies '-k'.

'-l'
     Send the output to a spooler for printing.  The 'print' directive
     in the device description file specifies the default command to be
     used; see Device and Font Description Files.  See options '-L' and
     '-X'.

'-L ARG'
     Pass ARG to the print spooler.  If multiple ARGs are required, pass
     each with a separate '-L' option.  'groff' does not prefix an
     option dash to ARG before passing it to the spooler.

'-m MAC'
     Search for the macro package 'MAC.tmac' and read it prior to any
     input.  If not found, 'tmac.MAC' is attempted.  See Macro
     Directories.  'groff' passes '-m' options and their arguments to
     'eqn', 'grap', and 'grn'.

'-M DIR'
     Search directory 'DIR' for macro files.  See Macro Directories.
     'groff' passes '-M' options and their arguments to 'eqn', 'grap',
     and 'grn'.

'-n NUM'
     Begin numbering pages at NUM.  The default is '1'.

'-N'
     Prohibit newlines between 'eqn' delimiters: pass '-N' to 'eqn'.

'-o LIST'
     Output only pages in LIST, which is a comma-separated list of page
     ranges; 'N' means page N, 'M-N' means every page between M and N,
     '-N' means every page up to N, 'N-' means every page from N on.
     'troff' stops processing and exits after formatting the last page
     enumerated in LIST.

'-p'
     Run 'pic' preprocessor.

'-P ARG'
     Pass ARG to the postprocessor.  If multiple ARGs are required, pass
     each with a separate '-P' option.  'groff' does not prefix an
     option dash to ARG before passing it to the postprocessor.

'-r CNUMERIC-EXPRESSION'
'-r REGISTER=NUMERIC-EXPRESSION'
     Define 'roff' register C or REGISTER as NUMERIC-EXPRESSION (see
     Numeric Expressions).  C must be one character; REGISTER can be of
     arbitrary length.  Such assignments happen before any macro file is
     loaded, including the startup file.  Due to 'getopt_long(3)'
     limitations, C cannot be, and REGISTER cannot contain, an equals
     sign, even though that is a valid character in a 'roff' identifier.
     See Registers.

'-R'
     Run 'refer' preprocessor.  No mechanism is provided for passing
     arguments to it; most 'refer' options have equivalent language
     elements that can be specified within the document.

     'troff' also accepts a '-R' option, which is not accessible via
     'groff'.  This option facilitates troubleshooting by preventing the
     loading of the 'troffrc' and 'troffrc-end' files.

'-s'
     Run 'soelim' preprocessor.

'-S'
     Operate in "safer" mode; see '-U' below for its opposite.  Safer
     mode is enabled by default.  Explicitly specifying '-S' causes
     'troff' to ignore any subsequent '-U' option.

'-t'
     Run 'tbl' preprocessor.

'-T DEV'
     Prepare output for device DEV.  'groff' passes the '-T' option and
     its argument to 'troff', then (unless the '-Z' option is used) runs
     an output driver to convert 'troff''s output to a form appropriate
     for DEV.  The following output devices are available.

     'ps'
          For PostScript printers and previewers.

     'pdf'
          For PDF viewers or printers.

     'dvi'
          For TeX DVI format.

     'X75'
          For a 75dpi X11 previewer.

     'X75-12'
          For a 75dpi X11 previewer with a 12-point base font in the
          document.

     'X100'
          For a 100dpi X11 previewer.

     'X100-12'
          For a 100dpi X11 previewer with a 12-point base font in the
          document.

     'ascii'
          For typewriter-like devices using the (7-bit) ISO 646:1991 IRV
          (US-ASCII) character set.

     'latin1'
          For typewriter-like devices that support the ISO Latin-1
          (8859-1) character set.

     'utf8'
          For typewriter-like devices that use the ISO 10646 (Unicode)
          character set with UTF-8 encoding.

     'lj4'
          For HP LaserJet4-compatible (or other PCL5-compatible)
          printers.

     'lbp'
          For Canon CaPSL printers (LBP-4 and LBP-8 series laser
          printers).

     'html'
     'xhtml'
          To produce HTML and XHTML output, respectively.  This driver
          consists of two parts, a preprocessor ('pre-grohtml') and a
          postprocessor ('post-grohtml').

     The predefined GNU 'troff' string '.T' contains the name of the
     output device; the read-only register '.T' is set to 1 if this
     option is used (which is always true if 'groff' is used to run GNU
     'troff').  See Built-in Registers.

     The postprocessor to be used for a device is specified by the
     'postpro' command in the device description file.  (See Device and
     Font Description Files.)  This selection can be overridden with the
     '-X' option.

'-U'
     Operate in "unsafe mode", enabling the 'cf', 'open', 'opena', 'pi',
     'pso', and 'sy' requests, which are disabled by default because
     they allow an untrusted input document to run arbitrary commands,
     put arbitrary content into 'troff' output, or write to arbitrary
     file names.(1)  (see Groff Options-Footnote-1) This option also
     adds the current directory to the macro package search path; see
     the '-m' and '-M' option above.  'groff' passes '-U' to 'pic' and
     GNU 'troff'.

'-v'
     Write version information for 'groff' and all programs run by it to
     the standard output stream; that is, the given command line is
     processed in the usual way, passing '-v' to the formatter and any
     pre- or postprocessors invoked.

'-V'
     Output the pipeline that 'groff' would run to the standard output
     stream and exit.  If given more than once, 'groff' both writes the
     pipeline to the standard error stream and runs it.

'-w CAT'
'-W CAT'
     Enable and inhibit, respectively, warnings in category CAT.  See
     Warnings.

'-X'
     Use 'gxditview' instead of the usual postprocessor to (pre)view a
     document on an X11 display.  Combining this option with '-T ps'
     uses the font metrics of the PostScript device, whereas the '-T
     X75', '-T X75-12', '-T X100', and '-T X100-12' options use the
     metrics of X11 fonts.

'-z'
     Suppress formatted output from 'troff'.

'-Z'
     Disable postprocessing.  'troff' output appears on the standard
     output stream (unless suppressed with '-z'); see GNU troff Output
     for a description of this format.

   (1) GNU 'troff' does not, however, accept newlines (line feeds) in
file names supplied as arguments to requests.

2.2 Environment
===============

Environment variables in the host system affect the behavior of programs
supplied by 'groff' as follows.  Normally, the path separator in
environment variables ending with 'PATH' is the colon; this may vary
depending on the operating system.  For example, Windows uses a
semicolon instead.

'GROFF_BIN_PATH'
     Locate 'groff' commands in these directories, followed by those in
     'PATH'.  If not set, the installation directory of GNU 'roff'
     executables, documented in 'groff(1)', is searched before 'PATH'.

'GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX'
     Apply a prefix to certain GNU 'roff' commands.  'groff' can be
     configured at compile time to apply a prefix to the names of
     programs it provides that had counterparts in AT&T 'troff', so that
     name collisions are avoided at run time.  The default prefix is
     empty.

     When used, this prefix is conventionally the letter 'g'.  For
     example, GNU 'troff' would be installed as 'troff'.  Besides
     'troff', the prefix applies to the formatter wrapper 'nroff'; the
     preprocessors 'eqn', 'grn', 'pic', 'refer', 'tbl', and 'soelim';
     and the utilities 'indxbib' and 'lookbib'.

'GROFF_ENCODING'
     Specify the assumed character encoding of the input.  'groff'
     passes its value as an argument to the 'preconv' preprocessor's
     '-e' option.  This variable's existence implies the 'groff' option
     '-k'.  If set but empty, 'groff' runs 'preconv' without an '-e'
     option.  'groff''s '-K' option overrides 'GROFF_ENCODING'.  See
     'preconv(7)'.

'GROFF_FONT_PATH'
     Seek the selected output device's directory of device and font
     description files in this list of directories.  See Font
     Directories, 'troff(1)', and 'groff_font(5)'.

'GROFF_TMAC_PATH'
     Seek macro packages in this list of directories.  See Macro
     Directories, 'troff(1)', and 'groff_tmac(5)'.

'GROFF_TMPDIR'
     Create temporary files in this directory.  If not set, but 'TMPDIR'
     is, the latter is used instead.  On Windows systems, if neither of
     the foregoing are set, the environment variables 'TMP' and 'TEMP'
     (in that order) are checked also.  Otherwise, temporary files are
     created in a system-dependent default directory (on Unix and
     GNU/Linux systems, usually '/tmp').  The 'refer', 'grohtml', and
     'grops' commands use temporary files.

'GROFF_TYPESETTER'
     Set the default output device.  The '-T DEV' option overrides it.
     If empty or unset, a default configured at build time, and
     documented in 'groff(1)', is used.

'SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH'
     Declare a time stamp (expressed as seconds since the Unix epoch) to
     use as the output creation time stamp in place of the current time.
     The time is converted to human-readable form using 'gmtime(3)' and
     'asctime(3)' when the formatter starts up and stored in registers
     usable by documents and macro packages (see Built-in Registers).

'TZ'
     Declare the time zone to use when converting the current time to
     human-readable form; see 'tzset(3)'.  If 'SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH' is
     used, it is always converted to human-readable form using UTC.

2.3 Macro Directories
=====================

A macro file must have a name in the form 'NAME.tmac' or 'tmac.NAME' and
be placed in a "tmac directory" to be found by the '-m MAC' command-line
option.(1)  (see Macro Directories-Footnote-1) Such naming and placement
makes a macro file into a macro package; when requested, it is sought in
several directories.  Together, these locations constitute the "tmac
path".  Each directory is searched in the following order until the
desired package is found or the list is exhausted.

   * Directories specified with the '-M' command-line option.

   * Directories listed in the 'GROFF_TMAC_PATH' environment variable.

   * The current working directory (only if in unsafe mode using the
     '-U' command-line option).

   * The user's home directory, found in the 'HOME' environment
     variable.

   * A site-local platform-dependent directory, a site-local
     platform-independent directory, and a stock directory.  Locations
     corresponding to your installation are listed in section
     "Environment" of 'troff(1)'.  If not otherwise configured, they are
     as follows.

          /usr/local/lib/groff/site-tmac
          /usr/local/share/groff/site-tmac
          /usr/local/share/groff/1.23.0/tmac

     The foregoing assumes that the version of 'groff' is 1.23.0, and
     that the installation prefix was '/usr/local'.  These locations can
     be customized as part of the build-time configuration process.

   (1) The 'mso' request loads a macro file of any name.  See Host
System Service Access.

2.4 Font Directories
====================

The GNU 'troff' formatter and 'groff''s output drivers read device and
font description files that detail the output device and the typefaces
available to it, including their glyph repertoires and the metrics
(dimensions) of each glyph.  This information permits the formatter to
accurately place glyphs with respect to each other.  The device
description file is always named 'DESC'; fonts are typically described
in files with short names like 'TR', 'CR', 'HBI', or 'S'.(1)  (see Font
Directories-Footnote-1)

   Device and font description files are kept in "font directories",
which together constitute the "font path".  The search procedure always
appends the directory 'dev'NAME, where NAME is the name of the output
device.  Assuming TeX DVI output, and '/foo/bar' as a font directory,
the description files for 'grodvi' must be in '/foo/bar/devdvi'.  Each
directory in the font path is searched in the following order until the
desired description file is found or the list is exhausted.

   * Directories specified with the '-f' command-line option.  All
     output drivers (and some preprocessors) support this option as
     well, because they require information about glyphs to be rendered
     in the document.

   * Directories listed in the 'GROFF_FONT_PATH' environment variable.

   * A site-local directory and a stock directory.  Locations
     corresponding to your installation are listed in section
     "Environment" of 'troff(1)'.  If not otherwise configured, they are
     as follows.

          /usr/local/share/groff/site-font
          /usr/local/share/groff/1.23.0/font

     The foregoing assumes that the version of 'groff' is 1.23.0, and
     that the installation prefix was '/usr/local'.  These locations can
     be customized as part of the build-time configuration process.

   (1) See Device and Font Description Files.

2.5 Paper Format
================

The formatter reads the device description file 'DESC' for the selected
output device when it starts; page dimensions declared there are used if
present.

   'groff''s build process configures a default page format and writes
it to typesetters' 'DESC' files.  This installation defaults to 'A4'.
If the 'DESC' file lacks this information, the formatter and output
driver use a page length of '11i' (eleven inches) for compatibility with
AT&T 'troff'.

   In the formatter, the 'pl' request changes the page length, but macro
packages often do not support alteration of the paper format within a
document.  One might, for instance, want to switch between portrait and
landscape orientations.  Macro packages lack a consistent approach to
configuration of parameters dependent on the paper format; some, like
'ms', benefit from a preamble in the document prior to the first macro
call, while others, like 'mm', instead require the specification of
registers on the command line, or otherwise before its macro file is
interpreted, to configure page dimensions.

   Output drivers for typesetters also recognize command-line options
'-p' to override the default page dimensions and '-l' to use landscape
orientation.  The output driver's man page, such as 'grops(1)', may be
helpful.

   'groff''s '-d paper' command-line option is a convenient means of
setting the paper format; see 'groff_tmac(5)'.  Combine it with
appropriate '-P' options for the output driver, overriding its defaults.
The following command formats for PostScript on A4 paper in landscape
orientation.

     $ groff -T ps -d paper=a4l -P -pa4 -P -l -m s my.ms >my.ps

2.6 Invocation Examples
=======================

'roff' systems are best known for formatting man pages.  A 'man'
librarian program, having located a page, might render it with a 'groff'
command.

     $ groff -t -m an -T utf8 /usr/share/man/man1/groff.1

   The librarian may also pipe the output through a pager, which might
not interpret terminal escape sequences 'groff' emits for boldface,
underlining, italics, or hyperlinking; see the 'grotty(1)' man page for
a discussion.

   To process a 'roff' input file using the preprocessors 'tbl' and
'pic' and the 'me' macro package in the way to which AT&T 'troff' users
were accustomed, one would type (or script) a pipeline.

     $ pic foo.me | tbl | troff -m e -T utf8 | grotty

   Shorten this pipeline to an equivalent command using 'groff'.

     $ groff -p -t -m e -T utf8 foo.me

   An even easier way to do this is to use 'grog' to guess the
preprocessor and macro options and execute the result by using the
command substitution feature of the shell.

     $ $(grog -T utf8 foo.me)

   Each command-line option to a postprocessor must be specified with
any required leading dashes '-' because 'groff' passes the arguments
as-is to the postprocessor, permitting transmission of arbitrary
arguments.  For example, to pass a title to the 'gxditview'
postprocessor, the shell commands

     $ groff -X -P -title -P 'trial run' mydoc.t

and

     $ groff -X -Z mydoc.t | gxditview -title 'trial run' -

are equivalent.

3 Tutorial for Macro Package Users
**********************************

Most users of the 'roff' language employ a macro package to format their
documents.  Successful macro packages ease the composition process;
their users need not master the full formatting language, nor understand
features like diversions, traps, and environments.  This chapter aims to
familiarize you with basic concepts and mechanisms common to many macro
packages (like "displays").  If you prefer a meticulous and
comprehensive presentation of the language and its formatter, peruse GNU
troff Reference instead.

3.1 Basics
==========

Let us first survey some basic concepts necessary to use a macro package
fruitfully.(1)  (see Basics-Footnote-1) References are made throughout
to more detailed information.

   GNU 'troff' reads input prepared by the user and outputs a formatted
document suitable for publication or framing.  The input consists of
text, or words to be printed, and embedded commands (requests and escape
sequences), which tell GNU 'troff' how to format the output.  See
Formatter Instructions.

   The primary function of GNU 'troff' is to collect words from its
input, fill output lines with those words, break the line at or near the
right-hand margin (possibly by hyphenating a word), adjust the line to
reach that margin (if necessary) by widening spaces between words, and
output the result.

     In fact, we know full well today that it is futile to
     speak of liberty as long as economic slavery exists.
     (Kropotkin)
       => In  fact,  we know full well today that it
       => is futile to speak of liberty as  long  as
       => economic slavery exists.  (Kropotkin)

   Sometimes a new output line should start even though the current line
is not yet full--for example, at the end of a paragraph.  GNU 'troff'
will do this for us automatically at the end of input, but we often want
a break sooner, and more frequently.  We wish to _instruct_ the
formatter.

   To that end, not all input lines are text lines containing words to
be formatted.  Control lines start with a dot ('.') or an apostrophe
(''') as the first character, and are followed by a request or macro
name that tells a macro package (or GNU 'troff' directly) how to format
the text.

   We can command a break with the 'br' request.  Some requests cause a
break automatically, as do (normally) blank input lines and input lines
beginning with a space or tab.

   A macro bundles text and/or control lines into a named collection
that can be called like a request.  A macro can also be called by a trap
that is set to "go off" automatically at certain places on the page.
Thus, while requests perform primitive operations, macros handle complex
ones, like arranging the output into columns, collecting and writing out
footnotes, or managing page headers and footers.

   Many requests and macros accept arguments that influence their
behavior.  A "plain" 'sp' request breaks and puts a blank line on the
output.  But

     .sp 4

spaces four lines instead.  Spaces (but _not_ tabs) separate arguments
from the request or macro name and from each other.

   Here are a few hints for preparing text for input to GNU 'troff'.

   * First, keep the input lines short.  Short input lines are easier to
     edit, and, when filling, GNU 'troff' packs words onto longer lines
     anyhow.

   * Second, it is helpful to begin a new line after every sentence,
     comma, semicolon, or colon, since common revisions are to add,
     delete, or replace sentences, clauses, phrases, or members of
     lists.

   * If you _don't_ start a sentence on a new line, put two spaces after
     the previous sentence.  GNU 'troff' then recognizes punctuation
     that ends a sentence, and inserts inter-sentence space accordingly.

   We offer further advice in Input Conventions.

   Vertical spacing is the distance between lines of text; it is
expressed in the same units as the type size--the point.  The default is
10-point type on 12-point spacing.  To get double-spaced text you would
set the vertical spacing to 24 points.  Some, but not all, macro
packages expose a macro or register to configure the vertical spacing.

   A number of requests allow you to change the way the output is
arranged on the page, sometimes called its layout.  Most macro packages
don't supply macros for performing these (at least not without
performing other actions besides), as they are such basic operations.
The macro packages for writing man pages, 'man' and 'mdoc', discourage
explicit use of these requests altogether.

   Arguments to requests and macro calls can often be measurements
rather than simple integers.  For instance,

     .sp 1.5i
     My thoughts on the subject
     .sp

outputs one and a half inches of vertical space, followed by the line
"My thoughts on the subject", followed by a single blank line (more
measurement units are available; see Measurements).  Excess vertical
space is normally discarded at page or column breaks.  If the above
example appears one inch from the bottom of the page, the half inch of
space "left over" does not appear at the top of the next.

   If you desire precise spacing control when using a macro package, be
advised that it might not honor 'sp' requests as you expect; it can use
a formatter feature called no-space mode to prevent excess space from
accumulating.  See Manipulating Spacing.  Use the facilities the package
offers to control spacing between paragraphs, before section headings,
and around displays (discussed below).

   Text lines can be centered by using the 'ce' request.  The line after
'ce' is centered (horizontally) on the page.  To center more than one
line, use '.ce N' (where N is the number of lines to center), followed
by the N lines.  To center many lines without counting them, try the
following technique.

     .ce 1000
     up to one thousand lines of input
     .ce 0

The '.ce 0' request tells GNU 'troff' to center zero more text lines--in
other words, to stop centering.

   GNU 'troff' also offers the 'rj' request for right-aligning text.  It
works analogously to 'ce' and is convenient for setting epigraphs.

   The 'bp' request starts a new page.

   All of these requests cause a break, starting a new line.  If you
invoke them with the apostrophe ''', the no-break control character, the
(initial) break they normally perform is suppressed.  ''br' does
nothing.

   (1) The remainder of this chapter is based on "Writing Papers with
NROFF using -me" by Eric P. Allman, which is distributed with 'groff' as
'meintro.me'.

3.2 Common Features
===================

GNU 'troff' provides low-level operations for formatting a document.
Many routine operations are undertaken in nearly all documents that
require a series of such primitive operations to be performed.  These
common tasks are grouped into macros, which are then collected into a
macro package.

   Some macro packages ("major" or "full-service") assume responsibility
for page layout and other critical functions; others ("supplemental" or
"auxiliary") do not.

   We present several capabilities of full-service macro packages below.
Each package employs its own macro names to exercise them.  For details,
consult the package's man page or, for 'ms', see ms.

3.2.1 Paragraphs
----------------

Paragraphs can be formatted in various ways.  Some indent their first
line.  Block paragraphs like the following example omit this
indentation, and must be separated with vertical space for readability.
Separation can be configured for other paragraph types as well.

       => Some men look at constitutions with sanctimonious rev-
       => erence,  and  deem  them like the ark of the covenant,
       => too sacred to be touched.

   We also frequently encounter tagged paragraphs, which begin with a
label, or tag, at the left margin, and indent the remaining text.

       => one  This is a tagged paragraph.  Notice how the first
       =>      line of the resulting paragraph lines up with the
       =>      other lines in the paragraph.

If the tag is too wide for the indentation amount, the line is broken.

       => longlabel
       =>      The  long  tag  does  not  align  with subsequent
       =>      lines, but those lines align with each other.

   A variation of the tagged paragraph is the itemized or enumerated
paragraph, which might use punctuation or a digit for a tag,
respectively.  These are frequently used to construct lists.

       => *    This list item starts with a bullet.  If a bullet
       =>      glyph  is unavailable, groff produces an asterisk
       =>      instead.

Often, use of the same macro without a tag continues such a discussion.

       => -xyz  This option is recognized but ignored.
       =>
       =>       It had a security hole that we don't discuss.

3.2.2 Sections and Chapters
---------------------------

A simple kind of section heading is unnumbered, set in a bold or italic
style, and occupies a line by itself.  Others possess automatically
numbered multi-level headings and/or different typeface styles or sizes
at different levels.  More sophisticated macro packages supply macros
for designating chapters and appendices, and permit "run-in headings",
where there is no break between the end of the heading text and the
start of the subsequent paragraph.

3.2.3 Headers and Footers
-------------------------

Headers and footers occupy the top and bottom of each page,
respectively, and contain data like the page number and the article or
chapter title.  Their appearance is not affected by the running text.
Some packages allow for different titles on even- and odd-numbered pages
(for printed, bound material).

   Headers and footers are together called titles, and comprise three
parts: left-aligned, centered, and right-aligned.  A '%' character
appearing anywhere in a title is automatically replaced by the page
number.  See Page Layout.

3.2.4 Page Layout
-----------------

Most macro packages let the user specify the size of the page margins.
The top and bottom margins are typically handled differently than the
left and right margins; the latter are derived from the page offset,
indentation, and line length.  See Line Layout.  Commonly, packages
support registers to tune these values.

3.2.5 Displays and Keeps
------------------------

Displays are sections of text set off from the surrounding material
(typically paragraphs), often differing in indentation and/or spacing.
Tables, block quotations, and figures are displayed.  Equations and code
examples, when not much shorter than an output line, often are.  Lists
may or may not be.

   A keep is a group of output lines, often a display, that is formatted
on a single page if possible; it causes a page break to happen early if
necessary to not interrupt the kept material.  Packages for setting man
pages support example displays but not keeps.

   Floating keeps can move, or "float", relative to the text around them
in the input.  They are useful for displays that are captioned and
referred to by name, as with "See figure 3".  A floating keep might
appear at the bottom of the current page if it fits, and at the top of
the next otherwise.  Alternatively, it might be deferred to the end of a
section.  Use of a floating keep can prevent a large vertical space from
appearing before a tall keep of the ordinary sort when it won't fit on
the page.

3.2.6 Footnotes and Endnotes
----------------------------

Footnotes and endnotes are forms of delayed formatting.  They are
recorded at their points of relevance in the input, but not formatted
there.  Instead, a mark cues the reader to check the "foot", or bottom,
of the current page, or in the case of endnotes, an annotation list
later in the document.  Macro packages that support these features also
supply a means of automatically numbering either type of annotation.

3.2.7 Table of Contents
-----------------------

A package may handle a table of contents by directing section heading
macros to save the heading's text and the page number where it occurs
for use in a later entry for a table of contents.  It writes the
collected entries at the end of the document, once all are known, upon
request.  A "leader", a row of dots, bridges the text on the left with
its location on the right.  Other collections might work in this manner,
providing lists of figures or tables.

   A table of contents is often found at the end of a GNU 'troff'
document because the formatter processes the document in a single pass.
The 'gropdf' output driver supports a PDF feature that relocates pages
at the time the document is rendered; see 'gropdf(1)'.

3.2.8 Indexing
--------------

An index is similar to a table of contents, in that entry labels and
locations must be collected, but poses a greater challenge because it
needs to be sorted before it is output.  Here, processing the document
in multiple passes is inescapable, and tools like the 'makeindex(1)'
program become necessary.

3.2.9 Document Formats
----------------------

Some macro packages supply stock configurations of certain types of
documents, like business letters and memoranda.  These often also have
provision for a cover sheet, which may be rigid in its format.  With
these features, it is even more important to use the package's macros in
preference to the formatter requests presented earlier, where possible.

3.2.10 Columnation
------------------

Macro packages apart from 'man' and 'mdoc' for man page formatting offer
a facility for setting multiple text columns on the page.

3.2.11 Font and Size Changes
----------------------------

The formatter's requests and escape sequences for setting the typeface
and size are not always intuitive in their behavior, so all full-service
packages provide macros to simplify input of these operations.  They can
also make mid-word font style changes more convenient, and can handle
italic corrections automatically.  See Italic Corrections.

3.2.12 Predefined Text
----------------------

Most macro packages supply predefined strings to set computed text like
the date, or to perform operations like super- and subscripting.

3.2.13 Preprocessor Support
---------------------------

All macro packages provide support for various preprocessors and may
extend their functionality by defining macros to caption their output
and/or set it in a display.  Examples include 'TS' and 'TE' for 'tbl',
'EQ' and 'EN' for 'eqn', and 'PS' and 'PE' for 'pic'.  Another
preprocessor, 'refer', facilitates the inclusion of bibliographic
citations in a consistent format.

3.2.14 Configuration and Customization
--------------------------------------

Each package provides means of customizing details of its behavior.
Often, this is achieved with register and string definitions.  Such
parameters include the default type size and the appearance of section
headings.

4 Macro Packages
****************

This chapter surveys the "major" macro packages that come with 'groff'.
One, 'ms', is presented in detail.

   Major macro packages are also sometimes described as "full-service"
due to the breadth of features they provide and because more than one
cannot be used by the same document; for example

     groff -m man foo.man -m ms bar.doc

doesn't work.  Option arguments are processed before non-option
arguments; the above (failing) sample is thus reordered to

     groff -m man -m ms foo.man bar.doc

   Many auxiliary, or supplemental, macro packages are also available.
They may in general be used with any full-service macro package and
handle a variety of tasks from character encoding selection, to language
localization, to inlining of raster images.  See 'groff_tmac(5)' for a
list.

4.1 'man'
=========

The 'man' macro package is the most widely used and probably the most
important ever developed for 'troff'.  It is easy to use, and a vast
majority of manual pages ("man pages") are written in it.

   'groff''s implementation is documented in 'groff_man(7)'.

4.1.1 Optional 'man' extensions
-------------------------------

Use the file 'man.local' to configure its rendering parameters on a
persistent basis.  With care, its macros can be redefined there (except
for 'TH', to which one should, at most, append with the 'am' family of
requests).

Custom headers and footers
..........................

In 'groff' versions 1.18.2 and later, you can specify custom headers and
footers by redefining the following macros in 'man.local'.

 -- Macro: .PT
     Control the content of the headers.  Normally, the header prints
     the command name and section number on either side, and the
     optional fifth argument to 'TH' in the center.

 -- Macro: .BT
     Control the content of the footers.  Normally, the footer prints
     the page number and the third and fourth arguments to 'TH'.

     Use the 'FT' register to specify the footer position.  The default
     is -0.5i.

Ultrix-specific man macros
..........................

The 'groff' source distribution includes a file named 'man.ultrix',
containing macros compatible with the Ultrix variant of 'man'.  Copy
this file into 'man.local' (or use the 'mso' request to load it) to
enable the following macros.

 -- Macro: .CT key
     Print '<CTRL/KEY>'.

 -- Macro: .CW
     Print subsequent text using a "constant-width" (monospaced)
     typeface (Courier roman).

 -- Macro: .Ds
     Begin a non-filled display.

 -- Macro: .De
     End a non-filled display started with 'Ds'.

 -- Macro: .EX [indent]
     Begin a non-filled display using a monospaced typeface (Courier
     roman).  Use the optional INDENT argument to indent the display.

 -- Macro: .EE
     End a non-filled display started with 'EX'.

 -- Macro: .G [text]
     Set TEXT in Helvetica.  If no text is present on the line where the
     macro is called, then the text of the next line appears in
     Helvetica.

 -- Macro: .GL [text]
     Set TEXT in Helvetica oblique.  If no text is present on the line
     where the macro is called, then the text of the next line appears
     in Helvetica Oblique.

 -- Macro: .HB [text]
     Set TEXT in Helvetica bold.  If no text is present on the line
     where the macro is called, then all text up to the next 'HB'
     appears in Helvetica bold.

 -- Macro: .TB [text]
     Identical to 'HB'.

 -- Macro: .MS title sect [punct]
     Set a man page reference in Ultrix format.  The TITLE is in Courier
     instead of italic.  Optional punctuation follows the section number
     without an intervening space.

 -- Macro: .NT [C] [title]
     Begin a note.  Print the optional title, or the word "Note",
     centered on the page.  Text following the macro makes up the body
     of the note, and is indented on both sides.  If the first argument
     is 'C', the body of the note is printed centered (the second
     argument replaces the word "Note" if specified).

 -- Macro: .NE
     End a note begun with 'NT'.

 -- Macro: .PN path [punct]
     Set the path name in a monospaced typeface (Courier roman),
     followed by optional punctuation.

 -- Macro: .Pn [punct] path [punct]
     If called with two arguments, identical to 'PN'.  If called with
     three arguments, set the second argument in a monospaced typeface
     (Courier roman), bracketed by the first and third arguments in the
     current font.

 -- Macro: .R
     Switch to roman font and turn off any underlining in effect.

 -- Macro: .RN
     Print the string '<RETURN>'.

 -- Macro: .VS [4]
     Start printing a change bar in the margin if the number '4' is
     specified.  Otherwise, this macro does nothing.

 -- Macro: .VE
     End printing the change bar begun by 'VS'.

Simple example
..............

The following example 'man.local' file alters the behavior of the 'SH'
macro.

     .\" Make the heading font Helvetica bold.
     .ds HF HB
     .
     .\" Add vertical space prior to headings on typesetters.
     .rn SH SH-orig
     .de SH
     .  if t .sp (u;\\n[PD]*2)
     .  SH-orig \\$*
     ..

4.2 'mdoc'
==========

'groff''s implementation of the BSD 'doc' package for man pages is
documented in 'groff_mdoc(7)'.

   Use the file 'mdoc.local' to configure its rendering parameters on a
persistent basis.  With care, its macros can be redefined there (except
for 'Dd', to which one should, at most, append with the 'am' family of
requests).

4.3 'me'
========

'groff''s implementation of the BSD 'me' macro package is documented
using itself.  A tutorial, 'meintro.me', and reference, 'meref.me', are
available in 'groff''s documentation directory.  'groff_me(7)'
identifies the installation path for these documents.

   A French translation of the tutorial is available as 'meintro_fr.me'
and installed parallel to the English version.

4.4 'mm'
========

'groff''s implementation of the AT&T memorandum macro package is
documented in 'groff_mm(7)'.

   A Swedish localization of 'mm' is also available; see
'groff_mmse(7)'.

4.5 'mom'
=========

The 'mom' package's primary documentation is in HTML.  Model documents
illustrating many features are offered in PDF.  See the 'groff(1)' man
page, section "Installation Directories", for their location.

   * 'toc.html' Entry point to the full mom manual.

   * 'macrolist.html' Hyperlinked index of macros with brief
     descriptions, arranged by category.

   * 'mom-pdf.pdf' PDF features and usage.

   The mom macros are in active development between 'groff' releases.
The most recent version, along with up-to-date documentation, is
available at <http://www.schaffter.ca/mom/mom-05.html>.

   The 'groff_mom(7)' man page (type 'man groff_mom' at the command
line) contains a partial list of available macros, however their usage
is best understood by consulting the HTML documentation.

4.6 'ms'
========

Use the 'ms' ("manuscript") package to compose letters, memoranda,
reports, and books.  These 'groff' macros feature cover page and table
of contents generation, automatically numbered headings, several
paragraph styles, a variety of text styling options, footnotes, and
multi-column page layouts.  'ms' supports the 'tbl', 'eqn', 'pic', and
'refer' preprocessors for inclusion of tables, mathematical equations,
diagrams, and consistently formatted bibliographic citations.  'groff'
'ms' is mostly compatible with the documented interface and behavior of
AT&T Unix Version 7 'ms'.  It recreates most extensions from 4.2BSD
(Berkeley) and Research Tenth Edition Unix.

4.6.1 Introduction
------------------

The 'ms' macros are the oldest surviving package for 'roff' systems.(1)
(see ms Introduction-Footnote-1) Whereas 'man' suits brief references,
'ms' can handle long or complex works intended for printing and possible
publication.

   Macro, register, and string descriptions frequently mention each
other; most references are to macros.  Where a register or string is
referenced, we annotate its type.  'ms''s identifiers use only capital
letters, numerals, and '-'.

   (1) While manual _pages_ are older, early ones used macros supplanted
by the 'man' package of Seventh Edition Unix (1979).  'ms' shipped with
Sixth Edition (1975) and was documented by Mike Lesk in a Bell Labs
internal memorandum.

4.6.1.1 Basic information
.........................

Prepare an 'ms' document with your preferred text editor.  Call an 'ms'
macro early in the document to initialize the package.  A "macro" is a
formatting instruction to 'ms'.  Put a macro call on a line by itself
with a dot before its name.  Use '.PP' if you want your paragraph's
first line indented, or '.LP' if you don't.  Then type text normally.
It is a good practice to start each sentence on a new line, or to put
two spaces after sentence-ending punctuation, so that the formatter
knows where the sentence boundaries are.  You can separate paragraphs
with further paragraphing macros, or with blank lines, and you can
indent with tabs.  When you need one of the features mentioned earlier
(see ms), return to this subsection.

   Format the document with the 'groff' command.  'nroff' can be useful
for previewing.

     $ editor radical.ms # vim, emacs, nano, ...
     $ nroff -ww -z -ms radical.ms # check for errors
     $ nroff -ms radical.ms | less -R
     $ groff -T ps -ms radical.ms > radical.ps
     $ see radical.ps # or your favorite PDF viewer

   Our 'radical.ms' document might look like this.

     .LP
     Radical novelties are so disturbing that they tend to be
     suppressed or ignored, to the extent that even the
     possibility of their existence in general is more often
     denied than admitted.

     ->That's what Dijkstra said, anyway.

   'ms' exposes many aspects of document layout to user control via
'groff''s "registers" and "strings", which store numbers and text,
respectively.  Measurements in 'groff' are expressed with a suffix
called a "scaling unit".

'i'
     inches

'c'
     centimeters

'p'
     points (1/72 inch)

'P'
     picas (1/6 inch)

'v'
     vees; current vertical spacing

'm'
     ems; width of an "M" in the current font

'n'
     ens; one-half em (same as 'm' on terminals)

   Set registers with the 'nr' request and strings with the 'ds'
request.  "Requests" are like macro calls; they go on lines by
themselves and start with the "control character", a dot ('.').  The
difference is that they directly instruct the formatter program, rather
than the macro package.  We'll discuss a few as applicable.  It is wise
to specify a scaling unit when setting any register that represents a
length, size, or distance.

     .nr PS 10.5p \" Use 10.5-point type.
     .ds FAM P    \" Use Palatino font family.

In the foregoing, we see that '\"' begins a comment.  This is an example
of an "escape sequence", the other kind of formatting instruction.
Escape sequences can appear almost anywhere.  They begin with the escape
character ('\') and are followed by at least one more character.  'ms'
documents tend to use only a few of 'groff''s many requests and escape
sequences; see Request Index and Escape Sequence Index or the 'groff(7)'
man page for complete lists.

'\"'
     Begin comment; ignore remainder of line.

'\n[REG]'
     Interpolate value of register REG.

'\nR'
     abbreviation of '\n[R]'; the name R must be only one character

'\*[STR]'
     Interpolate contents of string STR.

'\*S'
     abbreviation of '\*[S]'; the name S must be only one character

'\[CHAR]'
     Interpolate glyph of special character named CHAR.

'\&'
     dummy character

'\~'
     Insert an unbreakable space that is adjustable like a normal space.

'\|'
     Move horizontally by one-sixth em ("thin space").

   Prefix any words that start with a dot '.' or neutral apostrophe '''
with '\&' if they are at the beginning of an input line (or might become
that way in editing) to prevent them from being interpreted as macro
calls or requests.  Suffix '.', '?', and '!' with '\&' when needed to
cancel end-of-sentence detection.

     My exposure was \&.5 to \&.6 Sv of neutrons, said Dr.\&
     Wallace after the criticality incident.

4.6.2 Document Structure
------------------------

The 'ms' macro package expects a certain amount of structure: a
well-formed document contains at least one paragraphing or heading macro
call.  Organize longer documents as follows.

*Document type*
     Calling the 'RP' macro at the beginning of your document puts the
     document description (see below) on a cover page.  Otherwise, 'ms'
     places the information (if any) on the first page, followed
     immediately by the body text.  Some document types found in other
     'ms' implementations are specific to AT&T or Berkeley, and are not
     supported by 'groff' 'ms'.

*Format and layout*
     By setting registers and strings, you can configure your document's
     typeface, margins, spacing, headers and footers, and footnote
     arrangement.  See ms Document Control Settings.

*Document description*
     A document description consists of any of: a title, one or more
     authors' names and affiliated institutions, an abstract, and a date
     or other identifier.  See ms Document Description Macros.

*Body text*
     The main matter of your document follows its description (if any).
     'ms' supports highly structured text consisting of paragraphs
     interspersed with multi-level headings (chapters, sections,
     subsections, and so forth) and augmented by lists, footnotes,
     tables, diagrams, and similar material.  See ms Body Text.

*Tables of contents*
     Macros enable the collection of entries for a table of contents (or
     index) as the material they discuss appears in the document.  A
     macro call at the end of the document emits the collected entries.
     This material necessarily follows the rest of the text since
     'troff' is a single-pass formatter; it cannot determine the page
     number of a division of the text until it has been set and output.
     Since 'ms' output was designed for the production of hard copy, the
     traditional procedure was to manually relocate the pages containing
     the table of contents between the cover page and the body text.
     Today, page resequencing is more often done in the digital domain.
     An index works similarly, but because it typically needs to be
     sorted after collection, its preparation requires separate
     processing.

4.6.3 Document Control Settings
-------------------------------

'ms' exposes many aspects of document layout to user control via 'groff'
requests.  To use them, you must understand how to define registers and
strings.

 -- Request: .nr reg value
     Set register REG to VALUE.

 -- Request: .ds name contents
     Set string NAME to CONTENTS.

   A list of document control registers and strings follows.  For any
parameter whose default is unsatisfactory, define its register or string
before calling any 'ms' macro other than 'RP'.

Margin settings
...............

 -- Register: \n[PO]
     Defines the page offset (i.e., the left margin).

     Effective: next page.

     Default: Varies by output device and paper format; 1i is used for
     typesetters using U.S. letter paper, and zero for terminals.  See
     Paper Format.

 -- Register: \n[LL]
     Defines the line length (i.e., the width of the body text).

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: Varies by output device and paper format; 6.5i is used for
     typesetters using U.S. letter paper (see Paper Format) and 65n on
     terminals.

 -- Register: \n[LT]
     Defines the title line length (i.e., the header and footer width).
     This is usually the same as 'LL', but need not be.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: Varies by output device and paper format; 6.5i is used for
     typesetters using U.S. letter paper (see Paper Format) and 65n on
     terminals.

 -- Register: \n[HM]
     Defines the header margin height at the top of the page.

     Effective: next page.

     Default: 1i.

 -- Register: \n[FM]
     Defines the footer margin height at the bottom of the page.

     Effective: next page.

     Default: 1i.

Titles (headers, footers)
.........................

 -- String: \*[LH]
     Defines the text displayed in the left header position.

     Effective: next header.

     Default: empty.

 -- String: \*[CH]
     Defines the text displayed in the center header position.

     Effective: next header.

     Default: '-\n[%]-'.

 -- String: \*[RH]
     Defines the text displayed in the right header position.

     Effective: next header.

     Default: empty.

 -- String: \*[LF]
     Defines the text displayed in the left footer position.

     Effective: next footer.

     Default: empty.

 -- String: \*[CF]
     Defines the text displayed in the center footer position.

     Effective: next footer.

     Default: empty.

 -- String: \*[RF]
     Defines the text displayed in the right footer position.

     Effective: next footer.

     Default: empty.

Text settings
.............

 -- Register: \n[PS]
     Defines the type size of the body text.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 10p.

 -- Register: \n[VS]
     Defines the vertical spacing (type size plus leading).

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 12p.

 -- Register: \n[HY]
     Defines the automatic hyphenation mode used with the 'hy' request.
     Setting 'HY' to 0 disables automatic hyphenation.  This is a
     Research Tenth Edition Unix extension.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 6.

 -- String: \*[FAM]
     Defines the font family used to typeset the document.  This is a
     GNU extension.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: defined by the output device; often 'T' (see ms Body Text)

Paragraph settings
..................

 -- Register: \n[PI]
     Defines the indentation amount used by the 'PP', 'IP' (unless
     overridden by an optional argument), 'XP', and 'RS' macros.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 5n.

 -- Register: \n[PD]
     Defines the space between paragraphs.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 0.3v (1v on low-resolution devices).

 -- Register: \n[QI]
     Defines the indentation amount used on both sides of a paragraph
     set with the 'QP' or between the 'QS' and 'QE' macros.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 5n.

 -- Register: \n[PORPHANS]
     Defines the minimum number of initial lines of any paragraph that
     must be kept together to avoid isolated lines at the bottom of a
     page.  If a new paragraph is started close to the bottom of a page,
     and there is insufficient space to accommodate 'PORPHANS' 'groff'
     'ms' forces a page break before formatting the paragraph.  This is
     a GNU extension.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 1.

Heading settings
................

 -- Register: \n[PSINCR]
     Defines an increment in type size to be applied to a heading at a
     lesser depth than that specified in 'GROWPS'.  The value of
     'PSINCR' should be specified in points with the p scaling unit and
     may include a fractional component; for example, '.nr PSINCR 1.5p'
     sets a type size increment of 1.5p.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next heading.

     Default: 1p.

 -- Register: \n[GROWPS]
     Defines the heading depth above which the type size increment set
     by 'PSINCR' becomes effective.  For each heading depth less than
     the value of 'GROWPS', the type size is increased by 'PSINCR'.
     Setting 'GROWPS' to any value less than 2 disables the incremental
     heading size feature.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next heading.

     Default: 0.

 -- Register: \n[HORPHANS]
     Defines the minimum number of lines of an immediately succeeding
     paragraph that should be kept together with any heading introduced
     by the 'NH' or 'SH' macros.  If a heading is placed close to the
     bottom of a page, and there is insufficient space to accommodate
     both the heading and at least 'HORPHANS' lines of the following
     paragraph, before an automatic page break, then the page break is
     forced before the heading.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next paragraph.

     Default: 1.

 -- String: \*[SN-STYLE]
     Defines the style used to print numbered headings.  See Headings in
     ms.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next heading.

     Default: alias of 'SN-DOT'

Footnote settings
.................

 -- Register: \n[FI]
     Defines the footnote indentation.  This is a Berkeley extension.

     Effective: next footnote.

     Default: 2n.

 -- Register: \n[FF]
     Defines the format of automatically numbered footnotes, and those
     for which the 'FS' request is given a MARK argument, at the bottom
     of a column or page.  This is a Berkeley extension.
     '0'
          Set an automatic number(1) (see ms Document Control
          Settings-Footnote-1) as a superscript (on typesetters) or
          surrounded by square brackets (on terminals).  The footnote
          paragraph is indented as with 'PP' if there is an 'FS'
          argument or an automatic number, and as with 'LP' otherwise.
          This is the default.

     '1'
          As '0', but set MARK as regular text, and follow an automatic
          number with a period.

     '2'
          As '1', but without indentation (like 'LP').

     '3'
          As '1', but set the footnote paragraph with MARK hanging (like
          'IP').

     Effective: next footnote.

     Default: 0.

 -- Register: \n[FPS]
     Defines the footnote type size.

     Effective: next footnote.

     Default: '\n[PS] - 2p'.

 -- Register: \n[FVS]
     Defines the footnote vertical spacing.

     Effective: next footnote.

     Default: '\n[FPS] + 2p'.

 -- Register: \n[FPD]
     Defines the footnote paragraph spacing.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next footnote.

     Default: '\n[PD] / 2'.

 -- String: \*[FR]
     Defines the ratio of the footnote line length to the current line
     length.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next footnote if single-column layout, next page
     otherwise.

     Default: '11/12'.

Display settings
................

 -- Register: \n[DD]
     Sets the display distance--the vertical spacing before and after a
     display, a 'tbl' table, an 'eqn' equation, or a 'pic' image.  This
     is a Berkeley extension.

     Effective: next display boundary.

     Default: 0.5v (1v on low-resolution devices).

 -- Register: \n[DI]
     Sets the default amount by which to indent a display started with
     'DS' and 'ID' without arguments, to '.DS I' without an indentation
     argument, and to equations set with '.EQ I'.  This is a GNU
     extension.

     Effective: next indented display.

     Default: 0.5i.

Other settings
..............

 -- Register: \n[MINGW]
     Defines the default minimum width between columns in a multi-column
     document.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next page.

     Default: 2n.

 -- Register: \n[TC-MARGIN]
     Defines the width of the field in which page numbers are set in a
     table of contents entry; the right margin thus moves inboard by
     this amount.  This is a GNU extension.

     Effective: next 'PX' call.

     Default: '\w'000''

   (1) defined in ms Footnotes

4.6.4 Document Description Macros
---------------------------------

Only the simplest document lacks a title.(1)  (see ms Document
Description Macros-Footnote-1) As its level of sophistication (or
complexity) increases, it tends to acquire a date of revision,
explicitly identified authors, sponsoring institutions for authors, and,
at the rarefied heights, an abstract of its content.  Define these data
by calling the macros below in the order shown; 'DA' or 'ND' can be
called to set the document date (or other identifier) at any time before
(a) the abstract, if present, or (b) its information is required in a
header or footer.  Use of these macros is optional, except that 'TL' is
mandatory if any of 'RP', 'AU', 'AI', or 'AB' is called, and 'AE' is
mandatory if 'AB' is called.

 -- Macro: .RP [no-repeat-info] [no-renumber]
     Use the "report" (AT&T: "released paper") format for your document,
     creating a separate cover page.  The default arrangement is to
     place most of the document description (title, author names and
     institutions, and abstract, but not the date) at the top of the
     first page.  If the optional 'no-repeat-info' argument is given,
     'ms' produces a cover page but does not repeat any of its
     information subsequently (but see the 'DA' macro below regarding
     the date).  Normally, 'RP' sets the page number following the cover
     page to 1.  Specifying the optional 'no-renumber' argument
     suppresses this alteration.  Optional arguments can occur in any
     order.  'ms' recognizes 'no' as a synonym of 'no-repeat-info' to
     maintain AT&T compatibility.  Options other than 'no' are GNU
     extensions.

 -- Macro: .TL
     Specify the document title.  'ms' collects text on input lines
     following this call into the title until reaching 'AU', 'AB', or a
     heading or paragraphing macro call.

 -- Macro: .AU
     Specify an author's name.  'ms' collects text on input lines
     following this call into the author's name until reaching 'AI',
     'AB', another 'AU', or a heading or paragraphing macro call.  Call
     it repeatedly to specify multiple authors.

 -- Macro: .AI
     Specify the preceding author's institutional affiliation.  An 'AU'
     call is usefully followed by at most one 'AI' call; if there are
     more, the last 'AI' call controls.  'ms' collects text on input
     lines following this call into the author's institution until
     reaching 'AU', 'AB', or a heading or paragraphing macro call.

 -- Macro: .DA [x ...]
     Typeset the current date, or any arguments X, in the center footer,
     and, if 'RP' is also called, left-aligned at the end of the
     description information on the cover page.

 -- Macro: .ND [x ...]
     Typeset the current date, or any arguments X, if 'RP' is also
     called, left-aligned at the end of the document description on the
     cover page.  This is 'groff' 'ms''s default.

 -- Macro: .AB [no]
     Begin the abstract.  'ms' collects text on input lines following
     this call into the abstract until reaching an 'AE' call.  By
     default, 'ms' places the word "ABSTRACT" centered and in italics
     above the text of the abstract.  The optional argument 'no'
     suppresses this heading.

 -- Macro: .AE
     End the abstract.

   An example document description, using a cover page, follows.

     .RP
     .TL
     The Inevitability of Code Bloat
     in Commercial and Free Software
     .AU
     J.\& Random Luser
     .AI
     University of West Bumblefuzz
     .AB
     This report examines the long-term growth of the code
     bases in two large,
     popular software packages;
     the free Emacs and the commercial Microsoft Word.
     While differences appear in the type or order of
     features added,
     due to the different methodologies used,
     the results are the same in the end.
     .PP
     The free software approach is shown to be superior in
     that while free software can become as bloated as
     commercial offerings,
     free software tends to have fewer serious bugs and the
     added features are more in line with user demand.
     .AE
     ...the rest of the paper...

   (1) Distinguish a document title from "titles", which are what 'roff'
systems call headers and footers collectively.

4.6.5 Body Text
---------------

A variety of macros, registers, and strings can be used to structure and
style the body of your document.  They organize your text into
paragraphs, headings, footnotes, and inclusions of material such as
tables and figures.

4.6.5.1 Text settings
.....................

The 'FAM' string, a GNU extension, sets the font family for body text;
the default is 'T'.  The 'PS' and 'VS' registers set the type size and
vertical spacing (distance between text baselines), respectively.  The
font family and type size are ignored on terminals.  Set these
parameters before the first call of a heading, paragraphing, or
(non-date) document description macro to apply them to headers, footers,
and (for 'FAM') footnotes.

   Which font families are available depends on the output device; as a
convention, 'T' selects a serif family ("Times"), 'H' a sans-serif
family ("Helvetica"), and 'C' a monospaced family ("Courier").  The man
page for the output driver documents its font repertoire.  Consult the
'groff(1)' man page for lists of available output devices and their
drivers.

   The hyphenation mode (as used by the 'hy' request) is set from the
'HY' register.  Setting 'HY' to '0' is equivalent to using the 'nh'
request.  This is a Research Tenth Edition Unix extension.

4.6.5.2 Typographical symbols
.............................

'ms' provides a few strings to obtain typographical symbols not easily
entered with the keyboard.  These and many others are available as
special character escape sequences--see the 'groff_char(7)' man page.

 -- String: \*[-]
     Interpolate an em dash.

 -- String: \*[Q]
 -- String: \*[U]
     Interpolate typographer's quotation marks where available, and
     neutral double quotes otherwise.  '\*Q' is the left quote and '\*U'
     the right.

4.6.5.3 Paragraphs
..................

Paragraphing macros "break", or terminate, any pending output line so
that a new paragraph can begin.  Several paragraph types are available,
differing in how indentation applies to them: to left, right, or both
margins; to the first output line of the paragraph, all output lines, or
all but the first.  These calls insert vertical space in the amount
stored in the 'PD' register, except at page or column breaks.
Alternatively, a blank input line breaks the output line and vertically
spaces by one vee.

 -- Macro: .LP
     Set a paragraph without any (additional) indentation.

 -- Macro: .PP
     Set a paragraph with a first-line left indentation in the amount
     stored in the 'PI' register.

 -- Macro: .IP [mark [width]]
     Set a paragraph with a left indentation.  The optional MARK is not
     indented and is empty by default.  It has several applications; see
     Lists in ms.  WIDTH overrides the indentation amount stored in the
     'PI' register; its default unit is 'n'.  Once specified, WIDTH
     applies to further 'IP' calls until specified again or a heading or
     different paragraphing macro is called.

 -- Macro: .QP
     Set a paragraph indented from both left and right margins by the
     amount stored in the 'QI' register.

 -- Macro: .QS
 -- Macro: .QE
     Begin ('QS') and end ('QE') a region where each paragraph is
     indented from both margins by the amount stored in the 'QI'
     register.  The text between 'QS' and 'QE' can be structured further
     by use of other paragraphing macros.

 -- Macro: .XP
     Set an "exdented" paragraph--one with a left indentation in the
     amount stored in the 'PI' register on every line _except_ the first
     (also known as a hanging indent).  This is a Berkeley extension.

   The following example illustrates the use of paragraphing macros.

     .NH 2
     Cases used in the 2001 study
     .LP
     Two software releases were considered for this report.
     .PP
     The first is commercial software;
     the second is free.
     .IP \[bu]
     Microsoft Word for Windows,
     starting with version 1.0 through the current version
     (Word 2000).
     .IP \[bu]
     GNU Emacs,
     from its first appearance as a standalone editor through
     the current version (v20).
     See [Bloggs 2002] for details.
     .QP
     Franklin's Law applied to software:
     software expands to outgrow both RAM and disk space over
     time.
     .SH
     Bibliography
     .XP
     Bloggs, Joseph R.,
     .I "Everyone's a Critic" ,
     Underground Press, March 2002.
     A definitive work that answers all questions and
     criticisms about the quality and usability of free
     software.

4.6.5.4 Headings
................

Use headings to create a sequential or hierarchical structure for your
document.  The 'ms' macros print headings in *bold* using the same font
family and, by default, type size as the body text.  Headings are
available with and without automatic numbering.  Text on input lines
following the macro call becomes the heading's title.  Call a
paragraphing macro to end the heading text and start the section's
content.

 -- Macro: .NH [depth]
 -- Macro: .NH S heading-depth-index ...
     Set an automatically numbered heading.

     'ms' produces a numbered heading the form A.B.C..., to any depth
     desired, with the numbering of each depth increasing automatically
     and being reset to zero when a more significant level is increased.
     "1" is the most significant or coarsest division of the document.
     Only non-zero values are output.  If DEPTH is omitted, 'ms' assumes
     '1'.

     If you specify DEPTH such that an ascending gap occurs relative to
     the previous 'NH' call--that is, you "skip a depth", as by '.NH 1'
     and then '.NH 3'--'groff' 'ms' emits a warning on the standard
     error stream.

     Alternatively, you can give 'NH' a first argument of 'S', followed
     by integers to number the heading depths explicitly.  Further
     automatic numbering, if used, resumes using the specified indices
     as their predecessors.  This feature is a Berkeley extension.

   An example may be illustrative.

     .NH 1
     Animalia
     .NH 2
     Arthropoda
     .NH 3
     Crustacea
     .NH 2
     Chordata
     .NH S 6 6 6
     Daimonia
     .NH 1
     Plantae

   The above results in numbering as follows; the vertical space that
normally precedes each heading is omitted.

     1.  Animalia
     1.1.  Arthropoda
     1.1.1.  Crustacea
     1.2.  Chordata
     6.6.6.  Daimonia
     7.  Plantae

 -- String: \*[SN-STYLE]
 -- String: \*[SN-DOT]
 -- String: \*[SN-NO-DOT]
 -- String: \*[SN]
     After 'NH' is called, the assigned number is made available in the
     strings 'SN-DOT' (as it appears in a printed heading with default
     formatting, followed by a terminating period) and 'SN-NO-DOT' (with
     the terminating period omitted).  These (and 'SN-STYLE') are GNU
     extensions.

     You can control the style used to print numbered headings by
     defining an appropriate alias for the string 'SN-STYLE'.  By
     default, 'SN-STYLE' is aliased to 'SN-DOT'.  If you prefer to omit
     the terminating period from numbers appearing in numbered headings,
     you may define the alias as follows.

          .als SN-STYLE SN-NO-DOT

     Any such change in numbering style becomes effective from the next
     use of 'NH' following redefinition of the alias for 'SN-STYLE'.
     The formatted number of the current heading is available in the
     'SN' string (a feature first documented by Berkeley), which
     facilitates its inclusion in, for example, table captions, equation
     labels, and 'XS'/'XA'/'XE' table of contents entries.

 -- Macro: .SH [depth]
     Set an unnumbered heading.

     The optional DEPTH argument is a GNU extension indicating the
     heading depth corresponding to the DEPTH argument of 'NH'.  It
     matches the type size at which the heading is set to that of a
     numbered heading at the same depth when the 'GROWPS' and 'PSINCR'
     heading size adjustment mechanism is in effect.

   If the 'GROWPS' register is set to a value greater than the LEVEL
argument to 'NH' or 'SH', the type size of a heading produced by these
macros increases by 'PSINCR' units over the size specified by 'PS'
multiplied by the difference of 'GROWPS' and LEVEL.  The value stored in
'PSINCR' is interpreted in 'groff' basic units; the 'p' scaling unit
should be employed when assigning a value specified in points.

   The input

     .nr PS 10
     .nr GROWPS 3
     .nr PSINCR 1.5p
     .NH 1
     Carnivora
     .NH 2
     Felinae
     .NH 3
     Felis catus
     .SH 2
     Machairodontinae

causes "1.  Carnivora" to be printed in 13-point type, followed by "1.1.
Felinae" in 11.5-point type, while "1.1.1.  Felis catus" and all more
deeply nested heading levels remains in the 10-point type specified by
the 'PS' register.  "Machairodontinae" is printed at 11.5 points, since
it corresponds to heading level 2.

   In 'groff' 'ms', the 'NH' and 'SH' macros consult the 'HORPHANS'
register to prevent the output of isolated headings at the bottom of a
page; it specifies the minimum number of lines of an immediately
subsequent paragraph that must be kept on the same page as the heading.
If insufficient space remains on the current page to accommodate the
heading and this number of lines of paragraph text, 'groff' 'ms' forces
a page break before setting the heading.  Any display macro call or
'tbl', 'pic', or 'eqn' region between the heading and the subsequent
paragraph suppresses this grouping.  See ms keeps and displays and ms
Insertions.

4.6.5.5 Typeface and decoration
...............................

The 'ms' macros provide a variety of ways to style text.  Attend closely
to the ordering of arguments labeled PRE and POST, which is not
intuitive.  Support for PRE arguments is a GNU extension.(1)  (see
Typeface and decoration-Footnote-1)

 -- Macro: .B [text [post [pre]]]
     Style TEXT in bold, followed by POST in the previous font style
     without intervening space, and preceded by PRE similarly.  Without
     arguments, 'ms' styles subsequent text in bold until the next
     paragraphing, heading, or no-argument typeface macro call.

 -- Macro: .R [text [post [pre]]]
     As 'B', but use the roman style (upright text of normal weight)
     instead of bold.  Argument recognition is a GNU extension.

 -- Macro: .I [text [post [pre]]]
     As 'B', but use an italic or oblique style instead of bold.

 -- Macro: .BI [text [post [pre]]]
     As 'B', but use a bold italic or bold oblique style instead of
     upright bold.  This is a Research Tenth Edition Unix extension.

 -- Macro: .CW [text [post [pre]]]
     As 'B', but use a constant-width (monospaced) roman typeface
     instead of bold.  This is a Research Tenth Edition Unix extension.

 -- Macro: .BX [text]
     Typeset TEXT and draw a box around it.  On terminals, reverse video
     or another means of highlighting is used instead.  If you want TEXT
     to contain space, use unbreakable space or horizontal motion escape
     sequences ('\~', '\<SPC>', '\^', '\|', '\0' or '\h').

 -- Macro: .UL [text [post]]
     Typeset TEXT with an underline.  On terminals, TEXT is bracketed
     with underscores '_'.  POST, if present, is set after TEXT with no
     intervening space.

 -- Macro: .LG
     Set subsequent text in larger type (two points larger than the
     current size) until the next type size, paragraphing, or heading
     macro call.  Call the macro multiple times to enlarge the type size
     further.

 -- Macro: .SM
     Set subsequent text in smaller type (two points smaller than the
     current size) until the next type size, paragraphing, or heading
     macro call.  Call the macro multiple times to reduce the type size
     further.

 -- Macro: .NL
     Set subsequent text at the normal type size (the amount in register
     'PS').

   PRE and POST arguments are typically used to simplify the attachment
of punctuation to styled words.  When PRE is used, a hyphenation control
escape sequence '\%' that would ordinarily start TEXT must start PRE
instead to have the desired effect.

     The CS course's students found one C language keyword
     .CW static ) \%(
     most troublesome.

   The foregoing example produces output as follows.

     The CS course's students found one C language keyword (static)
     most troublesome.

   You can use the output line continuation escape sequence '\c' to
achieve the same result (see Line Continuation).  It is also portable to
older 'ms' implementations.

     The CS course's students found one C language keyword
     \%(\c
     .CW \%static )
     most troublesome.

   'groff' 'ms' also offers strings to begin and end super- and
subscripting.  These are GNU extensions.

 -- String: \*[{]
 -- String: \*[}]
     Begin and end superscripting, respectively.

 -- String: \*[<]
 -- String: \*[>]
     Begin and end subscripting, respectively.

   Rather than calling the 'CW' macro, in 'groff' 'ms' you might prefer
to change the font family to Courier by setting the 'FAM' string to 'C'.
You can then use all four style macros above, returning to the default
family (Times) with '.ds FAM T'.  Because changes to 'FAM' take effect
only at the next paragraph, 'CW' remains useful to "inline" a change to
the font family, similarly to the practice of this document in noting
syntactical elements of 'ms' and 'groff'.

   (1) This idiosyncrasy arose through feature accretion; for example,
the 'B' macro in Sixth Edition Unix 'ms' (1975) accepted only one
argument, the text to be set in boldface.  By Version 7 (1979) it
recognized a second argument; in 1990, 'groff' 'ms' added a "pre"
argument, placing it third to avoid breaking support for older
documents.

4.6.5.6 Lists
.............

The MARK argument to the 'IP' macro can be employed to present a variety
of lists; for instance, you can use a bullet glyph ('\[bu]') for
unordered lists, a number (or auto-incrementing register) for numbered
lists, or a word or phrase for glossary-style or definition lists.  If
you set the paragraph indentation register 'PI' before calling 'IP', you
can later reorder the items in the list without having to ensure that a
WIDTH argument remains affixed to the first call.

   The following is an example of a bulleted list.

     .nr PI 2n
     A bulleted list:
     .IP \[bu]
     lawyers
     .IP \[bu]
     guns
     .IP \[bu]
     money

     A bulleted list:

     * lawyers

     * guns

     * money

   The following is an example of a numbered list.

     .nr step 0 1
     .nr PI 3n
     A numbered list:
     .IP \n+[step]
     lawyers
     .IP \n+[step]
     guns
     .IP \n+[step]
     money

     A numbered list:

     1. lawyers

     2. guns

     3. money

   Here we have employed the 'nr' request to create a register of our
own, 'step'.  We initialized it to zero and assigned it an
auto-increment of 1.  Each time we use the escape sequence '\n+[step]'
(note the plus sign), the formatter applies the increment just before
interpolating the register's value.  Preparing the 'PI' register as well
enables us to rearrange the list without the tedium of updating macro
calls.

   The next example illustrates a glossary-style list.

     A glossary-style list:
     .IP lawyers 0.4i
     Two or more attorneys.
     .IP guns
     Firearms,
     preferably large-caliber.
     .IP money
     Gotta pay for those
     lawyers and guns!

     A glossary-style list:

     lawyers
           Two or more attorneys.

     guns  Firearms, preferably large-caliber.

     money
           Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns!

   In the previous example, observe how the 'IP' macro places the
definition on the same line as the term if it has enough space.  If this
is not what you want, there are a few workarounds we illustrate by
modifying the example.  First, you can use a 'br' request to force a
break after printing the term or label.

     .IP guns
     .br
     Firearms,

   Second, you could apply the '\p' escape sequence to force a break.
The space following the escape sequence is important; if you omit it,
'groff' prints the first word of the paragraph text on the same line as
the term or label (if it fits) _then_ breaks the line.

     .IP guns
     \p Firearms,

   Finally, you may append a horizontal motion to the mark with the '\h'
escape sequence; using the same amount as the indentation ensures that
the mark is too wide for 'groff' to treat it as "fitting" on the same
line as the paragraph text.

     .IP guns\h'0.4i'
     Firearms,

   In each case, the result is the same.

     A glossary-style list:

     lawyers
           Two or more attorneys.

     guns
           Firearms, preferably large-caliber.

     money
           Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns!

4.6.5.7 Indented regions
........................

You can indent a region of text while otherwise formatting it normally.
Such indented regions can be nested; change '\n[PI]' before each call to
vary the amount of inset.

 -- Macro: .RS
     Begin a region where headings, paragraphs, and displays are
     indented (further) by the amount stored in the 'PI' register.

 -- Macro: .RE
     End the (next) most recent indented region.

   This feature enables you to easily line up text under hanging and
indented paragraphs.  For example, you may wish to structure lists
hierarchically.

     .IP \[bu] 2
     Lawyers:
     .RS
     .IP \[bu]
     Dewey,
     .IP \[bu]
     Cheatham,
     and
     .IP \[bu]
     Howe.
     .RE
     .IP \[bu]
     Guns

     * Lawyers:

       *  Dewey,

       *  Cheatham, and

       *  Howe.

     * Guns

4.6.5.8 Keeps, boxed keeps, and displays
........................................

On occasion, you may want to "keep" several lines of text, or a region
of a document, together on a single page, preventing an automatic page
break within certain boundaries.  This can cause a page break to occur
earlier than it normally would.  For example, you may want to keep two
paragraphs together, or a paragraph that refers to a table, list, or
figure adjacent to the item it discusses.  'ms' provides the 'KS' and
'KE' macros for this purpose.

   You can alternatively specify a "floating keep": if a keep cannot fit
on the current page, 'ms' holds it, allowing material following the keep
(in the source document) to fill the remainder of the current page.
When the page breaks by reaching its bottom or by 'bp' request, 'ms'
puts the floating keep at the beginning of the next page.  Use floating
keeps to house large graphics or tables that do not need to appear
exactly where they occur in the source document.

 -- Macro: .KS
 -- Macro: .KF
 -- Macro: .KE
     'KS' begins a keep, 'KF' a floating keep, and 'KE' ends a keep of
     either kind.

   As an alternative to the keep mechanism, the 'ne' request forces a
page break if there is not at least the amount of vertical space
specified in its argument remaining on the page (see Page Control).  One
application of 'ne' is to reserve space on the page for a figure or
illustration to be included later.

   A "boxed keep" has a frame drawn around it.

 -- Macro: .B1
 -- Macro: .B2
     'B1' begins a keep with a box drawn around it.  'B2' ends a boxed
     keep.

   Boxed keep macros cause breaks; to box words within a line, recall
'BX' in Typeface and decoration.  'ms' draws box lines close to the text
they enclose so that they are usable within paragraphs.  When boxing
entire paragraphs thus, you may improve their appearance by calling 'B1'
after the first paragraphing macro, and invoking the 'sp' request before
calling 'B2'.

     .LP
     .B1
     .I Warning:
     Happy Fun Ball may suddenly accelerate to dangerous
     speeds.
     .sp \n[PD]/2 \" space by half the inter-paragraph distance
     .B2

   If you want a boxed keep to float, enclose the 'B1' and 'B2' calls
within a pair of 'KF' and 'KE' calls.

   "Displays" turn off filling; lines of verse or program code are shown
with their lines broken as in the source document without requiring 'br'
requests between lines.  Displays can be kept on a single page or
allowed to break across pages.  The 'DS' macro begins a kept display of
the layout specified in its first argument; non-kept displays are begun
with dedicated macros corresponding to their layout.

 -- Macro: .DS L
 -- Macro: .LD
     Begin ('DS': kept) left-aligned display.

 -- Macro: .DS [I [indent]]
 -- Macro: .ID [indent]
     Begin ('DS': kept) display indented by INDENT if specified, and by
     the amount of the 'DI' register otherwise.

 -- Macro: .DS B
 -- Macro: .BD
     Begin a ('DS': kept) a block display: the entire display is
     left-aligned, but indented such that the longest line in the
     display is centered on the page.

 -- Macro: .DS C
 -- Macro: .CD
     Begin a ('DS': kept) centered display: each line in the display is
     centered.

 -- Macro: .DS R
 -- Macro: .RD
     Begin a ('DS': kept) right-aligned display.  This is a GNU
     extension.

 -- Macro: .DE
     End any display.

   'groff' 'ms' inserts the distance stored in the 'DD' register before
and after each pair of display macros; this is a Berkeley extension.
This distance replaces any adjacent inter-paragraph distance or
subsequent spacing prior to a section heading.  The 'DI' register is a
GNU extension; its value is an indentation applied to displays created
with '.DS' and '.ID' without arguments, to '.DS I' without an
indentation argument, and to indented equations set with '.EQ'.  Changes
to either register take effect at the next display boundary.

   The display distance applies even in footnotes (discussed below),
which may cause a footnote with a display at its end to "emptily" spill
to the next page.  Consider the following tactic to compensate.

     .FS
     Recall the ideal gas law.
     .nr DD-saved \n[DD] \" stash display distance
     .nr DD 0       \" eliminate automatic space around display
     .sp \n[DD-saved]u   \" manually put space before it
     .EQ
     P V = n R T
     .EN
     .FE
     .nr DD \n[DD-saved] \" restore previous setting

4.6.5.9 Tables, figures, equations, and references
..................................................

'ms' often sees use with the 'tbl', 'pic', 'eqn', and 'refer'
preprocessors.  Mark text meant for preprocessors by enclosing it in
pairs of tokens as follows, with nothing between the dot and the macro
name.  Preprocessors match these tokens only at the start of an input
line.  The formatter interprets them as macro calls.

 -- Macro: .TS [H]
 -- Macro: .TE
     Demarcate a table to be processed by the 'tbl' preprocessor.  The
     optional argument 'H' to 'TS' instructs 'ms' to repeat table rows
     (often column headings) at the top of each new page the table
     spans, if applicable; calling the 'TH' macro marks the end of such
     rows.  The GNU 'tbl(1)' man page provides a comprehensive reference
     to the preprocessor and offers examples of its use.

 -- Macro: .PS H V
 -- Macro: .PE
 -- Macro: .PF
     'PS' begins a picture to be processed by the 'pic' preprocessor;
     either of 'PE' or 'PF' ends it, the latter with "flyback" to the
     vertical position at its top.  Create 'pic' input manually or with
     a program such as 'xfig'.  H and V are the horizontal and vertical
     dimensions of the picture; 'pic' supplies them automatically.

 -- Macro: .EQ [align [label]]
 -- Macro: .EN
     Demarcate an equation to be processed by the 'eqn' preprocessor.
     The equation is centered by default; ALIGN can be 'C', 'L', or 'I'
     to (explicitly) center, left-align, or indent it by the amount
     stored in the 'DI' register, respectively.  If specified, LABEL is
     set right-aligned.

 -- Macro: .[
 -- Macro: .]
     Demarcate a bibliographic citation to be processed by the 'refer'
     preprocessor.  'refer(1)' provides a comprehensive reference to the
     preprocessor and the format of its bibliographic database.

   When 'refer' emits collected references (as might be done on a "Works
Cited" page), it interpolates the 'REFERENCES' string as an unnumbered
heading ('SH').

   The following is an example of how to set up a table that may print
across two or more pages.

     .TS H
     allbox;
     Cb | Cb .
     Part->Description
     _
     .TH
     .T&
     GH-1978->Fribulating gonkulator
     ...the rest of the table follows...
     .TE

Attempting to place a multi-page table inside a keep can lead to
unpleasant results, particularly if the 'tbl' 'allbox' option is used.

   Mathematics can be typeset using the language of the 'eqn'
preprocessor.

     .EQ C (\*[SN-NO-DOT]a)
     p ~ = ~ q sqrt { ( 1 + ~ ( x / q sup 2 ) }
     .EN

This input formats a labelled equation.  We used the 'SN-NO-DOT' string
to base the equation label on the current heading number, giving us more
flexibility to reorganize the document.

   Create diagrams with 'pic'.

     .PS
     circle "input";
     arrow;
     box width 1.5i "\f[CR]groff -Rept -ms\f[]";
     arrow;
     circle "output";
     .PE

   'groff' options run preprocessors on the input: '-e' for 'eqn', '-p'
for 'pic', '-R' for 'refer', and '-t' for 'tbl'.

4.6.5.10 Footnotes
..................

A footnote is typically anchored to a place in the text with a "mark",
which is a small integer, a symbol such as a dagger, or arbitrary
user-specified text.

 -- String: \*[*]
     Place an "automatic number", an automatically generated numeric
     footnote mark, in the text.  Each time this string is interpolated,
     the number it produces increments by one.  Automatic numbers start
     at 1.  This is a Berkeley extension.

   Enclose the footnote text in 'FS' and 'FE' macro calls to set it at
the nearest available "foot", or bottom, of a text column or page.

 -- Macro: .FS [mark]
 -- Macro: .FE
     Begin ('FS') and end ('FE') a footnote.  'FS' calls 'FS-MARK' with
     any supplied MARK argument, which is then also placed at the
     beginning of the footnote text.  If MARK is omitted, the next
     pending automatic number enqueued by interpolation of the '*'
     string is used, and if none exists, nothing is prefixed.

   You may not desire automatically numbered footnotes in spite of their
convenience.  You can indicate a footnote with a symbol or other text by
specifying its mark at the appropriate place (for example, by using
'\[dg]' for the dagger glyph) _and_ as an argument to the 'FS' macro.
Such manual marks should be repeated as arguments to 'FS' or as part of
the footnote text to disambiguate their correspondence.  You may wish to
use '\*{' and '\*}' to superscript the mark at the anchor point, in the
footnote text, or both.

   'groff' 'ms' provides a hook macro, 'FS-MARK', for user-determined
operations to be performed when the 'FS' macro is called.  It is passed
the same arguments as 'FS' itself.  An application of 'FS-MARK' is
anchor placement for a hyperlink reference, so that a footnote can link
back to its referential context.  By default, this macro has an empty
definition.  'FS-MARK' is a GNU extension.

   Footnotes can be safely used within keeps and displays, but you
should avoid using automatically numbered footnotes within floating
keeps.  You can place a second '\**' interpolation between a '\**' and
its corresponding 'FS' call as long as each 'FS' call occurs _after_ the
corresponding '\**' and occurrences of 'FS' are in the same order as
corresponding occurrences of '\**'.

   Footnote text is formatted as paragraphs are, using analogous
parameters.  The registers 'FI', 'FPD', 'FPS', and 'FVS' correspond to
'PI', 'PD', 'PS', and 'CS', respectively; 'FPD', 'FPS', and 'FVS' are
GNU extensions.

   The 'FF' register controls the formatting of automatically numbered
footnote paragraphs, and those for which 'FS' is given a MARK argument,
See ms Document Control Settings.

   The default footnote line length is 11/12ths of the normal line
length for compatibility with the expectations of historical 'ms'
documents; you may wish to set the 'FR' string to '1' to align with
contemporary typesetting practices.  In the past,(1) (see ms
Footnotes-Footnote-1) an 'FL' register was used for the line length in
footnotes; however, setting this register at document initialization
time had no effect on the footnote line length in multi-column
arrangements.(2)  (see ms Footnotes-Footnote-2)

   Prefer the 'FR' string over the 'FL' register in contemporary
documents.  The footnote line length is effectively computed as
'column-width * \*[FR]'.  If you require an absolute footnote line
length, recall that 'roff' formatters evaluate numeric expressions
strictly from left to right, without operator precedence (parentheses
are honored).

     .ds FR 0+3i \" Set footnote line length to 3 inches.

   (1) Unix Version 7 'ms', its descendants, and GNU 'ms' prior to
'groff' version 1.23.0

   (2) You could reset it after each call to '1C', '2C', or 'MC'.

4.6.5.11 Language and localization
..................................

'groff' 'ms' provides several strings that you can customize for your
own purposes, or redefine to adapt the macro package to languages other
than English.  It is already localized for Czech, German, Spanish,
French, Italian, Polish, Russian, and Swedish.  Load the desired
localization macro package after 'ms'; see 'groff_tmac(5)'.

     $ groff -ms -mfr bienvenue.ms

   The following strings are available.

 -- String: \*[REFERENCES]
     Contains the string printed at the beginning of a references
     (bibliography) page produced with GNU 'refer(1)'.  The default is
     'References'.

 -- String: \*[ABSTRACT]
     Contains the string printed at the beginning of the abstract.  The
     default is '\f[I]ABSTRACT\f[]'; it includes font selection escape
     sequences to set the word in italics.

 -- String: \*[TOC]
     Contains the string printed at the beginning of the table of
     contents.  The default is 'Table of Contents'.

 -- String: \*[MONTH1]
 -- String: \*[MONTH2]
 -- String: \*[MONTH3]
 -- String: \*[MONTH4]
 -- String: \*[MONTH5]
 -- String: \*[MONTH6]
 -- String: \*[MONTH7]
 -- String: \*[MONTH8]
 -- String: \*[MONTH9]
 -- String: \*[MONTH10]
 -- String: \*[MONTH11]
 -- String: \*[MONTH12]
     Contain the full names of the calendar months.  The defaults are in
     English: 'January', 'February', and so on.

4.6.6 Page layout
-----------------

'ms''s default page layout arranges text in a single column with the
page number between hyphens centered in a header on each page except the
first, and produces no footers.  You can customize this arrangement.

4.6.6.1 Headers and footers
...........................

There are multiple ways to produce headers and footers.  One is to
define the strings 'LH', 'CH', and 'RH' to set the left, center, and
right headers, respectively; and 'LF', 'CF', and 'RF' to set the left,
center, and right footers.  This approach suffices for documents that do
not distinguish odd- and even-numbered pages.

   Another method is to call macros that set headers or footers for odd-
or even-numbered pages.  Each such macro takes a delimited argument
separating the left, center, and right header or footer texts from each
other.  You can replace the neutral apostrophes (''') shown below with
any character not appearing in the header or footer text.  These macros
are Berkeley extensions.

 -- Macro: .OH 'left'center'right'
 -- Macro: .EH 'left'center'right'
 -- Macro: .OF 'left'center'right'
 -- Macro: .EF 'left'center'right'
     The 'OH' and 'EH' macros define headers for odd- (recto) and
     even-numbered (verso) pages, respectively; the 'OF' and 'EF' macros
     define footers for them.

   With either method, a percent sign '%' in header or footer text is
replaced by the current page number.  By default, 'ms' places no header
on a page numbered "1" (regardless of its number format).

 -- Macro: .P1
     Typeset the header even on page 1.  To be effective, this macro
     must be called before the header trap is sprung on any page
     numbered "1"; in practice, unless your page numbering is unusual,
     this means that you should call it early, before 'TL' or any
     heading or paragraphing macro.  This is a Berkeley extension.

   For even greater flexibility, 'ms' is designed to permit the
redefinition of the macros that are called when formatter traps that
ordinarily cause the headers and footers to be output are sprung.  'PT'
("page trap") is called by 'ms' when the header is to be written, and
'BT' ("bottom trap") when the footer is to be.  The 'groff' page
location trap that 'ms' sets up to format the header also calls the
(normally undefined) 'HD' macro after 'PT'; you can define 'HD' if you
need additional processing after setting the header (for example, to
draw a line below it).  The 'HD' hook is a Berkeley extension.  Any such
macros you (re)define must implement any desired specialization for
odd-, even-, or first numbered pages.

4.6.6.2 Tab stops
.................

Use the 'ta' request to define tab stops as needed.  See Tabs and
Fields.

 -- Macro: .TA
     Reset the tab stops to the 'ms' default (every 5 ens).  Redefine
     this macro to create a different set of default tab stops.

4.6.6.3 Margins
...............

Control margins using the registers summarized in "Margin settings" in
ms Document Control Settings above.  There is no setting for the right
margin; the combination of page offset '\n[PO]' and line length '\n[LL]'
determines it.

4.6.6.4 Multiple columns
........................

'ms' can set text in as many columns as reasonably fit on the page.  The
following macros force a page break if a multi-column layout is active
when they are called.  The 'MINGW' register stores the default minimum
gutter width; it is a GNU extension.  When multiple columns are in use,
keeps and the 'HORPHANS' and 'PORPHANS' registers work with respect to
column breaks instead of page breaks.

 -- Macro: .1C
     Arrange page text in a single column (the default).

 -- Macro: .2C
     Arrange page text in two columns.

 -- Macro: .MC [column-width [gutter-width]]
     Arrange page text in multiple columns.  If you specify no
     arguments, it is equivalent to the '2C' macro.  Otherwise,
     COLUMN-WIDTH is the width of each column and GUTTER-WIDTH is the
     minimum distance between columns.

4.6.6.5 Creating a table of contents
....................................

Because 'roff' formatters process their input in a single pass, material
on page 50, for example, cannot influence what appears on page 1--this
poses a challenge for a table of contents at its traditional location in
front matter, if you wish to avoid manually maintaining it.  'ms'
enables the collection of material to be presented in the table of
contents as it appears, saving its page number along with it, and then
emitting the collected contents on demand toward the end of the
document.  The table of contents can then be resequenced to its desired
location by physically rearranging the pages of a printed document, or
as part of post-processing--with a 'sed(1)' script to reorder the pages
in 'troff''s output, with 'pdfjam(1)', or with 'gropdf(1)''s
'pdfswitchtopage' macro, for example.

   Define an entry to appear in the table of contents by bracketing its
text between calls to the 'XS' and 'XE' macros.  A typical application
is to call them immediately after 'NH' or 'SH' and repeat the heading
text within them.  The 'XA' macro, used within '.XS'/'.XE' pairs,
supplements an entry--for instance, when it requires multiple output
lines, whether because a heading is too long to fit or because style
dictates that page numbers not be repeated.  You may wish to indent the
text thus wrapped to correspond to its heading depth; this can be done
in the entry text by prefixing it with tabs or horizontal motion escape
sequences, or by providing a second argument to the 'XA' macro.  'XS'
and 'XA' automatically associate the page number where they are called
with the text following them, but they accept arguments to override this
behavior.  At the end of the document, call 'TC' or 'PX' to emit the
table of contents; 'TC' resets the page number to 'i' (Roman numeral
one), and then calls 'PX'.  All of these macros are Berkeley extensions.

 -- Macro: .XS [page-number]
 -- Macro: .XA [page-number [indentation]]
 -- Macro: .XE
     Begin, supplement, and end a table of contents entry.  Each entry
     is associated with PAGE-NUMBER (otherwise the current page number);
     a PAGE-NUMBER of 'no' prevents a leader and page number from being
     emitted for that entry.  Use of 'XA' within 'XS'/'XE' is optional;
     it can be repeated.  If INDENTATION is present, a supplemental
     entry is indented by that amount; ens are assumed if no unit is
     indicated.  Text on input lines between 'XS' and 'XE' is stored for
     later recall by 'PX'.

 -- Macro: .PX [no]
     Switch to single-column layout.  Unless 'no' is specified, center
     and interpolate the 'TOC' string in bold and two points larger than
     the body text.  Emit the table of contents entries.

 -- Macro: .TC [no]
     Set the page number to 1, the page number format to lowercase Roman
     numerals, and call 'PX' (with a 'no' argument, if present).

   Here's an example of typical 'ms' table of contents preparation.  We
employ horizontal escape sequences '\h' to indent the entries by
sectioning depth.

     .NH 1
     Introduction
     .XS
     Introduction
     .XE
     ...
     .NH 2
     Methodology
     .XS
     \h'2n'Methodology
     .XA
     \h'4n'Fassbinder's Approach
     \h'4n'Kahiu's Approach
     .XE
     ...
     .NH 1
     Findings
     .XS
     Findings
     .XE
     ...
     .TC

   The remaining features in this subsubsection are GNU extensions.
'groff' 'ms' obviates the need to repeat heading text after 'XS' calls.
Call 'XN' and 'XH' after 'NH' and 'SH', respectively.

 -- Macro: .XN heading-text
 -- Macro: .XH depth heading-text
     Format HEADING-TEXT and create a corresponding table of contents
     entry.  'XN' computes the indentation from the depth of the
     preceding 'NH' call; 'XH' requires a DEPTH argument to do so.

   'groff' 'ms' encourages customization of table of contents entry
production.

 -- Macro: .XN-REPLACEMENT heading-text
 -- Macro: .XH-REPLACEMENT depth heading-text
     These hook macros implement 'XN' and 'XH', respectively.  They call
     'XN-INIT' and pass their HEADING-TEXT arguments to 'XH-UPDATE-TOC'.

 -- Macro: .XN-INIT
 -- Macro: .XH-UPDATE-TOC depth heading-text
     The 'XN-INIT' hook macro does nothing by default.  'XH-UPDATE-TOC'
     brackets HEADING-TEXT with 'XS' and 'XE' calls, indenting it by 2
     ens per level of DEPTH beyond the first.

   We could therefore produce a table of contents similar to that in the
previous example with fewer macro calls.  (The difference is that this
input follows the "Approach" entries with leaders and page numbers.)

     .NH 1
     .XN Introduction
     ...
     .NH 2
     .XN Methodology
     .XH 3 "Fassbinder's Approach"
     .XH 3 "Kahiu's Approach"
     ...
     .NH 1
     .XN Findings
     ...

   To get the section number of the numbered headings into the table of
contents entries, we might define 'XN-REPLACEMENT' as follows.  (We
obtain the heading depth from 'groff' 'ms''s internal register 'nh*hl'.)

     .de XN-REPLACEMENT
     .XN-INIT
     .XH-UPDATE-TOC \\n[nh*hl] \\$@
     \&\\*[SN] \\$*
     ..

   You can change the style of the leader that bridges each table of
contents entry with its page number; define the 'TC-LEADER' special
character by using the 'char' request.  A typical leader combines the
dot glyph '.' with a horizontal motion escape sequence to spread the
dots.  The width of the page number field is stored in the 'TC-MARGIN'
register.

4.6.7 Differences from AT&T 'ms'
--------------------------------

The 'groff' 'ms' macros are an independent reimplementation, using no
AT&T code.  Since they take advantage of the extended features of GNU
'troff', they cannot be used with AT&T 'troff'.  'groff' 'ms' supports
features described above as Berkeley and Research Tenth Edition Unix
extensions, and adds several of its own.

   * The internals of 'groff' 'ms' differ from those of AT&T 'ms'.
     Documents that depend upon implementation details of AT&T 'ms' may
     not format properly with 'groff' 'ms'.  Such details include macros
     whose function was not documented in the AT&T 'ms' manual.(1)  (see
     Differences from AT&T ms-Footnote-1)

   * The error-handling policy of 'groff' 'ms' is to detect and report
     errors, rather than to ignore them silently.

   * Research Tenth Edition Unix supported 'P1'/'P2' macros to bracket
     code examples; 'groff' 'ms' does not.

   * 'groff' 'ms' does not work in GNU 'troff''s AT&T compatibility
     mode.  If loaded when that mode is enabled, it aborts processing
     with a diagnostic message.

   * Multiple line spacing is not supported.  Use a larger vertical
     spacing instead.

   * 'groff' 'ms' uses the same header and footer defaults in both
     'nroff' and 'troff' modes as AT&T 'ms' does in 'troff' mode; AT&T's
     default in 'nroff' mode is to put the date, in U.S. traditional
     format (e.g., "January 1, 2021"), in the center footer (the 'CF'
     string).

   * Many 'groff' 'ms' macros, including those for paragraphs, headings,
     and displays, cause a reset of paragraph rendering parameters, and
     may change the indentation; they do so not by incrementing or
     decrementing it, but by setting it absolutely.  This can cause
     problems for documents that define additional macros of their own
     that manipulate indentation.  Use the 'ms' 'RS' and 'RE' macros
     instead of the 'in' request.

   * AT&T 'ms' interpreted the values of the registers 'PS' and 'VS' in
     points, and did not support the use of scaling units with them.
     'groff' 'ms' interprets values of the registers 'PS', 'VS', 'FPS',
     and 'FVS' equal to or larger than 1,000 (one thousand) as decimal
     fractions multiplied by 1,000.(2)  (see Differences from AT&T
     ms-Footnote-2) This threshold makes use of a scaling unit with
     these parameters practical for high-resolution devices while
     preserving backward compatibility.  It also permits expression of
     non-integral type sizes.  For example, 'groff -rPS=10.5p' at the
     shell prompt is equivalent to placing '.nr PS 10.5p' at the
     beginning of the document.

   * AT&T 'ms''s 'AU' macro supported arguments whose values were used
     with some non-'RP' document types; that of 'groff' 'ms' does not.

   * Right-aligned displays are available.  The AT&T 'ms' manual
     observes that "it is tempting to assume that '.DS R' will right
     adjust lines, but it doesn't work".  In 'groff' 'ms', it does.

   * To make 'groff' 'ms' use the default page offset (which also
     specifies the left margin), the 'PO' register must stay undefined
     until the first 'ms' macro is called.

     This implies that '\n[PO]' should not be used early in the
     document, unless it is changed also: accessing an undefined
     register automatically defines it.

   * 'groff' 'ms' supports the 'PN' register, but it is not necessary;
     you can access the page number via the usual '%' register and
     invoke the 'af' request to assign a different format to it if
     desired.(3)  (see Differences from AT&T ms-Footnote-3)

   * The AT&T 'ms' manual documents registers 'CW' and 'GW' as setting
     the default column width and "intercolumn gap", respectively, and
     which applied when 'MC' was called with fewer than two arguments.
     'groff' 'ms' instead treats 'MC' without arguments as synonymous
     with '2C'; there is thus no occasion for a default column width
     register.  Further, the 'MINGW' register and the second argument to
     'MC' specify a _minimum_ space between columns, not the fixed
     gutter width of AT&T 'ms'.

   * The AT&T 'ms' manual did not document the 'QI' register; Berkeley
     and 'groff' 'ms' do.

 -- Register: \n[GS]
     'groff' 'ms' sets the register 'GS' to 1; AT&T 'ms' does not use
     it.  A document can test its value to determine whether it is being
     formatted with 'groff' 'ms' or another implementation.

   (1) "Typing Documents on the UNIX System: Using the -ms Macros with
Troff and Nroff", M. E. Lesk, Bell Laboratories, 1978

   (2) Register values are converted to and stored as basic units.  See
Measurements.

   (3) If you redefine the 'ms' 'PT' macro and desire special treatment
of certain page numbers (like '1'), you may need to handle a non-Arabic
page number format, as 'groff' 'ms''s 'PT' does; see the macro package
source.  In 'groff' 'ms', the 'PN' and '%' registers are aliases.

4.6.7.1 Unix Version 7 'ms' macros unimplemented by 'groff' 'ms'
................................................................

Several macros described in the Unix Version 7 'ms' documentation are
unimplemented by 'groff' 'ms' because they are specific to the
requirements of documents produced internally by Bell Laboratories, some
of which also require a glyph for the Bell System logo that 'groff' does
not support.  These macros implemented several document type formats
('EG', 'IM', 'MF', 'MR', 'TM', 'TR'), were meaningful only in
conjunction with the use of certain document types ('AT', 'CS', 'CT',
'OK', 'SG'), stored the postal addresses of Bell Labs sites ('HO', 'IH',
'MH', 'PY', 'WH'), or lacked a stable definition over time ('UX').  To
compatibly render historical 'ms' documents using these macros, we
advise your documents to invoke the 'rm' request to remove any such
macros it uses and then define replacements with an authentically
typeset original at hand.(1)  (see Missing Unix Version 7 ms
Macros-Footnote-1) For informal purposes, a simple definition of 'UX'
should maintain the readability of the document's substance.

     .rm UX
     .ds UX Unix\"

   (1) Removal beforehand is necessary because 'groff' 'ms' aliases
these macros with a diagnostic one; you want to reorient the aliased
name before (re-)populating the macro.

4.6.8 Legacy Features
---------------------

'groff' 'ms' retains some legacy features solely to support formatting
of historical documents; contemporary ones should not use them because
they can render poorly.  See the 'groff_char(7)' man page.

AT&T accent mark strings
........................

AT&T 'ms' defined accent mark strings as follows.

 -- String: \*[']
     Apply acute accent to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[`]
     Apply grave accent to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[:]
     Apply dieresis (umlaut) to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[^]
     Apply circumflex accent to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[~]
     Apply tilde accent to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[C]
     Apply caron to subsequent glyph.

 -- String: \*[,]
     Apply cedilla to subsequent glyph.

Berkeley accent mark and glyph strings
......................................

Berkeley 'ms' offered an 'AM' macro; calling it redefined the AT&T
accent mark strings (except for '\*C'), applied them to the _preceding_
glyph, and defined additional strings, some for spacing glyphs.

 -- Macro: .AM
     Enable alternative accent mark and glyph-producing strings.

 -- String: \*[']
     Apply acute accent to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[`]
     Apply grave accent to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[:]
     Apply dieresis (umlaut) to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[^]
     Apply circumflex accent to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[~]
     Apply tilde accent to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[,]
     Apply cedilla to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[/]
     Apply stroke (slash) to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[v]
     Apply caron to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[_]
     Apply macron to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[.]
     Apply underdot to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[o]
     Apply ring accent to preceding glyph.

 -- String: \*[?]
     Interpolate inverted question mark.

 -- String: \*[!]
     Interpolate inverted exclamation mark.

 -- String: \*[8]
     Interpolate small letter sharp s.

 -- String: \*[q]
     Interpolate small letter o with hook accent (ogonek).

 -- String: \*[3]
     Interpolate small letter yogh.

 -- String: \*[d-]
     Interpolate small letter eth.

 -- String: \*[D-]
     Interpolate capital letter eth.

 -- String: \*[th]
     Interpolate small letter thorn.

 -- String: \*[Th]
     Interpolate capital letter thorn.

 -- String: \*[ae]
     Interpolate small æ ligature.

 -- String: \*[Ae]
     Interpolate capital Æ ligature.

 -- String: \*[oe]
     Interpolate small oe ligature.

 -- String: \*[OE]
     Interpolate capital OE ligature.

4.6.9 Naming Conventions
------------------------

'groff' 'ms' uses the following conventions for names of macros,
strings, and registers.  External names available to documents that use
the macros contain only uppercase letters and digits.  The package
reserves the following identifiers for internal use.

   * those containing the characters '*', '@', and ':'; and

   * those containing only uppercase letters and digits.

   When selecting a name for your document's own macros, registers,
macros, and strings, avoid those reserved by 'groff' 'ms' and those
defined by GNU 'troff'.  See Register Index, Macro Index, and String
Index, or 'groff(7)' for complete lists thereof.

   'groff' 'ms' organizes most of its internal names into modules.  The
naming convenion is as follows.

   * Names used only within one module are of the form MODULE'*'NAME.

   * Names used outside the module in which they are defined are of the
     form MODULE'@'NAME.

   * Names associated with a particular environment are of the form
     ENVIRONMENT':'NAME; these are used only within the 'par' module.

   * NAME does not have a module prefix.

   * Names constructed to implement arrays are of the form
     ARRAY'!'INDEX.

5 GNU 'troff' Reference
***********************

This chapter covers _all_ of the facilities of the GNU 'troff'
formatting program.  Users of macro packages may skip it if not
interested in details.

5.1 Text
========

AT&T 'troff' was designed to take input as it would be composed on a
typewriter, including the teletypewriters used as early computer
terminals, and relieve the user drafting a document of concern with
details like line length maintenance, hyphenation breaking, and
consistent paragraph indentation.  Early in its development, the program
gained the ability to prepare output for a phototypesetter; a document
could then be prepared for output to a teletypewriter, a
phototypesetter, or both.  GNU 'troff' continues this tradition of
permitting an author to compose a single master version of a document
which can then be rendered upon a variety of output formats or devices,
including PDF, HTML, laser printers, and terminal displays.

   'roff' input contains text interspersed with instructions to control
the formatter.  Even in the absence of such instructions, GNU 'troff'
still processes its input in several ways, by filling, hyphenating,
breaking, and adjusting it, and supplementing it with inter-sentence
space.

5.1.1 Filling
-------------

When GNU 'troff' starts up, it obtains information about the device for
which it is preparing output.(1)  (see Filling-Footnote-1) An essential
property is the length of the output line, such as "6.5 inches".

   GNU 'troff' interprets plain text files employing the Unix
line-ending convention.  It reads input a character at a time,
collecting words as it goes, and fits as many words together on an
output line as it can--this is known as "filling".  To GNU 'troff', a
"word" is any sequence of one or more characters that aren't spaces or
newlines.  The exceptions separate words.(2)  (see Filling-Footnote-2)
To disable filling, see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.

     It is a truth universally acknowledged
     that a single man in possession of a
     good fortune must be in want of a wife.
         => It is a truth universally acknowledged that a
         => single man in possession of a good fortune must
         => be in want of a wife.

   (1) See Device and Font Description Files.

   (2) Tabs and leaders also separate words.  Escape sequences can
function as word characters, word separators, or neither--the last
simply have no effect on GNU 'troff''s idea of whether an input
character is within a word.  We'll discuss all of these in due course.

5.1.2 Sentences
---------------

A passionate debate has raged for decades among writers of the English
language over whether more space should appear between adjacent
sentences than between words within a sentence, and if so, how much, and
what other circumstances should influence this spacing.(1)  (see
Sentences-Footnote-1) GNU 'troff' follows the example of AT&T 'troff';
it attempts to detect the boundaries between sentences, and supplements
them with inter-sentence space.

     Hello, world!
     Welcome to groff.
         => Hello, world!  Welcome to groff.

   GNU 'troff' flags certain characters (normally '!', '?', and '.') as
potentially ending a sentence.  When GNU 'troff' encounters one of these
"end-of-sentence characters" at the end of an input line, or one of them
is followed by two (unescaped) spaces on the same input line, it appends
an inter-word space followed by an inter-sentence space in the output.

     R. Harper subscribes to a maxim of P. T. Barnum.
         => R. Harper subscribes to a maxim of P. T. Barnum.

   In the above example, inter-sentence space is not added after 'P.' or
'T.' because the periods do not occur at the end of an input line, nor
are they followed by two or more spaces.  Let's imagine that we've heard
something about defamation from Mr. Harper's attorney, recast the
sentence, and reflowed it in our text editor.

     I submit that R. Harper subscribes to a maxim of P. T.
     Barnum.
         => I submit that R. Harper subscribes to a maxim of
         => P. T.  Barnum.

   "Barnum" doesn't begin a sentence!  What to do?  Let us meet our
first "escape sequence", a series of input characters that give
instructions to GNU 'troff' instead of being used to construct output
device glyphs.(2)  (see Sentences-Footnote-2) An escape sequence begins
with the backslash character '\' by default, an uncommon character in
natural language text, and is _always_ followed by at least one other
character, hence the term "sequence".

   The dummy character escape sequence '\&' can be used after an
end-of-sentence character to defeat end-of-sentence detection on a
per-instance basis.  We can therefore rewrite our input more
defensively.

     I submit that R.\& Harper subscribes to a maxim of P.\&
     T.\& Barnum.
         => I submit that R. Harper subscribes to a maxim of
         => P. T. Barnum.

   Adding text caused our input to wrap; now, we don't need '\&' after
'T.' but we do after 'P.'.  Consistent use of the escape sequence
ensures that potential sentence boundaries are robust to editing
activities.  Further advice along these lines follows in Input
Conventions.

   Normally, the occurrence of a visible non-end-of-sentence character
(as opposed to a space or tab) immediately after an end-of-sentence
character cancels detection of the end of a sentence.  For example, it
would be incorrect for the formatter to infer the end of a sentence
after the dot in '3.14159'.  However, it treats several characters
_transparently_ after the occurrence of an end-of-sentence character--it
does not cancel end-of-sentence status upon encountering them.  Such
characters are often used as footnote marks or to close quotations and
parentheticals.  The default set is '"', ''', ')', ']', '*', '\[dg]',
'\[dd]', '\[rq]', and '\[cq]'.  The last four are examples of "special
characters", escape sequences whose purpose is to obtain glyphs that are
not easily typed at the keyboard, or which have special meaning to the
formatter (like '\' itself).(3)  (see Sentences-Footnote-3)

     \[lq]The idea that the poor should have leisure has always
     been shocking to the rich.\[rq]
     (Bertrand Russell, 1935)
         => "The idea that the poor should have
         => leisure has always been shocking to
         => the rich."  (Bertrand Russell, 1935)

   Configure the sets of characters that potentially end sentences or
are transparent to sentence endings with the 'cflags' request (see
Characters and Glyphs).  Use the 'ss' request to change--or
eliminate--supplemental inter-sentence space (see Manipulating Filling
and Adjustment).

   (1) A well-researched jeremiad appreciated by 'groff' contributors on
both sides of the sentence-spacing debate can be found at
<https://web.archive.org/web/20171217060354/http://www.heracliteanriver.com/?p=324>.

   (2) This statement oversimplifies; there are escape sequences whose
purpose is precisely to produce glyphs on the output device, and input
characters that _aren't_ part of escape sequences can undergo a great
deal of processing before getting to the output.

   (3) The mnemonics for the special characters shown here are "dagger",
"double dagger", "right (double) quote", and "closing (single) quote".
See 'groff_char(7)'.

5.1.3 Hyphenation
-----------------

When an output line is nearly full, it is uncommon for the next word
collected from the input to exactly fill it--often, there is room left
over for only part of the next word.  "Hyphenation" is the process of
splitting a word so that it appears partially on one line, followed by a
hyphen to indicate to the reader that the word has been broken, and that
its remainder lies on the next.  Hyphenation break points can be
manually specified; GNU 'troff' also uses a hyphenation algorithm and
language-specific pattern files (based on TeX's) to decide which words
can be hyphenated and where.

   Hyphenation does not always occur even when the hyphenation rules for
a word allow it; it can be disabled, and when not disabled there are
several parameters that can prevent it in certain circumstances.  See
Manipulating Hyphenation.

5.1.4 Breaking
--------------

Once an output line is full, the formatter places the next word (or
remainder of a hyphenated one) on a different output line; this is
called a "break".  In this manual and in 'roff' discussions generally, a
"break" if not further qualified always refers to the termination of an
output line.  When the formatter is filling text, it introduces breaks
automatically to keep output lines from exceeding the configured line
length.  After an automatic break, the formatter adjusts the line if
applicable (see below), and then resumes collecting and filling text on
the next output line.

   Sometimes, a line cannot be broken automatically.  This usually does
not happen with natural language text unless the output line length has
been manipulated to be extremely short, but it can with specialized text
like program source code.  We can use 'perl' at the shell prompt to
contrive an example of failure to break the line.  We also employ the
'-z' option to suppress normal output.

     $ perl -e 'print "#" x 80, "\n";' | nroff -z
         error-> cannot adjust line; overset by 15n

   The remedy for these cases is to tell GNU 'troff' where the line may
be broken without hyphens.  This is done with the non-printing break
point escape sequence '\:'; see Manipulating Hyphenation.

   What if the document author wants to stop filling lines temporarily,
for instance to start a new paragraph?  There are several solutions.  A
blank input line not only causes a break, but by default it also outputs
a one-line vertical space (effectively a blank output line).  This
behavior can be modified; see Blank Line Traps.  Macro packages may
discourage or disable the blank line method of paragraphing in favor of
their own macros.

   A line that begins with one or more spaces causes a break.  The
spaces are output at the beginning of the next line without being
_adjusted_ (see below); however, this behavior can be modified (see
Leading Space Traps).  Again, macro packages may provide other methods
of producing indented paragraphs.  Trailing spaces on text lines are
discarded.(1)  (see Breaking-Footnote-1)

   What if the file ends before enough words have been collected to fill
an output line?  Or the output line is exactly full but not yet broken,
and there is no more input?  The formatter breaks the pending output
line without adjustment upon encountering the end of input.  Certain
requests also cause breaks, implicitly or explicitly.  This is discussed
in Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.

   (1) See text lines.  AT&T 'troff' also cancels end-of-sentence
detection.

5.1.5 Adjustment
----------------

After performing an automatic break, the formatter may then "adjust" the
line, widening inter-word spaces until the text reaches the right
margin.  Extra spaces between words are preserved.  Leading and trailing
spaces are handled as noted above.  You can align text to the left or
right margin only, or center it; see Manipulating Filling and
Adjustment.

5.1.6 Tabs and Leaders
----------------------

The formatter translates input horizontal tab characters ("tabs") and
<Control+A> characters ("leaders") into movements to the next tab stop.
Tabs simply move to the next tab stop; leaders place enough periods to
fill the space.  Tab stops are by default located every half inch
measured from the drawing position corresponding to the beginning of the
input line; see Page Geometry.  Tabs and leaders do not cause breaks and
therefore do not interrupt filling.  Below, we use arrows -> and bullets
* to indicate input tabs and leaders, respectively.

     A->B->C*D->*E
     .br
     1
     ->2->3*4
     ->*5
         => A       B       C.......D       ........E
         => 1         2       3.......4         ........5

   Tabs and leaders lend themselves to table construction.(1)  (see Tabs
and Leaders-Footnote-1) The tab and leader fill characters can be
configured, and further facilities for sophisticated table composition
are available; see Tabs and Fields.  There are many details to track
when using such low-level features, so most users turn to the 'tbl(1)'
preprocessor to lay out tables.

   (1) "Tab" abbreviates "tabulation", suggesting a table arrangement
mechanism.

5.1.7 Requests and Macros
-------------------------

We have now encountered almost all of the syntax there is in the 'roff'
language, with an exception already noted in passing.(1)  (see Requests
and Macros-Footnote-1) A "request" is an instruction to the formatter
that occurs after a "control character", which is recognized at the
beginning of an input line.  The regular control character is a dot
('.').  Its counterpart, the "no-break control character", a neutral
apostrophe ('''), suppresses the break that is implied by some requests.
These characters were chosen because it is uncommon for lines of text in
natural languages to begin with them.  If you require a formatted period
or apostrophe (closing single quotation mark) where the formatter
expects a control character, prefix the dot or neutral apostrophe with
the dummy character escape sequence, '\&'.

   An input line beginning with a control character is called a "control
line".  Every line of input that is not a control line is a "text
line".(2)  (see Requests and Macros-Footnote-2)

   Requests often take "arguments", words (separated from the request
name and each other by spaces) that specify details of the action you
expect the formatter to perform.  If a request is meaningless without
arguments, it is typically ignored.

   Requests and escape sequences comprise the control language of the
formatter.  Of key importance are the requests that define macros.
Macros are invoked like requests, enabling the request repertoire to be
extended or overridden.(3)  (see Requests and Macros-Footnote-3)

   A "macro" can be thought of as an abbreviation you can define for a
collection of control and text lines.  When a document "calls" a macro
by placing its name after a control character, the formatter replaces
the control line with the macro's definition.  The process of textual
replacement is known as "interpolation".(4)  (see Requests and
Macros-Footnote-4) Interpolations are handled as soon as they are
recognized, and once performed, the formatter scans the replacement for
further requests, macro calls, and escape sequences.

   In 'roff' systems, the 'de' request defines a macro.(5)  (see
Requests and Macros-Footnote-5)

     .de DATE
     2020-11-14
     ..

The foregoing input produces no output by itself; all we have done is
store information in a macro named 'DATE'.  Observe the pair of dots
that ends the macro definition.  This is a default; you can specify your
own terminator for the macro definition as the second argument to the
'de' request.

     .de NAME ENDNAME
     Heywood Jabuzzoff
     .ENDNAME

   In fact, the ending mark is itself the name of a macro to be called,
or a request to be invoked, if it is defined at the time its control
line is read.

     .de END
     Big Rip
     ..
     .de START END
     Big Bang
     .END
     .START
         => Big Rip Big Bang

In the foregoing example, "Big Rip" printed before "Big Bang" because
its macro was _called_ first.  Consider what would happen if we dropped
'END' from the '.de START' line and added '..' after '.END'.  Would the
order change?

   Let us consider a more elaborate example.

     .de DATE
     2020-10-05
     ..
     .
     .de BOSS
     D.\& Kruger,
     J.\& Peterman
     ..
     .
     .de NOTICE
     Approved:
     .DATE
     by
     .BOSS
     ..
     .
     Insert tedious regulatory compliance paragraph here.

     .NOTICE

     Insert tedious liability disclaimer paragraph here.

     .NOTICE
         => Insert tedious regulatory compliance paragraph here.
         =>
         => Approved: 2020-10-05 by D. Kruger, J. Peterman
         =>
         => Insert tedious liability disclaimer paragraph here.
         =>
         => Approved: 2020-10-05 by D. Kruger, J. Peterman

The above document started with a series of control lines.  Three macros
were defined, with a 'de' request declaring each macro's name, and the
"body" of the macro starting on the next line and continuing until a
line with two dots ''..'' marked its end.  The text proper began only
after the macros were defined; this is a common pattern.  Only the
'NOTICE' macro was called "directly" by the document; 'DATE' and 'BOSS'
were called only by 'NOTICE' itself.  Escape sequences were used in
'BOSS', two levels of macro interpolation deep.

   The advantage in typing and maintenance economy may not be obvious
from such a short example, but imagine a much longer document with
dozens of such paragraphs, each requiring a notice of managerial
approval.  Consider what must happen if you are in charge of generating
a new version of such a document with a different date, for a different
boss.  With well-chosen macros, you only have to change each datum in
one place.

   In practice, we would probably use strings (see Strings) instead of
macros for such simple interpolations; what is important here is to
glimpse the potential of macros and the power of recursive
interpolation.

   We could have defined our 'DATE' and 'BOSS' macros in the opposite
order; perhaps less obviously, we could also have defined them _after_
'NOTICE'.  Such "forward references" are well-defined because the body
of a macro definition is, for the most part, stored rather than
interpreted (see Copy Mode).  While a macro is being defined (or
appended to), requests are not interpreted and macros not interpolated;
some commonly used escape sequences _are_ however interpreted.  'roff'
systems also support recursive macro calls, as long as you have a way to
break the recursion (see Conditionals and Loops).  Maintainable 'roff'
documents tend to arrange macro definitions to minimize forward
references.

   (1) The backspace character is also meaningful; see Page Motions.

   (2) The '\<RET>' escape sequence can alter how an input line is
classified; see Line Continuation.

   (3) Argument handling in macros is more flexible but also more
complex.  See Calling Macros.

   (4) Some escape sequences undergo interpolation as well.

   (5) GNU 'troff' offers additional ones.  See Writing Macros.

5.1.8 Macro Packages
--------------------

Macro definitions can be collected into "macro files", 'roff' input
files designed to produce no output themselves but instead ease the
preparation of other 'roff' documents.  There is no syntactical
difference between a macro file and any other 'roff' document; only its
purpose distinguishes it.  When a macro file is installed at a standard
location and suitable for use by a general audience, it is often termed
a "macro package".(1)  (see Macro Packages-Footnote-1) Macro packages
can be loaded by supplying the '-m' option to GNU 'troff' or a 'groff'
front end.  Alternatively, a document requiring a macro package can load
it with the 'mso' ("macro source") request.

   (1) Macro files and packages frequently define registers and strings
as well.

5.1.9 Input Format
------------------

Organize input to GNU 'troff' into lines separated by the Unix newline
character ('U+000A'), using the character encoding it recognizes:
ISO Latin-1 (8859-1).  A document encoded in ISO 646:1991 IRV
(US-ASCII), or, equivalently, uses only code points from the "C0
Controls" and "Basic Latin" parts of the Unicode character set is also a
valid ISO Latin-1 document; the standards are interchangeable in their
first 128 code points.(1)  (see Input Format-Footnote-1)

   Some control characters (from the sets "C0 Controls" and "C1
Controls" as Unicode describes them) are invalid as input characters.
GNU 'troff' discards them upon reading.(2)  (see Input
Format-Footnote-2) It processes a character sequence "foo", followed by
an invalid character and then "bar", as "foobar".

   Invalid input characters comprise '0x00', '0x0B', '0x0D'-'0x1F', and
'0x80'-'0x9F'.(3)  (see Input Format-Footnote-3) GNU 'troff' uses some
of these code points for internal purposes, making non-trivial the
extension of the program to accept UTF-8 or other encodings that use
characters from these ranges.

   (1) The _semantics_ of certain punctuation code points have gotten
stricter with the successive standards, a cause of some frustration
among man page writers; see 'groff_char(7)'.

   (2) It also emits a warning in category 'input'.  See Warnings.

   (3) Historically, control characters like ASCII 'STX', 'ETX', and
'BEL' (<Control+B>, <Control+C>, and <Control+G>, respectively) have
been observed in 'roff' documents, particularly in macro packages
employing them as delimiters with the output comparison operator to try
to avoid collisions with the content of arbitrary user-supplied
parameters (see Operators in Conditionals).  We discourage this
expedient; in GNU 'troff' it is unnecessary (outside of compatibility
mode) because the program parses delimited arguments at a different
input level than their surrounding context.  See Implementation
Differences.

5.1.10 Input Encodings
----------------------

Recall from Groff Options, that the 'groff' command's '-k' option runs
the 'preconv' preprocessor to perform input character encoding
conversions to satisfy GNU 'troff''s requirement of a single-byte
encoding compatible with ISO 646:1991 IRV (US-ASCII).

   Localization influences automatic hyphenation in two distinct but
related respects.  A macro file specific to a character coding
identifies which character codes correspond to letters expected in the
language's hyphenation pattern files and sets up case equivalences for
those letters.  A language's macro file determines which of these
letters are equivalent to other letters for hyphenation purposes.

   For example, in English, the letter 'ñ' occurs in loan words.  The
'latin1.tmac' and 'latin9.tmac' macro files define a hyphenation code
for 'ñ' and make 'Ñ' equivalent to it.  The English localization file
'en.tmac' furthermore makes 'ñ' equivalent to 'n'.  In Spanish
('es.tmac'), however, 'ñ' and 'n' are _not_ equivalent.  The language
localization file (see Manipulating Hyphenation) loads an appropriate
encoding localization file; a document need not do so directly.

'koi8-r'
     To use KOI8-R, an encoding for the Russian language, either place
     '.mso koi8-r.tmac' at the very beginning of your document or supply
     '-m koi8-r' as a command-line argument to 'groff'.  The 'ru.tmac'
     localization file loads 'koi8-r.tmac' automatically.(1)  (see Input
     Encodings-Footnote-1)

'latin1'
     ISO Latin-1 is an encoding for Western European languages.  The
     'de.tmac', 'en.tmac', 'it.tmac', and 'sv.tmac' localization files
     load 'latin1.tmac' automatically.

'latin2'
     To use ISO Latin-2, an encoding for Central and Eastern European
     languages, invoke '.mso latin2.tmac' at the beginning of your
     document or supply '-m latin2' as a command-line argument to
     'groff'.  The 'cs.tmac' and 'pl.tmac' localization files load
     'latin2.tmac' automatically.

'latin5'
     To use ISO Latin-5, an encoding for the Turkish language, invoke
     '.mso latin5.tmac' at the beginning of your document or supply '-m
     latin5' as a command-line argument to 'groff'.

'latin9'
     ISO Latin-9 succeeds Latin-1; it includes a Euro sign and better
     coverage for French.  To use this encoding, invoke
     '.mso latin9.tmac' at the beginning of your document or supply '-m
     latin9' as a command-line argument to 'groff'.  The 'es.tmac' and
     'fr.tmac' localization files load 'latin9.tmac' automatically.

   Some characters from an input encoding may not be available with a
particular output driver, or their glyphs may not have representation in
the font used.  For terminal devices, fallbacks are defined, like 'EUR'
for the Euro sign and '(C)' for the copyright sign.  For typesetter
devices, you may need to "mount" fonts that support glyphs required by
the document.  See Font Positions.

   Because a Euro glyph was not historically defined in PostScript
fonts, 'groff' comes with a font called 'freeeuro.pfa' that provides the
Euro in several styles.  Standard PostScript fonts contain the glyphs
from Latin-5 and Latin-9 that Latin-1 lacks, so these encodings are
supported for the 'ps' and 'pdf' output devices as 'groff' ships, while
Latin-2 is not.

   Unicode supports characters from all other input encodings; the
'utf8' output driver for terminals therefore does as well.  The DVI
output driver supports the Latin-2 and Latin-9 encodings if the
command-line option ''-m ec'' is used as well.  (2)  (see Input
Encodings-Footnote-2)

   (1) KOI8-R code points in the range '0x80'-'0x9F' are not valid input
to GNU 'troff'; recall Input Format.  This restriction should be no
impediment to practical documents, as these KOI8-R code points do not
encode letters, but box-drawing symbols and characters that are better
obtained via special character escape sequences; see 'groff_char(7)'.

   (2) The DVI output device defaults to using the Computer Modern (CM)
fonts; 'ec.tmac' loads the EC fonts instead, which provide Euro '\[Eu]'
and per mille '\[%0]' glyphs.

5.1.11 Input Conventions
------------------------

Since a 'roff' formatter fills text automatically, its experienced users
tend to avoid visual composition of text in input files: the esthetic
appeal of the formatted output is what matters.  Therefore, 'roff' input
should be arranged such that it is easy for authors and maintainers to
compose and develop the document, understand the syntax of 'roff'
requests, macro calls, and preprocessor languages used, and predict the
behavior of the formatter.  Several traditions have accrued in service
of these goals.

   * Follow sentence endings in the input with newlines to ease their
     recognition (see Sentences).  It is frequently convenient to end
     text lines after colons and semicolons as well, as these typically
     precede independent clauses.  Consider doing so after commas; they
     often occur in lists that become easy to scan when itemized by
     line, or constitute supplements to the sentence that are added,
     deleted, or updated to clarify it.  Parenthetical and quoted
     phrases are also good candidates for placement on text lines by
     themselves.

   * Set your text editor's line length to 72 characters or fewer.(1)
     (see Input Conventions-Footnote-1) This limit, combined with the
     previous item of advice, makes it less common that an input line
     will wrap in your text editor, and thus will help you perceive
     excessively long constructions in your text.  Recall that natural
     languages originate in speech, not writing, and that punctuation is
     correlated with pauses for breathing and changes in prosody.

   * Use '\&' after '!', '?', and '.' if they are followed by space or
     newline characters and don't end a sentence.

   * In filled text lines, use '\&' before '.' and ''' if they are
     preceded by space, so that revisions to the input don't turn them
     into control lines.

   * Do not use spaces to perform indentation or align columns of a
     table.  Leading spaces are reliable when text is not being filled.
     (Exception: when laying out a table with GNU 'tbl', specifying the
     'nospaces' region option causes the program to ignore spaces at the
     boundaries of table cells.)

   * Comment your document.  It is never too soon to apply comments to
     record information of use to future document maintainers (including
     your future self).  We thus introduce another escape sequence,
     '\"', which causes the formatter to ignore the remainder of the
     input line.

   * Use the empty request--a control character followed immediately by
     a newline--to visually manage separation of material in input
     files.  Many of the 'groff' project's own documents use an empty
     request between sentences, after macro definitions, and where a
     break is expected, and two empty requests between paragraphs or
     other requests or macro calls that will introduce vertical space
     into the document.

     You can combine the empty request with the comment escape sequence
     to include whole-line comments in your document, and even "comment
     out" sections of it.

   We conclude this section with an example sufficiently long to
illustrate most of the above suggestions in practice.  For the purpose
of fitting the example between the margins of this manual with the font
used for its typeset version, we have shortened the input line length to
56 columns.  As before, an arrow -> indicates a tab character.

     .\"   nroff this_file.roff | less
     .\"   groff -T ps this_file.roff > this_file.ps
     ->The theory of relativity is intimately connected with
     the theory of space and time.
     .
     I shall therefore begin with a brief investigation of
     the origin of our ideas of space and time,
     although in doing so I know that I introduce a
     controversial subject.  \" remainder of paragraph elided
     .
     .

     ->The experiences of an individual appear to us arranged
     in a series of events;
     in this series the single events which we remember
     appear to be ordered according to the criterion of
     \[lq]earlier\[rq] and \[lq]later\[rq], \" punct swapped
     which cannot be analysed further.
     .
     There exists,
     therefore,
     for the individual,
     an I-time,
     or subjective time.
     .
     This itself is not measurable.
     .
     I can,
     indeed,
     associate numbers with the events,
     in such a way that the greater number is associated with
     the later event than with an earlier one;
     but the nature of this association may be quite
     arbitrary.
     .
     This association I can define by means of a clock by
     comparing the order of events furnished by the clock
     with the order of a given series of events.
     .
     We understand by a clock something which provides a
     series of events which can be counted,
     and which has other properties of which we shall speak
     later.
     .\" Albert Einstein, _The Meaning of Relativity_, 1922

   (1) Emacs: 'fill-column: 72'; Vim: 'textwidth=72'

5.2 Page Geometry
=================

'roff' systems format text under certain assumptions about the size of
the output medium, or page.  For the formatter to correctly break a line
it is filling, it must know the line length, which it derives from the
page width (see Line Layout).  For it to decide whether to write an
output line to the current page or wait until the next one, it must know
the page length (see Page Layout).

   A device's "resolution" converts practical units like inches or
centimeters to "basic units", a convenient length measure for the output
device or file format.  The formatter and output driver use basic units
to reckon page measurements.  The device description file defines its
resolution and page dimensions (see DESC File Format).

   A "page" is a two-dimensional structure upon which a 'roff' system
imposes a rectangular coordinate system with its origin near the upper
left corner.  Coordinate values are in basic units and increase down and
to the right.  Useful ones are typically positive and within numeric
ranges corresponding to the page boundaries.

   Text is arranged on a one-dimensional lattice of text baselines from
the top to the bottom of the page.  A "text baseline" is a (usually
invisible) line upon which the glyphs of a typeface are aligned.
"Vertical spacing" is the distance between adjacent text baselines.
Typographic tradition sets this quantity to 120% of the type size.
Typographers term this unit a vee.

   While the formatter (and, later, output driver) is processing a page,
it keeps track of its "drawing position", which is the location at which
the next glyph will be written, from which the next motion will be
measured, or where a geometric object will commence rendering.
Notionally, glyphs are drawn from the text baseline upward and to the
right.(1)  (see Page Geometry-Footnote-1) A glyph therefore "starts" at
its bottom-left corner.  The formatter's origin is one vee below the
page top to prevent a glyph from lying partially or wholly off the page.

   Further, it is conventional not to write or draw at the extreme edges
of the page.  Typesetters configure a "page offset", a rightward shift
from the left edge that defines the zero point from which the formatter
reckons the line indentation and length.(2)  (see Page
Geometry-Footnote-2)

   Combining the foregoing facts results in an origin that lies at the
page offset in the horizontal dimension and at the text baseline (using
the default vertical spacing) in the vertical dimension.  A document can
change these prior to its first written or drawn output; see Line Layout
and Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.

   Vertical spacing has an impact on page-breaking decisions.
Generally, when a break occurs, the formatter automatically moves the
drawing position to the next text baseline.  If the formatter were
already writing to the last line that fits on the page, advancing by one
vee would place the next text baseline off the page.  To avoid that,
'roff' formatters instruct the output driver to eject the page, start a
new one, and again place the drawing position at the page offset one vee
below the page top; this is a "page break".

   When the last line of input text corresponds to the last output line
that fits on the page, the break caused by the end of input also breaks
the page, producing a useless blank one.  Macro packages keep users from
having to confront this difficulty by setting "traps" (see Traps);
moreover, all but the simplest page layouts tend to have headers and
footers, or at least bear vertical margins of at least one vee.

   (1) 'groff' does not yet support right-to-left scripts.

   (2) 'groff''s terminal output devices have page offsets of zero.

5.3 Measurements
================

A 'roff' document sometimes requires the input of numeric parameters to
specify measurements.  Express them as integers or decimal fractions
with an optional scaling unit suffixed.  A "scaling unit" is a letter
that immediately follows the magnitude of a measurement.  Digits after
the decimal point are optional.  Examples of measurements include
'10.5p', '11i', '.5f', and '3.c'.

   The formatter scales measurements by the specified scaling unit,
storing them internally (with any fractional part discarded) in basic
units.  The device resolution can therefore be obtained by storing a
value of '1i' to a register, then reading the register.

'u'
     Basic unit; it is at least as small as any other unit.

'i'
     Inch; defined as 2.54 centimeters.

'c'
     Centimeter; a centimeter is about 0.3937 inches.

'p'
     Point; a typesetter's unit used for measuring type size.  There are
     72 points to an inch.

'P'
     Pica; another typesetter's unit.  There are 6 picas to an inch and
     12 points to a pica.

's'
     Scaled point; see Using Fractional Type Sizes.

'z'
     Typographical point; like 'p', but used only with type sizes, to
     overcome a limitation of AT&T 'troff'; see Using Fractional Type
     Sizes.

'f'
     GNU 'troff' defines this unit to scale decimal fractions in the
     interval [0, 1] to 16-bit unsigned integers.  It multiplies a
     quantity by 65,536.  See Colors, for usage.

   The magnitudes of other scaling units depend on the text formatting
parameters in effect.  These are useful when specifying measurements
that need to scale with the typeface or vertical spacing.

'm'
     Em; an em is equal to the current type size in points.  It is named
     thus because it is approximately the width of the letter 'M'.

'n'
     En; on typesetters, an en is one-half em, but on terminals an en
     equals an em, because they align all text to a grid of character
     cells.

'v'
     Vee; recall Page Geometry.

'M'
     Hundredth of an em.

5.3.1 Motion Quanta
-------------------

The basic unit 'u' is not necessarily an output device's smallest
addressable length; 'u' can be smaller to avoid integer rounding errors.
The minimum distances that a device can work with in the horizontal and
vertical directions are termed its "motion quanta".  The formatter
rounds measurements to applicable motion quanta.  Half-quantum fractions
round toward zero.

 -- Register: \n[.H]
 -- Register: \n[.V]
     These read-only registers interpolate the horizontal and vertical
     motion quantum, respectively, of the output device in basic units.

   For example, we might draw short baseline rules on a terminal device
as follows.  See Drawing Geometric Objects.

     .tm \n[.H]
         error-> 24
     .nf
     \l'36u' 36u
     \l'37u' 37u
         => _ 36u
         => __ 37u

5.3.2 Default Units
-------------------

A general-purpose register (one created or updated with the 'nr'
request(1) (see Default Units-Footnote-1)) is implicitly dimensionless,
or reckoned in basic units if interpreted in a measurement context.  But
it is convenient for many requests and escape sequences to infer a
scaling unit for an argument if none is specified.  An explicit scaling
unit (not after a closing parenthesis) can override an undesirable
default.  Effectively, the default unit is suffixed to the expression if
a scaling unit is not already present.  GNU 'troff''s use of integer
arithmetic should also be kept in mind.(2)  (see Default
Units-Footnote-2)

   The 'll' request interprets its argument in ems by default.  Consider
several attempts to set a line length of 3.5 inches when the type size
is 10 points on a terminal device with a resolution of 240 basic units
and horizontal motion quantum of 24.  Some expressions become zero; the
request clamps them to that quantum.

     .ll 3.5i      \" 3.5i (= 840u)
     .ll 7/2       \" 7u/2u -> 3u -> 3m -> 0, clamped to 24u
     .ll (7 / 2)u  \" 7u/2u -> as above
     .ll 7/2i      \" 7u/2i -> 7u/480u -> 0 -> as above
     .ll 7i/2      \" 7i/2u -> 1680u/2m -> 1680u/24u -> 35u
     .ll 7i/2u     \" 3.5i (= 840u)

The safest way to specify measurements is to attach a scaling unit.  To
multiply or divide by a dimensionless quantity, use 'u' as its scaling
unit.

   (1) See Registers.

   (2) See Numeric Expressions.

5.4 Numeric Expressions
=======================

When evaluated, a "numeric expression" interpolates an integer: it can
be as simple as a literal '0' or it can be a complex sequence of
register and string interpolations interleaved with measurements and
operators.

   GNU 'troff' provides a set of mathematical and logical operators
familiar to programmers--as well as some unusual ones--but supports only
integer arithmetic.(1)  (see Numeric Expressions-Footnote-1) The
internal data type used for computing results depends on the host
machine but is at least a 32-bit signed integer, which suffices to
represent magnitudes within a range of ±2 billion.(2)  (see Numeric
Expressions-Footnote-2) Arithmetic saturates.(3)  (see Numeric
Expressions-Footnote-3)

   Arithmetic infix operators perform a function on the numeric
expressions to their left and right; they are '+' (addition), '-'
(subtraction), '*' (multiplication), '/' (truncating division), and '%'
(modulus).  "Truncating division" rounds to the integer nearer to zero,
no matter how large the fractional portion.  Division and modulus by
zero are errors and abort evaluation of a numeric expression.

   Arithmetic unary operators operate on the numeric expression to their
right; they are '-' (negation) and '+' (assertion--for completeness; it
does nothing).  The unary minus must often be used with parentheses to
avoid confusion with the decrementation operator, discussed below.

   Observe the rounding behavior and effect of negative operands on the
modulus and truncating division operators.

     .nr T 199/100
     .nr U 5/2
     .nr V (-5)/2
     .nr W 5/-2
     .nr X 5%2
     .nr Y (-5)%2
     .nr Z 5%-2
     T=\n[T] U=\n[U] V=\n[V] W=\n[W] X=\n[X] Y=\n[Y] Z=\n[Z]
         => T=1 U=2 V=-2 W=-2 X=1 Y=-1 Z=1

The sign of the modulus of operands of mixed signs is determined by the
sign of the first.  Division and modulus operators satisfy the following
property: given a dividend A and a divisor B, a quotient Q formed by '(a
/ b)' and a remainder R by '(a % b)', then qb + r = a.

   GNU 'troff''s scaling operator, used with parentheses as '(C;E)',
evaluates a numeric expression E using C as the default scaling unit.
If C is omitted, scaling units are ignored in the evaluation of E.  This
operator can save typing by avoiding the attachment of scaling units to
every operand out of caution.  Your macros can select a sensible default
unit in case the user neglects to supply one.

     .\" Indent by amount given in first argument; assume ens.
     .de Indent
     .  in (n;\\$1)
     ..

Without the scaling operator, the foregoing macro would, if called with
a unitless argument, cause indentation by the 'in' request's default
scaling unit (ems).  The result would be twice as much indentation as
expected.

   GNU 'troff' also provides a pair of operators to compute the extrema
of two operands: '>?' (maximum) and '<?' (minimum).

     .nr slots 5
     .nr candidates 3
     .nr salaries (\n[slots] <? \n[candidates])
     Looks like we'll end up paying \n[salaries] salaries.
         => Looks like we'll end up paying 3 salaries.

   Comparison operators comprise '<' (less than), '>' (greater than),
'<=' (less than or equal), '>=' (greater than or equal), and '=' (equal,
with synonym '==').  When evaluating a comparison, the formatter
replaces it with '0' if it is false and '1' if true.  In the 'roff'
language, positive values are true, others false.

   We can operate on truth values with the logical operators '&'
(logical conjunction or "and") and ':' (logical disjunction or "or").
They evaluate as comparison operators do.

   A logical complementation ("not") operator, '!', works only within
'if', 'ie', and 'while' requests.  Furthermore, the formatter recognizes
'!' only at the beginning of a numeric expression not contained by
another numeric expression.  In other words, '!' must be the "outermost"
operator.  Its presence elsewhere causes the expression to evaluate
false.(4)  (see Numeric Expressions-Footnote-4) This unfortunate
limitation maintains compatibility with AT&T 'troff'.  Test a numeric
expression for falsity within a complex expression by comparing it to a
false value.(5)  (see Numeric Expressions-Footnote-5)

     .nr X 1
     .nr Y 0
     .\" This does not work as expected.
     .if (\n[X])&(!\n[Y]) .nop A: X is true, Y is false
     .
     .\" Use this construct instead.
     .if (\n[X])&(\n[Y]<=0) .nop B: X is true, Y is false
         error-> warning: expected numeric expression, got '!'
         => B: X is true, Y is false

   The 'roff' language has no operator precedence: expressions are
evaluated strictly from left to right, in contrast to schoolhouse
arithmetic.  Use parentheses '(' ')' to impose a desired precedence upon
subexpressions.

     .nr X 3+5*4
     .nr Y (3+5)*4
     .nr Z 3+(5*4)
     X=\n[X] Y=\n[Y] Z=\n[Z]
         => X=32 Y=32 Z=23

   For many requests and escape sequences that cause motion on the page,
the unary operators '+' and '-' work differently when leading a numeric
expression.  They then indicate a motion relative to the drawing
position: positive is down in vertical contexts, right in horizontal
ones.

   '+' and '-' are also treated differently by the following requests
and escape sequences: 'bp', 'in', 'll', 'lt', 'nm', 'nr', 'pl', 'pn',
'po', 'ps', 'pvs', 'rt', 'ti', '\H', '\R', and '\s'.  Here, leading plus
and minus signs serve as incrementation and decrementation operators,
respectively.  To negate an expression in these contexts, subtract it
from zero or include the unary minus in parentheses with its argument.
See Setting Registers, for examples.

   A leading '|' operator indicates a measurement relative not to the
drawing position but to a boundary.  For horizontal motions, the
boundary is the drawing position corresponding to the beginning of the
_input_ line.  By default, tab stops reckon movements in this way.  Most
escape sequences do not; '|' tells them to do so.

     Mind the \h'1.2i'gap.
     .br
     Mind the \h'|1.2i'gap.
     .br
     Mind the
     \h'|1.2i'gap.
         => Mind the             gap.
         => Mind the    gap.
         => Mind the             gap.

   One use of this feature is to define macros whose scope is limited to
the output they format.

     .\" underline word $1 with trailing punctuation $2
     .de Underline
     .  nop \\$1\l'|0\[ul]'\\$2
     ..
     Typographical emphasis is best used
     .Underline sparingly .

In the above example, '|0' specifies a negative motion from the current
position (at the end of the argument just emitted, '\$1') to the
beginning of the input line.  Thus, the '\l' escape sequence in this
case draws a line from right to left.  A macro call occurs at the
beginning of an input line;(6) (see Numeric Expressions-Footnote-6) if
the '|' operator were omitted, then the underline would be drawn at zero
distance from the current position, producing device-dependent, and
likely undesirable, results.  On the 'ps' output device, it underlines
the period.

   For vertical motions, the '|' operator specifies a distance from the
first text baseline on the page or in the current diversion.(7)  (see
Numeric Expressions-Footnote-7)

     A
     .br
     B \Z'C'\v'|0'D
         => A D
         => B C

   In the foregoing example, we've used the '\Z' escape sequence (see
Page Motions) to restore the drawing position after formatting 'C', then
moved vertically to the first text baseline on the page.

 -- Escape sequence: \B'input'
     Interpolate 1 if INPUT is a valid numeric expression, and 0
     otherwise.  The delimiter need not be a neutral apostrophe; see
     Delimiters.

   You might use '\B' along with the 'if' request to filter out invalid
macro or string arguments.  See Conditionals and Loops.

     .\" Indent by amount given in first argument; assume ens.
     .de Indent
     .  if \B'\\$1' .in (n;\\$1)
     .  el          .tm \\$0: invalid number '\\$1'
     ..

   A register interpolated as an operand in a numeric expression must
have an Arabic format; luckily, this is the default.  See Assigning
Register Formats.

   Because spaces separate arguments to requests, spaces are not allowed
in numeric expressions unless parentheses surround the (sub)expression
containing them.  See Invoking Requests, and Conditionals and Loops.

     .nf
     .nr a 1+2 + 2+1
     \na
         error-> expected numeric expression, got a space
         => 3
     .nr a 1+(2 + 2)+1
     \na
         => 6

   The 'nr' request (see Setting Registers) expects its second and
optional third arguments to be numeric expressions; a bare '+' does not
qualify, so our first attempt elicited an error diagnostic.

   (1) Provision is made for interpreting and reporting decimal
fractions in certain cases.

   (2) If that's not enough, see the 'groff_tmac(5)' man page for the
'62bit.tmac' macro package.

   (3) If overflow would occur, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category
'range'.  See Warnings.

   (4) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'number'.  See Warnings.

   (5) See Conditionals and Loops.

   (6) Control structure syntax creates an exception to this rule, but
is designed to remain useful: recalling our example, '.if 1 .Underline
this' would underline only "this", precisely.  See Conditionals and
Loops.

   (7) See Diversions.

5.5 Identifiers
===============

An "identifier" labels a GNU 'troff' datum such as a register, name
(macro, string, or diversion), typeface (font, family, or style), color,
special character or character class, hyphenation language code,
environment, or stream.  Valid identifiers consist of one or more
ordinary characters.(1)  (see Identifiers-Footnote-1) An ordinary
character is any Unicode Basic Latin character that is not a space and
not the escape character; recall Input Format.  Thus, the identifiers
'br', 'PP', 'end-list', 'ref*normal-print', '|', '@_', and
'!"#$%'()*+,-./' are all valid.  Discretion should be exercised to
prevent confusion.  Identifiers starting with '(' or '[' require care.

     .nr x 9
     .nr y 1
     .nr (x 2
     .nr [y 3
     .nr sum1 (\n(x + \n[y])
         error-> a space character is not allowed in an escape
         error->   sequence parameter
     A:2+3=\n[sum1]
     .nr sum2 (\n((x + \n[[y])
     B:2+3=\n[sum2]
     .nr sum3 (\n[(x] + \n([y)
     C:2+3=\n[sum3]
         => A:2+3=1 B:2+3=5 C:2+3=5

An identifier with a closing bracket (']') in its name can't be accessed
with bracket-form escape sequences that expect an identifier as a
parameter.  For example, '\[foo]]' accesses the glyph 'foo', followed by
']' in whatever the surrounding context is, whereas '\C'foo]'' formats a
glyph named 'foo]'.  Similarly, the identifier '(' can't be interpolated
_except_ with bracket forms.

   Beginning a macro, string, or diversion name with the character '['
or ']' forecloses use of the 'refer' preprocessor, which recognizes
input lines starting with '.[' and '.]' as bibliographic reference
delimiters.

 -- Escape sequence: \A'input'
     Interpolate 1 if INPUT is a valid identifier, and 0 otherwise.  The
     delimiter need not be a neutral apostrophe; see Delimiters.
     Because GNU 'troff' ignores any input character with an invalid
     code when reading it, invalid identifiers are empty or contain
     spaces, tabs, newlines, or escape sequences that interpolate
     something other than a sequence of ordinary characters.

     You can employ '\A' to validate a macro argument before using it to
     construct another escape sequence or identifier.

          .\" usage: .init-coordinate-pair name val1 val2
          .\" Create a coordinate pair where name!x=val1 and
          .\" name!y=val2.
          .de init-coordinate-pair
          .  if \A'\\$1' \{\
          .    if \B'\\$2' .nr \\$1!x \\$2
          .    if \B'\\$3' .nr \\$1!y \\$3
          .  \}
          ..
          .init-coordinate-pair center 5 10
          .init-coordinate-pair "poi->nt" trash garbage \" ignored
          .init-coordinate-pair point waste rubbish \" ignored
          The center is at (\n[center!x], \n[center!y]).
              => The center is at (5, 10).

     In this example, we also validated the numeric arguments; the
     registers 'point!x' and 'point!y' remain undefined.  See Numeric
     Expressions for the '\B' escape sequence.

   The formatter's handling of undefined identifiers is
context-dependent.  There is no way to invoke an undefined request; such
syntax is interpreted as a macro call instead.  If the identifier is
interpreted as a string, macro, or diversion name, the formatter defines
it as empty and interpolates nothing.(2)  (see Identifiers-Footnote-2)
Similarly, if the identifier is interpreted as a register name, the
formatter initializes it to zero and interpolates that value.(3)  (see
Identifiers-Footnote-3) Attempting to use an undefined typeface, special
character or character class, color, environment, hyphenation language
code, or stream generally provokes an error diagnostic.

   Identifiers for requests, macros, strings, and diversions share one
name space; special characters and character classes another.  No other
object types do.

     .de xxx
     .  nop foo
     ..
     .di xxx
     bar
     .br
     .di
     .
     .xxx
         => bar

The foregoing example shows that GNU 'troff' reuses the identifier
'xxx', changing it from a macro to a diversion.  No warning is emitted,
and the previous contents of 'xxx' are lost.

   (1) Use of escape sequences in identifiers is not portable.  For
example, DWB 3.3 'troff' accepts '\_'.  Plan 9 'troff' does too, along
with '\'', '\`', and '\-'.  Solaris 'troff' rejects all of these except
'\_', but accepts '\&', '\{', '\}', '\SPC', '\%', and '\c'.  Heirloom
Doctools 'troff' rejects all of these, including '\_', but accepts '\!',
which the others reject.  GNU 'troff' rejects all of the foregoing.

   (2) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'mac'.  See Warnings.

   (3) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'reg'.  See Warnings.

5.6 Formatter Instructions
==========================

To support documents that require more than filling, automatic line
breaking and hyphenation, adjustment, and supplemental inter-sentence
space, the 'roff' language offers two means of embedding instructions to
the formatter.

   One is a "request", which begins with a control character and takes
up the remainder of the input line.  Requests often perform relatively
large-scale operations such as setting the page length, breaking the
line, or starting a new page.  They also conduct internal operations
like defining macros.

   The other is an "escape sequence", which begins with the escape
character and can be embedded anywhere in the input, even in arguments
to requests and other escape sequences.  Escape sequences interpolate
special characters, strings, or registers, and handle comparatively
minor formatting tasks like sub- and superscripting.

   Some operations, such as font selection and type size alteration, are
available via both requests and escape sequences.

5.6.1 Control Characters
------------------------

The mechanism of using 'roff''s control characters to invoke requests
and call macros was introduced in Requests and Macros.  The formatter
recognizes a control character only at the beginning of an input line,
or at the beginning of a branch of a control structure request; see
Conditionals and Loops.

   A few requests cause a break implicitly; invoke them with the
no-break control character to prevent the break.  Break suppression is
its sole behavioral distinction.  Employing the no-break control
character to invoke requests that don't cause breaks is harmless but
poor style.  See Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.

   The control '.' and no-break control ''' characters can each be
changed to any ordinary character(1) (see Control Characters-Footnote-1)
with the 'cc' and 'c2' requests, respectively.

 -- Request: .cc [o]
     Recognize the ordinary character O as the control character.  If O
     is absent or invalid, the default control character '.' is
     selected.  If O (or '.' if O is invalid) is already the escape or
     no-break control character, an error is diagnosed and the request
     ignored.  The identity of the control character is associated with
     the environment (see Environments).

 -- Request: .c2 [o]
     Recognize the ordinary character O as the no-break control
     character.  If O is absent or invalid, the default no-break control
     character ''' is selected.  If O (or ''' if O is invalid) is
     already the escape or control character, an error is diagnosed and
     the request ignored.  The identity of the no-break control
     character is associated with the environment (see Environments).

   When writing a macro, you might wish to know which control character
was used to call it.

 -- Register: \n[.br]
     This read-only register interpolates 1 if the currently executing
     macro was called using the normal control character and 0
     otherwise.  If a macro is interpolated as a string, the '.br'
     register's value is inherited from the context of the string
     interpolation.  See Strings.

     Use this register to reliably intercept requests that imply breaks.

          .als bp*orig bp
          .de bp
          .  ie \\n[.br] .bp*orig
          .  el          'bp*orig
          ..

     Testing the '.br' register outside of a macro definition makes no
     sense.

   (1) Recall Identifiers.

5.6.2 Invoking Requests
-----------------------

A control character is optionally followed by tabs and/or spaces and
then an identifier naming a request or macro.  The invocation of an
unrecognized request is interpreted as a macro call.  Defining a macro
with the same name as a request replaces the request.  Deleting a
request name with the 'rm' request makes it unavailable.  The 'als'
request can alias requests, permitting them to be wrapped or
non-destructively replaced.  See Strings.

   There is no inherent limit on argument length or quantity.  Most
requests take one or more arguments, and ignore any they do not expect.
A request may be separated from its arguments by tabs or spaces, but
only spaces can separate an argument from its successor.  Only one
between arguments is necessary; any excess is ignored.(1)  (see Invoking
Requests-Footnote-1) GNU 'troff' does not interpret tabs as argument
separators.(2)  (see Invoking Requests-Footnote-2)

   Generally, a space _within_ a request argument is not relevant, not
meaningful, or is supported by bespoke provisions, as with the 'tl'
request's delimiters (see Page Layout).  Some requests, like 'ds',
interpret the remainder of the control line as a single argument.  See
Strings.

   Spaces and tabs immediately after a control character are ignored.
Commonly, authors use them to indent the source of documents or macro
files.

     .de center
     .  if \\n[.br] \
     .    br
     .  ce \\$1
     ..
     .
     .
     .de right-align
     .->if \\n[.br] \
     .->->br
     .->rj \\$1
     ..

   If you assign an empty blank line trap, you can separate macro
definitions (or any input lines) with blank lines.

     .de do-nothing
     ..
     .blm do-nothing  \" activate blank line trap

     .de center
     .  if \\n[.br] \
     .    br
     .  ce \\$1
     ..


     .de right-align
     .->if \\n[.br] \
     .->->br
     .->rj \\$1
     ..

     .blm             \" deactivate blank line trap

   See Blank Line Traps.

   (1) In compatibility mode, a space is not necessary after a request
or macro name of two characters' length.

   (2) Plan 9 'troff' does.

5.6.3 Calling Macros
--------------------

If a macro of the desired name does not exist when called, the formatter
creates it and assigns it an empty definition.(1)  (see Calling
Macros-Footnote-1) Calling an undefined macro _does_ end a macro
definition naming it as its end macro (see Writing Macros).

   To embed spaces _within_ a macro argument, enclose the argument in
neutral double quotes '"'.  Horizontal motion escape sequences are
sometimes a better choice for arguments to be formatted as text.

   Consider calls to a hypothetical section heading macro 'uh'.

     .uh The Mouse Problem
     .uh "The Mouse Problem"
     .uh The\~Mouse\~Problem
     .uh The\ Mouse\ Problem

The first line calls 'uh' with three arguments: 'The', 'Mouse', and
'Problem'.  The remainder call the 'uh' macro with one argument, 'The
Mouse Problem'.  The last solution, using escaped spaces, can be found
in documents prepared for AT&T 'troff'.  It can cause surprise when text
is adjusted, because '\<SPC>' inserts a _fixed-width_, non-breaking
space.  GNU 'troff''s '\~' escape sequence inserts an adjustable,
non-breaking space.(2)  (see Calling Macros-Footnote-2)

   The foregoing raises the question of how to embed neutral double
quotes or backslashes in macro arguments when _those_ characters are
desired as literals.  In GNU 'troff', the special character escape
sequence '\[rs]' produces a backslash and '\[dq]' a neutral double
quote.

   In GNU 'troff''s AT&T compatibility mode, these characters remain
available as '\(rs' and '\(dq', respectively.  AT&T 'troff' did not
consistently define these special characters, but its descendants can be
made to support them.  See Device and Font Description Files.

   If even that is not feasible, options remain.  To obtain a literal
escape character in a macro argument, you can simply type it if you
change or disable the escape character first.  See Using Escape
Sequences.  Otherwise, you must escape the escape character repeatedly
to a context-dependent extent.  See Copy Mode.

   For the (neutral) double quote, you have recourse to an obscure
syntactical feature of AT&T 'troff'.  Because a double quote can begin a
macro argument, the formatter keeps track of whether the current
argument was started thus, and doesn't require a space after the double
quote that ends it.(3)  (see Calling Macros-Footnote-3) In the argument
list to a macro, a double quote that _isn't_ preceded by a space
_doesn't_ start a macro argument.  If not preceded by a double quote
that began an argument, this double quote becomes part of the argument.
Furthermore, within a quoted argument, a pair of adjacent double quotes
becomes a literal double quote.

     .de eq
     .  tm arg1:\\$1 arg2:\\$2 arg3:\\$3
     .  tm arg4:\\$4 arg5:\\$5 arg6:\\$6
     .. \" 4 backslashes on the next line
     .eq a" "b c" "de"f\\\\g" h""i "j""k"
         error-> arg1:a" arg2:b c arg3:de
         error-> arg4:f\g" arg5:h""i arg6:j"k

   Apart from the complexity of the rules, this traditional solution has
the disadvantage that double quotes don't survive repeated argument
expansion in AT&T 'troff' or GNU 'troff''s compatibility mode.  This can
frustrate efforts to pass such arguments intact through multiple macro
calls.

     .cp 1
     .de eq
     .  tm arg1:\\$1 arg2:\\$2 arg3:\\$3
     .  tm arg4:\\$4 arg5:\\$5 arg6:\\$6
     ..
     .de xe
     .  eq \\$1 \\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6
     .. \" 8 backslashes on the next line
     .xe a" "b c" "de"f\\\\\\\\g" h""i "j""k"
         error-> arg1:a" arg2:b arg3:c
         error-> arg4:de arg5:f\g" arg6:h""i

   Outside of compatibility mode, GNU 'troff' doesn't exhibit this
problem because it tracks the nesting depth of interpolations.  See
Implementation Differences.

   (1) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'mac'.  See Warnings.

   (2) '\~' is fairly portable; see Other Differences.

   (3) Strictly, you can neglect to close the last quoted macro
argument, relying on the end of the control line to do so.  We consider
this lethargic practice poor style.

5.6.4 Using Escape Sequences
----------------------------

Whereas requests must occur on control lines, escape sequences can occur
intermixed with text and may appear in arguments to requests, macros,
and other escape sequences.  An escape sequence is introduced by the
escape character, a backslash '\' (but see the 'ec' request below).  The
next character selects the escape's function.

   Escape sequences vary in length.  Some take an argument, and of
those, some have different syntactical forms for a one-character,
two-character, or arbitrary-length argument.  Others accept _only_ an
arbitrary-length argument.  In the former scheme, a one-character
argument follows the function character immediately, an opening
parenthesis '(' introduces a two-character argument (no closing
parenthesis is used), and an argument of arbitrary length is enclosed in
brackets '[]'.  In the latter scheme, the user selects a delimiter
character.  A few escape sequences are idiosyncratic, and support both
of the foregoing conventions ('\s'), designate their own termination
sequence ('\?'), consume input until the next newline ('\!', '\"',
'\#'), or support an additional modifier character ('\s' again, and
'\n').  In no case can an escape sequence parameter contain an unescaped
newline.  As with requests, use of some escape sequences in source
documents may interact poorly with a macro package you use; consult its
documentation to learn of "safe" sequences or alternative facilities it
provides to achieve the desired result.

   If the character that follows the escape character does not identify
a valid operation, the formatter ignores the escape character.(1)  (see
Using Escape Sequences-Footnote-1)

     $ groff -T ps -ww
     .nr N 12
     .ds co white
     .ds animal elephant
     I have \fI\nN \*(co \*[animal]s,\f[]
     said \P.\&\~Pseudo Pachyderm.
         error-> warning: ignoring escape character before 'P'
         => I have 12 white elephants, said P. Pseudo Pachyderm.

   Escape sequence interpolation is of higher precedence than escape
sequence argument interpretation.  This rule affords flexibility in
using escape sequences to construct parameters to other escape
sequences.

     .ds family C\" Courier
     .ds style I\" oblique
     Choose a typeface \f(\*[family]\*[style]wisely.
         => Choose a typeface wisely.

In the above, the syntax form '\f(' accepts only two characters for an
argument; the example works because the subsequent escape sequences are
interpolated before the selection escape sequence argument is processed,
and strings 'family' and 'style' interpolate one character each.(2)
(see Using Escape Sequences-Footnote-2)

   The escape character is nearly always interpreted when encountered;
it is therefore desirable to have a way to interpolate it, disable it,
or change it.

 -- Escape sequence: \e
     Interpolate the escape character.  '\e' is interpreted even in copy
     mode (see Copy Mode).

   The '\[rs]' special character escape sequence formats a backslash
glyph.  In macro and string definitions, the input sequences '\\' and
'\E' defer interpretation of escape sequences.  See Copy Mode.

 -- Request: .eo
     Disable the escape mechanism except in copy mode.  Once this
     request is invoked, no input character is recognized as starting an
     escape sequence in interpretation mode.

 -- Request: .ec [o]
     Recognize the ordinary character O as the escape character.  If O
     is absent or invalid, the default escape character '\' is selected.
     If O (or '\' if O is invalid) is already the control or no-break
     control character, an error is diagnosed and the request ignored.

   Switching escape sequence interpretation off to define a macro and
back on afterward can obviate the need to double the escape character
within the definition.  See Writing Macros.  This technique is not
available if your macro needs to interpolate values at the time it is
_defined_--but many do not.

     .\" simplified `BR` macro from the man(7) macro package
     .eo
     .de BR
     .  ds result \&
     .  while (\n[.$] >= 2) \{\
     .    as result \fB\$1\fR\$2\"
     .    shift 2
     .  \}
     .  if \n[.$] .as result \fB\$1\"
     \*[result]
     .  rm result
     .  ft R
     ..
     .ec

 -- Request: .ecs
 -- Request: .ecr
     The 'ecs' request stores the escape character for recall with
     'ecr'.  'ecr' sets the escape character to '\' if none has been
     saved.

     Use these requests together to temporarily change the escape
     character.

   Using a different escape character, or disabling it, when calling
macros not under your control will likely cause errors, since GNU
'troff' has no mechanism to "intern" macros--that is, to convert a macro
definition into a form independent of its representation.(3)  (see Using
Escape Sequences-Footnote-3) When a macro is called, its contents are
interpreted literally.

   (1) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'escape'.  See Warnings.

   (2) The omission of spaces before the comment escape sequences is
necessary; see Strings.

   (3) TeX does have such a mechanism.

5.6.5 Delimiters
----------------

Some escape sequences that require parameters delimit them.  The neutral
apostrophe ''' is a popular delimiter choice and shown in this document.
The neutral double quote '"' is also commonly seen.  Punctuation
characters are the best choice (and most portable to other 'troff's),
except for those meaningful in numeric expressions; see below.

     \l'1.5i\[bu]' \" draw 1.5 inches of bullet glyphs

   The following escape sequences are not themselves delimited, and thus
are allowed as delimiters: '\<SPC>', '\%', '\|', '\^', '\{', '\}', '\'',
'\`', '\-', '\_', '\!', '\?', '\)', '\/', '\,', '\&', '\:', '\~', '\0',
'\a', '\c', '\d', '\e', '\E', '\p', '\r', '\t', and '\u'.  However, we
discourage using them this way; they can make the input confusing to
read.(1)  (see Delimiters-Footnote-1) An invalid escape sequence is
valid as a delimiter if the character after the escape character would
be valid.

   The escape sequences '\D', '\h', '\H', '\l', '\L', '\N', '\R', '\s',
'\S', '\v', and '\x' prohibit delimiters that are meaningful in numeric
expressions, because they accept numeric expressions as (or within)
their arguments.  For consistency, GNU 'troff' prohibits the same
delimiters in the argument to the 'tl' request.(2)  (see
Delimiters-Footnote-2) The 'if', 'ie', and 'while' requests each
interpret their first argument as a conditional expression;(3) (see
Delimiters-Footnote-3) only characters that are not meaningful as
operators in that context can be used as output comparison delimiters.
The following inputs are therefore invalid as delimiters in GNU 'troff'.

   * the numerals '0'-'9' and the decimal point '.'

   * the (single-character) operators '+-/*%<>=&:()|'

   * the space and tab characters

   * any escape sequences other than '\%', '\:', '\{', '\}', '\'', '\`',
     '\-', '\_', '\!', '\/', '\c', '\e', and '\p'

   Delimiter syntax is flexible (and laborious to describe) primarily
for historical reasons; the foregoing restrictions need be kept in mind
mainly when using GNU 'troff' in AT&T compatibility mode.  Normally, GNU
'troff' keeps track of the nesting depth of escape sequence
interpolations, so the only characters you need to avoid using as
delimiters are those that appear in the arguments you input, not those
that result from interpolation.  Typically, ''' works fine.(4)  (see
Delimiters-Footnote-4)

     $ groff -T ps
     .de Mw
     .  nr wd \w'\\$1'
     .  tm "\\$1" is \\n(wd units wide.
     ..
     .Mw Wet'suwet'en
     .Mw Wet+200i
     .cp 1 \" turn on compatibility mode
     .Mw Wet'suwet'en
     .Mw Wet'
     .Mw Wet+200i
         error-> "Wet'suwet'en" is 54740 units wide.
         error-> "Wet'+200i" is 42610 units wide.
         error-> "Wet'suwet'en" is 15860 units wide.
         error-> "Wet'" is 15860 units wide.
         error-> "Wet'+200i" is 14415860 units wide.

   We see here that in compatibility mode, the part of the argument
after the ''' delimiter escapes, if you will, from its context and, if
nefariously crafted, influences the computation of the WD register's
value in a surprising way.

   (1) The GNU 'eqn(1)' and 'tbl(1)' preprocessors use parameterized but
non-delimited special character escape sequences '\(' and '\[' to
bracket portions of their output.

   (2) See Page Layout.

   (3) See Operators in Conditionals.

   (4) See Implementation Differences.

5.7 Comments
============

One of the most common forms of escape sequence is the comment.(1)  (see
Comments-Footnote-1)

 -- Escape sequence: \"
     Start a comment; read everything up to the next newline in copy
     mode (see Copy Mode) and discard it.  '\"' is interpreted even in
     copy mode.

     It can be tricky to keep the comments from interfering with the
     appearance of the output.  If the escape sequence is to the right
     of some text or a request, that portion of the line is ignored, but
     GNU 'troff' processes spaces preceding it normally.  This affects
     requests that read the remainder of the control line as a single
     argument, including 'ds', 'as', 'tm', and 'char'; their variants;
     as well as 'ab', 'device', 'length', 'output', 'pi', 'pso', 'rd',
     'sy', 'write', and 'writec'.

     One possibly irritating idiosyncrasy is that tabs should not be
     used to vertically align comments in the source document.  Tab
     characters are not treated as separators between a request name and
     its first argument, nor between arguments.

     The formatter handles a '\"' comment on a line by itself as a blank
     line, because after eliminating the comment, that is all that
     remains.

          apples bananas
          \" cantaloupes
          durians
              => apples bananas
              =>
              => durians

     To compensate, it is common to combine the empty request with the
     comment escape sequence as '.\"', causing the input line to be
     ignored.

     Another commenting scheme sometimes seen is three consecutive
     neutral apostrophes (''''') at the beginning of an input line.
     This works,(2) (see Comments-Footnote-2) but GNU 'troff' emits a
     warning diagnostic (if enabled) about an undefined macro (namely
     '''').

 -- Escape sequence: \#
     Start a whole-line comment; read everything up to and including the
     next newline in copy mode(3) (see Comments-Footnote-3) and discard
     it.  GNU 'troff' introduced this extension to avoid the problems
     described above.  ('\"' is still widely seen, and remains useful
     for partial-line comments on control lines.)  '\#' is interpreted
     even in copy mode.

          .nr in-indonesia 1
          apples bananas \" common favorites
          \# cantaloupes
          .ie \n[in-indonesia] durians \" Borneo, Sumatra
          .el                  elderberries \" England, France
              => apples bananas durians

     If we change the comment escape sequence from '\"' to '\#' on the
     line with the 'ie' request, we get the following undesired output.

              => apples bananas durians .el elderberries

 -- Request: .ig [end]
     Ignore input until, in the current conditional block (if any),(4)
     (see Comments-Footnote-4) the macro END is called at the start of a
     control line, or the control line '..' is encountered if END is not
     specified.  'ig' is parsed as if it were a macro definition, but
     its contents are discarded, not stored.(5)  (see
     Comments-Footnote-5)

          .ll 45n
          hand\c
          .de TX
          fasting
          ..
          .ig TX
          This is part of a large block of input that has been
          temporarily(?) commented out.
          .TX
          shake
              => handfasting shake

     Observe the result if we remove the 'ig' request and the call of
     its end macro.

              => handThis  is  part  of a large block of input
              => that has been temporarily(?)  commented  out.
              => shake

   (1) This claim may be more aspirational than descriptive.

   (2) except in copy mode on Plan 9 'troff'

   (3) See Copy Mode.

   (4) See Conditional Blocks.

   (5) Exception: auto-incrementing registers defined outside the
ignored region _will_ be modified if interpolated with '\n±' inside it.
See Auto-increment.

5.8 Registers
=============

In the 'roff' language, numbers and measurements can be stored in
"registers".  Many built-in registers exist, supplying anything from
components of the date to details of formatting parameters; some of
these are read-only.  You can also define your own.  Recall Identifiers,
regarding the construction of valid names for registers.

   Each register (except read-only ones) can be assigned a "format",
causing its value to interpolate with leading zeroes, in Roman numerals,
or alphabetically.  Some read-only registers are string-valued, meaning
that they interpolate text and lack a format.

5.8.1 Setting Registers
-----------------------

Define registers and update their values with the 'nr' request or the
'\R' escape sequence.

 -- Request: .nr ident value
 -- Escape sequence: \R'ident value'
     Set register IDENT to VALUE.  If IDENT doesn't exist, the formatter
     creates it.  In the '\R' escape sequence, the delimiter need not be
     a neutral apostrophe; see Delimiters.

          .nr a (((17 + (3 * 4))) % 4)
          \n[a]
          .\R'a (((17 + (3 * 4))) % 4)'
          \n[a]
              => 1 1

     (Later, we will discuss additional forms of 'nr' and '\R' that can
     change a register's value after it is dereferenced but before it is
     interpolated.  See Auto-increment.)

     GNU 'troff' does not tokenize '\R' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates only the formatter's register dictionary and does
     not contribute (directly) to output.  See GNU troff Internals.

     Further surprise can occur if you use registers like '.k',(1) (see
     Setting Registers-Footnote-1) whose values are not determined until
     they are interpolated.

          .ll 1.6i
          .
          aaa bbb ccc ddd eee fff ggg hhh\R':k \n[.k]'
          .tm :k == \n[:k]
              => :k == 126950
          .
          .br
          .
          aaa bbb ccc ddd eee fff ggg hhh\h'0'\R':k \n[.k]'
          .tm :k == \n[:k]
              => :k == 15000

     If you process this with the PostScript device ('-T ps'), there
     will be a line break eventually after 'ggg' in both input lines.
     However, after processing the space after 'ggg', the partially
     collected line is not overfull yet, so GNU 'troff' continues to
     collect input until it sees the space (or in this case, the
     newline) after 'hhh'.  At this point, the line is longer than the
     line length, and the line gets broken.

     In the first input line, since the '\R' escape sequence leaves no
     traces, the check for the overfull line hasn't been done yet at the
     point where '\R' gets handled, and you get a value for the '.k'
     register that is even greater than the current line length.

     In the second input line, the insertion of '\h'0'' to cause a
     zero-width motion forces GNU 'troff' to check the line length,
     which in turn causes the start of a new output line.  Now '.k'
     returns the expected value.

   'nr' and '\R' each have two additional special forms to increment or
decrement a register.

 -- Request: .nr ident +value
 -- Request: .nr ident -value
 -- Escape sequence: \R'ident +value'
 -- Escape sequence: \R'ident -value'
     Increment (decrement) register IDENT by VALUE.  In the '\R' escape
     sequence, the delimiter need not be a neutral apostrophe; see
     Delimiters.

          .nr a 1
          .nr a +1
          \na
              => 2

     A 'roff' formatter always interprets a leading minus sign in VALUE
     as a decrementation operator, not an algebraic sign.  To assign a
     register a negative value or the negated value of another register,
     you must force the formatter to interpret '-' as a negation or
     minus, rather than decrementation, operator: enclose the '-' with
     its operand in parentheses or subtract the expression of interest
     from zero.

          .nr a 7
          .nr b 3
          .nr a -\nb
          \na
              => 4
          .nr a (-\nb)
          \na
              => -3
          .nr a 0-\nb
          \na
              => -3

     If a register's prior value does not exist--the register was
     undefined--an increment or decrement is applied as if to 0.

 -- Request: .rr reg ...
     Remove each register REG.  If REG doesn't exist, the request is
     ignored.  Technically, only the name is removed; the register's
     contents are still accessible under aliases created with 'aln', if
     any.

     This request is incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff' manual
     as accepting only one argument.

 -- Request: .rnn ident1 ident2
     Rename register IDENT1 to IDENT2.  If IDENT1 doesn't exist, the
     request is ignored.  Renaming a built-in register does not
     otherwise alter its properties.

 -- Request: .aln new-register old-register
     Create alias (additional name) NEW-REGISTER of EXISTING-REGISTER,
     causing the names to refer to the same stored object.  If
     EXISTING-REGISTER is undefined, the formatter ignores the
     request.(2)  (see Setting Registers-Footnote-2)

     To remove a register alias, invoke 'rr' on its name.  A register's
     contents do not become inaccessible until it has no more names.

   (1) See Page Motions.

   (2) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'reg'.  See Warnings.

5.8.2 Interpolating Registers
-----------------------------

The '\n' escape sequence interpolates register contents.

 -- Escape sequence: \ni
 -- Escape sequence: \n(id
 -- Escape sequence: \n[ident]
     Interpolate register with name IDENT (one-character name I,
     two-character name ID).  If the register is undefined, the
     formatter creates it and assigns it a value of '0', and
     interpolates that value.(1)  (see Interpolating
     Registers-Footnote-1) '\n' is interpreted even in copy mode (see
     Copy Mode).

          .nr a 5
          .nr as \na+\na
          \n(as
              => 10

          .nr a1 5
          .nr ab 6
          .ds str b
          .ds num 1
          \n[a\n[num]]
              => 5
          \n[a\*[str]]
              => 6

   (1) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'reg'.  See Warnings.

5.8.3 Auto-increment
--------------------

User-defined registers can also be incremented or decremented by a
configured amount at the time they are interpolated.  The value of the
increment is specified with a third argument to the 'nr' request, and a
special interpolation syntax alters and then retrieves the register's
value.  Together, these features are called "auto-increment".(1)  (see
Auto-increment-Footnote-1)

 -- Request: .nr ident value incr
     Set register IDENT to VALUE and its auto-incrementation amount to
     INCR.  The '\R' escape sequence doesn't support an INCR argument.

   Auto-incrementation is not _completely_ automatic; the '\n' escape
sequence in its basic form never alters the value of a register.  To
apply auto-incrementation to a register, interpolate it with '\n±'.

 -- Escape sequence: \n+i
 -- Escape sequence: \n-i
 -- Escape sequence: \n+(id
 -- Escape sequence: \n-(id
 -- Escape sequence: \n+[ident]
 -- Escape sequence: \n-[ident]
     Increment or decrement IDENT (one-character name I, two-character
     name ID) by the register's auto-incrementation value and then
     interpolate the new register value.  If IDENT has no
     auto-incrementation value, GNU 'troff' interpolates its value
     without alteration.

     .nr a 0 1
     .nr xx 0 5
     .nr foo 0 -2
     \n+a, \n+a, \n+a, \n+a, \n+a
     .br
     \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx
     .br
     \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo]
         => 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
         => -5, -10, -15, -20, -25
         => -2, -4, -6, -8, -10

   To change the increment value without changing the value of a
register, assign the register's value to itself by interpolating it, and
specify the desired increment normally.  Apply an increment of '0' to
disable auto-incrementation of the register.

   (1) A negative auto-increment can be considered an "auto-decrement".

5.8.4 Assigning Register Formats
--------------------------------

A writable register's value can be interpolated in several number
formats.  By default, conventional Arabic numerals are used.  Other
formats see use in sectioning and outlining schemes and alternative page
numbering arrangements.

 -- Request: .af reg fmt
     Use number format FMT when interpolating register REG.  Valid
     number formats are as follows.

     '0...'
          Arabic numerals 0, 1, 2, and so on.  Any decimal digit is
          equivalent to '0'; the formatter merely counts the digits
          specified.  Multiple Arabic numerals in FMT cause
          interpolations to be zero-padded on the left if necessary to
          at least as many digits as specified (interpolations never
          truncate a register value).  A register with format '00'
          interpolates values 1, 2, 3 as '01', '02', '03'.  The default
          format for all writable registers is '0'.

     'I'
          Uppercase Roman numerals: 0, I, II, III, IV, ...

     'i'
          Lowercase Roman numerals: 0, i, ii, iii, iv, ...

     'A'
          Uppercase letters: 0, A, B, C, ..., Z, AA, AB, ...

     'a'
          Lowercase letters: 0, a, b, c, ..., z, aa, ab, ...

     Omitting FMT causes a warning in category 'missing'.  See Warnings,
     regarding the enablement and suppression of warnings.  Specifying
     an unrecognized format is an error.

     Zero values are interpolated as '0' in non-Arabic formats.
     Negative quantities are prefixed with '-' irrespective of format.
     In Arabic formats, the sign supplements the field width.  If REG
     doesn't exist, it is created with a zero value.

          .nr a 10
          .af a 0           \" the default format
          \na,
          .af a I
          \na,
          .af a 321
          .nr a (-\na)
          \na,
          .af a a
          \na
              => 10, X, -010, -j

     The representable extrema in the 'i' and 'I' formats correspond to
     Arabic ±39,999.  GNU 'troff' uses 'w' and 'z' to represent 5,000
     and 10,000 in Roman numerals, respectively, following the
     convention of AT&T 'troff'--currently, the correct glyphs for Roman
     numerals five thousand ('U+2181') and ten thousand ('U+2182') are
     not used.

     Assigning the format of a read-only register is an error.  Instead,
     copy the read-only register's value to, and assign the format of, a
     writable register.

 -- Escape sequence: \gr
 -- Escape sequence: \g(rg
 -- Escape sequence: \g[reg]
     Interpolate the format of the register REG (one-character name R,
     two-character name RG).  Zeroes represent Arabic formats.  If REG
     is not defined, REG is not created and nothing is interpolated.
     '\g' is interpreted even in copy mode (see Copy Mode).

   GNU 'troff' interprets only Arabic numerals.  The Roman numeral or
alphabetic formats cannot be used as operands to arithmetic operators in
expressions (see Numeric Expressions).  For instance, it may be
desirable to test the page number independently of its format.

     .af % i \" front matter
     .de header-trap
     .  \" To test the page number, we need it in Arabic.
     .  ds saved-page-number-format \\g%\"
     .  af % 0
     .  nr page-number-in-decimal \\n%
     .  af % \\*[saved-page-number-format]
     .  ie \\n[page-number-in-decimal]=1 .do-first-page-stuff
     .  el \{\
     .    ie o .do-odd-numbered-page-stuff
     .    el   .do-even-numbered-page-stuff
     .  \}
     .  rm saved-page-number-format
     ..
     .wh 0 header-trap

5.8.5 Built-in Registers
------------------------

Predefined registers whose identifiers start with a dot are read-only.
Many are Boolean-valued, interpolating a true or false value testable
with the 'if', 'ie', or 'while' requests.

   *Caution:* Built-in registers are subject to removal like others;
once removed, they can be recreated only as normal writable registers
and will not otherwise reflect the configuration of the formatter.

   A register name is often associated with a request of the same name
(without the dot).  A complete listing of all built-in registers can be
found in Register Index.

   We present here a few built-in registers that are not described
elsewhere in this manual; they have to do with invariant properties of
GNU 'troff', or obtain information about its command-line options or
processing progress.

'\n[.A]'
     Approximate output is being formatted (Boolean-valued); see
     'groff''s '-a' option (Groff Options).

'\n[.c]'
'\n[c.]'
     Input line number.  'c.' is a writable synonym, affecting
     subsequent interpolations of both '.c' and 'c.'.

'\n[.F]'
     Name of input file (string-valued).

'\n[.g]'
     Always true in GNU 'troff' (Boolean-valued).  Documents can use
     this to ask the formatter if it claims 'groff' compatibility.

'\n[.P]'
     Output page selection status (Boolean-valued); see 'groff''s '-o'
     option (Groff Options).

'\n[.R]'
     Count of available unused registers; in GNU 'troff' this register
     always interpolates the maximum representable integer.(1)  (see
     Built-in Registers-Footnote-1) Favor its use over numeric literals
     with many zeroes or nines to indicate an arbitrary large quantity.

'\n[.T]'
     Indicator of output device selection (Boolean-valued); see
     'groff''s '-T' option (Groff Options).

'\n[.U]'
     Unsafe mode enablement status (Boolean-valued); see 'groff''s '-U'
     option (Groff Options).

'\n[.x]'
     Major version number of the running GNU 'troff' formatter.  For
     example, if the version number is 1.23.0, then '.x' contains '1'.

'\n[.y]'
     Minor version number of the running GNU 'troff' formatter.  For
     example, if the version number is 1.23.0, then '.y' contains '23'.

'\n[.Y]'
     Revision number of the running GNU 'troff' formatter.  For example,
     if the version number is 1.23.0, then '.Y' contains '0'.

   (1) GNU 'troff' dynamically allocates memory for as many registers as
required.

5.9 Manipulating Filling and Adjustment
=======================================

When an output line is pending (see below), a break moves the drawing
position to the beginning of the next text baseline, interrupting
filling.  Recall Breaking.  The 'br' request likewise causes a break.
Several other requests imply breaks: 'bp', 'brp', 'ce', 'cf', 'fi',
'fl', 'in', 'nf', 'rj', 'sp', 'ti', and 'trf'.  If the no-break control
character is used with any of these requests, GNU 'troff' suppresses the
break; instead the requested operation takes effect at the next break.
''br' and ''brp' do nothing.

     .ll 55n
     This line is normally filled and adjusted.
     .br
     A line's alignment is decided
     'ce \" Center the next input line (with no initial break).
     when it is output.
     This line returns to normal filling and adjustment.
         => This line is normally filled and adjusted.
         =>    A line's alignment is decided when it is output.
         => This line returns to normal filling and adjustment.

Output line properties like page offset, indentation, adjustment, and
even the location of its text baseline, are not determined until the
line has been broken.  An output line is said to be "pending" if some
input has been collected but an output line corresponding to it has not
yet been written; such an output line is also termed "partially
collected".  If no output line is pending, it is as if a break has
already happened; additional breaks, whether explicit or implicit, have
no effect.  If the vertical drawing position is negative--as it is when
the formatter starts up--a break starts a new page (even if no output
line is pending) unless an end-of-input macro is being interpreted.  See
End-of-input Traps.

 -- Request: .br
     Break the line: emit any pending output line without adjustment.

          foo bar
          .br
          baz
          'br
          qux
              => foo bar
              => baz qux

   You can prevent a break between words, as with a quantity and its
units.

 -- Escape sequence: \~
     Insert an adjustable, unbreakable space.  As with ordinary spaces,
     the formatter discards any sequence of these at the end of an
     output line if a break occurs.

          Set the output speed to\~1.
          There are 1,024\~bytes in 1\~KiB.
          J.\~F.\~Ossanna wrote the original CSTR\~#54.

   By default, the formatter fills text and adjusts it to reach the
output line length.  The 'nf' request disables filling; the 'fi' request
reënables it.

 -- Request: .fi
 -- Register: \n[.u]
     Enable filling of output lines; a pending output line is broken.
     The read-only register '.u' is set to 1.  The filling enablement
     status, sometimes called "fill mode", is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).  See Line Continuation, for
     interaction with the '\c' escape sequence.

 -- Request: .nf
     Disable filling of output lines: the output line length (see Line
     Layout) is ignored and output lines are broken where the input
     lines are.  A pending output line is broken and adjustment is
     suppressed.  The read-only register '.u' is set to 0.  The filling
     enablement status is associated with the environment (see
     Environments).  See Line Continuation, for interaction with the
     '\c' escape sequence.

 -- Request: .ad [mode]
 -- Register: \n[.j]
     Enable output line adjustment in MODE, taking effect when the
     pending (or next) output line is broken.  Adjustment is suppressed
     when filling is.  MODE can have one of the following values.

     'b'
     'n'
          Adjust "normally": if the output line does not consume the
          distance between the indentation and the configured output
          line length, GNU 'troff' stretches adjustable spaces within
          the line until that length is reached.  When the indentation
          is zero, this mode spreads the line to both the left and right
          margins.  This is the GNU 'troff' default.

     'c'
          Center filled text.  Contrast with the 'ce' request, which
          centers text _without_ filling it.

     'l'
          Align text to the left without adjusting it.

     'r'
          Align text to the right without adjusting it.

     MODE can also be a value previously stored in the '.j' register.
     Using 'ad' without an argument is the same as '.ad \n[.j]'; unless
     filling is disabled, GNU 'troff' resumes adjusting lines in the
     same way it did before adjustment was disabled by invocation of the
     'na' request.

     The adjustment mode and enablement status are encoded in the
     read-only register '.j'.  These parameters are associated with the
     environment (see Environments).

     The value of '.j' for any adjustment mode is an implementation
     detail and should not be relied upon as a programmer's interface.
     Do not write logic to interpret or perform arithmetic on it.

          .ll 48n
          .de AD
          .  br
          .  ad \\$1
          ..
          .de NA
          .  br
          .  na
          ..
          left
          .AD r
          .nr ad \n(.j
          right
          .AD c
          center
          .NA
          left
          .AD
          center
          .AD \n(ad
          right
              => left
              =>                                            right
              =>                      center
              => left
              =>                      center
              =>                                            right

 -- Request: .na
     Disable output line adjustment, produciing the same output as
     left-alignment, but altering the value of the adjustment mode
     register '.j' differently.  The adjustment mode and enablement
     status are associated with the environment.(1)  (see Manipulating
     Filling and Adjustment-Footnote-1)

   Normally, an explicit break implies non-adjustment of the pending
output line, as at the end of a paragraph.

 -- Request: .brp
 -- Escape sequence: \p
     The 'brp' request commands a break as 'br' does, but also forces
     adjustment of the output line per the current adjustment mode.
     Like 'br', it does nothing if invoked with the no-break control
     character.

     '\p' schedules a break with adjustment at the next word boundary.
     The escape sequence is itself neither a break nor a space of any
     kind; it can thus be placed in the middle of a word to cause a
     break at the end of that word.

     '\p' is typically used for fine-tuning of typeset output late in
     the document revision process.  One of its applications is
     prevention of a break after an explicit hyphen when this occurs in
     an undesired place, such as at the end of a recto page, or before a
     displayed figure.  The hyphenation mode can be configured to
     prevent breaks after _automatically_ placed hyphens, but not
     explicit ones.(2)  (see Manipulating Filling and
     Adjustment-Footnote-2) What one can do in this scenario is place
     '\p' at the end of the word _before_ the one that breaks
     undesirably.

          .ll 1.375i
          The next data were out-of-band. \" breaks after "out-"
          .br
          The next data were\p out-of-band. \" breaks after "were"

     Breaking with immediate adjustment can produce ugly results since
     GNU 'troff' doesn't have a sophisticated paragraph-building
     algorithm, as TeX has, for example.  Instead, GNU 'troff' fills and
     adjusts a paragraph line by line.

          .ll 4.5i
          This is an uninteresting sentence.
          This is an uninteresting sentence.\p
          This is an uninteresting sentence.

     is formatted as follows.

          This  is  an uninteresting sentence.  This is
          an          uninteresting           sentence.
          This is an uninteresting sentence.

   To clearly present the next couple of requests, we must introduce the
concept of "productive" input lines.  A "productive input line" is one
that directly produces formatted output.  Text lines produce output,(3)
(see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment-Footnote-3) as do control lines
containing requests like '.tl //Page %//' or escape sequences like
'\l'1i''.  Macro calls are not themselves productive, but their
interpolations can be.  Empty requests, and requests and escape
sequences that define registers or strings or alter the formatting
environment (as with changes to the size, face, height, slant, or color
of the type) are not productive.(4)  (see Manipulating Filling and
Adjustment-Footnote-4) We will also preview the output line continuation
escape sequence, '\c', which "connects" two input lines that would
otherwise be counted separately.  (5)  (see Manipulating Filling and
Adjustment-Footnote-5)

     .de hello
     Hello, world!
     ..
     .ce \" center output of next productive input line
     .
     .nr junk-reg 1
     .ft I
     Chorus: \c
     .ft
     .hello
     Went the day well?
       =>                  Chorus: Hello, world!
       => Went the day well?

 -- Request: .ce [n]
 -- Register: \n[.ce]
     Break (unless the no-break control character is used), center the
     output of the next N productive input lines with respect to the
     line length and indentation without filling, then break again
     regardless of the invoking control character.  If the argument is
     not positive, centering is disabled.  Omitting the argument implies
     an N of '1'.  The count of input lines remaining to be centered is
     stored in the read-only register '.ce' and is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).

     While the '.ad c' request also centers text, it fills the text as
     well.

          .de FR
          This is a small text fragment that shows the differences
          between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' requests.
          ..
          .ll 4i
          .ce \n(.R
          .FR
          .ce 0

          .ad c
          .FR
              => This is a small text fragment that shows
              =>              the differences
              => between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' requests.
              =>
              => This is a small text fragment that shows
              =>  the differences between the `.ce' and
              =>         the `.ad c' requests.

     The previous example illustrates a common idiom of turning
     centering on for a quantity of lines far in excess of what is
     required,(6) (see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment-Footnote-6)
     and off again after the text to be centered.  This technique
     relieves humans of counting lines for requests that take a count of
     input lines as an argument.

 -- Request: .rj [n]
 -- Register: \n[.rj]
     Break (unless the no-break control character is used), align the
     output of the next N productive input lines to the right margin
     without filling, then break again regardless of the control
     character.  If the argument is not positive, right-alignment is
     disabled.  Omitting the argument implies an N of '1'.  The count of
     input lines remaining to be right-aligned is stored in the
     read-only registeinput r '.rj' and is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).

          .ll 49n
          .rj 3
          At first I hoped that such a technically unsound
          project would collapse but I soon realized it was
          doomed to success. \[em] C. A. R. Hoare
              =>  At first I hoped that such a technically unsound
              => project would collapse but I soon realized it was
              =>              doomed to success. -- C. A. R. Hoare

 -- Request: .ss word-space-size [additional-sentence-space-size]
 -- Register: \n[.ss]
 -- Register: \n[.sss]
     Set the sizes of spaces between words and sentences(7) (see
     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment-Footnote-7) in twelfths of the
     space width of the currently selected font.(8)  (see Manipulating
     Filling and Adjustment-Footnote-8) (A "word space" is typically
     one-fourth to one-third em for Western scripts.)  The default for
     both parameters is 12.  Negative values are erroneous.  The first
     argument is a minimum; if an output line undergoes adjustment, such
     spaces may increase in width.  The optional second argument sets
     the amount of additional space separating sentences on the same
     output line.  If omitted, this amount is set to WORD-SPACE-SIZE.
     The request is ignored if there are no parameters.

     Additional inter-sentence space is used only if the output line is
     not full when the end of a sentence occurs in the input.  If a
     sentence ends at the end of an input line, then both an inter-word
     space and an inter-sentence space are added to the output; if two
     spaces follow the end of a sentence in the middle of an input line,
     then the second space becomes an inter-sentence space in the
     output.  Additional inter-sentence space is not adjusted, but the
     inter-word space that always precedes it may be.  Further input
     spaces after the second, if present, are adjusted as normal.

     The read-only registers '.ss' and '.sss' hold the minimum
     inter-word space and supplemental inter-sentence space amounts,
     respectively.  These parameters are part of the environment (see
     Environments).

     The 'ss' request can insert discardable horizontal space; that is,
     space that is discarded at a break.  For example, some footnote
     styles collect the notes into a single paragraph with large gaps
     between each note.

          .ll 48n
          1.\~J. Fict. Ch. Soc. 6 (2020), 3\[en]14.
          .ss 12 48 \" applies to next sentence ending
          Reprints no longer available through FCS.
          .ss 12 \" go back to normal
          2.\~Better known for other work.
              => 1.  J.  Fict. Ch. Soc. 6 (2020), 3-14.  Reprints
              => no longer available through FCS.      2.  Better
              => known for other work.

     If _undiscardable_ space is required, use the '\h' escape sequence
     to put horizontal motion on the output.

   (1) See Environments.

   (2) See Manipulating Hyphenation.

   (3) though not necessarily to the output device; see Diversions

   (4) If you're not sure whether an input line has been productive, you
can use the 'pline' request before and after it to see whether it
produced any output nodes.  See Debugging.

   (5) See Line Continuation.

   (6) The '.R' register interpolates the largest value that GNU 'troff'
can work with.  Recall Built-in Registers.

   (7) Recall Filling and Sentences for the definitions of word and
sentence boundaries, respectively.

   (8) See Font Description File Format.  This request is incorrectly
documented in the AT&T 'troff' manual as using units of 1/36 em.

5.10 Manipulating Hyphenation
=============================

When filling, GNU 'troff' hyphenates words as needed at user-specified
and automatically determined hyphenation points.  The machine-driven
determination of hyphenation points in words requires algorithms and
data, and is susceptible to conventions and preferences.  Before
tackling such "automatic hyphenation", let us consider how hyphenation
points can be set explicitly.

   Explicitly hyphenated words such as "mother-in-law" are eligible for
breaking after each of their hyphens.  Relatively few words in a
language offer such obvious break points, however, and automatic
detection of syllabic (or phonetic) boundaries for hyphenation is not
perfect,(1) (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-1) particularly for
unusual words found in technical literature.  We can instruct GNU
'troff' how to hyphenate specific words if the need arises.

 -- Request: .hw word ...
     Define each argument WORD (comprising ordinary, special, or indexed
     characters) as a "hyphenation exception word" such that each
     occurrence of a hyphen-minus '-' in WORD indicates a hyphenation
     point.  For example, the request

          .hw in-sa-lub-rious alpha

     marks potential hyphenation points in "insalubrious", and prevents
     "alpha" from being hyphenated at all.

     Besides the space character, any character whose hyphenation code
     is zero can be used to separate the arguments (see the 'hcode'
     request below).

     Hyphenation points specified with 'hw' are not subject to the
     within-word placement restrictions imposed by the 'hy' request (see
     below).

     Hyphenation exception words are associated with the hyphenation
     language (see the 'hla' request below); invoking the 'hw' request
     in the absence of a hyphenation language is an error.  Each
     hyphenation language maintains an independent set of hyphenation
     exception words.

     The formatter ignores the request if it lacks arguments.  (2)  (see
     Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-2)

     Obtain a report of hyphenation exception words on the standard
     error stream with the 'phw' request.  See Debugging.

   These are known as hyphenation exception words in the expectation
that most users will avail themselves of automatic hyphenation; these
exceptions override any rules that would normally apply to a word
matching a hyphenation exception word defined with 'hw'.

   Situations also arise when only a specific occurrence of a word needs
its hyphenation altered or suppressed, or when a URL or similar
specialized text needs to be breakable in sensible places without
hyphenation.

 -- Escape sequence: \%
 -- Escape sequence: \:
     To tell GNU 'troff' how to hyphenate words as they occur in input,
     use the '\%' escape sequence; it is the default "hyphenation
     character".  Each instance within a word indicates to GNU 'troff'
     that the word may be hyphenated at that point, while prefixing a
     word with this escape sequence prevents it from being otherwise
     hyphenated.  This mechanism affects only that occurrence of the
     word; to change the hyphenation of a word for the remainder of
     input processing, use the 'hw' request.

     GNU 'troff' regards the escape sequences '\X' and '\Y' as starting
     a word; that is, the '\%' escape sequence in, say,
     '\X'...'\%foobar' or '\Y'...'\%foobar' no longer prevents
     hyphenation of 'foobar' but inserts a hyphenation point just prior
     to it; most likely this isn't what you want.  See Postprocessor
     Access.

     '\:' inserts a non-printing break point; that is, a word can break
     there, but the soft hyphen glyph (see below) is not written to the
     output if it does.  The remainder of the word is subject to
     hyphenation as normal.

     You can combine '\:' and '\%' to control breaking of a file name or
     URL, or to permit hyphenation only after certain explicit hyphens
     within a word.

          The \%Lethbridge-Stewart-\:\%Sackville-Baggins divorce
          was, in retrospect, inevitable once the contents of
          \%/var/log/\:\%httpd/\:\%access_log on the family web
          server came to light, revealing visitors from Hogwarts.

 -- Request: .hc [char]
     Change the hyphenation character to CHAR.  This character then
     works as the '\%' escape sequence normally does, and thus no longer
     appears in the output.(3)  (see Manipulating
     Hyphenation-Footnote-3) Without an argument, 'hc' resets the
     hyphenation character to '\%' (the default).  The hyphenation
     character is associated with the environment (see Environments).

 -- Request: .shc [c]
     Set the "soft hyphen character", inserted when a word is hyphenated
     automatically or at a hyphenation character, to the ordinary or
     special character C.(4)  (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-4)
     If the argument is omitted, the soft hyphen character is set to the
     default, '\[hy]'.  If no glyph for C exists in the font in use at a
     potential hyphenation point, then the line is not broken there.
     Neither character definitions (specified with the 'char' and
     similar requests) nor translations (specified with the 'tr'
     request) are applied to C.

   Several requests influence automatic hyphenation.  Because
conventions vary, a variety of hyphenation modes is available to the
'hy' request; these determine whether hyphenation will apply to a word
prior to breaking a line at the end of a page (more or less; see below
for details), and at which positions within that word automatically
determined hyphenation points are permissible.  The places within a word
that are eligible for hyphenation are determined by language-specific
data and lettercase relationships.  Furthermore, hyphenation of a word
might be suppressed due to a limit on consecutive hyphenated lines
('hlm'), a minimum line length threshold ('hym'), or because the line
can instead be adjusted with additional inter-word space ('hys').

 -- Request: .hy [mode]
 -- Register: \n[.hy]
     Set automatic hyphenation mode to MODE, an integer encoding
     conditions for hyphenation; if omitted, the configured hyphenation
     mode default (see below) is implied.  The hyphenation mode is
     available in the read-only register '.hy'; it is associated with
     the environment (see Environments).  The hyphenation mode default
     depends on the localization file loaded when GNU 'troff' starts up;
     see the 'hpf' request below.  If no localization file is loaded,
     the default is '1'.

     Typesetting practice generally does not avail itself of every
     opportunity for hyphenation, but the details differ by language and
     site mandates.  The hyphenation modes of AT&T 'troff' were
     implemented with English-language publishing practices of the 1970s
     in mind, not a scrupulous enumeration of conceivable parameters.
     GNU 'troff' extends those modes such that finer-grained control is
     possible, favoring compatibility with older implementations over a
     more intuitive arrangement.  The means of hyphenation mode control
     is a set of numbers that can be added up to encode the behavior
     sought.(5)  (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-5) The entries
     in the following table are termed "values"; the sum of the desired
     values is the "mode".

     '0'
          disables hyphenation.

     '1'
          enables hyphenation except after the first and before the last
          character of a word.

     The remaining values "imply" 1; that is, they enable hyphenation
     under the same conditions as '.hy 1', and then apply or lift
     restrictions relative to that basis.

     '2'
          disables hyphenation of the last word on a page or column,(6)
          (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-6) even for explicitly
          hyphenated words.

     '4'
          disables hyphenation before the last two characters of a word.

     '8'
          disables hyphenation after the first two characters of a word.

     '16'
          enables hyphenation before the last character of a word.

     '32'
          enables hyphenation after the first character of a word.

     Apart from value 2, restrictions imposed by the hyphenation mode
     are _not_ respected for words whose hyphenations have been
     specified with the hyphenation character ('\%' by default) or the
     'hw' request.

     Nonzero values in the previous table are additive.  For example,
     mode 12 causes GNU 'troff' to hyphenate neither the last two nor
     the first two characters of a word.  Some values cannot be used
     together because they contradict; for instance, values 4 and 16,
     and values 8 and 32.  As noted, it is superfluous to add 1 to any
     non-zero even mode.

     The automatic placement of hyphens in words is determined by
     "pattern files", which are derived from TeX and available for
     several languages.  These files are named 'hyphen.XX' (for the
     patterns) and 'hyphenex.XX' (for a list of exceptions in languages
     that require them) where XX is an ISO 639 language code; see the
     table below.

     The number of characters at the beginning of a word after which the
     first hyphenation point should be inserted is determined by the
     patterns themselves; it can't be reduced further without
     introducing additional, invalid hyphenation points (unfortunately,
     this information is not part of a pattern file--you have to know it
     in advance).  The same is true for the number of characters at the
     end of a word before the last hyphenation point should be inserted.
     For example, you can supply the following input to 'echo $(nroff)'.

          .ll 1
          .hy 48
          splitting

     You will get

          s- plit- t- in- g

     instead of the correct 'split- ting'.  English patterns as
     distributed with GNU 'troff' need two characters at the beginning
     and three characters at the end; this means that value 4 of 'hy' is
     mandatory.  Value 8 is possible as an additional restriction, but
     values 16 and 32 should be avoided, as should mode 1.  Modes 4
     and 6 are typical.

     A table of left and right minimum character counts for hyphenation
     as needed by the patterns distributed with GNU 'troff' follows.(7)
     (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-7)

     language             pattern name   left min   right min
     -----------------------------------------------------------
     Czech                cs             2          2
     English              en             2          3
     French               fr             2          3
     German traditional   det            2          2
     German reformed      den            2          2
     Italian              it             2          2
     Polish               pl             2          2
     Russian              ru             2          2
     Spanish              es             2          2
     Swedish              sv             1          2

     Hyphenation exceptions within pattern files (that is, the words
     within a TeX '\hyphenation' group) obey hyphenation restrictions
     imposed by 'hy'.

 -- Request: .nh
     Disable automatic hyphenation; i.e., set the hyphenation mode to 0
     (see above).  The hyphenation mode of the last call to 'hy' is not
     remembered, but invoking 'hy' without an argument restores the
     hyphenation mode default; 'groff''s localization macro files do so
     for the languages listed above.

 -- Request: .hydefault [mode]
 -- Register: \n[.hydefault]
     Set hyphenation mode default to MODE, configuring the value the
     automatic hyphenation mode takes if 'hy' is invoked without an
     argument.  The hyphenation mode default is available in the
     read-only register '.hydefault'; it is associated with the
     environment.(8)  (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-8)

 -- Request: .hpf ["]pattern-file
 -- Request: .hpfa ["]pattern-file
     Read hyphenation patterns from PATTERN-FILE, which is sought in the
     same way that macro files are with the 'mso' request or the '-m
     MAC' command-line option to 'groff'.  The PATTERN-FILE should have
     the same format as (simple) TeX pattern files.  More specifically,
     the following scanning rules are implemented.

        * A percent sign starts a comment (up to the end of the line)
          even if preceded by a backslash.

        * "Digraphs" like '\$' are not supported.

        * '^^XX' (where each X is 0-9 or a-f) and '^^C' (character C in
          the code point range 0-127 decimal) are recognized; other uses
          of '^' cause an error.

        * No macro expansion is performed.

        * 'hpf' checks for the expression '\patterns{...}' (possibly
          with whitespace before or after the braces).  Everything
          between the braces is taken as hyphenation patterns.
          Consequently, '{' and '}' are not allowed in patterns.

        * Similarly, '\hyphenation{...}' gives a list of hyphenation
          exceptions.

        * '\endinput' is recognized also.

        * For backward compatibility, if '\patterns' is missing, the
          whole file is treated as a list of hyphenation patterns
          (except that the '%' character is recognized as the start of a
          comment).

     The 'hpfa' request appends a file of patterns to the current list.

     GNU 'troff' ties the set of hyphenation patterns to the hyphenation
     language code selected by the 'hla' request (see below).  The 'hpf'
     request is usually invoked by a localization file loaded by the
     'troffrc' file.(9)  (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-9)

     A second call to 'hpf' (for the same language) replaces the
     hyphenation patterns with the new ones.  Invoking 'hpf' or 'hpfa'
     causes an error if there is no hyphenation language.  If no 'hpf'
     request is specified (either in the document, in a file loaded at
     startup, or in a macro package), GNU 'troff' won't automatically
     hyphenate at all.

     *Caution:* The 'hpf' and 'hpfa' requests interpret the remainder of
     the input line as the file name argument, including any spaces, up
     to a newline or comment escape sequence.  Suffixing the file name
     with a comment, even an empty one, prevents unwanted space from
     creeping into it during source document maintenance.(10)  (see
     Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-10)

   For automatic hyphenation to work, the formatter must know which
letters are equivalent.  For example, the letter 'E' behaves like 'e';
only the latter typically appears in hyphenation pattern files.  GNU
'troff' expects characters that participate in automatic hyphenation to
be assigned "hyphenation codes" that define these equivalence classes.
At startup, GNU 'troff' assigns hyphenation codes to the letters
'a'-'z', applies the same codes to 'A'-'Z' in one-to-one correspondence,
and assigns a code of zero to all other characters.

   The 'hcode' request enables application of hyphenation codes to
characters outside the Unicode basic Latin set; without doing so, words
containing such letters won't hyphenate properly even if the
corresponding hyphenation patterns contain them.  Localization files for
the input character set and language configure hyphenation codes; see
'groff_tmac(5)'.

 -- Request: .hcode dst1 src1 [dst2 src2] ...
     Set the hyphenation code of ordinary or special character DST1 to
     that of SRC1, and so on.  DST1 must be an ordinary character (other
     than a numeral) or a special character, and SRC1 must be an
     ordinary character (other than a numeral) or a special character to
     which a hyphenation code has already been applied.  Assigning the
     code of an ordinary character to itself effectively creates a
     unique hyphenation code (which can then be copied to others).
     'hcode' ignores spaces between arguments.  If any argument is
     invalid, 'hcode' reports an error and stops reading them.

     For example, the following 'hcode' requests are necessary to assign
     hyphenation codes to the letters 'ÄäÖöÜüß', needed for German.

          .hcode ä ä  Ä ä
          .hcode ö ö  Ö ö
          .hcode ü ü  Ü ü
          .hcode ß ß

     Without these assignments, GNU 'troff' treats the German word
     'Kindergärten' (the plural form of 'kindergarten') as two words
     'kinderg' and 'rten' because the hyphenation code of the umlaut a
     is zero by default, just like a space.  There is a German
     hyphenation pattern that covers 'kinder', so GNU 'troff' finds the
     hyphenation 'kin-der'.  The other two hyphenation points
     ('kin-der-gär-ten') are missed.

     To remove a character's hyphenation code, copy the code of a
     character with a hyphenation code value of zero to it.  For
     example, '.hcode ß $' removes the hyphenation code from 'ß' (unless
     '$' has already been assigned a different one).

     The 'pchar' request may be helpful to troubleshoot hyphenation code
     assignments.  See Debugging.

 -- Request: .hpfcode a b [c d] ...
     *Caution:* This request will be withdrawn in a future 'groff'
     release.  Use 'hcode' instead.

     The 'hpfcode' request defines mapping values for character codes in
     pattern files.  It is an older mechanism no longer used by GNU
     'troff''s own macro files.  'hpf' or 'hpfa' apply the mapping after
     reading the patterns but before replacing or appending to the
     active list of patterns.  Its arguments are pairs of character
     codes--integers from 0 to 255.  The request maps character code A
     to code B, code C to code D, and so on.  Character codes that would
     otherwise be invalid in GNU 'troff' can be used.

 -- Request: .hla [lang]
 -- Register: \n[.hla]
     Set the hyphenation language to LANG, or clear it if there is no
     argument.  Hyphenation exceptions specified with the 'hw' request
     and hyphenation patterns and exceptions specified with the 'hpf'
     and 'hpfa' requests are associated with the hyphenation language.
     The 'hla' request is usually invoked by a localization file, which
     is turn loaded by the 'troffrc' or 'troffrc-end' file; see the
     'hpf' request above.

     The hyphenation language is available in the read-only
     string-valued register '.hla'; it is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).

     If no hyphenation language is set or no patterns are loaded, GNU
     'troff' does not perform automatic hyphenation.

 -- Request: .hlm [n]
 -- Register: \n[.hlm]
 -- Register: \n[.hlc]
     Set the maximum quantity of consecutive hyphenated lines to N.  If
     N is negative, there is no maximum.  If omitted, N is -1.  This
     value is associated with the environment (see Environments).  Only
     lines output from a given environment count toward the maximum
     associated with that environment.  Hyphens resulting from '\%' are
     counted; explicit hyphens are not.

     The '.hlm' read-only register stores this maximum.  The count of
     immediately preceding consecutive hyphenated lines is available in
     the read-only register '.hlc'.

 -- Request: .hym [length]
 -- Register: \n[.hym]
     Set the (right) hyphenation margin to LENGTH.  If the adjustment
     mode is not 'b' or 'n', the line is not hyphenated if it is shorter
     than LENGTH.  Without an argument, the hyphenation margin is reset
     to its default value, 0.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  The
     hyphenation margin is associated with the environment (see
     Environments).

     A negative argument resets the hyphenation margin to zero.  (11)
     (see Manipulating Hyphenation-Footnote-11)

     The hyphenation margin is available in the '.hym' read-only
     register.

 -- Request: .hys [hyphenation-space]
 -- Register: \n[.hys]
     Suppress hyphenation of the line in adjustment modes 'b' or 'n' if
     that adjustment can be achieved by adding no more than
     HYPHENATION-SPACE extra space to each inter-word space.  Without an
     argument, the hyphenation space adjustment threshold is set to its
     default value, 0.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  The
     hyphenation space adjustment threshold is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).

     A negative argument resets the hyphenation space adjustment
     threshold to zero.  (12)  (see Manipulating
     Hyphenation-Footnote-12)

     The hyphenation space adjustment threshold is available in the
     '.hys' read-only register.

   (1) Whether a perfect algorithm for this application is even possible
is an unsolved problem in computer science:
<https://tug.org/docs/liang/liang-thesis.pdf>.

   (2) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'missing'.  See Warnings.

   (3) '\%' itself stops marking hyphenation points but still produces
no output glyph.

   (4) "Soft" because it appears in output only where a hyphenation
break is performed; a "hard" hyphen, as in "long-term", always appears.

   (5) The mode is a vector of Boolean values encoded as an integer.  To
a programmer, this fact is easily deduced from the exclusive use of
powers of two for the configuration parameters; they are computationally
easy to "mask off" and compare to zero.  To almost everyone else, the
arrangement seems recondite and unfriendly.

   (6) The formatter prevents hyphenation if the next page location trap
is closer to the vertical drawing position than the next text baseline
would be.  See Page Location Traps.  A macro package might also employ
value '2' to prevent hyphenation before a display; recall Displays and
Keeps.

   (7) See subsection "Localization packages" of 'groff_tmac(5)'.

   (8) See Environments.

   (9) For more detail on localization, see 'groff_tmac(5)'.

   (10) See the discussion of the 'ds' request in Strings.

   (11) GNU 'troff' also emits a warning in category 'range'.  See
Warnings.

   (12) GNU 'troff' also emits a warning in category 'range'.  See
Warnings.

5.11 Manipulating Spacing
=========================

A break causes the formatter to update the vertical drawing position at
which the new text baseline is placed; you can alter this location.

 -- Request: .sp [vertical-distance]
     Break and move the next text baseline down by DISTANCE, or until
     springing a page location trap.(1)  (see Manipulating
     Spacing-Footnote-1) If invoked with the no-break control character,
     'sp' moves the text baseline applicable to the entire pending
     output line by VERTICAL-DISTANCE.(2)  (see Manipulating
     Spacing-Footnote-2) A negative VERTICAL-DISTANCE cannot reduce the
     position of the text baseline below zero.  Inside a diversion, the
     formatter ignores any argument.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.
     Omitting VERTICAL-DISTANCE implies '1v'.

          .pl 5v \" Set page length to 5 vees.
          .de xx
          \-\-\-
          .  br
          ..
          .wh 0 xx \" Set a trap at the top of the page.
          foo on page \n%
          .sp 2v
          bar on page \n%
          .sp 50v \" This will cause a page break.
          baz on page \n%
          .pl \n(nlu \" Truncate page to current position.
              => ---
              => foo on page 1
              =>
              =>
              => bar on page 1
              => ---
              => baz on page 2

     The following macros place the next text baseline relative to the
     page top or bottom.  We subtract one line height ('\n[.v]') because
     the '|' operator moves the drawing position relative to the first
     baseline on the page (recall Numeric Expressions).

          .de y-from-top-down
          .  sp |\\$1-\\n[.v]u
          ..
          .de y-from-bot-up
          .  sp |\\n[.p]u-\\$1-\\n[.v]u
          ..

     The input '.y-from-bot-up 10c' sets the next text baseline 10 cm
     from the bottom edge of the paper.

     Applying the boundary-relative measurement operator '|' operator to
     VERTICAL-DISTANCE, as in '|'N, moves to a position relative to the
     page top for positive N, and the bottom if N is negative.

 -- Request: .ls [count]
 -- Register: \n[.L]
     Set the line spacing; add COUNT-1 blank lines after each line of
     text.  With no argument, GNU 'troff' uses the previous value before
     the last 'ls' call.  The default is '1'.

     The read-only register '.L' contains the current line spacing; it
     is associated with the environment (see Environments).

   The 'ls' request is a coarse mechanism.  See Changing the Type Size,
for the requests 'vs' and 'pvs' as alternatives to 'ls'.

     .de SetNewLineSpacing
     .  if r *old-vs .ab cannot nest SetNewLineSpacing
     .  nr *old-vs \\n[.v]
     .  vs (\\n[.v] * \\$1)
     ..
     .
     .de RestoreOldLineSpacing
     .  vs \\n[*old-vs]
     .  rr *old-vs
     ..

 -- Escape sequence: \x'spacing'
 -- Register: \n[.a]
     Sometimes, an output line requires additional vertical spacing, for
     instance to allow room for a tall construct like an inline equation
     with exponents or subscripts (particularly if they are iterated).
     The '\x' escape sequence takes a delimited measurement (like
     '\x'3p'') to increase the vertical spacing of the pending output
     line.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.  If the measurement is
     positive, extra vertical space is inserted below the current line;
     a negative measurement adds space above.  If '\x' is applied to the
     pending output line multiple times, the maxima of the positive and
     negative adjustments are separately applied.  The delimiter need
     not be a neutral apostrophe; see Delimiters.

     The '.a' read-only register contains the extra vertical spacing
     _after_ the text baseline of the most recently emitted output line.
     (In other words, it is the largest positive argument to '\x'
     encountered on that line.)  This quantity is exposed via a register
     because if an output line requires this "extra post-vertical line
     spacing", and the subsequent output line requires "extra
     pre-vertical line spacing" (a negative argument to '\x'), then
     applying both can lead to excessive spacing between the output
     lines.  Text that is piling high on line N might not require (as
     much) extra pre-vertical line spacing if line N-1 carries extra
     post-vertical line spacing.

     Use of '\x' can be necessary in combination with the
     bracket-building escape sequence '\b',(3) (see Manipulating
     Spacing-Footnote-3) as the following example shows.

          .nf
          This is a test of \[rs]b (1).
          This is a test of \[rs]b (2).
          This is a test of \b'xyz'\x'-1m'\x'1m' (3).
          This is a test of \[rs]b (4).
          This is a test of \[rs]b (5).
              => This is a test of \b (1).
              => This is a test of \b (2).
              =>                   x
              => This is a test of y (3).
              =>                   z
              => This is a test of \b (4).
              => This is a test of \b (5).

Without '\x', the backslashes on the lines marked '(2)' and '(4)' would
be overprinted.

 -- Request: .ns
 -- Request: .rs
 -- Register: \n[.ns]
     Enable "no-space mode".  Vertical spacing, whether by 'sp' requests
     or blank input lines, is disabled.  The 'bp' request to advance to
     the next page is also disabled, unless it is accompanied by a page
     number (see Page Control).  No-space mode ends automatically when
     text(4) (see Manipulating Spacing-Footnote-4) is formatted for
     output (5) (see Manipulating Spacing-Footnote-5) or the 'rs'
     request is invoked, which ends no-space mode.  The read-only
     register '.ns' interpolates a Boolean value indicating the
     enablement of no-space mode.

     A paragraphing macro might ordinarily insert vertical space to
     separate paragraphs.  A section heading macro could invoke 'ns' to
     suppress this spacing for the first paragraph in a section.

   (1) See Page Location Traps.

   (2) To shift the text baseline for _part_ of an output line--to set
super- or subscripts, for instance-use the '\v' escape sequence.  See
Page Motions.

   (3) See Drawing Geometric Objects.

   (4) or geometric objects; see Drawing Geometric Objects

   (5) to the top-level diversion; see Diversions

5.12 Tabs and Fields
====================

A tab character (code point 9) causes a horizontal movement to the next
tab stop, if any.

 -- Escape sequence: \t
     Interpolate a tab in copy mode; see Copy Mode.

 -- Request: .ta [[n1 n2 ... nn ]T r1 r2 ... rn]
 -- Register: \n[.tabs]
     Set tab stop positions.  This request takes a series of tab
     specifiers as arguments (optionally divided into two groups with
     the letter 'T') that indicate where each tab stop is to be,
     overriding any previous settings.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.
     Invoking 'ta' without arguments removes all tab stops.  GNU
     'troff''s startup value is 'T 0.5i'.

     Tab stops can be specified absolutely--as distances from the left
     margin.  The following example sets six tab stops, one every inch.

          .ta 1i 2i 3i 4i 5i 6i

     Tab stops can also be specified using a leading '+', which means
     that the specified tab stop is set relative to the previous tab
     stop.  For example, the following is equivalent to the previous
     example.

          .ta 1i +1i +1i +1i +1i +1i

     GNU 'troff' supports an extended syntax to specify repeating tab
     stops.  These stops appear after a 'T' argument.  Their values are
     always taken as distances relative to the previous tab stop.  This
     is the idiomatic way to specify tab stops at equal intervals in
     'groff'.  The following is, yet again, the same as the previous
     examples.  It does more, in fact, since it defines an infinite
     number of tab stops at one-inch intervals.

          .ta T 1i

     Now we are ready to interpret the full syntax given above.  The
     'ta' request sets tabs at positions N1, N2, ..., NN, then at NN+R1,
     NN+R2, ..., NN+RN, then at NN+RN+R1, NN+RN+R2, ..., NN+RN+RN, and
     so on.  For example, '4c +6c T 3c 5c 2c' is equivalent to '4c 10c
     13c 18c 20c 23c 28c 30c ...'.

     Text between two tab stops may be aligned to the right or left, or
     centered.  This alignment is determined by appending 'R', 'L', or
     'C' to the tab specifier.  The default is 'L'.

          .ta 1i 2iC 3iR

     The beginning of an output line is not a tab stop; the text that
     begins an output line is placed according to the configured
     alignment and indentation; see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment
     and Line Layout.

     A tab stop becomes a non-breakable horizontal movement that cannot
     be adjusted.

          .ll 2i
          .ta T 1i
          a->b->c
              error-> warning: cannot adjust line; overset by 1n
              => a         b         c

     The above creates a single output line that is a bit longer than
     two inches.  Now consider the following.

          .ll 2i
          .ta T 1i
          a->b c->d
              error-> warning: cannot adjust line; underset by 9n
              => a         b
              => c       d

     GNU 'troff' first converts the line's tab stops into unbreakable
     horizontal movements, then breaks after 'b'.  This usually isn't
     what you want.

     Superfluous tab characters--those that do not correspond to a tab
     stop--are ignored except for the first, which delimits the
     characters belonging to the last tab stop for right-alignment or
     centering.

          .nf
          .ta 2i 4iR
          \l'4i\&-'
          foo->bar
          foo->bar->baz
          foo->bar->bazqux
          foo->bar->baz->qux
              => ----------------------------------------
              => foo                 bar
              => foo                 bar              baz
              => foo                 bar           bazqux
              => foo                 bar              bazqux

     We see that "bar" is between the first and second tab stops, not
     the second and (nonexistent) third.  The first "baz" is
     right-aligned within the second tab stop.  The second is catenated
     with "qux" and right-aligned within it.  The third "baz" is aligned
     like the first because the tab character after it determines the
     right boundary of the tab stop.

     Tab stops are associated with the environment (see Environments).

     The read-only register '.tabs' contains a string representation of
     the current tab settings suitable for use as an argument to the
     'ta' request.(1)  (see Tabs and Fields-Footnote-1)

          .ds tab-string \n[.tabs]
          \*[tab-string]
              => T120u

 -- Request: .tc [c]
     Set the tab repetition character to the ordinary or special
     character C; normally, no glyph is written when moving to a tab
     stop (and some output devices may output space characters to
     achieve this motion).  A "tab repetition character" causes the
     formatter to write as many instances of C as are necessary to
     occupy the interval from the horizontal drawing position to the
     next tab stop.  With no argument, GNU 'troff' reverts to the
     default behavior.  The tab repetition character is associated with
     the environment (see Environments).  Only a single character of C
     is recognized; any excess is ignored.

 -- Request: .linetabs [b]
 -- Register: \n[.linetabs]
     Activate or deactivate line-tabs in the environment per Boolean
     expression B.  They are inactive by default, and activated if B is
     omitted.  When line-tabs are active, tab stops are computed
     relative to the start of the pending output line instead of the
     drawing position corresponding to the start of the input line.

          .ta 1i 3i
          a->\c
          b->\c
          c
          .br
          .linetabs
          a->\c
          b->\c
          c
              => a         b         c
              => a         b                   c

     The read-only register '.linetabs' interpolates 1 if line-tabs are
     active, and 0 otherwise.

   (1) Plan 9 'troff' uses the register '.S' for this purpose.

5.12.1 Leaders
--------------

Sometimes it is desirable to fill a tab stop with a given glyph, but
also use tab stops normally on the same output line.  An example is a
table of contents entry that uses dots to bridge the entry name with its
page number, which is itself aligned between tab stops.  The 'roff'
language provides "leaders" for this purpose.(1)  (see
Leaders-Footnote-1)

   A leader character (code point 1, also known as SOH or "start of
heading"), behaves similarly to a tab character: it moves to the next
tab stop.  The difference is that for this movement, the default fill
character is a period '.'.

 -- Escape sequence: \a
     Interpolate a leader in copy mode; see Copy Mode.

 -- Request: .lc [c]
     Set the leader repetition character to the ordinary or special
     character C.  Recall Tabs and Leaders: when encountering a leader
     character in the input, the formatter writes as many dots '.' as
     are necessary until reaching the next tab stop; this is the "leader
     definition character".  Omitting C unsets the leader character.
     With no argument, GNU 'troff' treats leaders the same as tabs.  The
     leader repetition character is associated with the environment (see
     Environments).  Only a single C is recognized; any excess is
     ignored.

   A table of contents, for example, may define tab stops after a
section number, a title, and a gap to be filled with leader dots.  The
page number follows the leader, after a right-aligned final tab stop
wide enough to house the largest page number occurring in the document.

     .ds entry1 19.\tThe Prophet\a\t98
     .ds entry2 20.\tAll Astir\a\t101
     .ta .5i 4.5i +.5iR
     .nf
     \*[entry1]
     \*[entry2]
         => 19.  The Prophet.............................   98
         => 20.  All Astir...............................  101

   (1) Pronounce "leader" to rhyme with "feeder"; it refers to how the
glyphs "lead" the eye across the page to the corresponding page number
or other datum.

5.12.2 Fields
-------------

"Fields" are a more general way of laying out tabular data.  A field is
defined as the data between a pair of "delimiting characters".  It
contains substrings that are separated by "padding characters".  The
width of a field is the distance on the _input_ line from the position
where the field starts to the next tab stop.  A padding character
inserts an adjustable space similar to TeX's '\hss' command (thus it can
even be negative) to make the sum of all substring lengths plus the
adjustable space equal to the field width.  If more than one padding
character is inserted, the available space is evenly distributed among
them.

 -- Request: .fc [delim-char [padding-char]]
     Define a delimiting and a padding character for fields.  If the
     latter is missing, the padding character defaults to a space
     character.  If there is no argument at all, the field mechanism is
     disabled (which is the default).  In contrast to, e.g., the tab
     repetition character, delimiting and padding characters are _not_
     associated with the environment (see Environments).

          .fc # ^
          .ta T 3i
          #foo^bar^smurf#
          .br
          #foo^^bar^smurf#
              => foo         bar          smurf
              => foo            bar       smurf

5.13 Character Translations
===========================

A "translation" is a mapping of an input character to an output glyph.
The mapping occurs at output time, i.e., the input character gets
assigned the metric information of the mapped output character right
before tokens are converted to nodes (see GNU troff Internals, for more
on this process).

 -- Request: .tr abcd...
 -- Request: .trin abcd...
     Translate character A to glyph B, character C to glyph D, and so
     on.  If there is an odd number of characters in the argument, the
     last one is translated to a fixed-width space (the same one
     obtained by the '\<SPC>' escape sequence).

     The 'trin' request works as does 'tr', except that 'asciify' (see
     Diversions) ignores the translation when a diversion is
     interpolated.

     Some notes:

        * Special characters ('\(XX', '\[XXX]', '\C'XXX'', '\'', '\`',
          '\-', '\_'), glyphs defined with the 'char' request, and
          numbered glyphs ('\N'XXX'') can be translated also.

        * The '\e' escape can be translated also.

        * Characters can be mapped onto the '\%' and '\~' escape
          sequences (but '\%' and '\~' can't be mapped onto another
          glyph).

        * The following characters can't be translated: space (with one
          exception, see below), backspace, newline, leader (and '\a'),
          tab (and '\t').

        * Translations are not considered for finding the soft hyphen
          character set with the 'shc' request.

        * The pair 'C\&' (an arbitrary character C followed by the dummy
          character) maps this character to "nothing".

               .tr a\&
               foo bar
                   => foo br

          Even the space character can be mapped to the dummy character.

               .tr aa \&
               foo bar
                   => foobar

          As shown in the example, the space character can't be the
          first character/glyph pair as an argument of 'tr'.
          Additionally, it is not possible to map the space character to
          any other glyph; requests like '.tr aa x' undo '.tr aa \&'
          instead.

          If adjustment is enabled, it occurs in spite of the 'empty'
          space character; but no minimum distance--no minimum
          inter-word space--separates words).

        * After an output glyph has been constructed (this happens at
          the moment immediately before the glyph is appended to an
          output glyph list, either by direct output, in a macro,
          diversion, or string), it is no longer affected by 'tr'.

        * Translating character to glyphs where one of them or both are
          undefined is possible also; 'tr' does not check whether the
          elements of its argument exist.

          See GNU troff Internals.

        * Without an argument, the 'tr' request is ignored.

 -- Request: .trnt abcd...
     'trnt' is the same as the 'tr' request except that the translations
     do not apply to text that is transparently throughput into a
     diversion with '\!'.  See Diversions.

     For example,

          .tr ab
          .di x
          \!.tm a
          .di
          .x

     prints 'b' to the standard error stream; if 'trnt' is used instead
     of 'tr' it prints 'a'.

5.14 'troff' and 'nroff' Modes
==============================

Historically, 'nroff' and 'troff' were two separate programs; the former
for terminal output, the latter for typesetters.  GNU 'troff' merges
both functions into one executable(1) (see troff and nroff
Modes-Footnote-1) that sends its output to a device driver ('grotty' for
terminal devices, 'grops' for PostScript, and so on) that interprets its
output.  When discussing AT&T 'troff', it makes sense to talk about
"'nroff' mode" and "'troff' mode" since the differences are hard-coded.
GNU 'troff' takes information from device and font description files
without handling requests specially if a terminal output device is used,
so such a strong distinction is unnecessary.

   Usually, a macro package can be used with all output devices.
Nevertheless, it is sometimes necessary to make a distinction between
terminal and non-terminal devices: GNU 'troff' provides two built-in
conditions 'n' and 't' for the 'if', 'ie', and 'while' requests to
decide whether GNU 'troff' shall behave like 'nroff' or like 'troff'.(2)
(see troff and nroff Modes-Footnote-2)

 -- Request: .troff
     Make the 't' built-in condition true (and the 'n' built-in
     condition false) for 'if', 'ie', and 'while' conditional requests.
     This is the default if GNU 'troff' (_not_ 'groff') is started with
     the '-R' switch to avoid loading of the startup files 'troffrc' and
     'troffrc-end'.  Without '-R', GNU 'troff' stays in 'troff' mode if
     the output device is not a terminal (e.g., 'ps').

 -- Request: .nroff
     Make the 'n' built-in condition true (and the 't' built-in
     condition false) for 'if', 'ie', and 'while' conditional requests.
     This is the default if GNU 'troff' uses a terminal output device;
     the code for switching to 'nroff' mode is in the file 'tty.tmac',
     which is loaded by the startup file 'troffrc'.

   (1) A GNU 'nroff' program is available for convenience; it runs GNU
'troff' to perform formatting; see 'nroff(1)'.

   (2) See Conditionals and Loops, for more on built-in conditions.

5.15 Line Layout
================

The following drawing shows the dimensions that GNU 'troff' uses to
arrange a line of output on the page.  Each dimension is labeled with
the name of the request that configures it.

          -->| in |<--
             |<-----------ll------------>|
        +----+----+----------------------+----+
        |    :    :                      :    |
        +----+----+----------------------+----+
     -->| po |<--
        |<--------paper width---------------->|

The dimensions are defined as follows.

'po' The "page offset" is the leftmost position of running text.
     
'in' "Indentation" is the distance from the page offset at which text
     is set.
     
'll' "Line length" is the maximum extent of unindented running text.

   The page offset can be thought of as the "left margin".  The right
margin is not explicitly configured; the combination of page offset and
line length provides the information necessary to derive it.

     .ll 3i
     This is text without indentation.
     The line length has been set to 3\~inches.
     .in +.5i
     .ll -.5i
     Now the left and right margins are both increased.
     .in
     .ll
     Calling .in and .ll without parameters restores
     the previous values.

         => This  is text without indenta-
         => tion.   The  line  length  has
         => been set to 3 inches.
         =>      Now   the  left  and
         =>      right  margins   are
         =>      both increased.
         => Calling  .in  and  .ll without
         => parameters restores the previ-
         => ous values.

   Requests exist to place line numbers and margin characters beyond the
page margins; Miscellaneous.

 -- Request: .po [offset]
 -- Request: .po +offset
 -- Request: .po -offset
 -- Register: \n[.o]
     Set page offset to OFFSET; if OFFSET is signed, adjust the page
     offset by its value.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  The default
     offset is 1i on typesetters and zero on terminals.

     If OFFSET is omitted, the page offset is reset to that before the
     previous invocation of 'po'.

     The page offset can be found in the read-only register '.o'.  This
     request is incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff' manual as
     using a default scaling unit of 'v'.

          .po 3i
          \n[.o]
              => 720
          .po -1i
          \n[.o]
              => 480
          .po
          \n[.o]
              => 720

 -- Request: .in [indent]
 -- Request: .in +indent
 -- Request: .in -indent
 -- Register: \n[.i]
     Set indentation to INDENT; if INDENT is signed, adjust the
     indentation by its value.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.
     Initially, there is no indentation.  This request causes a break.

     If INDENT is omitted, the indentation is reset to that before the
     previous invocation of 'in', and zero if there is none.  If INDENT
     is negative, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'range' and
     sets the indentation to zero; a temporary indentation (see below)
     is reset to zero as well.

     The formatter delays the effect of 'in' until it has emitted any
     partially collected line.  In other words, 'in' does not change a
     pending output line's indentation.

     The read-only register '.i' interpolates the indentation amount,
     ignoring temporary indentation (see below).  The indentation amount
     is associated with the environment (see Environments).

 -- Request: .ti offset
 -- Request: .ti +offset
 -- Request: .ti -offset
 -- Register: \n[.in]
     Temporarily indent the next output line by OFFSET; if OFFSET is
     signed, adjust the temporary indentation relative to the value set
     by the 'in' request.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  This
     request causes a break.

     Omitting OFFSET causes a warning in category 'missing'.

     The effect of 'ti' is delayed until a partially collected line (if
     it exists) is output.  In other words, it does not change a pending
     output line's indentation.

     The read-only register '.in' reports the indentation that applies
     to the pending output line.  The temporary indentation is
     associated with the environment (see Environments).

 -- Request: .ll [length]
 -- Request: .ll +length
 -- Request: .ll -length
 -- Register: \n[.l]
 -- Register: \n[.ll]
     Change (increase or decrease) the line length per the numeric
     expression LENGTH.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  If not
     otherwise configured (see see Paper Format), the default line
     length is 6.5i.  If LENGTH is invalid, GNU 'troff' emits a warning
     in category 'number' and ignores the request.  If LENGTH is
     nonpositive, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'range' and
     sets the line length to the device's horizontal motion quantum;
     recall Motion Quanta.  The line length is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).  If LENGTH is omitted, GNU 'troff'
     restores the environment's previous line length.

     The effect of 'll' is delayed until a partially collected line (if
     it exists) is output.  In other words, it does not change a pending
     output line's length.

     The line length as set by 'll' can be found in the read-only
     register '.l'.  The read-only register '.ll' is the line length
     that applies to the pending output line.

     Similarly to '.i' and '.in', the difference between '.l' and '.ll'
     is that the latter takes into account whether a partially collected
     line still uses the previous length.

5.16 Line Continuation
======================

When filling is enabled, input and output line breaks generally do not
correspond.  The 'roff' language therefore distinguishes input and
output line continuation.

 -- Escape sequence: \<RET>
     '\<RET>' (a backslash immediately followed by a newline) suppresses
     the effects of that newline in the input.  The next input line thus
     retains the classification of its predecessor as a control or text
     line.  '\<RET>' is useful for managing line lengths in the input
     during document maintenance; you can even break an input line in
     the middle of a word, request invocation, macro call, or escape
     sequence.  Input line continuation is invisible to the formatter,
     with two exceptions: the '|' operator recognizes the new input line
     (see Numeric Expressions), and the input line counter register '.c'
     increments.  '\RET' is interpreted even in copy mode.(1)  (see Line
     Continuation-Footnote-1)

          .ll 50n
          .de I
          .  ft I
          .  nop \\$*
          .  ft
          ..
          Our film class watched
          .I The Effect of Gamma Rays on Man-in-the-Moon
          Marigolds. \" whoops, the input line wrapped
          .br
          .I My own opus begins on line \n[.c] \
          and ends on line \n[.c].
              => Our film class watched The Effect of Gamma Rays on
              => Man-in-the-Moon Marigolds.
              => My own opus begins on line 11 and ends on line 12.

 -- Escape sequence: \c
 -- Register: \n[.int]
     '\c' continues an output line.  Nothing after it on the input line
     is formatted.  In contrast to '\<RET>', a line after '\c' remains a
     new input line, so a control character is recognized at its
     beginning.  The visual results depend on whether filling is
     enabled; see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.

        * If filling is enabled, a word interrupted with '\c' is
          continued with the text on the next input text line, without
          an intervening space.

               This is a te\c
               st.
                   => This is a test.

        * If filling is disabled, the next input text line after '\c' is
          handled as a continuation of the same input text line.

               .nf
               This is a \c
               test.
                   => This is a test.

     An intervening control line that causes a break overrides '\c',
     flushing out the pending output line in the usual way.

     The '.int' register interpolates a positive value only if the
     pending output line has been continued with '\c'; this datum is
     associated with the environment (see Environments).(2)  (see Line
     Continuation-Footnote-2)

   (1) See Copy Mode.

   (2) Historically, the '\c' escape sequence has proven challenging to
characterize.  Some sources say it "connects the next input text" (to
the input line on which it appears); others describe it as
"interrupting" text, on the grounds that a text line is interrupted
without breaking, perhaps to inject a request invocation or macro call.

5.17 Page Layout
================

The formatter permits configuration of the page length and page number.

 -- Request: .pl [length]
 -- Request: .pl +length
 -- Request: .pl -length
 -- Register: \n[.p]
     Change (increase or decrease) the page length per the numeric
     expression LENGTH.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.  If LENGTH is
     invalid, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'number'.  If
     LENGTH is absent or invalid, '11i' is assumed.  If LENGTH is
     nonpositive, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'range' and
     sets the page length to the device's vertical motion quantum;
     recall Motion Quanta.

     The read-only register '.p' interpolates the current page length.

 -- Request: .pn num
 -- Request: .pn +num
 -- Request: .pn -num
 -- Register: \n[.pn]
     Change (increase or decrease) the page number of the _next_ page
     per the numeric expression NUM.  If NUM is invalid, GNU 'troff'
     emits a warning in category 'number' and ignores the request.
     Without an argument, 'pn' is ignored.

     The read-only register '.pn' interpolates NUM if set by 'pn' on the
     current page, or the current page number plus 1.

   The formatter offers special support for typesetting headers and
footers, collectively termed "titles".  Titles have an independent line
length, and their placement on the page is not restricted.

 -- Request: .tl 'left'center'right'
     Format an output line as a title consisting of LEFT, CENTER, and
     RIGHT, each aligned accordingly.  The delimiter need not be a
     neutral apostrophe: 'tl' accepts the same delimiters as most escape
     sequences; see Delimiters.  If not used as the delimiter, any "page
     number character" character is replaced with the current page
     number; the default is '%'; see the the 'pc' request below.
     Without an argument, 'tl' is ignored.  'tl' writes the title line
     immediately, ignoring any partially collected line.

     It is not an error to omit delimiters after the first.  For
     example, '.tl /Thesis' is interpreted as '.tl /Thesis///': it sets
     a title line comprising only the left-aligned word 'Thesis'.

 -- Request: .lt [length]
 -- Request: .lt +length
 -- Request: .lt -length
 -- Register: \n[.lt]
     Change (increase or decrease) the line length used by titles per
     the numeric expression LENGTH.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.
     The formatter's default title length is '6.5i'.  If LENGTH is
     invalid, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'number' and
     ignores the request.  If LENGTH is nonpositive, GNU 'troff' emits a
     warning in category 'range' and sets the title line length to the
     device's horizontal motion quantum; recall Motion Quanta.  The
     title length is is associated with the environment (see
     Environments).  If LENGTH is omitted, GNU 'troff' restores the
     environment's previous title length.

     The read-only register '.lt' interpolates the title line length.

 -- Request: .pc [char]
     Set the page number character to CHAR.  With no argument, the page
     number character is disabled.  'pc' does not affect the
     register '%'.

   The following example exercises title features.

     .lt 50n
     This is my partially collected
     .tl 'Isomers 2023'%'Dextrose Edition'
     line.
         => Isomers 2023             1        Dextrose Edition
         => This is my partially collected line.

   We most often see titles used in page header and footer traps.  See
Traps.

5.18 Page Control
=================

Discretionary page breaks can prevent the unwanted separation of
content.  A new page number takes effect during page ejection; see The
Implicit Page Trap.

 -- Request: .bp [page-number]
 -- Request: .bp +page-number
 -- Request: .bp -page-number
 -- Register: \n[%]
     Break the page and change (increase or decrease) the next page
     number per the numeric expression PAGE-NUMBER.  If PAGE-NUMBER is
     invalid, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'number' and
     ignores the argument.  This request causes a break.  A page break
     advances the vertical drawing position to the bottom of the page,
     springing traps.  See Page Location Traps.  'bp' has effect only if
     invoked within the top-level diversion.(1)  (see Page
     Control-Footnote-1) This request is incorrectly documented in the
     AT&T 'troff' manual as having a default scaling unit of 'v'.

     The register '%' interpolates the page number.

          .de BP
          '  bp \" schedule page break once current line is output
          ..

     *Caution:* Interpolations occur before formatting operations.  The
     process of filling, breaking, and adjusting a line can change the
     page number.  '%' is a register like any other, not a placeholder
     that is rewritten after the line it appears on is formatted.
     Consider, for example, an extremely long page number at the end of
     the last line on the page; numbers aren't hyphenated, so the word
     containing the page number might break the line and the page,
     causing the reported page number to lag by one.  This sequencing
     also means that interpolating the '%' register inside a diversion
     (such as a footnote) records the page number at the time the
     diversion is populated, not when it is output.

 -- Request: .ne [space]
     Force a page break if insufficient vertical space is available (it
     asserts "needed" space).  'ne' tests the distance to the next page
     location trap; see Page Location Traps, and breaks the page if that
     amount is less than SPACE.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.  If
     SPACE is invalid, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'number'
     and ignores the argument.  If SPACE is not specified, '1v' is
     assumed.

     We can require space for at least the first two output lines of a
     paragraph, preventing its first line from being isolated at the
     page bottom.

          .ne 2v
          Considering how common illness is,
          how tremendous the spiritual change that it brings,
          how astonishing,
          when the lights of health go down,
          the undiscovered countries that are then disclosed,
          what wastes and deserts of the soul a slight attack
          of influenza brings to view,
          what precipices and lawns sprinkled with bright flowers
          a little rise of temperature reveals,
          what ancient and obdurate oaks are uprooted in us
          in the act of sickness,
          how we go down into the pit of death
          and feel the waters of annihilation
          close above our heads.\|.\|.
          .sp
          Virgina Woolf, \[lq]On Being Ill\[rq], 1926

     This method is reliable only if no output line is pending when 'ne'
     is invoked.  When macro packages are used, this is often not the
     case: their paragraphing macros perform the break.  You may need to
     experiment with placing the 'ne' after the paragraphing macro, or
     'br' and 'ne' before it.

     'ne' is also useful to force grouping of section headings with
     their subsequent paragraphs, or tables with their captions and/or
     explanations.  Macro packages often use 'ne' with diversions to
     implement keeps and displays; see Diversions.  They may also offer
     parameters for widow and orphan management.

 -- Request: .sv [space]
 -- Request: .os
     'sv' requires vertical space as 'ne' does, but also saves it for
     later output by the 'os' request.  If SPACE is available before the
     next page location trap, it is output immediately.  Both requests
     ignore a partially collected line, taking effect at the next break.
     'sv' and 'os' ignore no-space mode (recall Manipulating Spacing).
     While the 'sv' request allows negative values for SPACE, 'os'
     ignores them.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.  If SPACE is not
     specified, '1v' is assumed.

 -- Register: \n[nl]
     'nl' interpolates the vertical drawing position as of the most
     recently typeset output line.  It does not necessarily (and often
     does not) represent that of the pending output line, because the
     formatter does not determine the position of its baseline until it
     is output; recall Manipulating Spacing.  Assigning a value to 'nl'
     sets the vertical drawing position in advance of further
     modifications to baseline positioning arising from alterations to
     type size, changes to vertical spacing, or application of extra
     pre- or post-vertical spacing.

     When the formatter starts, the transition to the first page has not
     yet happened--'nl' is negative.  If you plant a page location trap
     at vertical position '0' (idiomatically to format a header), you
     can assign a negative value to 'nl' to spring that trap even if the
     page has already started (see Page Location Traps).

          .de HD
          .  sp
          .  tl ''Goldbach Solution''
          .  sp
          ..
          .
          First page.
          .bp
          .wh 0 HD \" plant header trap at top of page
          .nr nl (-1)
          Second page.
              => First page.
              =>
              => (blank lines elided)
              =>
              =>                         Goldbach Solution
              =>
              => (blank lines elided)
              =>
              => Second page.

     Without resetting 'nl' to a negative value, the trap just planted
     would be active beginning with the _next_ page, not the current
     one.

     See Diversions, for a comparison of 'nl' with the '.h' and '.d'
     registers.

   (1) See Diversions.

5.19 Using Fonts
================

In digital typography, a "font" is a collection of characters in a
specific typeface that a device can render as glyphs at a desired
size.(1)  (see Using Fonts-Footnote-1) A 'roff' formatter can change
typefaces at any point in the text.  The basic faces are a set of
"styles" combining upright and slanted (italic or oblique) shapes with
normal and heavy stroke weights: 'R', 'I', 'B', and 'BI'--these stand
for roman, italic, bold, and bold-italic.  For linguistic text, GNU
'troff' groups typefaces into "families" containing each of these
styles.(2)  (see Using Fonts-Footnote-2) A "text font" is thus often a
family combined with a style, but it need not be: consider the 'ps' and
'pdf' devices' 'ZCMI' (Zapf Chancery Medium italic)--often, no other
style of Zapf Chancery Medium is provided.  On typesetters, at least one
"special font" is available, comprising "unstyled" glyphs for
mathematical operators and other purposes.

   Like the AT&T 'troff' formatter, GNU 'troff' does not itself load or
manipulate a digital font file;(3) (see Using Fonts-Footnote-3) instead
it works with a "font description file" that characterizes it, including
its glyph repertoire and the "metrics" (dimensions) of each glyph.(4)
(see Using Fonts-Footnote-4) This information permits the formatter to
accurately place glyphs with respect to each other.  Before using a font
description, the formatter associates it with a "mounting position", a
place in an ordered list of available typefaces.  So that a document
need not be strongly coupled to a specific font family, in GNU 'troff'
an output device can associate a style in the abstract sense with a
mounting position.  Thus the default family can be combined with a style
dynamically, producing a "resolved font name".  A user-specified font
name that combines family and style, or refers to a font that is not a
member of a family, is already "resolved".

   Fonts often have trademarked names, and even Free Software fonts can
require renaming upon modification.  'groff' maintains a convention that
a device's serif font family is given the name 'T' ("Times"), its
sans-serif family 'H' ("Helvetica"), and its monospaced family 'C'
("Courier").  Historical inertia has driven 'groff''s font identifiers
to short uppercase abbreviations of font names, as with 'TR', 'TI',
'TB', 'TBI', and a special font 'S'.

   The default family used with abstract styles is initially 'T'.
Typically, abstract styles are arranged in the first four mounting
positions in the order shown above.  The default mounting position, and
therefore style, is always '1' ('R').  By issuing appropriate formatter
instructions, you can override these defaults before your document
writes its first glyph.

   Terminals cannot change font families and lack special fonts.  They
support style changes by overstriking, or by altering ISO 6429/ECMA-48
"graphic renditions" (character cell attributes).

   (1) Terminals and some typesetters have fonts that render at only one
or two sizes.  As examples, take the 'groff' 'lj4' device's Lineprinter,
and 'lbp''s Courier and Elite faces.

   (2) Font designers prepare families such that the styles share
esthetic properties.

   (3) Historically, the fonts 'troff's dealt with were not Free
Software or, as with the Graphic Systems C/A/T, did not even exist in
the digital domain.

   (4) See Font Description File Format.

5.19.1 Selecting Fonts
----------------------

We use "font" to refer to any of several means of identifying a
typeface: by its mounting position ('3'), by its identifier ('TB'), or
by an abstract style ('B') to be combined with the default family.

 -- Request: .ft [font]
 -- Escape sequence: \ff
 -- Escape sequence: \f(fn
 -- Escape sequence: \f[font]
 -- Register: \n[.fn]
     The 'ft' request selects the typeface FONT.  If the argument is
     absent or 'P', it selects the previously used typeface; if there is
     none, the formatter ignores the request.  If FONT is an integer,
     the formatter interprets it as a mounting position; the font
     mounted there is selected.  If that position refers to an abstract
     style, GNU 'troff' combines it with the default family (see 'fam'
     and '\F' below) to make a resolved font name.  If FONT is 'DESC',
     if the mounting position is not an abstract style and no font is
     mounted there, or the mounting position is negative, GNU 'troff'
     ignores the request.(1)  (see Selecting Fonts-Footnote-1)

     If FONT matches a style name, it is combined with the default
     family to make a resolved font name.  If not, FONT is assumed to be
     resolved already.

     The resolved font name is subject to translation (see request 'ftr'
     below).  Next, the (possibly translated) font name's mounting
     position is looked up; if not mounted, FONT is sought on the file
     system as a font description file and, if located, automatically
     mounted at the next available position (see register '.fp' below).
     If the font was mounted using an identifier different from its font
     description file name (see request 'fp' below), that file name is
     then sought.  If a font description file for the resolved font name
     is not found, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'font' and
     ignores the request.

     The '\f' escape sequence is similar, accepting names or mounting
     positions of one character F, two characters FN, or arbitrary
     length FONT.  '\f[]' selects the previous font.  The syntax form
     '\fP' is supported for backward compatibility, and '\f[P]' for
     consistency.

          eggs, bacon,
          .ft I
          spam,
          .ft
          and sausage.
          .br
          eggs, bacon, \fIspam,\fP and sausage.
              => eggs, bacon, spam, and sausage.
              => eggs, bacon, spam, and sausage.

     The currently and previously selected fonts are properties of the
     environment (see Environments).

     The read-only string-valued register '.fn' contains the resolved
     font name of the selected font.  Copy its value to a string to save
     it for later use.

          .ds saved-font \n[.fn]
          ... text involving many font changes ...
          .ft \*[saved-font]

     GNU 'troff' does not tokenize '\f' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.  It thus can be used in requests
     that expect a single-character argument.  We can assign a font to a
     margin character as follows (see Miscellaneous).

          .mc \f[I]x\f[]

 -- Request: .ftr f [g]
     Translate font name F to G.  Where the '\f' escape sequence, the
     'F' and 'S' conditional expression operators, and the 'ft', 'ul',
     'bd', 'cs', 'tkf', 'special', 'fspecial', 'fp', or 'sty' requests
     refer to F, GNU 'troff' uses G instead.  Omit G or repeat F as G to
     untranslate F.  F and G need not be mounted fonts.

     You can obtain a report of font translations defined by 'ftr' on
     the standard error stream with the 'pftr' request.  See Debugging.

 -- Request: .fzoom font [zoom]
 -- Register: \n[.zoom]
     Set magnification of mounted FONT to factor ZOOM, a multiplier
     applied to the type size in thousandths.  ZOOM must be
     non-negative.  'fzoom' applies to glyphs when they are formatted,
     altering a font's apparent size in relation to others.  A missing
     or zero ZOOM is treated as '1000'--no magnification.  FONT must be
     a resolved font name, not an abstract style.

     Font magnification is transparent to some aspects of GNU 'troff'.
     A change of the zoom factor affects scaling of glyph sizes,
     inter-word and inter-sentence spaces, and kerning adjustments on
     the output device, but _not_ vertical spacing.  It is not reflected
     in registers that report the requested or current type size, or the
     minimum inter-word and supplemental inter-sentence space sizes.  It
     _is_ reflected in measurements of formatted output: the horizontal
     drawing position register 'hp', interpolation of the '\w' escape
     sequence, and the registers updated by that escape sequence or the
     formatting of a glyph in the environment.  See Environments.

     'fzoom' can harmonize the apparent cap-heights of fonts from
     different families when formatted on the same baseline at the same
     type size.

          .fzoom HR 900
          .fzoom CR 1150
          .fzoom PR 950
          Times, \F[H]Helvetica\F[], \F[C]Courier\F[],
          and \F[P]Palatino\F[].
          .sp
          M\F[H]M\F[C]M\F[P]M

     The zoom factor of the currently selected font is available in the
     read-only register '.zoom'.  It interpolates zero if there is no
     magnification.

   (1) It also emits a warning in category 'font' or 'range', as
appropriate.  See Warnings.

5.19.2 Font Families
--------------------

To accommodate the wide variety of fonts available, GNU 'troff'
distinguishes "font families" and "font styles".  A resolved font name
is the catenation of a font family and a style.  Selecting an abstract
style causes GNU 'troff' to combine it with the default font family.

   You can thus compose a document using abstract styles exclusively for
its body or running text--selecting a specific family only for titles or
examples, for instance--and change the default family on the command
line.

 -- Request: .fam [family]
 -- Register: \n[.fam]
 -- Escape sequence: \Ff
 -- Escape sequence: \F(fm
 -- Escape sequence: \F[family]
     Set the default font family, used in combination with abstract
     styles to construct a resolved font name, to FAMILY (one-character
     name F, two-character name FM).  If no argument is given, GNU
     'troff' selects the previous font family; if there are none, it
     falls back to the device's default(1) (see Font
     Families-Footnote-1) or its own ('T').

     The '\F' escape sequence works similarly.  In disanalogy to '\f',
     '\FP' makes 'P' the default family.  Use '\F[]' to select the
     previous default family.  The default font family is available in
     the read-only string-valued register '.fam'; it is associated with
     the environment (see Environments).

          spam,     \" startup defaults are T (Times) R (roman)
          .fam H    \" make Helvetica the default family
          spam,     \" family H + style R = HR
          .ft B     \" family H + style B = HB
          spam,
          .ft CR    \" Courier roman (default family not changed)
          spam,
          .ft       \" back to Helvetica bold
          spam,
          .fam T    \" make Times the default family
          spam,     \" family T + style B = TB
          .ft AR    \" font AR (not a style)
          baked beans,
          .ft R     \" family T + style R = TR
          and spam.

     GNU 'troff' does not tokenize '\F' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.  It thus can be used in requests
     that expect a single-character argument.  We can assign a font
     family to a margin character as follows (see Miscellaneous).

          .mc \F[P]x\F[]

 -- Request: .sty pos style
 -- Register: \n[.sty]
     Associate an abstract style STYLE with mounting position POS, which
     must be a non-negative integer.  Applying the requests 'cs', 'bd',
     'tkf', 'uf', or 'fspecial' to an abstract style affects the member
     of the default family corresponding to that style.

     The default family can be set with the '-f' option (see Groff
     Options).  The 'styles' command in the 'DESC' file controls which
     font positions (if any) are initially associated with abstract
     styles rather than fonts.

     *Caution:* The STYLE argument is not validated.  Errors may occur
     later, when the formatter attempts to construct a resolved font
     name, or format a character for output.

          .nr BarPos \n[.fp]
          .sty \n[.fp] Bar
          .fam Foo
          .ft \n[BarPos]
          .tm .f=\n[.f]
          A
              error-> error: no font family named 'Foo' exists
              error-> .f=41
              error-> error: cannot format glyph: no current font

     When an abstract style has been selected, the read-only
     string-valued register '.sty' interpolates its name; this datum is
     associated with the environment (see Environments).  Otherwise,
     '.sty' interpolates nothing.

   (1) See DESC File Format.

5.19.3 Font Positions
---------------------

To support typeface indirection through abstract styles, and for
compatibility with AT&T 'troff', the formatter maintains a list of font
"positions" at which fonts required by a document are "mounted".  An
output device's description file 'DESC' typically configures a set of
pre-mounted fonts; see Device and Font Description Files.  A font need
not be explicitly mounted before it is selected; GNU 'troff' will search
'GROFF_FONT_PATH' for a file name matching the identifier and mount it
on demand.

 -- Request: .fp pos id [font-description-file-name]
 -- Register: \n[.f]
 -- Register: \n[.fp]
     Mount a font under the name ID at mounting position POS, a
     non-negative integer.  When the formatter starts up, it reads the
     output device's description to mount an initial set of faces, and
     selects font position 1.  Position 0 is unused by default.  Unless
     the FONT-DESCRIPTION-FILE-NAME argument is given, ID should be the
     name of a font description file stored in a directory corresponding
     to the selected output device.  GNU 'troff' does not traverse
     directories to locate the font description file.

     The optional third argument enables font names to be aliased, which
     can be necessary in compatibility mode since AT&T 'troff' syntax
     affords no means of identifying fonts with names longer than two
     characters, like 'TBI' or 'ZCMI', in a font selection escape
     sequence.  See Compatibility Mode.  You can also alias fonts on
     mounting for convenience or abstraction.  (See below regarding the
     '.fp' register.)

          .fp \n[.fp] SC ZCMI
          Send a \f(SChand-written\fP thank-you note.
          .fp \n[.fp] Emph TI
          .fp \n[.fp] Strong TB
          Are \f[Emph]these names\f[] \f[Strong]comfortable\f[]?

     'DESC', 'P', and non-negative integers are not usable as font
     identifiers.

     You can obtain a report of occupied font mounting positions
     (whether configured by the 'DESC' file, the 'fp' request, or
     automatic mounting) on the standard error stream with the 'pfp'
     request.  See Debugging.

     The position of the currently selected font (or abstract style) is
     available in the read-only register '.f'.  It is associated with
     the environment (see Environments).

     Copy the value of '.f' to another register to save it for later
     use.

          .nr sF \n(.f
          ... text involving many font changes ...
          .ft \n(sF

     The index of the next (non-zero) free font position is available in
     the read-only register '.fp'.  Fonts not listed in the 'DESC' file
     are automatically mounted at position '\n[.fp]' when selected with
     the 'ft' request or '\f' escape sequence.  When mounting a font at
     a position explicitly with the 'fp' request, this same practice
     should be followed, although GNU 'troff' does not enforce this
     strictly.

5.19.4 Characters and Glyphs
----------------------------

A glyph is a graphical representation of a character.  Whereas a
"character" is an abstraction of semantic information, a "glyph" is an
intelligible mark visible on screen or paper.  A character has many
possible representation forms; for example, the character 'A' can be
written in an upright or slanted typeface, producing distinct glyphs.
Sometimes, a sequence of characters map to a single glyph: this is a
"ligature"--the most common is 'fi'.

   Space characters never become glyphs in GNU 'troff'.  If not
discarded (as when trailing text lines), horizontal motions represent
them in the output.

   In a 'troff' system, a font description file (recall Font
Directories) lists all of the glyphs a particular font provides.  If the
user requests a glyph not available in the currently selected font, the
formatter looks it up an ordered list of "special fonts".  By default,
the 'ps' (PostScript) and 'pdf' output devices support the two special
fonts 'SS' (slanted symbol) and 'S' (symbol); and these devices' 'DESC'
files arrange them such that the formatter searches the former before
the latter.  Other output devices use different names for special fonts.
Fonts mounted with the 'fonts' keyword in the 'DESC' file are globally
available.  GNU 'troff''s 'special' and 'fspecial' requests alter the
list of fonts treated as special on a general basis, or only when a
certain font is currently selected, respectively.

   The formatter supports three kinds of character.  An "ordinary
character" is the most commonly used, has no special syntax, and
typically represents itself.(1)  (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-1)
Interpolate a "special character" with the '\[XXX]' or '\C'XXX'' escape
sequence syntax, where XXX is an identifier.  An "indexed character"
bypasses most character-to-glyph resolution logic, uses the '\N'I''
syntax, and selects a glyph from the currently selected font by its
integer-valued position I in the output device's representation of that
font.(2)  (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-2)

   "User-defined characters" are similar to string definitions,(3) (see
Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-3) and permit extension of or
substitution within the character repertoire.  Any ordinary, special, or
indexed character can be user-defined.  The 'char', 'fchar', 'schar',
and 'fschar' requests create user-defined characters employed at various
stages of the character-to-glyph resolution process.

   GNU 'troff' employs the following procedure to resolve an input
character into a glyph.  User-defined characters make this resolution
process recursive.  The first step that succeeds ends the resolution
procedure for the character being formatted, which may not be the last
in the sequence interpolated by a user-defined character.

   * Interpolate the definition of any character defined by the 'char'
     request and apply this procedure to each character in its
     definition.

   * Check the current font for a glyph corresponding to the character.

   * Interpolate the definition of any user-defined character matching
     defined by the 'fchar' request and apply this procedure to each
     character in its definition.

   * Check whether the current font has a font-specific list of special
     fonts; if so, check the each font therein, in the order determined
     by the last applicable 'fspecial' request, for a glyph
     corresponding to the character.

   * Interpolate the definition of any character defined by the 'fschar'
     request for the currently selected font, and apply this procedure
     to each character in its definition.

   * Check each font in the list configured by the most recently issued
     'special' request for a glyph corresponding to the character.

   * Interpolate the definition of any character defined by the 'sschar'
     request and apply this procedure to each character in its
     definition.

   * Finally, iterate through the list of mounted fonts by position;
     recall See Font Positions.  For each mounted font, if that font
     bears the 'special' directive,(4) (see Characters and
     Glyphs-Footnote-4) check it for a glyph corresponding to the
     character.  This stage of the resolution process can sometimes lead
     to surprising results since the 'fonts' directive in the 'DESC'
     file often contains empty positions that are filled by a macro file
     or document employing the 'fp' request after the formatter
     initializes.

     For example, consider the following:

          fonts 3 0 0 FOO

     This mounts font 'foo' at font position 3.  We assume that 'FOO' is
     a special font, containing glyph 'foo', and that no font has been
     loaded yet.  The line

          .fspecial BAR BAZ

     makes font 'BAZ' special only if font 'BAR' is active.  We further
     assume that 'BAZ' is really a special font, i.e., the font
     description file contains the 'special' keyword, and that it also
     contains glyph 'foo' with a special shape fitting to font 'BAR'.
     After executing 'fspecial', font 'BAR' is loaded at font
     position 1, and 'BAZ' at position 2.

     We now switch to a new font 'XXX', trying to access glyph 'foo'
     that is assumed to be missing.  There are neither font-specific
     special fonts for 'XXX' nor any other fonts made special with the
     'special' request, so the formatter starts the search for special
     fonts in the list of already mounted fonts, with increasing font
     positions.  Consequently, it finds 'BAZ' before 'FOO' even before
     'XXX', which is not the intended behaviour.

   See Device and Font Description Files, and Special Fonts, for more
details.

   The 'groff_char(7)' man page houses a complete list of predefined
special character names, but the availability of any as a glyph is
device- and font-dependent.  For example, say

     man -T dvi groff_char > groff_char.dvi

to obtain those available with the DVI device and default font
configuration.(5)  (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-5) If you want to
use an additional macro package to change the fonts used, you must run
'groff' (or 'troff') directly.

     groff -T dvi -m ec -m an groff_char.7 > groff_char.dvi

   Special character names not listed in 'groff_char(7)' are derived
algorithmically, using a simplified version of the Adobe Glyph List
(AGL) algorithm, which is described in
<https://github.com/adobe-type-tools/agl-aglfn>.  The (frozen) set of
names that can't be derived algorithmically is called the "'groff' glyph
list (GGL)".

   * A glyph for Unicode character U+XXXX[X[X]], which is not a
     composite character is named 'uXXXX[X[X]]'.  X must be an uppercase
     hexadecimal digit.  Examples: 'u1234', 'u008E', 'u12DB8'.  The
     largest Unicode value is 0x10FFFF. There must be at least four 'X'
     digits; if necessary, add leading zeroes (after the 'u').  No zero
     padding is allowed for character codes greater than 0xFFFF.
     Surrogates (i.e., Unicode values greater than 0xFFFF represented
     with character codes from the surrogate area U+D800-U+DFFF) are not
     allowed either.

   * A glyph representing more than a single input character is named

          'u' COMPONENT1 '_' COMPONENT2 '_' COMPONENT3 ...

     Example: 'u0045_0302_0301'.

     For simplicity, all Unicode characters that are composites must be
     maximally decomposed to NFD;(6) (see Characters and
     Glyphs-Footnote-6) for example, 'u00CA_0301' is not a valid glyph
     name since U+00CA (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) can be
     further decomposed into U+0045 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E) and U+0302
     (COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT).  'u0045_0302_0301' is thus the glyph
     name for U+1EBE, LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND ACUTE.

   * groff maintains a table to decompose all algorithmically derived
     glyph names that are composites itself.  For example, 'u0100'
     (LATIN LETTER A WITH MACRON) is automatically decomposed into
     'u0041_0304'.  Additionally, a glyph name of the GGL is preferred
     to an algorithmically derived glyph name; 'groff' also
     automatically does the mapping.  Example: The glyph 'u0045_0302' is
     mapped to '^E'.

   * glyph names of the GGL can't be used in composite glyph names; for
     example, '^E_u0301' is invalid.

 -- Escape sequence: \(nm
 -- Escape sequence: \[name]
 -- Escape sequence: \[base-glyph combining-component ...]
     Typeset a special character NAME (two-character name NM) or a
     composite glyph consisting of BASE-GLYPH overlaid with one or more
     COMBINING-COMPONENTs.  For example, '\[A ho]' is a capital letter
     "A" with a "hook accent" (ogonek).

     There is no special syntax for one-character names--the analogous
     form '\N' would collide with other escape sequences.  However, the
     four escape sequences '\'', '\-', '\_', and '\`', are translated on
     input to the special character escape sequences '\[aa]', '\[-]',
     '\[ul]', and '\[ga]', respectively.

     A special character name of length one is not the same thing as an
     ordinary character: that is, the character 'a' is not the same as
     '\[a]'.

     If NAME is undefined, a warning in category 'char' is produced and
     the escape is ignored.  See Warnings, for information about the
     enablement and suppression of warnings.

     GNU 'troff' resolves '\[...]' with more than a single component as
     follows:

        * Any component that is found in the GGL is converted to the
          'uXXXX' form.

        * Any component 'uXXXX' that is found in the list of
          decomposable glyphs is decomposed.

        * The resulting elements are then catenated with '_' in between,
          dropping the leading 'u' in all elements but the first.

     No check for the existence of any component (similar to 'tr'
     request) is done.

     Examples:

     '\[A ho]'
          'A' maps to 'u0041', 'ho' maps to 'u02DB', thus the final
          glyph name would be 'u0041_02DB'.  This is not the expected
          result: the ogonek glyph 'ho' is a spacing ogonek, but for a
          proper composite a non-spacing ogonek (U+0328) is necessary.
          Looking into the file 'composite.tmac', one can find
          '.composite ho u0328', which changes the mapping of 'ho' while
          a composite glyph name is constructed, causing the final glyph
          name to be 'u0041_0328'.

     '\[^E u0301]'
     '\[^E aa]'
     '\[E a^ aa]'
     '\[E ^ ']'
          '^E' maps to 'u0045_0302', thus the final glyph name is
          'u0045_0302_0301' in all forms (assuming proper calls of the
          'composite' request).

     It is not possible to define glyphs with names like 'A ho' within a
     'groff' font file.  This is not really a limitation; instead, you
     have to define 'u0041_0328'.

 -- Escape sequence: \C'xxx'
     Typeset the special character XXX.  Normally, it is more convenient
     to use '\[XXX]', but '\C' has some advantages: it is compatible
     with AT&T device-independent 'troff' (and therefore available in
     compatibility mode(7) (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-7)) and
     can interpolate special characters with ']' in their names.  The
     delimiter need not be a neutral apostrophe; recall Delimiters.

 -- Request: .composite c1 c2
     Map ordinary or special character name C1 to C2 when C1 is a
     combining component in a composite character.  See above for
     examples.  This is a strict rewriting of the special character
     name; no check is performed for the existence of a glyph for
     either.  Typically, 'composite' is used to map a spacing character
     to a combining one.  A set of default mappings for many accents can
     be found in the file 'composite.tmac', loaded by the default
     'troffrc' at startup.

     You can obtain a report of mappings defined by 'composite' on the
     standard error stream with the 'pcomposite' request.  See
     Debugging.

 -- Escape sequence: \N'n'
     Format indexed character numbered N in the current font ('n' is
     _not_ the input character code).  N can be any non-negative decimal
     integer.  Most devices number glyphs with codes between 0 and 255
     only; the 'utf8' output device uses codes in the range 0-65535.  If
     the current font does not contain a glyph with that code, special
     fonts are _not_ searched.  The '\N' escape sequence can be
     conveniently used in conjunction with the 'char' request.

          .char \[phone] \f[ZD]\N'37'

     The code of each glyph is given in the fourth column in the font
     description file after the 'charset' command.  It is possible to
     include unnamed glyphs in the font description file by using a name
     of '---'; the '\N' escape sequence is the only way to use these.

     No kerning is applied to glyphs accessed with '\N'.  The delimiter
     need not be a neutral apostrophe; see Delimiters.

   A few escape sequences are also special characters.

 -- Escape sequence: \'
     An escaped neutral apostrophe is a synonym for '\[aa]' (acute
     accent).

 -- Escape sequence: \`
     An escaped grave accent is a synonym for '\[ga]' (grave accent).

 -- Escape sequence: \-
     An escaped hyphen-minus is a synonym for '\[-]' (minus sign).

 -- Escape sequence: \_
     An escaped underscore ("low line") is a synonym for '\[ul]'
     (underrule).  On typesetting devices, the underrule is
     font-invariant and drawn lower than the underscore '_'.

 -- Request: .cflags n c...
     Assign properties encoded by non-negative integer N to each
     character or class(8) (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-8).  C.
     Spaces need not separate C arguments.

     Characters, whether ordinary, special, or indexed, have certain
     associated properties.  The first argument is the sum of the
     desired flags and the remaining arguments are the characters to be
     assigned those properties.  arguments.

     The non-negative integer N is the sum of any of the following.
     Some combinations are nonsensical, such as '33' (1 + 32).

     '1'
          Recognize the character as ending a sentence if followed by a
          newline or two spaces.  Initially, characters '.?!' have this
          property.

     '2'
          Enable breaks before the character.  A line is not broken at a
          character with this property unless the characters on each
          side both have non-zero hyphenation codes.  This exception can
          be overridden by adding 64.  Initially, no characters have
          this property.

     '4'
          Enable breaks after the character.  A line is not broken at a
          character with this property unless the characters on each
          side both have non-zero hyphenation codes.  This exception can
          be overridden by adding 64.  Initially, characters
          '\-\[hy]\[em]' have this property.

     '8'
          Mark the glyph associated with this character as overlapping
          other instances of itself horizontally.  Initially, characters
          '\[ul]\[rn]\[ru]\[radicalex]\[sqrtex]' have this property.

     '16'
          Mark the glyph associated with this character as overlapping
          other instances of itself vertically.  Initially, the
          character '\[br]' has this property.

     '32'
          Mark the character as transparent for the purpose of
          end-of-sentence recognition.  In other words, an
          end-of-sentence character followed by any number of characters
          with this property is treated as the end of a sentence if
          followed by a newline or two spaces.  This is the same as
          having a zero space factor in TeX.  Initially, characters
          '"')]*\[dg]\[dd]\[rq]\[cq]' have this property.

     '64'
          Ignore hyphenation codes of the surrounding characters.  Use
          this in combination with values 2 and 4 (initially, no
          characters have this property).

          For example, if you need an automatic break point after the
          en-dash in numeric ranges like "3000-5000", insert

               .cflags 68 \[en]

          into your document.  However, this practice can lead to bad
          layout if done thoughtlessly; in most situations, a better
          solution instead of changing the 'cflags' value is to insert
          '\:' right after the hyphen at the places that really need a
          break point.

     The remaining values were implemented for East Asian language
     support; those who use alphabetic scripts exclusively can disregard
     them.

     '128'
          Prohibit a line break before the character, but allow a line
          break after the character.  This works only in combination
          with flags 256 and 512 and has no effect otherwise.
          Initially, no characters have this property.

     '256'
          Prohibit a line break after the character, but allow a line
          break before the character.  This works only in combination
          with flags 128 and 512 and has no effect otherwise.
          Initially, no characters have this property.

     '512'
          Allow line break before or after the character.  This works
          only in combination with flags 128 and 256 and has no effect
          otherwise.  Initially, no characters have this property.

     In contrast to values 2 and 4, the values 128, 256, and 512 work
     pairwise.  If, for example, the left character has value 512, and
     the right character 128, no break will be automatically inserted
     between them.  If we use value 6 instead for the left character, a
     break after the character can't be suppressed since the neighboring
     character on the right doesn't get examined.

 -- Request: .char c ["][contents]
 -- Request: .fchar c ["][contents]
 -- Request: .fschar f c ["][contents]
 -- Request: .schar c ["][contents]
     Define an ordinary, special, or indexed character C as CONTENTS.

     Omitting CONTENTS gives C an empty definition.

     GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     CONTENTS, permitting initial embedded spaces in it, and reads it to
     the end of the input line in copy mode.  See Copy Mode.

     Defining (or redefining) a character C creates a formatter object
     that GNU 'troff' recognizes like any other ordinary, special, or
     indexed character on input, and produces CONTENTS on output.  When
     formatting C, GNU 'troff' processes CONTENTS in a temporary
     environment and enscapsulates the result in a node;(9) (see
     Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-9) disabling compatibility mode and
     setting the escape character to '\' while interpreting CONTENTS.
     Any emboldening, constant spacing, or track kerning applies to this
     object rather than to individual glyphs resulting from the
     formatting of CONTENTS.

     A character defined by these requests can be used just like a glyph
     provided by the output device.  In particular, other characters can
     be translated to it with the 'tr' and 'trin' requests; it can be
     made the tab or leader fill character with the 'tc' and 'lc'
     requests, respectively; sequences of it can be drawn with the '\l'
     and '\L' escape sequences; and, if the 'hcode' request is used on
     C, it is subject to automatic hyphenation.

     However, a user-defined character C does not participate at its
     boundaries in kerning adjustments or italic corrections.

     The formatter prevents infinite recursion by treating an occurrence
     of a character in its own definition as if it were undefined; when
     interpolating such a character, GNU 'troff' emits a warning in
     category 'char'.(10)  (see Characters and Glyphs-Footnote-10)

     The 'tr' and 'trin' requests take precedence if 'char' accesses the
     same symbol.

          .tr XY
          X
              => Y
          .char X Z
          X
              => Y
          .tr XX
          X
              => Z

     The 'fchar' request defines a fallback glyph: 'troff' checks for
     glyphs defined with 'fchar' only if it cannot find the glyph in the
     current font.  'troff' performs this test before checking special
     fonts.

     'fschar' defines a fallback glyph for font F: 'troff' checks for
     glyphs defined with 'fschar' after the list of fonts declared as
     font-specific special fonts with the 'fspecial' request, but before
     the list of fonts declared as global special fonts with the
     'special' request.

     Finally, the 'schar' request defines a global fallback glyph:
     'troff' checks for glyphs defined with 'schar' after the list of
     fonts declared as global special fonts with the 'special' request,
     but before the already mounted special fonts.

     See Character Classes.

     *Caution:* These requests remove a leading neutral double quote '"'
     and treat the remainder of the input line as their second argument,
     including any spaces, up to a newline or comment escape sequence.
     See the discussion of the 'ds' request in Strings.

 -- Request: .rchar c ...
 -- Request: .rfschar f c ...
     Remove definition of each ordinary, special, or indexed character
     C, undoing the effect of a 'char', 'fchar', or 'schar' request.
     Spaces need not separate C arguments.  The character definition
     removed (if any) is the first encountered in the resolution process
     documented above.  Glyphs, which are defined by font description
     files, cannot be removed.

     'rfschar' removes character definitions created by 'fschar' for
     font F.

   (1) Depending on the breadth of the output device's glyph repertoire,
the characters ''', '-', '^', '`', and '~' can be exceptions to this
rule.  '"'  and '\' are not exceptions, but because they are
syntactically meaningful to the formatter, access to their glyphs may
require use of special characters (or changing or disabling the escape
character).  See 'groff_char(7)'.

   (2) Fonts do not necessarily arrange their glyphs per a standard
character encoding.

   (3) See Strings.

   (4) See Device and Font Description Files.

   (5) Not all versions of the 'man' program support the '-T' option;
use the subsequent example for an alternative.

   (6) This is "Normalization Form D" as documented in Unicode Standard
Annex #15 (<https://unicode.org/reports/tr15/>).

   (7) See Compatibility Mode.

   (8) See Character Classes.

   (9) See GNU troff Internals.

   (10) Mutually recursive character definitions are handled similarly.

5.19.5 Character Classes
------------------------

GNU 'troff' can group characters into "classes", making manipulation of
their breaking and/or sentential properties convenient; recall the
'cflags' request in Characters and Glyphs.  Classes are particularly
useful for East Asian languages such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean,
which have much larger character repertoires than the Latin, Greek,
Cyrillic, or Thai scripts.  In such large character sets, many
characters share the same properties.  Only 'class' and 'cflags'
requests can operate on character classes.

 -- Request: .class ident c ...
     Define a character class (or simply "class") IDENT comprising the
     members C ..., where each C is an ordinary, special, or indexed
     character; or a range expression.  A class thus defined can then be
     referred to in a 'cflags' request in lieu of listing all the
     characters within it.

          .class [quotes] ' \[aq] \[dq] \[oq] \[cq] \[lq] \[rq]

     Since class and special character names share the same name space,
     we recommend starting and ending the class name with '[' and ']',
     respectively, to avoid collisions with existing special character
     names defined by GNU 'troff' or the user (with 'char' and related
     requests).  This practice applies the presence of ']' in the class
     name to prevent the use of the special character escape form
     '\[...]', you must therefore access a class thus named via the '\C'
     escape sequence.

     An argument C can alternatively be a "range expression" consisting
     of a start character followed by '-' and then an end character.
     Internally, GNU 'troff' converts these two symbol names to Unicode
     code points (according to the 'groff' glyph list [GGL]), which
     determine the start and end values of the range.  If that
     conversion fails, GNU 'troff' skips the range expression and any
     remaining arguments.

     If you want to include '-' in a class, it must be the first
     character in a C argument; otherwise GNU 'troff' interprets the
     argument as a range expression.

5.19.6 Special Fonts
--------------------

Special fonts are those that the formatter searches, in mounting
position order, when it cannot find a requested glyph in the selected
font.  Typically, they are declared as such in their description
files,(1) (see Special Fonts-Footnote-1) and contain unstyled glyphs.
The "Symbol" and "Zapf Dingbats" fonts of the PostScript and PDF
standards are examples.  Ordinarily, only typesetters have special
fonts.

   GNU 'troff''s 'special' and 'fspecial' requests permit a document to
supplement the set of fonts the device configures for glyph search
without having to use the 'fp' request to manipulate the list of
mounting positions, which can be tedious--by default, GNU 'troff' mounts
40 fonts at startup when using the 'ps' device.

 -- Request: .special [s ...]
 -- Request: .fspecial f [s ...]
     'special' declares each font S as special, irrespective of its
     description file, populating a list that GNU 'troff' searches, in
     order, to find the glyph demanded.  GNU 'troff' mounts each font S.
     Invoking 'special' without arguments empties the list.  A font is
     not automatically unmounted if a subsequent 'special' request
     removes it from the list.  Initially, the list is empty.

     'fspecial' is similar; it designates each font S as special only
     when font F is selected.  Initially, a font F's list of associated
     special fonts is empty for all F.

     Invoking 'special' (or 'fspecial', for a given font F) again
     overwrites the previous list; if you invoke them without arguments,
     GNU 'troff' empties the corresponding list.

   (1) See Font Description File Format.

5.19.7 Artificial Fonts
-----------------------

There are a number of requests and escape sequences for artificially
creating fonts.  These are largely vestiges of the days when output
devices did not have a wide variety of fonts, and when 'nroff' and
'troff' were separate programs.  Most of them are no longer necessary in
GNU 'troff'.  Nevertheless, they are supported.

 -- Escape sequence: \H'height'
 -- Escape sequence: \H'+height'
 -- Escape sequence: \H'-height'
 -- Register: \n[.height]
     Set (increment, decrement) the height of the current font, but not
     its width.  If HEIGHT is zero, the formatter uses the font's
     inherent height for its type size.  The default scaling unit is
     'z'.

     Changing the font height does not affect vertical spacing; dramatic
     changes may be better accompanied by an '\x' escape sequence to add
     extra pre-vertical space to the output line.  Recall Manipulating
     Spacing.

     The read-only register '.height' interpolates the font height.

     As of this writing, only the 'ps' and 'pdf' output devices support
     this feature.

     The formatter does not tokenize '\H' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.(1)  (see Artificial
     Fonts-Footnote-1) It thus can be used in requests that expect a
     single-character argument.  We can alter the font height of a
     margin character(2) (see Artificial Fonts-Footnote-2) as follows.

          .mc \H'+5z'x\H'0'

     In compatibility mode, GNU 'troff' behaves differently: it applies
     an increment or decrement to the current type size and not to the
     previously selected font height.

          .cp 1
          \H'+5'test \H'+5'test

     prints the word 'test' twice with the same font height--five points
     larger than the current font size.

 -- Escape sequence: \S'slant'
 -- Register: \n[.slant]
     Slant the glyphs of the currently selected font by SLANT degrees.
     Positive values slant in the direction of text flow.  Only integer
     values are possible.

     The read-only register '.slant' interpolates the font slant.

     As of this writing, only the 'ps' and 'pdf' output devices support
     this feature.

     The formatter does not tokenize '\S' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.(3)  (see Artificial
     Fonts-Footnote-3) It thus can be used in requests that expect a
     single-character argument.  We can apply a slant to a margin
     character(4) (see Artificial Fonts-Footnote-4) as follows.

          .mc \S'20'x\S'0'

     This escape sequence is incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff'
     manual: the slant is only assigned, never incremented or
     decremented.

 -- Request: .ul [lines]
     The 'ul' request normally underlines subsequent lines if a TTY
     output device is used.  Otherwise, the lines are printed in italics
     (only the term 'underlined' is used in the following).  The single
     argument is the quantity of input lines to be underlined; with no
     argument, the next line is underlined.  If LINES is zero or
     negative, stop the effects of 'ul' (if it was active).  Requests
     and empty lines do not count for computing the number of underlined
     input lines, even if they produce some output like 'tl'.  Lines
     inserted by macros (e.g., invoked by a trap) do count.

     At the beginning of 'ul', the current font is stored and the
     underline font is activated.  Within the span of a 'ul' request, it
     is possible to change fonts, but after the last line affected by
     'ul' the saved font is restored.

     This number of lines still to be underlined is associated with the
     environment (see Environments).  The underline font can be changed
     with the 'uf' request.

     The 'ul' request does not underline spaces.

 -- Request: .cu [lines]
     The 'cu' request is similar to 'ul' but underlines spaces as well
     (if a TTY output device is used).

 -- Request: .uf font
     Set the underline font (globally) used by 'ul' and 'cu'.  By
     default, this is the font at position 2.  FONT can be either a
     non-negative font position or the name of a font.

 -- Request: .bd font [offset]
 -- Request: .bd font1 font2 [offset]
 -- Register: \n[.b]
     Embolden FONT by overstriking its glyphs offset by OFFSET units
     minus one.

     Two syntax forms are available.

        * Imitate a bold font unconditionally.  The first argument
          specifies the font to embolden, and the second is the number
          of basic units, minus one, by which the two glyphs are offset.
          If the second argument is missing, emboldening is turned off.

          FONT can be either a non-negative font position or the name of
          a font.

          OFFSET is available in the '.b' read-only register if a
          special font is active; in the 'bd' request, its default unit
          is 'u'.

        * Imitate a bold form conditionally.  Embolden FONT1 by OFFSET
          only if font FONT2 is the current font.  This request can be
          issued repeatedly to set up different emboldening values for
          different current fonts.  If the second argument is missing,
          emboldening is turned off for this particular current font.

          Because the emboldening is conditional, it applies only if the
          glyph to be formatted is not available in the current font.
          FONT1 must therefore be a special font, configured either with
          the 'special' directive in its font description file or with
          the 'fspecial' request).

 -- Request: .cs font [width [em-size]]
     Switch to and from "constant glyph spacing mode".  If activated,
     the width of every glyph is WIDTH/36 ems.  The em size is given
     absolutely by EM-SIZE; if this argument is missing, the em value is
     taken from the current font size (as set with the 'ps' request)
     when the font is effectively in use.  Without second and third
     argument, constant glyph spacing mode is deactivated.

     Default scaling unit for EM-SIZE is 'z'; WIDTH is an integer.

   (1) See Environments.

   (2) See Miscellaneous.

   (3) See Environments.

   (4) See Miscellaneous.

5.19.8 Ligatures and Kerning
----------------------------

Proportional fonts commonly employ two techniques to improve the
esthetics of typeset text.  "Ligatures" are sequences of glyphs that are
visually connected or "tied", overlapping them and slightly altering
their shapes.  "Kerning" is the adjustment of horizontal spacing between
glyphs.  Neither is employed on terminals.(1)  (see Ligatures and
Kerning-Footnote-1)

   Most typesetters support ligatures for the sequences 'fi', 'fl',
'ff', 'ffi', and 'ffl', and 'troff' does likewise.  Some fonts may
include others, but GNU 'troff' does not (yet) support them.

   The formatter checks only the current font for ligatures and kerning
adjustments; neither glyphs from special fonts nor special characters
defined with the 'char' request (and its siblings) are considered for
these processes.

 -- Request: .lg [flag]
 -- Register: \n[.lg]
     Switch the ligature mechanism on or off; if the parameter is
     non-zero or missing, ligatures are enabled, otherwise disabled.
     Default is on.  The current ligature mode can be found in the
     read-only register '.lg' (set to 1 or 2 if ligatures are enabled,
     0 otherwise).

     Setting the ligature mode to 2 enables the two-character ligatures
     (fi, fl, and ff) and disables the three-character ligatures (ffi
     and ffl).

   "Pairwise kerning" is another subtle typesetting mechanism that
modifies the distance between adjacent glyphs in a pair to improve
readability.  In most cases (but not always) the distance is decreased.
Monospaced (typewriter-like) fonts and terminals don't use kerning.

 -- Request: .kern [flag]
 -- Register: \n[.kern]
     Enable or disable pairwise kerning of glyphs in the environment per
     B.  It is enabled by default, and if B is omitted.

     The read-only register '.kern' interpolates 1 if pairwise kerning
     is enabled, 0 otherwise.

     If the font description file contains pairwise kerning information,
     glyphs from that font are kerned.  Kerning between two glyphs can
     be inhibited by placing '\&' between them: 'V\&A'.

     See Font Description File Format.

   "Track kerning" expands or reduces the space between glyphs.  This
can be handy, for example, if you need to squeeze a long word onto a
single line or spread some text to fill a narrow column.  It must be
used with great care since it is usually considered bad typography if
the reader notices the effect.

 -- Request: .tkf f s1 n1 s2 n2
     Enable track kerning for font F.  If the current font is F the
     width of every glyph is increased by an amount between N1 and N2
     (N1, N2 can be negative); if the current type size is less than or
     equal to S1 the width is increased by N1; if it is greater than or
     equal to S2 the width is increased by N2; if the type size is
     greater than or equal to S1 and less than or equal to S2 the
     increase in width is a linear function of the type size.

     The default scaling unit is 'z' for S1 and S2, 'p' for N1 and N2.

     The track kerning amount is added even to the rightmost glyph in a
     line; for large values it is thus recommended to increase the line
     length by the same amount to compensate.

   (1) A monospaced font may possess glyphs for ligatures, but they
nevertheless seldom see use to set text.

5.19.9 Italic Corrections
-------------------------

When typesetting adjacent glyphs from typefaces of different slants, the
space between them may require adjustment.

 -- Escape sequence: \/
     Apply an "italic correction": modify the spacing of the preceding
     glyph so that the distance between it and the following glyph is
     correct if the latter is of upright shape.  For example, if an
     italic 'f' is followed immediately by a roman right parenthesis,
     then in many fonts the top right portion of the 'f' overlaps the
     top of the right parenthesis, which is ugly.  Use '\/' whenever a
     slanted glyph is followed immediately by an upright glyph without
     any intervening space.

 -- Escape sequence: \,
     Apply a "left italic correction": modify the spacing of the
     following glyph so that the distance between it and the preceding
     glyph is correct if the latter is of upright shape.  For example,
     if a roman left parenthesis is immediately followed by an
     italic 'f', then in many fonts the bottom left portion of the 'f'
     overlaps the bottom of the left parenthesis, which is ugly.  Use
     '\,' whenever an upright glyph is followed immediately by a slanted
     glyph without any intervening space.

5.19.10 Dummy Characters
------------------------

As discussed in Requests and Macros, the first character on an input
line is treated specially.  Further, formatting a glyph has many
consequences on formatter state (see Environments).  Occasionally, we
want to escape this context or embrace some of those consequences
without actually rendering a glyph to the output.

 -- Escape sequence: \&
     Interpolate a dummy character, which is constitutive of output but
     invisible.(1)  (see Dummy Characters-Footnote-1) Its presence
     alters the interpretation context of a subsequent input character,
     and enjoys several applications.

        * Prevent insertion of extra space after an end-of-sentence
          character.

               Test.
               Test.
                   => Test.  Test.
               Test.\&
               Test.
                   => Test. Test.

        * Prevent recognition of a control character.

               .Test
                   error-> warning: name 'Test' not defined
               \&.Test
                   => .Test

        * Prevent kerning between two glyphs.

        * Translate a character to "nothing".

               .tr JIjiK\&k\&UVuv
               Post universitum, alea jacta est, OK?
                   => Post vniversitvm, alea iacta est, O?

        * Stop the interpretation of a numerical expression.

               \l'4i-'
                   error-> warning: expected numeric expression,
                   error-> got character "'"
               \l'4i\&-'
                   => ----------------------------------------

     The dummy character escape sequence sees use in macro definitions
     as a means of ensuring that arguments are treated as text even if
     they begin with spaces or control characters.

          .de HD \" typeset a simple bold heading
          .  sp
          .  ft B
          \&\\$1 \" exercise: remove the \&
          .  ft
          .  sp
          ..
          .HD .\|.\|.\|surprised?

   One way to think about the dummy character is to imagine placing the
symbol '&' in the input at a certain location; if doing so has all the
side effects on formatting that you desire except for sticking an ugly
ampersand in the midst of your text, the dummy character is what you
want in its place.

 -- Escape sequence: \)
     Interpolate a transparent dummy character--one that is transparent
     to end-of-sentence detection.  It behaves as '\&', except that '\&'
     is treated as letters and numerals normally are after '.', '?' and
     '!'; '\&' cancels end-of-sentence detection, and '\)' does not.

          .de Suffix-&
          .  nop \&\\$1
          ..
          .
          .de Suffix-)
          .  nop \)\\$1
          ..
          .
          Here's a sentence.\c
          .Suffix-& '
          Another one.\c
          .Suffix-) '
          And a third.
              => Here's a sentence.' Another one.'  And a third.

   (1) Opinions of this escape sequence's best name abound.  "Zero-width
space" is a popular misnomer: 'roff' formatters do not treat it like a
space; when filling, they do not break a line where '\&' appears.
Ossanna called it a "non-printing, zero-width character", but the
character causes _output_ even though it does not "print".  If no output
line is pending, the dummy character starts one.  Contrast an empty
input document with one containing only '\&'.  The former produces no
output; the latter, a blank page.

5.20 Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing
================================================

These concepts were introduced in Page Geometry.  The height of a font's
tallest glyph is one em, which is equal to the type size in points.(1)
(see Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing-Footnote-1) A vertical
spacing of less than 120% of the type size can make a document hard to
read.  Larger proportions can be useful to spread the text for
annotations or proofreader's marks.  By default, GNU 'troff' uses
10 point type on 12 point spacing.  Typographers call the difference
between type size and vertical spacing "leading".(2)  (see Manipulating
Type Size and Vertical Spacing-Footnote-2) Both properties are
associated with the environment; see Environments)

   (1) In text fonts, parentheses are often the tallest glyphs, but a
font's glyphs may not match the nominal type size!  In the standard
PostScript font families, 10-point Times sets better with 9-point
Helvetica and 11-point Courier than if all were used at 10 points.
Recall the 'fzoom' request in Selecting Fonts for a remedy.

   (2) Rhyme with "sledding"; mechanical typography used lead metal
(Latin _plumbum_).

5.20.1 Changing the Type Size
-----------------------------

 -- Request: .ps [size]
 -- Request: .ps +size
 -- Request: .ps -size
 -- Register: \n[.s]
     Set (increase, decrease) the type size to (by) SIZE points.  'ps'
     with no argument restores the previous size.  The 'ps' request's
     default scaling unit is 'z'; recall Measurements and see Using
     Fractional Type Sizes).  The formatter rounds the requested size to
     the nearest valid size (with ties rounding down) within the limits
     supported by the device, and if the requested size is non-positive,
     treats it as 1u.

     Type size alteration is incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff'
     manual, which claims "if [the requested size] is invalid, the next
     larger valid size will result, with a maximum of 36".(1)  (see
     Changing the Type Size-Footnote-1)

     The read-only string-valued register '.s' interpolates the type
     size in points as a decimal fraction.  To obtain the type size in
     scaled points, interpolate the '.ps' register instead (see Using
     Fractional Type Sizes).

 -- Escape sequence: \ssize
     The '\s' escape sequence also determines the type size, but handles
     a zero argument differently.  It supports a variety of syntax
     forms.

     '\sN'
          Set the type size to N typographical points.  N must be a
          single digit.(2)  (see Changing the Type Size-Footnote-2) If
          N is '0', restore the previous size.

     '\s+N'
     '\s-N'
          Increase or decrease the type size by N typographical points.
          N must be exactly one digit.

     '\s(NN'
          Set the type size to NN typographical points.  NN must be
          exactly two digits.  If N is '00', restore the previous size.

     '\s+(NN'
     '\s-(NN'
     '\s(+NN'
     '\s(-NN'
          Alter the type size in scaled points by the NN typographical
          points.  NN must be exactly two digits.

     See Using Fractional Type Sizes, for further syntactical forms of
     the '\s' escape sequence that additionally accept decimal
     fractions.

          snap, snap,
          .ps +2
          grin, grin,
          .ps +2
          wink, wink, \s+2nudge, nudge,\s+8 say no more!
          .ps 10

   The formatter does not tokenize '\s' when reading its input; it
instead updates the environment.  It thus can be used in requests that
expect a single-character argument.  We might alter the type size when
writing a margin character as follows (see Miscellaneous).

     .mc \s[20]x\s[0]

 -- Request: .sizes s1 s2 ... sn [0]
     The 'DESC' file specifies which type sizes are allowed by the
     output device; see DESC File Format.  Use the 'sizes' request to
     change this set of permissible sizes.  Arguments are in scaled
     points; see Using Fractional Type Sizes.  Each can be a single type
     size (such as '12000'), or a range of sizes (such as '4000-72000').
     You can optionally end the list with a '0'.

   (1) The claim appears to have been true of Ossanna 'troff' for the
C/A/T device; Kernighan made device-independent 'troff' more flexible.

   (2) In compatibility mode only, a non-zero N must be in the range
4-39.  See Compatibility Mode.

5.20.2 Changing the Vertical Spacing
------------------------------------

 -- Request: .vs [space]
 -- Request: .vs +space
 -- Request: .vs -space
 -- Register: \n[.v]
     Set the vertical spacing to, or alter it by, SPACE.  The default
     scaling unit is 'p'.  If 'vs' is invoked without an argument, the
     vertical spacing is reset to the previous value before the last
     call to 'vs'.  GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'range' if
     SPACE is negative; the vertical spacing is then set to the smallest
     possible positive value, the vertical motion quantum (as found in
     the '.V' register).

     '.vs 0' isn't saved in a diversion since it doesn't result in a
     vertical motion.  You must explicitly issue this request before
     interpolating the diversion.

     The read-only register '.v' contains the vertical spacing.

When a break occurs, GNU 'troff' performs the following procedure.

   * Move the drawing position vertically by the "extra pre-vertical
     line space", the minimum of all negative '\x' escape sequence
     arguments in the pending output line.

   * Move the drawing position vertically by the vertical line spacing.

   * Write out the pending output line.

   * Move the drawing position vertically by the "extra post-vertical
     line space", the maximum of all positive '\x' escape sequence
     arguments in the line that has just been output.

   * Move the drawing position vertically by the "post-vertical line
     spacing" (see below).

   Prefer 'vs' or 'pvs' over 'ls' to produce double-spaced documents.
'vs' and 'pvs' have finer granularity than 'ls'; moreover, some
preprocessors assume single spacing.  See Manipulating Spacing,
regarding the '\x' escape sequence and the 'ls' request.

 -- Request: .pvs [space]
 -- Request: .pvs +space
 -- Request: .pvs -space
 -- Register: \n[.pvs]
     Set the post-vertical spacing to, or alter it by, SPACE.  The
     default scaling unit is 'p'.  If 'pvs' is invoked without an
     argument, the post-vertical spacing is reset to the previous value
     before the last call to 'pvs'.  GNU 'troff' emits a warning in
     category 'range' if SPACE is negative; the post-vertical spacing is
     then set to zero.

     The read-only register '.pvs' interpolates the post-vertical
     spacing.

5.20.3 Using Fractional Type Sizes
----------------------------------

When configuring the type size, AT&T 'troff' ignored scaling units and
interpreted all measurements in points.  Combined with integer
arithmetic, this design choice made it impossible to support, for
instance, ten-and-a-half-point type.  In GNU 'troff', an output device
can select a scaling factor that subdivides a point into "scaled
points".  A type size expressed in scaled points can thus represent a
non-integral size in points.

   A "scaled point", scaling unit 's', is equal to 1/SIZESCALE points,
where the device description file, 'DESC', specifies SIZESCALE and
otherwise defaults to 1.(1)  (see Using Fractional Type
Sizes-Footnote-1) GNU 'troff' also defines the "typographical point",
scaling unit 'z', which explicitly specifies a type size of potentially
non-integral measure.  The program multiplies typographical points by
SIZESCALE and converts the value to an integer.  Arguments GNU 'troff'
interprets in 'z' units by default comprise those to the escape
sequences '\H' and '\s', to the request 'ps', the third argument to the
'cs' request, and the second and fourth arguments to the 'tkf' request.

   For example, if SIZESCALE is 1000, then a scaled point is one
thousandth of a point.  The request '.ps 10.5' is synonymous with '.ps
10.5z'; both set the type size to 10,500 scaled points, or
10.5 typographical points.

 -- Register: \n[.ps]
     This read-only register interpolates the type size in scaled
     points.  '\n[.ps]s', '\n[.s]z', and '1m' are co-equal by
     definition.

     .tm device=\*[.T]
     .tm A: .s=\n[.s]z, .ps=\n[.ps]s
     .ps 10.5
     .tm B: .s=\n[.s]z, .ps=\n[.ps]s
     .ps 12.3p
     .tm C: .s=\n[.s]z, .ps=\n[.ps]s
     .ps 8.1z
     .tm D: .s=\n[.s]z, .ps=\n[.ps]s
     .ps 10500s
     .tm E: .s=\n[.s]z, .ps=\n[.ps]s
         => device=ps
         => A: .s=10z, .ps=10000s
         => B: .s=10.5z, .ps=10500s
         => C: .s=12.3z, .ps=12300s
         => D: .s=8.1z, .ps=8100s
         => E: .s=10.5z, .ps=10500s

   It makes no sense to use the 'z' scaling unit in a numeric expression
whose default scaling unit is neither 'u' nor 'z', so GNU 'troff'
disallows this.  Similarly, it is nonsensical to use scaling units other
than 'p', 's', 'z', or 'u' in a numeric expression whose default scaling
unit is 'z', and so GNU 'troff' disallows those as well.

 -- Register: \n[.psr]
 -- Register: \n[.sr]
     Output devices may be limited in the type sizes they can employ.
     The '.s' and '.ps' registers represent the type size selected by
     the formatter as it understands a device's capability.  The last
     _requested_ type size is interpolated in scaled points by the
     read-only register '.psr' and in points as a decimal fraction by
     the read-only string-valued register '.sr'.

     For example, if a document requests a type size of 10.95 points,
     and the nearest size permitted by a 'sizes' request (or by the
     'sizes' or 'sizescale' directives in the device's 'DESC' file) is
     11 points, 'groff' uses the latter value.

   The '\s' escape sequence offers the following syntax forms that work
with fractional type sizes and accept scaling units.  The delimited
forms need not use the neutral apostrophe; see Delimiters.

'\s[N]'
'\s'N''
     Set the type size to N typographical points; N is a numeric
     expression with a default scaling unit of 'z'.

'\s[+N]'
'\s[-N]'
'\s+[N]'
'\s-[N]'
'\s'+N''
'\s'-N''
'\s+'N''
'\s-'N''
     Increase or decrease the type size by N typographical points; N is
     a numeric expression with a default scaling unit of 'z'.  If N is
     '0', restore the previous size.

   (1) See Device and Font Description Files.

5.21 Colors
===========

GNU 'troff' supports color output with a variety of color spaces and up
to 16 bits per channel.  Some devices, particularly terminals, may be
more limited.  When color support is enabled, two colors are current at
any given time: the "stroke color", with which glyphs, rules (lines),
and geometric objects like circles and polygons are drawn, and the "fill
color", which can be used to paint the interior of a closed geometric
figure.

 -- Request: .color [b]
 -- Register: \n[.color]
     Enable or disable output of color-related device-independent output
     commands per Boolean expression B.  It is enabled by default, and
     if B is omitted.

     The read-only register '.color' interpolates 1 if color support is
     enabled, 0 otherwise.

     Color can also be disabled with the '-c' command-line option.

 -- Request: .defcolor ident scheme color-component ...
     Define a color named IDENT.  SCHEME selects a color space and
     determines the quantity of required COLOR-COMPONENTs; it must be
     one of 'rgb' (three components), 'cmy' (three), 'cmyk' (four), or
     'gray' (one).  'grey' is accepted as a synonym of 'gray'.  The
     color components can be encoded as a single hexadecimal value
     starting with '#' or '##'.  The former indicates that each
     component is in the range 0-255 (0-FF), the latter the range
     0-65,535 (0-FFFF).

          .defcolor half gray #7f
          .defcolor pink rgb #FFC0CB
          .defcolor magenta rgb  ##ffff0000ffff

     Alternatively, each color component can be specified as a decimal
     fraction in the range 0-1, interpreted using a default scaling unit
     of 'f', which multiplies its value by 65,536 (but clamps it at
     65,535).

          .defcolor gray50 rgb 0.5 0.5 0.5
          .defcolor darkgreen rgb 0.1f 0.5f 0.2f

     You can obtain a report of colors defined by 'defcolor' on the
     standard error stream with the 'pcolor' request.  See Debugging.

   Each output device has a color named 'default', which cannot be
redefined.  A device's default stroke and fill colors are not
necessarily the same.  For the 'dvi', 'html', 'pdf', 'ps', and 'xhtml'
output devices, GNU 'troff' automatically loads a macro file defining
many color names at startup.  By the same mechanism, the devices
supported by 'grotty' recognize the eight standard ISO 6429/ECMA-48
color names.(1)  (see Colors-Footnote-1)

 -- Request: .gcolor [col]
 -- Escape sequence: \mc
 -- Escape sequence: \m(co
 -- Escape sequence: \m[col]
 -- Register: \n[.m]
     Select COL as the stroke color for glyphs, rules, and objects drawn
     with '\D'...'' escape sequences.  The escape sequence '\M[]'
     restores the previous stroke color, or the default if there is
     none, as does a 'gcolor' request without an argument.

          .gcolor red
          The next words
          .gcolor
          \m[red]are in red\m[]
          and these words are in the previous color.

     The current environment's stroke color selection is available in
     the read-only string-valued register '.m' (see Environments).  The
     default strike color is named 'default'.

     GNU 'troff' does not tokenize '\m' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.  It thus can be used in requests
     that expect a single-character argument.  We can assign a stroke
     color to a margin character as follows (see Miscellaneous).

          .mc \m[red]x\m[]

 -- Request: .fcolor [col]
 -- Escape sequence: \Mc
 -- Escape sequence: \M(co
 -- Escape sequence: \M[col]
 -- Register: \n[.M]
     Select COL as the fill color for objects drawn with '\D'...''
     escape sequences.  The escape sequence '\M[]' restores the previous
     fill color, or the default if there is none, as does an 'fcolor'
     request without an argument.

     GNU 'troff' does not tokenize '\F' when reading it; the escape
     sequence updates the environment.  It thus can be used in requests
     that expect a single-character argument.  We can assign a fill
     color to a margin character as follows (see Miscellaneous);
     'grotty' interprets the fill color as a character cell background
     color.

          .mc \m[black]\M[green]x\M[]\m[]

     The current environment's fill color selection is available in the
     read-only string-valued register '.M' (see Environments).  The
     default fill color is named 'default'.

     Create an ellipse with a red interior as follows.

          \M[red]\h'0.5i'\D'E 2i 1i'\M[]

   (1) These are known vulgarly as "ANSI" colors, after its X3.64
standard, now withdrawn.

5.22 Strings
============

GNU 'troff' supports strings primarily for user convenience.
Conventionally, if one would define a macro only to interpolate a small
amount of text, without invoking requests or calling any other macros,
one defines a string instead.  Only one string is predefined by the
language.

 -- String: \*[.T]
     Contains the name of the output device (for example, 'utf8' or
     'pdf').

   The 'ds' request creates a string with a specified name and contents
and the '\*' escape sequence dereferences its name, interpolating its
contents.  If the string named by the '\*' escape sequence does not
exist, it is defined as empty, nothing is interpolated, and a warning in
category 'mac' is emitted.  See Warnings, regarding the enablement and
suppression of warnings.

 -- Request: .ds name [["]contents]
 -- Request: .ds1 name [["]contents]
 -- Escape sequence: \*n
 -- Escape sequence: \*(nm
 -- Escape sequence: \*[name [arg1 arg2 ...]]
     Define a string called NAME with contents CONTENTS.  If NAME
     already exists as an alias, the target of the alias is redefined;
     see 'als' and 'rm' below.  If 'ds' is invoked with only one
     argument, NAME is defined as an empty string.  Otherwise, GNU
     'troff' stores CONTENTS in copy mode.  '\*' is itself interpreted
     even in copy mode.(1)  (see Strings-Footnote-1)

     The '\*' escape sequence interpolates a previously defined string
     NAME (one-character name N, two-character name NM).  The bracketed
     interpolation form accepts arguments that are handled as macro
     arguments are; recall Calling Macros.  In contrast to macro calls,
     however, if a closing bracket ']' occurs in a string argument, that
     argument must be enclosed in double quotes.  When defining strings,
     argument interpolations must be escaped if they are to reference
     parameters from the calling context; see Parameters.

          .ds cite (\\$1, \\$2)
          Gray codes are explored in \*[cite Morgan 1998].
              => Gray codes are explored in (Morgan, 1998).

     *Caution:* After the formatter has read the space character that
     ends the first argument, it treats the remainder of the input line
     as the second argument, including any spaces, up to a newline or
     comment escape sequence.  Ending string definitions (and
     appendments) with a comment, even an empty one, prevents unwanted
     space from creeping into them during source document maintenance.

          .ds Si silicon \" use chemical symbol
          We observed a \*[Si]-based life form.
              => We observed a silicon -based life form.

     Instead, place the comment on another line or put the comment
     escape sequence immediately adjacent to the last character of the
     string.

          .ds Si silicon\" use chemical symbol
          We observed a \*[Si]-based life form.
              => We observed a silicon-based life form.

     Because the first space after the string name separates the
     arguments, you can retain it while using a comment to document an
     empty string.

          .ds author Alice Pleasance Liddell\"
          .ds friends \" empty; append to with .as

     The formatter removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     CONTENTS, permitting initial embedded spaces in it.  It interprets
     any other '"' literally, but the wise author uses the special
     character escape sequence '\[dq]' instead if the string might be
     interpolated as part of a macro argument; recall Calling Macros.

          .ds salutation "         Yours in a white wine sauce,\"
          .ds c-var-defn "  char mydate[]=\[dq]2020-07-29\[dq];\"

     Strings are not limited to a single input line of text.  '\<RET>'
     works just as it does elsewhere.  The resulting string is stored
     _without_ the newlines.  When filling is disabled, care is required
     to avoid overrunning the line length when interpolating strings.

          .ds foo This string contains \
          text on multiple lines \
          of input.

     Conversely, when filling is enabled, it is not necessary to append
     '\c' to a string interpolation to prevent a break afterward, as
     might be required in a macro argument.  Nor does a string require
     use of the GNU 'troff' 'chop' request to excise a trailing newline
     as is often done with diversions.

     It is not possible to embed a newline in a string that will be
     interpreted as such when the string is interpolated.  To achieve
     that effect, use '\*' to interpolate a macro instead; see Punning
     Names.

     Because strings are similar to macros, they too can be defined so
     as to suppress AT&T 'troff' compatibility mode when used; see
     Writing Macros and Compatibility Mode.  The 'ds1' request defines a
     string such that compatibility mode is off when the string is later
     interpolated.  To be more precise, GNU 'troff' inserts a a
     "compatibility save" token at the beginning of CONTENTS, and a
     "compatibility restore" token at the end.

          .nr xxx 12345
          .ds aa The value of xxx is \\n[xxx].
          .ds1 bb The value of xxx is \\n[xxx].
          .
          .cp 1
          .
          \*(aa
              error-> warning: register '[' not defined
              => The value of xxx is 0xxx].
          \*(bb
              => The value of xxx is 12345.

 -- Request: .as name [["]contents]
 -- Request: .as1 name [["]contents]
     The 'as' request is similar to 'ds' but appends CONTENTS to the
     string stored as NAME instead of redefining it.  If NAME doesn't
     exist yet, it is created.  If 'as' is invoked with only one
     argument, no operation is performed (beyond dereferencing the
     string).

          .as salutation " with shallots, onions and garlic,\"

     *Caution:* The formatter reads the second argument to the end of
     the line in copy mode, omitting any leading neutral double quote
     '"' character.  See the discussion of the 'ds' request above.

     The 'as1' request works as does 'as', but like 'ds1', it brackets
     CONTENTS with compatibility save and restore tokens.

   Several requests exist to perform rudimentary string operations.
Strings can be queried ('length') and modified ('chop', 'substring',
'stringup', 'stringdown'), and their names can be manipulated through
renaming, removal, and aliasing ('rn', 'rm', 'als').

 -- Request: .length reg [["]contents]
     Compute the number of characters in CONTENTS and store the count in
     the register REG.  If REG doesn't exist, GNU 'troff' creates it.

     GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     CONTENTS, permitting initial embedded spaces in it, and reads it to
     the end of the input line in copy mode.  See Copy Mode.

          .ds xxx abcd\h'3i'efgh
          .length yyy \*[xxx]
          \n[yyy]
              => 14

     *Caution:* The formatter reads the second argument to the end of
     the line in copy mode, omitting any leading neutral double quote
     '"' character.  See the discussion of the 'ds' request above.

     *Caution:* If you interpolate a macro or diversion in CONTENTS (see
     Punning Names), the 'length' request counts characters (or nodes)
     only up to the first newline, and leaves the rest on the input
     stream.  In conventional circumstances, that means the remainder is
     interpreted, and may be formatted.  To discover the length of any
     string, macro, or diversion, use the 'pm' request.  See Debugging.

 -- Request: .chop object
     Remove the last character from the macro, string, or diversion
     named OBJECT.  This is useful for removing the newline from the end
     of a diversion that is to be interpolated as a string.  This
     request can be used repeatedly on the same OBJECT; see GNU troff
     Internals, for details on nodes inserted additionally by GNU
     'troff'.

 -- Request: .substring str start [end]
     Replace the string named STR with its substring bounded by the
     indices START and END, inclusively.  The first character in the
     string has index 0.  If END is omitted, it is implicitly set to the
     largest valid value (the string length minus one).  Negative
     indices count backward from the end of the string: the last
     character has index -1, the character before the last has index -2,
     and so on.

          .ds xxx abcdefgh
          .substring xxx 1 -4
          \*[xxx]
              => bcde
          .substring xxx 2
          \*[xxx]
              => de

 -- Request: .stringdown str
 -- Request: .stringup str
     Alter the string named STR by replacing each of its bytes with its
     lowercase ('stringdown') or uppercase ('stringup') version (if one
     exists).  Special characters in the string will often transform in
     the expected way due to the regular naming convention for accented
     characters.  When they do not, use substrings and/or catenation.

          .ds resume R\['e]sum\['e]\"
          \*[resume]
          .stringdown resume
          \*[resume]
          .stringup resume
          \*[resume]
              => Résumé résumé RÉSUMÉ

 -- Request: .rn old new
     Rename the request, macro, diversion, or string OLD to NEW.

 -- Request: .rm name ...
     Remove each request, macro, diversion, or string NAME.  GNU 'troff'
     treats subsequent invocations as if the name had never been
     defined.

     This request is incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff' manual
     as accepting only one argument.

 -- Request: .als new-name existing-name
     Create alias (additional name) NEW-NAME of request, string, macro,
     or diversion EXISTING-NAME, causing the names to refer to the same
     stored object.  If EXISTING-NAME is undefined, the formatter
     ignores the request.(2)  (see Strings-Footnote-2) If NEW-NAME
     already exists, its contents are lost unless already aliased.

     To understand how the 'als' request works, consider two different
     storage pools: one for objects (macros, strings, etc.), and another
     for names.  As soon as an object is defined, GNU 'troff' adds it to
     the object pool, adds its name to the name pool, and creates a link
     between them.  When 'als' creates an alias, it adds a new name to
     the name pool that gets linked to the same object as the old name.

     Now consider this example.

          .de foo
          ..
          .
          .als bar foo
          .
          .de bar
          .  foo
          ..
          .
          .bar
              error-> input stack limit exceeded (probable infinite
              error-> loop)

     In the above, 'bar' remains an _alias_--another name for--the
     object referred to by 'foo', which the second 'de' request
     replaces.  Alternatively, imagine that the 'de' request
     _dereferences_ its argument before replacing it.  Either way, the
     result of calling 'bar' is a recursive loop that finally leads to
     an error.  See Writing Macros.

     To remove an alias, call 'rm' on its name.  The object itself is
     not destroyed until it has no more names.

     When a request, macro, string, or diversion is aliased
     redefinitions and appendments "write through" alias names.  To
     replace an alias with a separately defined object, remove its name
     first.

   (1) See Copy Mode.

   (2) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'mac'.  See Warnings.

5.23 Conditionals and Loops
===========================

'groff' has 'if' and 'while' control structures like other languages.
However, the syntax for grouping multiple input lines in the branches or
bodies of these structures is unusual.

5.23.1 Operators in Conditionals
--------------------------------

The 'if', 'ie', and 'while' requests test the truth values of numeric
expressions.  They also support several additional Boolean operators;
the members of this expanded class are termed "conditional expressions";
their truth values are as shown below.

'c CHR'
     True if a character CHR is available; CHR is an ordinary, special
     or indexed character, whether defined by a font description file or
     a request.

'd NAME'
     True if a string, macro, diversion, or request called NAME exists.

'e'
     True if the current page is even-numbered.

'F FONT'
     True if FONT exists.  FONT is handled as if it were an argument to
     the 'ft' request (that is, the default family is combined with an
     abstract style and font translation is applied), but FONT cannot be
     a mounting position, and no font is mounted.

'm COLOR'
     True if COLOR is defined.

'n'
     True if the document is being processed in 'nroff' mode.

'o'
     True if the current page is odd-numbered.

'r REGISTER'
     True if REGISTER exists.

'S STYLE'
     True if STYLE is available for the current font family.  Font
     translation is applied.

't'
     True if the document is being processed in 'troff' mode.

'v'
     Always false.  This condition exists for compatibility with certain
     other 'troff' implementations.(1)  (see Operators in
     Conditionals-Footnote-1)

   If the first argument to an 'if', 'ie', or 'while' request begins
with a non-alphanumeric character apart from '!' (see below) and is not
a numeric expression, the formatter performs an output comparison test.
(2)  (see Operators in Conditionals-Footnote-2)

''XXX'YYY''
     This "output comparison operator" interpolates a true value if
     formatting the comparands XXX and YYY produces the same output
     commands.  The delimiter need not be a neutral apostrophe: the
     output comparison operator accepts the same delimiters as most
     escape sequences; see Delimiters.  'troff' formats XXX and YYY in
     separate scratch buffers; after comparison, it discards the
     resulting data.

          .ie "|"\fR|\fP" true
          .el false
              => true

     The resulting glyph properties, including font family, style, size,
     and slant, must match, but not necessarily the requests and/or
     escape sequences used to obtain them.  In the previous example, '|'
     and '\fR|\fP' result in '|' glyphs in the same typefaces at the
     same positions, so the comparands are equal.  If '.ft I' had been
     added before the '.ie', they would differ: the first '|' would
     produce an italic '|', not a roman one.  Motions must match in
     orientation and magnitude to within the applicable horizontal and
     vertical motion quanta of the device, after rounding.  '.if
     "\u\d"\v'0'"' is false even though both comparands result in zero
     net motion, because motions are not interpreted or optimized but
     sent as-is to the output.(3)  (see Operators in
     Conditionals-Footnote-3) On the other hand, '.if "\d"\v'0.5m'"' is
     true, because '\d' is defined as a downward motion of one-half
     em.(4)  (see Operators in Conditionals-Footnote-4)

     Surround the comparands with '\?' to avoid formatting them; this
     causes them to be compared character by character, as with string
     comparisons in other programming languages.

          .ie "\?|\?"\?\fR|\fP\?" true
          .el false
              => false

     Since GNU 'troff' reads comparands protected with '\?' in copy
     mode,(5) (see Operators in Conditionals-Footnote-5) they need not
     even be syntactically valid.  The escape character is still
     lexically recognized, however, and consumes the next character.

          .ds a \[
          .ds b \[
          .if '\?\*a\?'\?\*b\?' a and b equivalent
          .if '\?\\?'\?\\?' backslashes equivalent
          .if '\?\P\?'\?P\?' backslash-P and P equivalent
              => a and b equivalent

   The above operators can't be combined with most others, but a leading
'!', not followed immediately by spaces or tabs, complements an
expression.

     .nr x 1
     .ie !r x register x is not defined
     .el      register x is defined
         => register x is defined

   Spaces and tabs are optional immediately after the 'c', 'd', 'F',
'm', 'r', and 'S' operators, but right after '!', they end the predicate
and the conditional evaluates true.(6)  (see Operators in
Conditionals-Footnote-6)

     .nr x 1
     .ie ! r x register x is not defined
     .el       register x is defined
         => r x register x is not defined

The unexpected 'r x' in the output is a clue that our conditional was
not interpreted as we planned, but matters may not always be so obvious.

   Conditional operators do not create 'roff' language objects as
interpolations with '\n' and '\*' escape sequences do.

   (1) We refer to 'vtroff', which converted the C/A/T command stream
produced by early-vintage AT&T 'troff' to input suitable for Versatec
and Benson-Varian plotters.

   (2) Strictly, letters not otherwise recognized _are_ treated as
output comparison delimiters.  A portable document avoids using letters
not in the list above; for example, Plan 9 'troff' uses 'h' to test a
mode it calls 'htmlroff', and GNU 'troff' may provide additional
operators in the future.

   (3) Because formatting of the comparands takes place in a dummy
environment, vertical motions within them cannot spring traps.  See
Traps.

   (4) All of this is to say that the lists of nodes created by
formatting XXX and YYY must be identical.  See GNU troff Internals.

   (5) See Copy Mode.

   (6) This bizarre behavior maintains compatibility with AT&T 'troff'.

5.23.2 if-then
--------------

 -- Request: .if cond-expr input
     Evaluate the conditional expression COND-EXPR, and if it evaluates
     true (or to a positive value), interpret the remainder of the line
     INPUT as if it were an input line.  Recall from Invoking Requests
     that any quantity of spaces between arguments to requests serves
     only to separate them; leading spaces in INPUT are thus not seen.
     INPUT effectively _cannot_ be omitted; if COND-EXPR is true and
     INPUT is empty, the formatter interprets the newline at the end of
     the control line as a blank input line (and therefore a blank text
     line).

          super\c
          tanker
          .nr force-word-break 1
          super\c
          .if ((\n[force-word-break] = 1) & \n[.int])
          tanker
              => supertanker super tanker

 -- Request: .nop [input]
     Interpret INPUT as if it were an input line.  'nop' resembles '.if
     1'; it puts a break on the output if INPUT is empty.  Unlike 'if',
     it cannot govern conditional blocks.  Its application is to
     maintain consistent indentation within macro definitions even when
     formatting output.

          .als real-MAC MAC
          .de wrapped-MAC
          .  tm MAC: called with arguments \\$@
          .  nop \\*[real-MAC]\\
          ..
          .als MAC wrapped-MAC
          \# Later...
          .als MAC real-MAC

     In the above, we've used aliasing, 'nop', and the interpolation of
     a macro as a string to interpose a wrapper around the macro 'MAC'
     (perhaps to debug it).

5.23.3 if-else
--------------

 -- Request: .ie cond-expr input
 -- Request: .el input
     Use the 'ie' and 'el' requests to write an if-then-else.  The first
     request is the "if" part and the latter is the "else" part.
     Unusually among programming languages, any number of
     non-conditional requests may be interposed between the 'ie' branch
     and the 'el' branch.

          .nr a 0
          .ie \na a is non-zero.
          .nr a +1
          .el a was not positive but is now \na.
              => a was not positive but is now 1.

     Another way in which 'el' is an ordinary request is that it does
     not lexically "bind" more tightly to its 'ie' counterpart than it
     does to any other request.  This fact can surprise C programmers.

          .nr a 1
          .nr z 0
          .ie \nz \
          .  ie \na a is true
          .  el     a is false
          .el z is false
              => a is false

     To conveniently nest conditionals, keep reading.

5.23.4 Conditional Blocks
-------------------------

It is frequently desirable for a control structure to govern more than
one request, macro call, text line, or combination of the foregoing.
The opening and closing brace escape sequences '\{' and '\}' define such
groups.  These "conditional blocks" can furthermore be nested.

 -- Escape sequence: \{
 -- Escape sequence: \}
     '\{' begins a conditional block; it must appear (after optional
     spaces and tabs) immediately subsequent to the conditional
     expression of an 'if', 'ie', or 'while' request,(1) (see
     Conditional Blocks-Footnote-1) or as the argument to an 'el'
     request.

     '\}' ends a conditional block and should appear on a line with
     other occurrences of itself as necessary to match '\{' sequences.
     It can be preceded by a control character, spaces, and tabs.  Input
     after any quantity of '\}' sequences on the same line is processed
     only if all of the preceding conditions to which they correspond
     are true.  Furthermore, a '\}' closing the body of a 'while'
     request must be the last such escape sequence on an input line.

     Brace escape sequences outside of control structures have no
     meaning and produce no output.

     *Caution:* Input lines using '\{' often end with '\RET', especially
     in macros that consist primarily of control lines.  Forgetting to
     use '\RET' on an input line after '\{' is a common source of error.

   We might write the following in a page header macro.  If we delete
'\RET', the header will carry an unwanted extra empty line (except on
page 1).

     .if (\\n[%] != 1) \{\
     .  ie ((\\n[%] % 2) = 0) .tl \\*[even-numbered-page-title]
     .  el                    .tl \\*[odd-numbered-page-title]
     .\}

   Let us take a closer look at how conditional blocks nest.

     A
     .if 0 \{ B
     C
     D
     \}E
     F
         => A F

     N
     .if 1 \{ O
     .  if 0 \{ P
     Q
     R\} S\} T
     U
         => N O U

   The above behavior may challenge the intuition; it was implemented to
retain compatibility with AT&T 'troff'.  For clarity, it is idiomatic to
end input lines with '\{' (followed by '\<RET>' if appropriate), and to
precede '\}' on an input line with nothing more than a control
character, spaces, tabs, and other instances of itself.

   We can use 'ie', 'el', and conditional blocks to simulate the
multi-way "switch" or "case" control structures of other languages.  The
following example is adapted from the 'groff' 'man' package.
Indentation is used to clarify the logic.

     .\" Simulate switch/case in roff.
     .      ie '\\$2'1' .ds title General Commands\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'2' .ds title System Calls\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'3' .ds title Library Functions\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'4' .ds title Kernel Interfaces\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'5' .ds title File Formats\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'6' .ds title Games\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'7' .ds title Miscellaneous Information\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'8' .ds title System Management\"
     .el \{.ie '\\$2'9' .ds title Kernel Development\"
     .el                .ds title \" empty
     .\}\}\}\}\}\}\}\}

   (1) See while.

5.23.5 while
------------

GNU 'troff' provides a looping construct: the 'while' request.  Its
syntax matches the 'if' request.

 -- Request: .while cond-expr input
     Evaluate the conditional expression COND-EXPR, and repeatedly
     execute INPUT unless and until COND-EXPR evaluates false.  INPUT,
     which is often a conditional block, is referred to as the 'while'
     request's "body".

          .nr a 0 1
          .while (\na < 9) \{\
          \n+a,
          .\}
          \n+a
              => 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

     GNU 'troff' treats the body of a 'while' request similarly to that
     of a 'de' request (albeit one not read in copy mode(1) (see
     while-Footnote-1)), but stores it under an internal name and
     deletes it when the loop finishes.  The operation of a macro
     containing a 'while' request can slow significantly if its body is
     large.  Each time GNU 'troff' interpolates the macro, it parses and
     stores the 'while' body again.

          .de xxx
          .  nr num 10
          .  while (\\n[num] > 0) \{\
          .    \" many lines of code
          .    nr num -1
          .  \}
          ..

     An often better solution--and one that is more portable, since AT&T
     'troff' lacked the 'while' request--is to instead write a recursive
     macro, which is parsed only once.(2)  (see while-Footnote-2)

          .de yy
          .  if (\\n(nm > 0) \{\
          .    \" many lines of code
          .    nr nm -1
          .    yy
          .  \}
          ..
          .
          .de xx
          .  nr nm 10
          .  yy
          ..

     To prevent infinite loops, GNU 'troff' limits the default number of
     available recursion levels to 1,000 or somewhat less.(3)  (see
     while-Footnote-3) You can disable this protective measure, or alter
     the limit, by setting the 'slimit' register.  See Debugging.

     As noted above, if a 'while' body begins with a conditional block,
     its closing brace must end an input line.

          .if 1 \{\
          .  nr a 0 1
          .  while (\n[a] < 10) \{\
          .    nop \n+[a]
          .\}\}
              error-> unbalanced brace escape sequences

 -- Request: .break
     Exit a 'while' loop.  Do not confuse this request with a
     typographical break or the 'br' request.

 -- Request: .continue
     Skip the remainder of a 'while' loop's body, immediately retesting
     its conditional expression.

   (1) See Copy Mode.

   (2) unless you redefine it

   (3) "somewhat less" because things other than macro calls can be on
the input stack

5.24 Writing Macros
===================

A "macro" is a stored collection of text and control lines that can be
interpolated multiple times.  Use macros to define common operations.
Macros are called in the same way that requests are invoked.  While
requests exist for the purpose of creating macros, simply calling an
undefined macro, or interpolating it as a string, will cause it to be
defined as empty.  See Identifiers.

 -- Request: .de name [end]
     Define a macro NAME, replacing the definition of any existing
     request, macro, string, or diversion called NAME.  If NAME already
     exists as an alias, the target of the alias is redefined; recall
     Strings.  GNU 'troff' enters copy mode,(1) (see Writing
     Macros-Footnote-1) storing subsequent input lines as the macro
     definition.  If the optional second argument is not specified, the
     definition ends with the control line '..' (two dots).
     Alternatively, END identifies a macro whose call syntax at the
     start of a control line ends the definition of NAME; END is then
     called normally.  A macro definition must end in the same
     conditional block (if any) in which it began (recall see
     Conditional Blocks).  Spaces or tabs are permitted after the
     control character in the line containing this ending token (either
     '.' or 'END'), but a tab immediately after the token prevents its
     recognition as the end of a macro definition.  The macro END can be
     called with arguments.(2)  (see Writing Macros-Footnote-2)

     Here is a small example macro called 'P' that causes a break and
     inserts some vertical space.  It could be used to separate
     paragraphs.

          .de P
          .  br
          .  sp .8v
          ..

     We can define one macro within another.  Attempting to nest '..'
     naïvely will end the outer definition because the inner definition
     isn't interpreted as such until the outer macro is later
     interpolated.  We can use an end macro instead.  Each level of
     nesting should use a unique end macro.

     An end macro need not be defined until it is called.  This fact
     enables a nested macro definition to begin inside one macro and end
     inside another.  Consider the following example.(3)  (see Writing
     Macros-Footnote-3)

          .de m1
          .  de m2 m3
          you
          ..
          .de m3
          Hello,
          Joe.
          ..
          .de m4
          do
          ..
          .m1
          know?
          .  m3
          What
          .m4
          .m2
              => Hello, Joe.  What do you know?

     A nested macro definition _can_ be terminated with '..' and nested
     macros _can_ reuse end macros, but these control lines must be
     escaped multiple times for each level of nesting.  The necessity of
     this escaping and the utility of nested macro definitions will
     become clearer when we employ macro parameters and consider the
     behavior of copy mode in detail.

   'de' defines a macro that inherits the compatibility mode enablement
status of its context (see Implementation Differences).  Often it is
desirable to make a macro that uses 'groff' features callable from
contexts where compatibility mode is on; for instance, when writing
extensions to a historical macro package.  To achieve this,
compatibility mode needs to be switched off while such a macro is
interpreted--without disturbing that state when it is finished.

 -- Request: .de1 name [end]
     The 'de1' request defines a macro to be interpreted with
     compatibility mode disabled.  When NAME is called, compatibility
     mode enablement status is saved; it is restored when the call
     completes.  Observe the extra backlash before the interpolation of
     register 'xxx'; we'll explore this subject in Copy Mode.

          .nr xxx 12345
          .de aa
          The value of xxx is \\n[xxx].
          .  br
          ..
          .de1 bb
          The value of xxx is \\n[xxx].
          ..
          .cp 1
          .aa
              error-> warning: register '[' not defined
              => The value of xxx is 0xxx].
          .bb
              => The value of xxx is 12345.

 -- Request: .dei name [end]
 -- Request: .dei1 name [end]
     The 'dei' request defines a macro with its name and end macro
     indirected through strings.  That is, it interpolates strings named
     NAME and END before performing the definition.

     The following examples are equivalent.

          .ds xx aa
          .ds yy bb
          .dei xx yy

          .de aa bb

     The 'dei1' request bears the same relationship to 'dei' as 'de1'
     does to 'de'; it temporarily turns compatibility mode off when NAME
     is called.

 -- Request: .am name [end]
 -- Request: .am1 name [end]
 -- Request: .ami name [end]
 -- Request: .ami1 name [end]
     'am' appends subsequent input lines to macro NAME, extending its
     definition, and otherwise working as 'de' does.

     To make the previously defined 'P' macro set indented instead of
     block paragraphs, add the necessary code to the existing macro.

          .am P
          .ti +5n
          ..

     The other requests are analogous to their 'de' counterparts.  The
     'am1' request turns off compatibility mode during interpretation of
     the appendment.  The 'ami' request appends indirectly, meaning that
     strings NAME and END are interpolated with the resulting names used
     before appending.  The 'ami1' request is similar to 'ami',
     disabling compatibility mode during interpretation of the appended
     lines.

   Using 'trace.tmac', you can trace calls to 'de', 'de1', 'am', and
'am1'.  You can also use the 'backtrace' request at any point desired to
troubleshoot tricky spots (see Debugging).

   See Strings, for the 'als', 'rm', and 'rn' requests to create an
alias of, remove, and rename a macro, respectively.

   Macro identifiers share their name space with requests, strings, and
diversions; see Identifiers.  The 'am', 'as', 'da', 'de', 'di', and 'ds'
requests (together with their variants) create a new object only if the
name of the macro, diversion, or string is currently undefined or if it
is defined as a request; normally, they modify the value of an existing
object.  See the description of the 'als' request: als, for pitfalls
when redefining a macro that is aliased.

 -- Request: .return [input]
     Stop interpreting an interpolated macro, skipping to the end of its
     definition.  Do not confuse 'return' with 'rt'.  If called with an
     argument INPUT, GNU 'troff' performs the skip twice--once within
     the macro being interpreted and once in an enclosing macro,
     permitting a macro to wrap the request.(4)  (see Writing
     Macros-Footnote-4)

   (1) See Copy Mode.

   (2) While it is possible to define and call a macro '.', you can't
use it as an end macro: during a macro definition, '..' is never handled
as calling '.', even if '.de NAME .' explicitly precedes it.

   (3) Its structure is adapted from, and isomorphic to, part of a
solution by Tadziu Hoffman to the problem of reflowing text multiple
times to find an optimal configuration for it.
<https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2008-12/msg00006.html>

   (4) as 'trace.tmac' does

5.24.1 Parameters
-----------------

Macro calls and string interpolations optionally accept a list of
arguments; recall Calling Macros.  At the time such an interpolation
takes place, these "parameters" can be examined using a register and a
variety of escape sequences starting with '\$'.  All such escape
sequences are interpreted even in copy mode, a fact we shall motivate
and explain below (see Copy Mode).

 -- Register: \n[.$]
     The count of parameters available to a macro or string is kept in
     this read-only register.  The 'shift' request can change its value.

   Any individual parameter can be accessed by its position in the list
of arguments to the macro call, numbered from left to right starting at
1, with one of the following escape sequences.

 -- Escape sequence: \$n
 -- Escape sequence: \$(nn
 -- Escape sequence: \$[nnn]
     Interpolate the Nth, NNth, or NNNth parameter.  The first form
     expects only a single digit (1<=N<=9)), the second two digits
     (01<=NN<=99)), and the third any positive integer NNN.  Macros and
     strings accept an unlimited number of parameters.  '\$' is
     interpreted even in copy mode.(1)  (see Parameters-Footnote-1)

 -- Request: .shift [n]
     Shift macro or string parameters N places (by 1 if N omitted):
     argument I becomes argument I-N; arguments 1 to N become
     unavailable.  Shifting by a non-positive amount, or outside of a
     macro or string definition, performs no operation.  The register
     '.$' adjusts its value accordingly.

   In practice, parameter interpolations are usually seen prefixed with
an extra escape character.  This is because the '\$' family of escape
sequences is interpreted even in copy mode.(2)  (see
Parameters-Footnote-2)

 -- Escape sequence: \$*
 -- Escape sequence: \$@
 -- Escape sequence: \$^
     In some cases it is convenient to interpolate all of the parameters
     at once (to pass them to a request, for instance).  The '\$*'
     escape catenates the parameters, separating them with spaces.
     '\$@' is similar, surrounding each parameter with double quotes and
     separating them with spaces.  If not in compatibility mode, the
     interpolation depth of double quotes is preserved (see Calling
     Macros).  '\$^' interpolates all parameters as if they were
     arguments to the 'ds' request.

          .de foo
          . tm $1='\\$1'
          . tm $2='\\$2'
          . tm $*='\\$*'
          . tm $@='\\$@'
          . tm $^='\\$^'
          ..
          .foo " This is a "test"
              error-> $1=' This is a '
              error-> $2='test"'
              error-> $*=' This is a  test"'
              error-> $@='" This is a " "test""'
              error-> $^='" This is a "test"'

     '\$*' is useful when writing a macro that doesn't need to
     distinguish its arguments, or even to not interpret them; examples
     include macros that produce diagnostic messages by wrapping the
     'tm' or 'ab' requests.  Use '\$@' when writing a macro that may
     need to shift its parameters and/or wrap a macro or request that
     finds the count significant.  If in doubt, prefer '\$@' to '\$*'.
     An application of '\$^' is seen in 'trace.tmac', which redefines
     some requests and macros for debugging purposes.

 -- Escape sequence: \$0
     Interpolate the name by which the macro being interpreted was
     called.  The 'als' request can cause a macro to have more than one
     name.  Applying string interpolation to a macro does not change
     this name.

          .de foo
          .  tm \\$0
          ..
          .als bar foo
          .
          .de aaa
          .  foo
          ..
          .de bbb
          .  bar
          ..
          .de ccc
          \\*[foo]\\
          ..
          .de ddd
          \\*[bar]\\
          ..
          .
          .aaa
              error-> foo
          .bbb
              error-> bar
          .ccc
              error-> ccc
          .ddd
              error-> ddd

   (1) See Copy Mode.

   (2) If they were not, parameter interpolations would be similar to
command-line parameters--fixed for the entire duration of a 'roff'
program's run.  The advantage of interpolating '\$' escape sequences
even in copy mode is that they can interpolate different contents from
one call to the next, like function parameters in a procedural language.
The additional escape character is the price of this power.

5.24.2 Copy Mode
----------------

GNU 'troff' processes certain requests in "copy mode": it copies
ordinary, special, and indexed characters as-is; interpolates the escape
sequences '\n', '\g', '\$', '\*', '\V', and '\?' normally; discards
comments '\"' and '\#'; interpolates '\a', '\e', and '\t', as the
current leader, escape, or tab character, respectively; represents
'\RET', '\&', '\_', '\|', '\^', '\{', '\}', '\`', '\'', '\-', '\!',
'\c', '\%', '\SPC', '\E', '\)', '\~', and '\:' in an encoded form, and
copies other escape sequences as-is.  The term "copy mode" reflects its
most visible application in requests that populate macros and strings,
but other requests also use it when interpreting arguments that can't
meaningfully represent typesetting operations.  For example, a font
selection escape sequence has no meaning in a hyphenation pattern file
name ('hpf') or a diagnostic message written to the terminal ('tm').

   The complement of copy mode--a 'roff' formatter's behavior when not
defining or appending to a macro, string, or diversion--where all macros
are interpolated, requests invoked, and valid escape sequences processed
immediately upon recognition, can be termed "interpretation mode".

 -- Escape sequence: \\
     The escape character ('\' by default) when used before itself
     "quotes" an escape character for later interpretation in an
     enclosing context.  Escape character quotation enables you to
     control whether the formatter interprets a given '\n', '\g', '\$',
     '\*', '\V', or '\?' escape sequence at the time the macro
     containing it is defined, or later when the macro is called.(1)
     (see Copy Mode-Footnote-1)

          .nr x 20
          .de y
          .nr x 10
          \&\nx
          \&\\nx
          ..
          .y
              => 20 10

     You can think of '\\' as a "delayed" backslash; it is the escape
     character followed by a backslash from which the escape character
     has removed its special meaning.  Consequently, '\\' is not best
     considered an escape sequence, but a quoted escape character.  In
     any escape sequence '\X' that GNU 'troff' does not recognize, the
     formatter discards the escape character and outputs X.  An
     unrecognized escape sequence causes a warning in category 'escape',
     with two exceptions--'\\' is the first.

 -- Escape sequence: \.
     '\.' quotes the control character.  It is similar to '\\' in that
     it isn't a true escape sequence.  It is used to permit nested macro
     definitions to end without a named macro call to conclude them.
     Without a syntax for quoting the control character, this would not
     be possible.

          .de m1
          foo
          .
          .  de m2
          bar
          \\..
          .
          ..
          .m1
          .m2
              => foo bar

     The first backslash is consumed while the macro is read, and the
     second is interpreted when macro 'm1' is called.

   Outside of copy mode, 'roff' documents should not use the '\\' or
'\.' character sequences; they serve only to obfuscate the input.  Use
'\e' to represent the escape character, '\[rs]' to obtain a backslash
glyph, and '\&' before '.' and ''' where GNU 'troff' expects them as
control characters if you mean to use them literally (recall Requests
and Macros).

   Macro definitions can be nested to arbitrary depth.  The mechanics of
parsing the escape character have significant consequences for this
practice.

     .de M1
     \\$1
     .  de M2
     \\\\$1
     .    de M3
     \\\\\\\\$1
     \\\\..
     .    M3 hand.
     \\..
     .  M2 of
     ..
     This understeer is getting
     .M1 out
         => This understeer is getting out of hand.

   As seen above, the formatter interprets each escape character in
multiple contexts; once, when populating the macro or string, where the
first '\' serves its quotation function\[em]thus only one '\' is stored
in the definition.  (Verify this fact with the 'pm' request.)  The
formatter interprets the second '\' as an escape character (assuming the
escape character hasn't been changed in the meantime) each time it
interpolates the macro or string definition.  This fact leads to
exponential growth in the quantity of escape characters required to
quote and thereby delay interpolation of '\n', '\g', '\$', '\*', '\V',
and '\?' at each nesting level, which can be daunting.  GNU 'troff'
offers a solution.

 -- Escape sequence: \E
     '\E' represents an escape character that is not interpreted in copy
     mode.  You can use it to ease the writing of nested macro
     definitions.

          .de M1
          .  nop \E$1
          .  de M2
          .    nop \E$1
          .    de M3
          .      nop \E$1
          \\\\..
          .    M3 better.
          \\..
          .  M2 bit
          ..
          This vehicle handles
          .M1 a
              => This vehicle handles a bit better.

     Observe that because '\.' is not a true escape sequence, we can't
     use '\E' to keep '..' from ending a macro definition prematurely.
     If the multiplicity of backslashes complicates maintenance, use end
     macros.

     '\E' is also convenient to define strings containing escape
     sequences that need to work when used in copy mode (for example, as
     macro arguments), or which will be interpolated at varying macro
     nesting depths.  We might define strings to begin and end
     superscripting as follows.(2)  (see Copy Mode-Footnote-2)

          .ds { \v'-.9m\s'\En[.s]*7u/10u'+.7m'
          .ds } \v'-.7m\s0+.9m'

     When the 'ec' request is used to redefine the escape character,
     '\E' also makes it easier to distinguish the semantics of an escape
     character from the other meaning(s) its character might have.
     Consider the use of an unusual escape character, '-'.

          .nr a 1
          .ec -
          .de xx
          --na
          ..
          .xx
              => -na

     This result may surprise you; some people expect '1' to be output
     since register 'a' has clearly been defined with that value.  What
     has happened?  The robotic replacement of '\' with '-' has led us
     astray.  You might recognize the sequence '--' more readily with
     the default escape character as '\-', the special character escape
     sequence for the minus sign glyph.

          .nr a 1
          .ec -
          .de xx
          -Ena
          ..
          .xx
              => 1

   (1) Compare this to the '\def' and '\edef' commands in TeX.

   (2) These are lightly adapted from the 'groff' implementation of the
'ms' macros.

5.25 Page Motions
=================

See Manipulating Spacing, for a discussion of the most commonly used
request for vertical motion, 'sp'.

 -- Request: .mk [reg]
 -- Request: .rt [dist]
     You can "mark" a location on a page for subsequent "return".  'mk'
     takes an argument, a register name in which to store the current
     page location.  If given no argument, it stores the location in an
     internal register.  This location can be used later by the 'rt' or
     the 'sp' requests (or the '\v' escape sequence).

     The 'rt' request returns _upward_ to the location marked with the
     last 'mk' request.  If used with an argument, it returns to a
     vertical position DIST from the top of the page (no previous call
     to 'mk' is necessary in this case).  The default scaling unit is
     'v'.

     If a page break occurs between a 'mk' request and its matching 'rt'
     request, the 'rt' request is silently ignored.

     A simple implementation of a macro to set text in two columns
     follows.  This example also defines a macro to be called when a
     trap is sprung;(1) (see Page Motions-Footnote-1) this trap macro
     performs the motion to the next column.

          .nr column-length 1.5i
          .nr column-gap 4m
          .nr bottom-margin 1m
          .
          .de 2c
          .  br
          .  mk
          .  ll \\n[column-length]u
          .  wh -\\n[bottom-margin]u 2c-trap
          .  nr right-side 0
          ..
          .
          .de 2c-trap
          .  ie \\n[right-side] \{\
          .    nr right-side 0
          .    po -(\\n[column-length]u + \\n[column-gap]u)
          .    \" remove trap
          .    wh -\\n[bottom-margin]u
          .  \}
          .  el \{\
          .    \" switch to right side
          .    nr right-side 1
          .    po +(\\n[column-length]u + \\n[column-gap]u)
          .    rt
          .  \}
          ..

     Now let us apply our two-column macro.

          .pl 1.5i
          .ll 4i
          This is a small test that shows how the
          rt request works in combination with mk.

          .2c
          Starting here, text is typeset in two columns.
          Note that this implementation isn't robust
          and thus not suited for a real two-column
          macro.
              => This is a small test that shows how the
              => rt request works in combination with mk.
              =>
              => Starting  here,    isn't    robust
              => text is typeset    and   thus  not
              => in two columns.    suited  for   a
              => Note that  this    real two-column
              => implementation     macro.

   Several escape sequences enable fine control of movement about the
page.

 -- Escape sequence: \v'expr'
     Vertically move the drawing position.  EXPR indicates the magnitude
     of motion: positive is downward and and negative upward.  The
     default scaling unit is 'v'.  The motion is relative to the current
     drawing position unless EXPR begins with the boundary-relative
     measurement operator '|'.  See Numeric Expressions.

     Text processing continues at the new drawing position; usually,
     vertical motions should be in balanced pairs to avoid a confusing
     page layout.

     '\v' does not spring a vertical position trap.  This can be useful;
     for example, consider a page bottom trap macro that prints a mark
     in the margin to indicate continuation of a footnote.  See Traps.

   A few escape sequences that produce vertical motion are unusual.
They are thought to originate early in AT&T 'nroff' history to achieve
super- and subscripting by half-line motions on line printers and
teletypewriters before the phototypesetter made more precise positioning
available.  They are reckoned in ems--not vees--to maintain continuity
with their original purpose of moving relative to the size of the type
rather than the distance between text baselines (vees).(2)  (see Page
Motions-Footnote-2)

 -- Escape sequence: \r
 -- Escape sequence: \u
 -- Escape sequence: \d
     Move upward 1m, upward .5m, and downward .5m, respectively.

Let us see these escape sequences in use.

     Obtain 100 cm\u3\d of \ka\d\092\h'|\nau'\r233\dU.

   In the foregoing we have paired '\u' and '\d' to typeset a
superscript, and later a full em negative ("reverse") motion to place a
superscript above a subscript.  A numeral-width horizontal motion escape
sequence aligns the proton and nucleon numbers, while '\k' marks a
horizontal position to which '\h' returns so that we could stack them.
(We shall discuss these horizontal motion escape sequences presently.)
In serious applications, we often want to alter the type size of the
-scripts and to fine-tune the vertical motions, as the 'groff' 'ms'
package does with its super- and subscripting string definitions.

 -- Escape sequence: \h'expr'
     Horizontally move the drawing position.  EXPR indicates the
     magnitude of motion: positive is rightward and negative leftward.
     The default scaling unit is 'm'.  The motion is relative to the
     current drawing position unless EXPR begins with the
     boundary-relative measurement operator '|'.  See Numeric
     Expressions.

   The following string definition sets the TeX logo.  Recall Strings
regarding the trailing '\"'.

     .ds TeX T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X\"

   An input backspace becomes a negative horizontal motion of one word
space; recall Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.  This feature
persists for backward compatibility with early formatters that predate
'nroff' and even Unix itself, and which used it to facilitate
user-directed overstriking for character composition, boldfacing, and
underlining.  GNU 'troff' has explicit features to support each of
these; use them instead.

   Several escape sequences support special cases of horizontal motion.

 -- Escape sequence: \<SPC>
     Move right one word space.  (The input is a backslash followed by a
     space.)  This escape sequence can be thought of as a
     non-adjustable, unbreakable space.  Usually you want '\~' instead;
     see Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.

 -- Escape sequence: \|
     Move one-sixth em to the right on typesetting output devices.  If a
     glyph named '\|' is defined in the current font, its width is used
     instead, even on terminal output devices.

 -- Escape sequence: \^
     Move one-twelfth em to the right on typesetting output devices.  If
     a glyph named '\^' is defined in the current font, its width is
     used instead, even on terminal output devices.

 -- Escape sequence: \0
     Move right by the width of a numeral in the current font.

   Horizontal motions are not discarded at the end of an output line as
word spaces are; recall Breaking.

 -- Escape sequence: \w'input'
 -- Register: \n[st]
 -- Register: \n[sb]
 -- Register: \n[rst]
 -- Register: \n[rsb]
 -- Register: \n[ct]
 -- Register: \n[ssc]
 -- Register: \n[skw]
     Interpolate the width of INPUT, as interpreted, in basic units.
     This escape sequence allows several properties of formatted output
     to be measured without writing it out.

          The length of the string 'abc' is \w'abc'u.
              => The length of the string 'abc' is 72u.

     The formatter processes INPUT in a dummy environment: this means
     that font and type size changes, for example, may occur within it
     without affecting subsequent output.

     After each use, '\w' sets several registers.

     'st'
     'sb'
          The maximum vertical displacements of the text baseline above
          and below, respectively.  The sign convention is opposite that
          of relative vertical motions; that is, depth below the
          (original) baseline is negative.  These registers are
          incorrectly documented in the AT&T 'troff' manual as "the
          highest and lowest extent of [the argument to '\w'] relative
          to the baseline".

     'rst'
     'rsb'
          Like 'st' and 'sb', but taking account of the heights and
          depths of glyphs.  In other words, these registers store the
          highest and lowest vertical positions attained by INPUT, doing
          what AT&T 'troff' documented 'st' and 'sb' as doing.

     'ct'
          Characterizes the geometry of glyphs occurring in INPUT.

          0
               only short glyphs, no descenders or tall glyphs

          1
               at least one descender

          2
               at least one tall glyph

          3
               at least one each of a descender and a tall glyph

     'ssc'
          The amount of horizontal space (possibly negative) that should
          be added to the last glyph before a subscript.

     'skw'
          How far to right of the center of the last glyph in the '\w'
          argument, the center of an accent from a roman font should be
          placed over that glyph.

 -- Escape sequence: \kp
 -- Escape sequence: \k(ps
 -- Escape sequence: \k[position]
     Store the horizontal drawing position, relative to that
     corresponding to the start of the input line (ignoring page offset
     and indentation), in a register with the name POSITION
     (one-character name P, two-character name PS).  Use this, for
     example, to later move to the beginning of a word for highlighting
     or other decoration.

 -- Register: \n[hp]
     The horizontal position relative to that at the start of the input
     line.

 -- Register: \n[.k]
     A read-only register containing the current horizontal output
     position (relative to the current indentation).

 -- Escape sequence: \o'abc...'
     Overstrike the glyphs of characters A, B, C, ...; the glyphs are
     centered, written, and the drawing position advanced by the widest
     of the glyphs.

 -- Escape sequence: \zc
     Format the character C with zero width; that is, without advancing
     the drawing position.  Use '\z' to overstrike glyphs aligned to
     their left edges, in contrast to '\o''s centering.

 -- Escape sequence: \Z'input
     Save the drawing position, format INPUT, then restore it.  GNU
     'troff' ignores tabs and leaders in INPUT with an error diagnostic.

     We might implement a strike-through macro thus.

          .de strikeout
          .nr width \w'\\$1'
          \Z@\v'-.25m'\l'\\n[width]u'@\\$1
          ..
          .
          This is
          .strikeout "a test"
          an actual emergency!

   (1) See Page Location Traps.

   (2) At the 'grops' defaults of 10-point type on 12-point vertical
spacing, the difference between half a vee and half an em can be subtle:
large spacings like '.vs .5i' make it obvious.

5.26 Output Line Annotation
===========================

After an output line is broken (and adjusted, if applicable), it can be
annotated in the margins.  You can indicate line numbers on the left,
and apply a margin character on the right.

 -- Request: .nm [start [increment [space [indentation]]]]
 -- Register: \n[ln]
 -- Register: \n[.nm]
     Begin (or, with no arguments, cease) numbering output lines.  START
     assigns the number of the _next_ output line.  Only line numbers
     divisible by INCREMENT (default: '1') bear marks.  The formatter
     reckons the third and fourth arguments in numeral widths ('\0'):
     SPACE configures the horizontal spacing between the number and the
     text (default: '1').  Any given INDENTATION applies to the numbers
     (default: '0').  START must be non-negative and INCREMENT positive.

     The formatter aligns the number to the right in a space of three
     numeral widths plus INDENTATION, then catenates SPACE and the
     output line.  The line length is _not_ reduced.  Depending on the
     value of the page offset (recall Line Layout) numbers wider than
     the allocated space protrude into the left margin, or shift the
     output line to the right.

     Line numbering parameters corresponding to missing arguments are
     not altered.  After numbering is disabled, '.nm +0' resumes it
     using the previously active parameters.

     The parameters of 'nm' are associated with the environment (see
     Environments).

     While numbering is enabled, the output line number register 'ln' is
     updated as each line is output, even if no line number is formatted
     with it because it is being skipped (it is not a multiple of
     INCREMENT) or because numbering is suppressed (see the 'nn' request
     below).

     The '.nm' register tracks the enablement status of numbering.
     Temporary suspension of numbering with the 'nn' request does _not_
     alter its value.

          .po 5n
          .ll 44n
          Programming,
          when stripped of all its circumstantial irrelevancies,
          .nm 999 1 1 -4
          boils down to no more and no less than
          .nm +0 3
          very effective thinking so as to avoid unmastered
          .nn 2
          complexity,
          to very vigorous separation of your many
          different concerns.
          .br
          \(em Edsger Dijkstra
          .sp
          .nm 1 1 1
          This guy's arrogance takes your breath away.
          .br
          \(em John Backus
              =>      Programming,  when  stripped of all its cir-
              =>  999 cumstantial irrelevancies, boils down to  no
              =>      more  and no less than very effective think-
              =>      ing so as to avoid unmastered complexity, to
              =>      very vigorous separation of your  many  dif-
              =>      ferent concerns.
              => 1002 -- Edsger Dijkstra
              =>
              =>    1 This guy's arrogance takes your breath away.
              =>    2 -- John Backus

 -- Request: .nn [skip]
 -- Register: \n[.nn]
     Suppress numbering of the next SKIP output lines counted by the
     'nm' request.  If SKIP is '0', cancel suppression.  The default
     is 1.  'nn' can be invoked when line numbering is not active;
     suppression of numbering takes effect for SKIP lines once 'nm'
     enables it.

     The '.nn' register stores the count of lines remaining in the
     environment for which numbering is suppressed while output line
     numbering is enabled.

     This count is associated with the environment (see Environments).

   To test whether the current output line will be numbered, you must
check both the '.nm' and '.nn' registers.

       .de is-numbered
       .  nop This line
       .  ie (\\n[.nm] & (1-\\n[.nn])) IS
       .  el                           ISN'T
       .  nop numbered.
       .  br
       ..
       Test line numbering.
       .is-numbered
       .nm 1
       .nn 1
       .is-numbered
       .is-numbered
       .nm
       .is-numbered
         => Test line numbering.  This line ISN'T numbered.
         => This line ISN'T numbered.
         =>   1 This line IS numbered.
         => This line ISN'T numbered.

 -- Request: .mc [margin-character [distance]]
     Begin (or, with no arguments, cease) writing a "margin-character"
     to the right of each output line.  The DISTANCE argument separates
     MARGIN-CHARACTER from the right margin.  If absent, the most recent
     value is used; the default is 10 points.  If an output line exceeds
     the line length, the margin character is appended to it.  No margin
     character is written on lines produced by the 'tl' request.

     The margin character is a property of the output line.  Only one
     margin character is in effect at one time; the most recent 'mc'
     call determines its value.  If the margin character is disabled
     before an output line breaks, none is output (but see below).

     The margin character is associated with the environment (see
     Environments).

          .ll 5i
          .nf
          .mc \[br]
          This paragraph is marked with a margin character.
          .sp
          As seen above, vertical space isn't thus marked.
          \&
          An output line that is present, but empty, is.
              => This paragraph is marked with a margin character.  |
              =>
              => As seen above, vertical space isn't thus marked.   |
              =>                                                    |
              => An output line that is present, but empty, is.     |

   For compatibility with AT&T 'troff', a call to 'mc' to set the margin
character can't be undone immediately; at least one line gets a margin
character.

     .ll 10n
     .nf
     .mc |
     .mc *
     .mc
     foo
     bar
         => foo        *
         => bar

   The margin character mechanism is commonly used to annotate changes
in documents.  The 'groff' distribution ships a program, 'gdiffmk', to
assist with this task.(1)  (see Output Line Annotation-Footnote-1)

   (1) Historically, tools named 'nrchbar' and 'changebar' were
developed for marking changes with margin characters and could be found
in archives of the 'comp.sources.unix' Usenet group.  Some proprietary
Unices also offer(ed) a 'diffmk' program.

5.27 Drawing Geometric Objects
==============================

A few of the formatter's escape sequences draw lines and other geometric
objects.  Combined with each other and with page motion commands (see
Page Motions), a wide variety of figures is possible.  For complex
drawings, these operations can be cumbersome: the preprocessors 'pic' or
'grn' are typically used instead.

   The '\l' and '\L' escape sequences draw horizontal and vertical
sequences of glyphs, respectively.  Even the simplest of output devices
supports them.  They require an argument specifying the length of the
rule (line) to be drawn, optionally followed by a single ordinary or
special character with which to draw the rule if the default is not
desired.  If the character is valid in a numerical expression, put '\&'
after L to disambiguate the input.

 -- Escape sequence: \l'l'
 -- Escape sequence: \l'lc'
     Draw a horizontal line of length L from the drawing position.
     Rightward motion is positive.  Afterward, the drawing position is
     at the right end of the line.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.
     The default glyph is the baseline rule special character, '\[ru]'.

          \l'4i\&-'
              => ----------------------------------------

     Let us see how to draw a box around a word using a macro.

          .de textbox
          \[br]\\$*\[br]\l'|0\[rn]'\l'|0\[ul]'
          ..

     The foregoing outputs a box rule (a vertical line), the text
     argument(s), and another box rule.  We employ the boundary-relative
     measurement operator '|'.  Finally, the line-drawing escape
     sequences draw a radical extender (a form of overline) and an
     underline from the drawing position to the position corresponding
     to beginning of the _input_ line.  The formatter leaves the drawing
     position at the right-hand box rule even though the line lengths
     are negative, as noted above.

 -- Escape sequence: \L'l'
 -- Escape sequence: \L'lc'
     Draw a vertical line of length L from the drawing position.
     Downward motion is positive.  The default scaling unit is 'v'.  The
     default glyph is the box rule, '\[br]'.  As with vertical motion
     escape sequences, text processing continues where the line ends.

          $ nroff <<EOF
          This is a \L'3v'test.
          EOF
              => This is a
              =>           |
              =>           |
              =>           |test.

     When writing text, the drawing position is at the text baseline;
     recall Page Geometry.

   The '\D' escape sequence provides "drawing commands" that direct the
output device to render geometrical objects rather than glyphs.
Specific devices may support only a subset, or may feature additional
ones; consult the man page for the output driver in use.  Terminals in
particular implement almost none.  See Graphics Commands.

   Rendering starts at the drawing position; when finished, the drawing
position is left at the rightmost point of the object, even for closed
figures, except where noted.  GNU 'troff' draws stroked (outlined)
objects with the stroke color, and shades filled ones with the fill
color.  See Colors.  Coordinates H and V are horizontal and vertical
motions relative to the drawing position or previous point in the
command.  The default scaling unit for horizontal measurements (and
diameters of circles) is 'm'; for vertical ones, 'v'.

   Circles, ellipses, and polygons can be drawn filled or stroked.
These are independent properties; if you want a filled, stroked figure,
you must draw the same figure twice using each drawing command.  A
filled figure is always smaller than an outlined one because the former
is drawn only within its defined area, whereas strokes have a line
thickness (set with '\D't'').

     \h'1i'\v'1i'\
     \# increase line thickness
     \Z'\D't 5p''\
     \# draw stroked (unfilled) polygon
     \Z'\D'p 3 3 -6 0''\
     \# draw filled (solid) polygon
     \Z'\D'P 3 3 -6 0''

 -- Escape sequence: \D'command argument ...'
     Drawing command escape sequence parameters begin with an ordinary
     character, COMMAND, selecting the type of object to be drawn,
     followed by ARGUMENTs whose meaning is determined by COMMAND.

     '\D'~ H1 V1 ... HN VN''
          Draw a B-spline to each point in sequence, leaving the drawing
          position at (HN, VN).

     '\D'a HC VC H V''
          Draw a circular arc centered at (HC, VC) counterclockwise from
          the drawing position to a point (H, V) relative to the center.
          (1)  (see Drawing Geometric Objects-Footnote-1)

     '\D'c D''
          Draw a circle of diameter D with its leftmost point at the
          drawing position.

     '\D'C D''
          As '\D'C ...'', but the circle is filled.

     '\D'e H V''
          Draw an ellipse of width H and height V with its leftmost
          point at the drawing position.

     '\D'E X Y''
          As '\D'e ...'', but the ellipse is filled.

     '\D'l DX DY''
          Draw line from the drawing position to (H, V).

          The following is a macro for drawing a box around a text
          argument; for simplicity, the box margin is a fixed at 0.2m.

               .de TEXTBOX
               .  nr @wd \w'\\$1'
               \h'.2m'\
               \h'-.2m'\v'(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\
               \D'l 0 -(\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m)'\
               \D'l (\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\
               \D'l 0 (\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m)'\
               \D'l -(\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\
               \h'.2m'\v'-(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\
               \\$1\
               \h'.2m'
               ..

          The argument is measured with the '\w' escape sequence.  Its
          width is stored in register '@wd'.  '\w' also sets the
          registers 'rst' and 'rsb'; these contain its maximum vertical
          extents of the argument.  Then, four lines are drawn to form a
          box, offset by the box margin.

     '\D'p H1 V1 ... HN VN''
          Draw polygon with vertices at the drawing position and each
          point in sequence.  GNU 'troff' closes the polygon by drawing
          a line from (HN, VN) back to the initial drawing position.
          Afterward, the drawing position is left at (HN, VN).

     '\D'P DX1 DY1 DX2 DY2 ...''
          As '\D'P ...'', but the polygon is filled.  'groff' does not
          specify how the output device must fill concave or
          self-intersecting polygons.

          The following macro is like the '\D'l'' example, but shades
          the box.  We draw the box before writing the text because
          colors in GNU 'troff' have no transparency; in the opposite
          order, the filled polygon would occlude the text.

               .de TEXTBOX
               .  nr @wd \w'\\$1'
               \h'.2m'\
               \h'-.2m'\v'(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\
               \M[lightcyan]\
               \D'P 0 -(\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m) \
                    (\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0 \
                    0 (\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m) \
                    -(\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\
               \h'.2m'\v'-(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\
               \M[]\
               \\$1\
               \h'.2m'
               ..

     '\D't N''
          Set the stroke thickness of geometric objects to N basic
          units.  A zero N selects the minimum supported thickness.  A
          negative N selects a thickness proportional to the type size;
          this is the default.

   In a hazy penumbra between text rendering and drawing commands we
locate the bracket-building escape sequence, '\b'.  It can assemble
glyphs that appear large by vertically stacking ordinary ones.

 -- Escape sequence: \b'contents'
     Pile and center a sequence of glyphs vertically on the output line.
     "Piling" stacks glyphs corresponding to each character in CONTENTS,
     read from left to right, and placed from top to bottom.  GNU
     'troff' separates the glyphs vertically by 1m, and the pile itself
     is centered 0.5m above the text baseline.  The horizontal drawing
     position is then advanced by the width of the widest glyph in the
     pile.

     This rather inflexible positioning algorithm doesn't work with the
     'dvi' output device since its bracket pieces vary in height.
     Instead, use the 'eqn' preprocessor.

     Manipulating Spacing describes how to adjust the vertical spacing
     of the output line with the '\x' escape sequence.

     The application of '\b' that lends its name is construction of
     brackets, braces, and parentheses when typesetting mathematics.  We
     might construct a large opening (left) brace as follows.

          \b'\[lt]\[bv]\[lk]\[bv]\[lb]'

     See 'groff_char(7)' for a list of special character identifiers.

   (1) (HC, VC) is adjusted to the point nearest the perpendicular
bisector of the arc's chord.

5.28 Deferring Output
=====================

A few 'roff' language elements are generally not used in simple
documents, but arise as page layouts become more sophisticated and
demanding.  "Environments" collect formatting parameters like line
length and typeface.  A "diversion" stores formatted output for later
use.  A "trap" is a condition on the input or output, tested
automatically by the formatter, that is associated with a macro:
fulfilling the condition "springs" the trap--calls the macro.

   Footnote support often exercises all three of the foregoing features.
A simple implementation might work as follows.  The author writes a pair
of macros: one starts a footnote and the other ends it.  They further
set a trap a small distance above the page bottom, reserving a footnote
area.  The author calls the first macro where a footnote mark is
desired.  The macro establishes a diversion so that the footnote text is
collected at the place in the body text where its corresponding mark
appears.  It further creates an environment for the footnote so that it
sets using a smaller typeface.  The footnote text is formatted in the
diversion using that environment but it does not yet appear in the
output.  The document author calls the footnote end macro, which returns
to the previous environment and ends the diversion.  Later, after body
text nearly fills the page, the trap springs.  The macro called by the
trap draws a line across the page and emits the stored diversion by
calling it like a macro.  Thus, the footnote renders.

   Diversions and traps make the text formatting process non-linear.
Let us imagine a set of text lines or paragraphs labelled 'A', 'B', and
so on.  If we set up a trap that produces text 'T' (as a page footer,
say), and we also use a diversion to store the formatted text 'D', then
a document with input text in the order 'A B C D E F' might render as 'A
B C E T F'.  The diversion 'D' is never output if we do not call it.

   Environments of themselves are not a source of non-linearity in
document formatting: environment switches have immediate effect.  One
could always write a macro to change as many formatting parameters as
desired with a single convenient call.  But because diversions can be
nested and macros called by traps that are sprung by other trap-called
macros, they may be interpolated in varying contexts.  For example,
consider a page header that is always to be set in Helvetica.  A
document that uses Times for most of its body text, but Courier for
displayed code examples, poses a challenge if a page break occurs in the
middle of a code display; if the header trap assumes that the "previous
font" is always Times, the rest of the example will be formatted in the
wrong typeface.  One could carefully save all formatting parameters upon
entering the trap and restore them upon leaving it, but this is verbose,
error-prone, and not future-proof as the 'groff' language develops.
Environments save us considerable effort.

5.29 Traps
==========

"Traps" are locations in the output, or conditions on the input that,
when reached or fulfilled, call a specified macro.  These traps can
occur at a given location either on the page or in the current diversion
(together, these are known as vertical position traps), at a blank line,
at a line with leading space characters, after a quantity of input
lines, or at the end of input.  Setting a trap is also called "planting"
one.  It is said that a trap is "sprung" if its condition is fulfilled.
The formatter passes no arguments to macros called by traps.

5.29.1 Vertical Position Traps
------------------------------

A "vertical position trap" calls a macro when the formatter's vertical
drawing position reaches or passes, in the downward direction, a certain
location on the output page or in a diversion.  Its applications include
setting page headers and footers, body text in multiple columns, and
footnotes.

 -- Request: .vpt [b]
 -- Register: \n[.vpt]
     Enable or disable vertical position traps per Boolean expression B.
     They are enabled by default, and if B is omitted.  Vertical
     position traps are those set by the 'wh' request or by 'dt' within
     a diversion.  Vertical position trap enablement is global.  Its
     status is stored in the '.vpt' read-only register.

     A page can't be ejected if vertical position traps are disabled.(1)
     (see Vertical Position Traps-Footnote-1)

   (1) See The Implicit Page Trap.

5.29.1.1 Page Location Traps
............................

A "page location trap" is a vertical position trap that applies to the
page; that is, to the top-level diversion.  Many can be present; manage
them with the 'wh' and 'ch' requests.

 -- Request: .wh dist [name]
     Plant macro NAME as page location trap at DIST.  The default
     scaling unit is 'v'.  Non-negative values for DIST set the trap
     relative to the top of the page; negative values set the trap
     relative to the bottom of the page.  It is not possible to plant a
     trap less than one basic unit from the page bottom: the formatter
     interprets a DIST of '-0' as '0', the top of the page.  'wh'
     removes any existing _visible_ trap (see below) at DIST is removed;
     this is its sole function if NAME is missing.

     A trap springs only if it is "visible", meaning that its location
     is reachable on the page(1) (see Page Location Traps-Footnote-1)
     and it is not hidden by another trap at the same location already
     planted there.

     A macro package might set headers and footers as follows; this
     example configures vertical margins of one inch to the body text,
     and one half-inch to the titles.  Observe the use of the no-break
     control character with the 'sp' and 'bp' requests to position our
     text baselines and prevent a partially collected line from being
     written outside the body text, and the page number character '%'
     used with the 'tl' request.

          .\" hdfo.roff
          .de hd                  \" page header
          '  sp .5i
          .  tl '\\*(Ti''\\*(Da'  \" title and date strings
          '  sp |1i
          ..
          .de fo                  \" page footer
          '  sp .5i-1v
          .  tl ''%''
          '  bp
          ..
          .wh 0   hd              \" trap at top of the page
          .wh -1i fo              \" trap 1 inch from bottom

     *Caution:* A word about measurements is in order.  Recall that the
     'sp' request vertically spaces such that the next text baseline (of
     one vee in height by definition) sets with the amount of space
     given to 'sp''s argument _above_ it.  Thus in the example above,
     when the 'hd' trap springs at vertical position '0', invoking 'sp
     .5i', we get the desired half-inch of top margin.  With the 'ft'
     trap, we space after the body text by one half-inch _minus one vee_
     to leave a half-inch bottom margin.  The footer title, if taller
     than a baseline rule, thus "encroaches" into the half-inch margin
     between the body text and the bottom margin, just as the header
     title symmetrically intrudes into the half-inch of space between
     its own cap-height and that of the top of the body text.

     To use these traps, copy the above (or load it from a file with the
     'so' or 'mso' requests), then set up the strings it uses.

          .so hdfo.roff
          .ds Ti Final Report\"
          .ds Da 21 May 2023\"
          .ti
          On 5 August of last year,
          this committee tasked me with the investigation of the
          CFIT (controlled flight into terrain) incident of
          .\" ...and so on...

     A trap above the top or at or below the bottom of the page can be
     made visible by either moving it into the page area or increasing
     the page length so that the trap is on the page.  A negative trap
     value always uses the _current_ page length; the formatter does not
     convert it to an absolute vertical position.  We can use the 'pwh'
     request to dump page location traps to the standard error stream
     (see Debugging).  GNU 'troff' reports their positions in basic
     units, and includes empty slots in the list, where a trap had been
     planted but subsequently (re)moved, because they can affect the
     visibility of subsequently planted traps.  An 'nroff' device
     example follows.

          .pl 5i
          .wh -1i xx
          .pwh
              error-> xx      -240
          .pl 100i
          .pwh
              error-> xx      -240

     It is possible to have more than one trap at the same location
     (although only one at a time can be visible); to achieve this, the
     traps must be defined at different locations, then moved to the
     same place with the 'ch' request.  In the following example, the
     many empty lines caused by the 'bp' request are not shown in the
     output.

          .de a
          .  nop a
          ..
          .de b
          .  nop b
          ..
          .de c
          .  nop c
          ..
          .
          .wh 1i a
          .wh 2i b
          .wh 3i c
          .bp
              => a b c
          .ch b 1i
          .ch c 1i
          .bp
              => a
          .ch a 0.5i
          .bp
              => a b

 -- Register: \n[.t]
     The read-only register '.t' holds the distance to the next vertical
     position trap.  If no such traps exist between the drawing position
     and the bottom of the page, it contains the distance to the page
     bottom.  Within a diversion, in the absence of a diversion trap,
     this distance is the maximum possible vertical position supported
     by the output device.

 -- Request: .ch name [dist]
     Change the location of a trap by moving macro NAME to new location
     DIST, or by unplanting it altogether if DIST is absent.  The
     default scaling unit is 'v'.  Parameters to 'ch' are specified in
     the opposite order from 'wh'.  If NAME is the earliest planted
     macro of multiple traps at the same location, (re)moving it from
     that location exposes the macro next least recently planted at the
     same place.(2)  (see Page Location Traps-Footnote-2)

     Changing a trap's location is useful for building up footnotes in a
     diversion to allow more space at the bottom of the page for them.

   The same macro can be installed simultaneously at multiple locations;
however, only the earliest-planted instance--that has not yet been
deleted with 'wh'--will be moved by 'ch'.  The following example (using
an 'nroff' device) illustrates this behavior.  Blank lines have been
elided from the output.

     .de T
     Trap sprung at \\n(nlu.
     .br
     ..
     .wh 1i T
     .wh 2i T
     foo
     .sp 11i
     .bp
     .ch T 4i
     bar
     .sp 11i
     .bp
     .ch T 5i
     baz
     .sp 11i
     .bp
     .wh 5i
     .ch T 6i
     qux
     .sp 11i
         => foo
         => Trap sprung at 240u.
         => Trap sprung at 480u.
         => bar
         => Trap sprung at 480u.
         => Trap sprung at 960u.
         => baz
         => Trap sprung at 480u.
         => Trap sprung at 1200u.
         => qux
         => Trap sprung at 1440u.

 -- Register: \n[.ne]
     The read-only register '.ne' contains the amount of space that was
     needed in the last 'ne' request that caused a trap to be sprung; it
     is useful in conjunction with the '.trunc' register.  See Page
     Control.  Since the '.ne' register is set only by traps, it doesn't
     make sense to interpolate it outside of macros called by traps.

 -- Register: \n[.trunc]
     A read-only register containing the amount of vertical space
     truncated from an 'sp' request by the most recently sprung vertical
     position trap, or, if the trap was sprung by an 'ne' request, minus
     the amount of vertical motion produced by the 'ne' request.  In
     other words, at the point a trap is sprung, it represents the
     difference of what the vertical position would have been but for
     the trap, and what the vertical position actually is.  Since the
     '.trunc' register is set only by traps, it doesn't make sense to
     interpolate it outside of macros called by traps.

 -- Register: \n[.trap]
     This read-only, string-valued register interpolates the name of the
     next vertical position trap that will be sprung.

 -- Register: \n[.pe]
     This Boolean-valued, read-only register interpolates 1 while a page
     is being ejected, and 0 otherwise.

     In the following example, we plant the same trap at the top and the
     bottom of the page.  We also make the trap report its name and the
     vertical drawing position.

          .de T
          .tm \\$0: page \\n%, nl=\\n[nl] .pe=\\n[.pe]
          ..
          .ll 46n
          .wh 0 T
          .wh -1v T
          Those who can make you believe absurdities can make you
          commit atrocities. \[em] Voltaire
              error-> T: page 1, nl=0 .pe=0
              error-> T: page 1, nl=2600 .pe=1
              => Those who can make you believe absurdities can
              => make you commit atrocities. -- Voltaire

   When designing macros, keep in mind that diversions and traps do not
normally interact.  For example, if a trap calls a header macro (while
outputting a diversion) that tries to change the font on the current
page, the effect is not visible before the diversion has completely been
printed (except for input protected with '\!' or '\?') since the data in
the diversion is already formatted.  In most cases, this is not the
expected behaviour.

   (1) A trap planted at '20i' or '-30i' cannot spring on a page of
length '11i'.

   (2) It may help to think of each trap location as maintaining a
queue; 'wh' operates on the head of the queue, and 'ch' operates on its
tail.  Only the trap at the head of the queue is visible.

5.29.1.2 The Implicit Page Trap
...............................

If, after starting GNU 'troff' without loading a macro package, you use
the 'pwh' request to dump a list of the active traps to the standard
error stream,(1) (see The Implicit Page Trap-Footnote-1) nothing is
reported.  Yet the '.t' register will report a steadily decreasing value
with every output line your document produces, and once the value of
'.t' gets to within '.V' of zero, you will notice that something
trap-like happens--the page is ejected, a new one begins, and the value
of '.t' becomes large once more.

   This "implicit page trap" always exists in the top-level
diversion;(2) (see The Implicit Page Trap-Footnote-2) its purpose is to
eject the current page and start the next one.  It works like a trap in
some ways but not others.  It has no name, so it cannot be moved or
deleted with 'wh' or 'ch' requests.  You cannot hide it by placing
another trap at its location, and can move it only by redefining the
page length with 'pl'.  Its operation is suppressed when vertical page
traps are disabled with GNU 'troff''s 'vpt' request.

   (1) See Debugging.

   (2) See Diversions.

5.29.1.3 Diversion Traps
........................

A diversion is not formatted in the context of a page, so it lacks page
location traps; instead it can have a "diversion trap".  There can exist
at most one such vertical position trap per diversion.

 -- Request: .dt [dist name]
     Set a trap _within_ a diversion at location DIST, which is
     interpreted relative to diversion rather than page boundaries.  If
     invoked with fewer than two arguments, any diversion trap in the
     current diversion is removed.  The register '.t' works within
     diversions.  It is an error to invoke 'dt' in the top-level
     diversion.  See Diversions.

5.29.2 Input Line Traps
-----------------------

 -- Request: .it [n name]
 -- Request: .itc [n name]
 -- Register: \n[.it]
 -- Register: \n[.itc]
 -- Register: \n[.itm]
     Set an input line trap, calling macro NAME after processing the
     next N productive input lines (recall Manipulating Filling and
     Adjustment).  Any existing input line trap in the environment is
     replaced.  Without arguments, 'it' and 'itc' clear any input line
     trap that has not yet sprung.

     Consider a macro '.ST S N' which sets the next N input lines in the
     font style S.

          .de ST \" Use style $1 for next $2 text lines.
          .  it \\$2 ES
          .  ft \\$1
          ..
          .de ES \" end ST
          .  ft R
          ..
          .ST I 1
          oblique
          face
          .ST I 1
          oblique\c
          face
              => oblique face obliqueface (second "face" upright)

     Unlike the 'ce' and 'rj' requests, 'it' counts lines interrupted
     with the '\c' escape sequence separately (see Line Continuation);
     'itc' does not.  To see the difference, let's change the previous
     example to use 'itc' instead.

          ...
          .  itc \\$2 ES
          ...
              => oblique face obliqueface (second "face" oblique)

     You can think of the 'ce' and 'rj' requests as implicitly creating
     an input line trap with 'itc' that schedules a break when the trap
     is sprung.

          .de BR
          .  br
          .  internal: disable centering-without-filling
          ..
          .
          .de ce
          .  if \\n[.br] .br
          .  itc \\$1 BR
          .  internal: enable centering-without-filling
          ..

     The '.it', '.itc', and '.itm' registers report the number of input
     lines remaining in a pending input trap, a Boolean indication of
     whether that pending input trap honors output line continuation,
     and the name of the macro associated with the pending input trap,
     respectively.  All are read-only; '.itm' is string-valued as well.

     Let us consider in more detail the sorts of input lines that are or
     are not "productive".

          .de Trap
          TRAP SPRUNG
          ..
          .de Mac
          .if r a \l'5n'
          ..
          .it 2 Trap
          .
          foo
          .Mac
          bar
          baz
          .it 1 Trap
          .sp \" moves, but does not write or draw
          qux
          .itc 1 Trap
          \h'5n'\c \" moves, but does not write or draw
          jat

     When 'Trap' gets called depends on whether the 'a' register is
     defined; the control line with the 'if' request may or may not
     produce written output.  We also see that the spacing request 'sp',
     while certainly affecting the output, does not spring the input
     line trap.  Similarly, the horizontal motion escape sequence '\h'
     also affected the output, but was not "written".  Observe that we
     had to follow it with '\c' and use 'itc' to prevent the newline at
     the end of the text line from causing a word break, which, like an
     ordinary space character, counts as written output.

          $ groff -T ascii input-trap-example.groff
              => foo bar TRAP SPRUNG baz
              =>
              => qux TRAP SPRUNG      jat TRAP SPRUNG
          $ groff -T ascii -r a1 input-trap-example.groff
              => foo _____ TRAP SPRUNG bar baz
              =>
              => qux TRAP SPRUNG      jat TRAP SPRUNG

   Input line traps are associated with the environment (see
Environments); switching to another environment suspends the current
input line trap, and going back resumes it, restoring the count of
qualifying lines enumerated in that environment.

5.29.3 Blank Line Traps
-----------------------

 -- Request: .blm [name]
     Set a blank line trap, calling the macro NAME when GNU 'troff'
     encounters a blank line in input, instead of the usual behavior
     (see Breaking).  A line consisting only of spaces is also treated
     as blank and subject to this trap.  If no argument is supplied, the
     default blank line behavior is (re-)established.

5.29.4 Leading Space Traps
--------------------------

 -- Request: .lsm [name]
 -- Register: \n[lsn]
 -- Register: \n[lss]
     Set a leading space trap, calling the macro NAME when GNU 'troff'
     encounters leading spaces on a text line; the implicit line break
     that normally happens in this case is suppressed.  The formatter
     stores the count of leading spaces on the text line in register
     'lsn', and the amount of corresponding horizontal motion in
     register 'lss', irrespective of whether a leading space trap is
     set.  When it is, GNU 'troff' removes the leading spaces from the
     input line and produces no motion before calling NAME.

     If no argument is supplied, GNU 'troff' reëstablishes the default
     handling of leading spaces on text lines (breaking the line when
     filling, and formatting a horizontal motion of '\n[lsn]' word
     spaces).

5.29.5 End-of-input Traps
-------------------------

 -- Request: .em [name]
     Set a trap at the end of input, calling macro NAME after the last
     line of the last input file has been processed.  If no argument is
     given, any existing end-of-input trap is removed.

     For example, if the document had to have a section at the bottom of
     the last page for someone to approve it, the 'em' request could be
     used.

          .de approval
          \c
          .  ne 3v
          .  sp (\\n[.t]u - 3v)
          .  in +4i
          .  lc _
          .  br
          Approved:\t\a
          .  sp
          Date:\t\t\a
          ..
          .
          .em approval

     The '\c' in the above example needs explanation.  For historical
     reasons (compatibility with AT&T 'troff'), the end-of-input macro
     exits as soon as it causes a page break if no partially collected
     line remains.(1)  (see End-of-input Traps-Footnote-1)

     Let us assume that there is no '\c' in the above 'approval' macro,
     that the page is full, and last output line has been broken with,
     say, a 'br' request.  Because there is no more room, a 'ne' request
     at this point causes a page ejection, which in turn makes 'troff'
     exit immediately as just described.  In most situations, this is
     not desired; people generally want to format the input after 'ne'.

     To force processing of the whole end-of-input macro independently
     of this behavior, it is thus advisable to (invisibly) ensure the
     existence of a partially collected line ('\c') whenever there is a
     chance that a page break can happen.  In the above example,
     invoking the 'ne' request ensures that there is room for the
     subsequent formatted output on the same page, so we need insert
     '\c' only once.

     The next example shows how to append three lines, then start a new
     page unconditionally.  Since '.ne 1' doesn't give the desired
     effect--there is always one line available or we are already at the
     beginning of the next page--we temporarily increase the page length
     by one line so that we can use '.ne 2'.

          .de EM
          .pl +1v
          \c
          .ne 2
          line one
          .br
          \c
          .ne 2
          line two
          .br
          \c
          .ne 2
          line three
          .br
          .pl -1v
          \c
          'bp
          ..
          .em EM

     This specific feature affects only the first potential page break
     caused by the end-of-input macro; further page breaks emitted by
     the macro are handled normally.

     Another possible use of the 'em' request is to make GNU 'troff'
     emit a single large page instead of multiple pages.  For example,
     one may want to produce a long plain text file for reading in a
     terminal or emulator without page footers and headers interrupting
     the body of the document.  One approach is to set the page length
     at the beginning of the document to a very large value to hold all
     the text and automatically adjust it to the exact height of the
     document after the text has been output.

          .de adjust-page-length
          .  br
          .  pl \\n[nl]u \" \n[nl]: current vertical position
          ..
          .
          .de single-page-mode
          .  pl \n[.R]u
          .  em adjust-page-length
          ..
          .
          .\" Activate the above code if configured.
          .if \n[do-continuous-rendering] \
          .  single-page-mode

     Since only one end-of-input trap exists and another macro package
     may already use it, care must be taken not to break the mechanism.
     A simple solution would be to append the above macro to the macro
     package's end-of-input macro using the 'am' request.

   (1) While processing an end-of-input macro, the formatter assumes
that the next page break must be the last; it goes into "sudden death
overtime".

5.30 Diversions
===============

In 'roff' systems it is possible to format text as if for output, but
instead of writing it immediately, one can "divert" the formatted text
into a named storage area.  It is retrieved later by specifying its name
after a control character.  The formatter uses the same name space for
such diversions as for strings and macros; recall Identifiers.  Such
text is sometimes said to be "stored in a macro", but this coinage
obscures the important distinction between macros and strings on one
hand and diversions on the other; the former store _unformatted_ input
text, and the latter capture _formatted_ output.(1)  (see
Diversions-Footnote-1) Diversions also do not interpret arguments.
Applications of diversions include footnotes, tables of contents,
indices, and "keeps" (preventing a page break from occurring at an
inconvenient place by forcing a set of output lines to be set as a
group).  For orthogonality it is said that GNU 'troff' populates the
"top-level diversion" if no diversion is active (that is, formatted
output is being "diverted" directly to the output device).  The
top-level diversion has no name.

   Dereferencing an undefined diversion creates an empty one of that
name.(2)  (see Diversions-Footnote-2) A diversion does not exist for the
purpose of testing with the 'd' conditional expression operator until
its initial definition ends; recall Operators in Conditionals.  The
following requests create and alter diversions.

 -- Request: .di [name]
 -- Request: .da [name]
     Start collecting formatted output in a diversion called NAME.  The
     'da' request appends to a diversion called NAME, creating it if
     necessary.  If NAME already exists as an alias, the target of the
     alias is replaced or appended to; recall Strings.  The pending
     output line is diverted as well.  Switching to another environment
     (with the 'ev' request) before invoking 'di' or 'da' avoids
     including any pending output line in the diversion.(3)  (see
     Diversions-Footnote-3)

     Invoking 'di' or 'da' without an argument stops diverting output to
     the diversion named by the most recent corresponding request.
     Invoking 'di' or 'da' without an argument when no diversion is
     being populated does nothing.(4)  (see Diversions-Footnote-4)

          .ll 56n
          Ahoy, me hearties,
          I traveled unto a distant isle,
          .br
          .di HT
          and thereupon I lay a vast treasure,
          .br
          .di
          .HT
          .br
          which none o' ye shall ever see.
              => Ahoy, mateys, I traveled unto a distant isle,
              => and thereupon I lay a vast treasure,
              => which none o' ye shall ever see.

   GNU 'troff' supports "box" requests to exclude a partially collected
line from a diversion, as this is often desirable.

 -- Request: .box [name]
 -- Request: .boxa [name]
     Divert (or append) output to NAME, similarly to the 'di' and 'da'
     requests, respectively.  Any pending output line is _not_ included
     in the diversion.  Without an argument, stop diverting output; any
     pending output line inside the diversion is discarded.

          .ll 56n
          Ahoy, mateys,
          I traveled unto a distant isle,
          .br
          .box SECRET
          and thereupon I lay a vast treasure,
          .br
          accurst wi' neutron activation,
          .box
          .SECRET
          .br
          which none o' ye shall ever see.
              => Ahoy, mateys, I traveled unto a distant isle,
              => and thereupon I lay a vast treasure,
              => which none o' ye shall ever see.

   Apart from pending output line inclusion and the request names that
populate them, boxes are handled exactly as diversions are.  All of the
following 'groff' language elements can be used with them
interchangeably.

 -- Register: \n[.z]
 -- Register: \n[.d]
     Diversion requests may be nested.  The read-only string-valued
     register '.z' contains the name of the current diversion.  The
     read-only register '.d' contains the vertical drawing position in
     the diversion.  If the input text is not being diverted, '.d'
     reports the same location as the register 'nl'.

          .nf
          .di A
          alpha
          .di B
          beta
          .di
          gamma
          \*B
          .di
          delta
          \*A
          epsilon
              => delta
              => alpha
              => gamma
              => beta
              =>
              =>
              => epsilon

 -- Register: \n[.h]
     The read-only register '.h' stores the "high-water mark" on the
     current page or in the current diversion.  It corresponds to the
     text baseline of the lowest line on the page.(5)  (see
     Diversions-Footnote-5)

          .tm .h==\n[.h], nl==\n[nl]
              => .h==0, nl==-1
          This is a test.
          .br
          .sp 2
          .tm .h==\n[.h], nl==\n[nl]
              => .h==40, nl==120

     As implied by the example, vertical motion does not produce text
     baselines and thus does not increase the value interpolated by
     '\n[.h]'.

 -- Register: \n[dn]
 -- Register: \n[dl]
     After output to a (named) diversion stops, the formatter stores its
     vertical and horizontal sizes, to the writable registers 'dn' and
     'dl', respectively.  Only the lines just processed are counted: for
     the computation of 'dn' and 'dl', the requests 'da' and 'boxa' are
     handled as if 'di' and 'box' had been used, respectively--lines
     that have been already stored in the diversion (box) are not taken
     into account.

          .\" Center text both horizontally and vertically.
          .\" Macro .(c starts centering mode; .)c terminates it.
          .
          .\" Disable the escape character with .eo so that we
          .\" don't have to double backslashes on the "\n"s.
          .eo
          .de (c
          .  br
          .  ev (c
          .  evc 0
          .  in 0
          .  nf
          .  di @c
          ..
          .de )c
          .  br
          .  ev
          .  di
          .  nr @s (((\n[.t]u - \n[dn]u) / 2u) - 1v)
          .  sp \n[@s]u
          .  ce 1000
          .  @c
          .  ce 0
          .  sp \n[@s]u
          .  br
          .  fi
          .  rr @s
          .  rm @c
          ..
          .ec

 -- Escape sequence: \!character-sequence
 -- Escape sequence: \?character-sequence\?
     "Transparently" embed CHARACTER-SEQUENCE into the current
     diversion, preventing the formatter from interpreting requests,
     macro calls, and escape sequences when reading them into a
     diversion.  Doing so prevents them from taking effect until the
     diverted text is actually output.  The '\!' escape sequence
     transparently embeds input up to and including the end of the line.
     The '\?' escape sequence transparently embeds input, read in copy
     mode, up to its own next occurrence on the input line.  Use '\!' by
     itself to embed newlines in a diversion.  The two escape sequences
     differ in that GNU 'troff' interprets '\?' even in copy mode;
     recall Copy Mode.  Consequently, comparands protected with '\?'
     need not be valid GNU 'troff' syntax.

          .nr x 1
          .nf
          .di d
          \?\\?\\\\?\\\\\\\\nx\\\\?\\?\?
          .di
          .nr x 2
          .di e
          .d
          .di
          .nr x 3
          .di f
          .e
          .di
          .nr x 4
          .f
              => 4

     Both escape sequences read the data in copy mode.

     If '\!' is used in the top-level diversion, its argument is
     embedded into GNU 'troff''s device-independent output.  One of its
     applications is control of a postprocessor that transforms the data
     that are subsequently read by an output driver.

     Using the '\?' escape sequence in the top-level diversion produces
     no output at all; its argument is simply ignored.

 -- Request: .output ["]character-sequence
     Emit CHARACTER-SEQUENCE directly to GNU 'troff''s output; this
     usage is similar to that of '\!' when it occurs in the top-level
     diversion.

     GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     CHARACTER-SEQUENCE, permitting initial embedded spaces in it, and
     reads it to the end of the input line in copy mode.  Recall Copy
     Mode.

     *Caution:* Use of these features can put syntactically invalid
     content into the formatter's output, which 'groff''s output drivers
     then fail to process.  One application of 'output' and of '\!' from
     the top-level diversion is to pass instructions to a postprocessor
     that interprets CHARACTER-SEQUENCE and filters it out before
     sending it to the output driver.

 -- Request: .asciify div
     "Unformat" the diversion DIV in a way such that Unicode basic Latin
     (US-ASCII) characters, characters translated with the 'trin'
     request, space characters, and some escape sequences that were
     formatted and diverted into DIV are treated like ordinary input
     characters when DIV is interpolated.  Doing so can be useful in
     conjunction with the 'writem' request.

     When transforming a glyph node back into an input sequence that
     demands expression as a special character escape sequence, GNU
     'troff' uses the default escape character.

     'asciify' can be also used for gross hacks; for example, the
     following sets register 'n' to 1.

          .tr @.
          .di x
          @nr n 1
          .br
          .di
          .tr @@
          .asciify x
          .x

     'asciify' cannot return all nodes in a diversion to their source
     equivalents: those produced by indexed characters ('\N'), for
     example, remain nodes, so the result cannot be guaranteed to be a
     character sequence as a macro or string is.  Give the diversion
     name as an argument to the 'pm' request to inspect its contents and
     node list.  Glyph parameters such as the type face and size are not
     preserved; use 'unformat' to achieve that.

 -- Request: .unformat div
     Like 'asciify', unformat the diversion DIV.  However, 'unformat'
     handles only tabs and spaces between words, the latter usually
     arising from spaces or newlines in the input.  Tabs are treated as
     tokens, and spaces become adjustable again.  The vertical sizes of
     lines are not preserved, but glyph information (font, type size,
     space width, and so on) is retained.

   (1) See GNU troff Internals.

   (2) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'mac'.  See Warnings.

   (3) See Environments.

   (4) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'di'.  See Warnings.

   (5) Thus, the "water" gets "higher" proceeding _down_ the page.

5.31 Punning Names
==================

Macros, strings, and diversions share a name space; recall Identifiers.
Internally, the same mechanism is used to store them.  You can thus call
a macro with string interpolation syntax and vice versa.

     .de subject
     Typesetting
     ..
     .de predicate
     rewards attention to detail
     ..
     \*[subject] \*[predicate].
     Truly.
         => Typesetting
         =>  rewards attention to detail Truly.

What went wrong?  Strings don't contain newlines, but macros do.  String
interpolation placed a newline at the end of '\*[subject]', and the next
thing on the input was a space.  Then when '\*[predicate]' was
interpolated, it was followed by the empty request '.' on a line by
itself.  If we want to use macros as strings, we must take interpolation
behavior into account.

     .de subject
     Typesetting\\
     ..
     .de predicate
     rewards attention to detail\\
     ..
     \*[subject] \*[predicate].
     Truly.
         => Typesetting rewards attention to detail.  Truly.

By ending each text line of the macros with an escaped <RET>, we get the
desired effect; recall Line Continuation.(1)  (see Punning
Names-Footnote-1) What would have happened if we had used only one
backslash in each case?

   Interpolating a string does not hide existing macro arguments.  We
can also place the escaped newline outside the string interpolation
instead of within the string definition.  Thus, in a macro, a more
efficient way of doing

     .xx \\$@

is

     \\*[xx]\\

The latter calling syntax doesn't change the value of '\$0', which is
then inherited from the calling macro; recall Parameters.

   It is sometimes convenient to copy a single-line diversion to a
string, which can then be interpolated with '\*'.

     .di xx
     the
     .ft I
     interpolation system
     .ft
     .br
     .di
     .ds yy This is a test of \*(xx\c
     \*(yy.
         => This is a test of the interpolation system.

In the foregoing, we see that formatted output can thus be stored in a
string.  The '\c' escape sequence prevents the subsequent newline from
being interpreted as a break; again, recall Line Continuation.

   Copying multi-output-line diversions produces unexpected results.

     .di xxx
     a funny
     .br
     test
     .br
     .di
     .ds yyy This is \*[xxx]\c
     \*[yyy].
         => test This is a funny.

   Usually, it is not predictable whether a diversion contains one or
more output lines, so this mechanism should be avoided.  With AT&T
'troff', this was the only solution to strip off a final newline from a
diversion.  Another disadvantage is that the spaces in the copied string
are already formatted, preventing their adjustment.  This can cause ugly
results.

   A clean solution to this problem is available in GNU 'troff', using
the requests 'chop' to remove the final newline of a diversion, and
'unformat' to make the horizontal spaces adjustable again.

     .box xxx
     a funny
     .br
     test
     .br
     .box
     .chop xxx
     .unformat xxx
     This is \*[xxx].
         => This is a funny test.

   See GNU troff Internals.

   (1) We must double the backslash.  Recall Copy Mode.

5.32 Environments
=================

As discussed in Deferring Output, environments store most of the
parameters that determine the appearance of text.  A default environment
named '0' (zero) exists when the formatter starts up; formatting-related
requests and escape sequences modify its properties.

   You can create new environments and switch among them.  Only one is
current at any given time.  Active environments are managed using a
"stack", a data structure supporting "push" and "pop" operations.  The
current environment is at the top of the stack.  The same environment
name can be pushed onto the stack multiple times, possibly interleaved
with others.  Popping the environment stack does not destroy the current
environment; it remains accessible by name and can be made current again
by pushing it at any time.  Environments cannot be renamed or deleted,
and can only be modified when current.  To inspect the environment
stack, use the 'pev' request.(1)  (see Environments-Footnote-1)

   Environments store the following information.

   * a partially collected line, if any

   * data about the most recently output glyph and line (registers
     '.cdp', '.cht', '.csk', '.n', '.w')

   * typeface parameters (size, family, style, height and slant,
     inter-word and inter-sentence space sizes)

   * page parameters (line length, title length, vertical spacing, line
     spacing, indentation, line numbering, centering, right-alignment,
     underlining, hyphenation parameters)

   * filling enablement; adjustment enablement and mode

   * tab stops; tab, leader, escape, control, no-break control,
     hyphenation, and margin characters

   * input line traps

   * stroke and fill colors

 -- Request: .ev [ident]
 -- Register: \n[.ev]
     Enter the environment IDENT, which is created if it does not
     already exist, using the same parameters as for the default
     environment used at startup.  With no argument, GNU 'troff'
     switches to the previous environment.

     Invoking 'ev' with an argument puts environment IDENT onto the top
     of the environment stack.  (If it isn't already present in the
     stack, this is a proper push.)  Without an argument, 'ev' pops the
     environment stack, making the previous environment current.  It is
     an error to pop the environment stack with no previous environment
     available.  The read-only string-valued register '.ev' contains the
     name of the current environment--the one at the top of the stack.

          .ev footnote-env
          .fam N
          .ps 6
          .vs 8
          .ll -.5i
          .ev

          ...

          .ev footnote-env
          \[dg] Observe the smaller text and vertical spacing.
          .ev

     We can familiarize ourselves with stack behavior by wrapping the
     'ev' request with a macro that reports the contents of the '.ev'
     register to the standard error stream.

          .de EV
          .  ev \\$1
          .  tm environment is now \\n[.ev]
          ..
          .
          .EV foo
          .EV bar
          .EV
          .EV baz
          .EV
          .EV
          .EV

              error-> environment is now foo
              error-> environment is now bar
              error-> environment is now foo
              error-> environment is now baz
              error-> environment is now foo
              error-> environment is now 0
              error-> error: environment stack underflow
              error-> environment is now 0

 -- Request: .evc environment
     Copy the properties of ENVIRONMENT to the current environment,
     except for:

        * a partially collected line, if present;

        * the interruption status of the previous input line (due to use
          of the '\c' escape sequence);

        * the count of remaining lines to center, to right-justify, or
          to underline (with or without underlined spaces)--these are
          set to zero;

        * the activation status of temporary indentation;

        * input line traps and their associated data;

        * the activation status of line numbering (which can be
          reactivated with '.nm +0'); and

        * the count of consecutive hyphenated lines (set to zero).

     Copying an environment to itself discards the foregoing data.

 -- Register: \n[.w]
 -- Register: \n[.cht]
 -- Register: \n[.cdp]
 -- Register: \n[.csk]
     The '\n[.w]' register contains the width of the last glyph
     formatted in the environment.

     The '\n[.cht]' register contains the height of the last glyph
     formatted in the environment.

     The '\n[.cdp]' register contains the depth of the last glyph
     formatted in the environment.  It is positive for glyphs extending
     below the baseline.

     The '\n[.csk]' register contains the "skew" (how far to the right
     of the glyph's center that GNU 'troff' should place an accent) of
     the last glyph formatted in the environment.

 -- Register: \n[.n]
     The '\n[.n]' register contains the length of the previous output
     line emitted in the environment.

   (1) See Debugging.

5.33 Suppressing Output
=======================

 -- Escape sequence: \O[num]
     Suppress GNU 'troff' output of glyphs and geometric objects.  The
     sequences '\O2', '\O3', '\O4', and '\O5' are intended for internal
     use by 'grohtml'.

     '\O0'
          Disable the emission of glyphs and geometric objects to the
          output driver, provided that this sequence occurs at the
          outermost suppression level (see '\O3' and '\04' below).
          Horizontal motions corresponding to non-overstruck glyph
          widths still occur.

     '\O1'
          Enable the emission of glyphs and geometric objects to the
          output driver, provided that this sequence occurs at the
          outermost suppression level.

     '\O0' and '\O1' also reset the four registers 'opminx', 'opminy',
     'opmaxx', and 'opmaxy' to -1.  These four registers mark the top
     left and bottom right hand corners of a box encompassing all
     written or drawn output.

     '\O2'
          At the outermost suppression level, enable emission of glyphs
          and geometric objects, and write to the standard error stream
          the page number and values of the four aforementioned
          registers encompassing glyphs written since the last
          interpolation of a '\O' sequence, as well as the page offset,
          line length, image file name (if any), horizontal and vertical
          device motion quanta, and input file name.  Numeric values are
          in basic units.

     '\O3'
          Begin a nested suppression level.  'grohtml' uses this
          mechanism to create images of output preprocessed with 'pic',
          'eqn', and 'tbl'.  At startup, GNU 'troff' is at the outermost
          suppression level.  'pre-grohtml' generates these sequences
          when processing the document, using GNU 'troff' with the 'ps'
          output device, Ghostscript, and the PNM tools to produce
          images in PNG format.  They start a new page if the device is
          not 'html' or 'xhtml', to reduce the number of images crossing
          a page boundary.

     '\O4'
          End a nested suppression level.

     '\O[5PFILE]'
          At the outermost suppression level, write the name 'file' to
          the standard error stream at position P, which must be one of
          'l', 'r', 'c', or 'i', corresponding to left, right, centered,
          and inline alignments within the document, respectively.  FILE
          is a name associated with the production of the next image.

 -- Register: \n[.O]
     Output suppression nesting level applied by '\O3' and '\O4' escape
     sequences.

5.34 Host System Service Access
===============================

Occasionally a document wants to access the system clock, file storage,
or other services provided by the operating environment.

 -- Register: \n[$$]
     Process identifier (PID) of the GNU 'troff' program in its
     operating environment.

   Date- and time-related registers are set per the local time as
determined by 'localtime(3)' when the formatter launches.  This
initialization can be influenced by the environment variable 'TZ' or
overridden by 'SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH'; see Environment.

'\n[seconds]'
     Count of seconds elapsed in the minute (0-60).

'\n[minutes]'
     Count of minutes elapsed in the hour (0-59).

'\n[hours]'
     Count of hours elapsed since midnight (0-23).

'\n[dw]'
     Day of the week (1-7; 1 is Sunday).

'\n[dy]'
     Day of the month (1-31).

'\n[mo]'
     Month of the year (1-12).

'\n[year]'
     Gregorian year.

'\n[yr]'
     Gregorian year minus 1900.  This register is incorrectly documented
     in the AT&T 'troff' manual as storing the last two digits of the
     current year.  That claim stopped being true in 2000.  Old 'troff'
     input that looks like:

          '\" The year number is a surprise after 1999.
          This document was formatted in 19\n(yr.

     can be corrected to:

          This document was formatted in \n[year].

     or, for portability across many 'roff' programs, to the following.

          .nr y4 1900+\n(yr
          This document was formatted in \n(y4.

   If you wish to embed the date and/or time of a document's formatting
into its output, interpolate these registers into its text.  Use the
'af' request to format their values for output.

     .af year 0000
     .af mo 00
     .af dy 00
     .af hours 00
     .af minutes 00
     .af seconds 00
     ISO 8601 date stamp:
     \n[year]-\n[mo]-\n[dy]T\n[hours]:\n[minutes]:\n[seconds]
         => ISO 8601 date stamp: 2025-12-07T02:17:54

   'roff' formatters allow files to be read into the input stream.
Enabling GNU 'troff''s unsafe mode at the command line permits the
writing of files and execution of external commands, with or without
inclusion of their output in the document.

   *Caution:* The requests discussed below that accept a file name or
system command as an argument treat the remainder of the input line as
that argument, including any spaces, up to a newline or comment escape
sequence.  Suffixing the file name or command with a comment, even an
empty one, prevents unwanted space from creeping into it during source
document maintenance.  GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double
quote '"' from such an argument, permitting initial embedded spaces in
it, and reads it to the end of the input line in copy mode.  Recall Copy
Mode.

 -- Request: .so ["]file
 -- Request: .soquiet ["]file
     Replace the request's control line with the contents of FILE,
     "sourcing" it.  GNU 'troff' searches for FILE in any directories
     specified by '-I' command-line options, followed by the current
     working directory.  If FILE does not exist, the formatter ignores
     the request.(1)  (see Host System Service Access-Footnote-1)

     'so' can be useful for large documents, allowing each chapter of a
     book, for example, to be maintained in a separate file.  However,
     files interpolated with 'so' are not preprocessed; to overcome this
     limitation, see 'soelim(1)'.

     *Caution:* Since the formatter replaces the entire control line
     with the contents of a file, FILE must end with a newline, or the
     formatter will continue reading the next input line of the 'roff'
     file as if it were part of the last line of the sourced file.
     Consider a file 'xxx' containing only the word 'foo' without a
     trailing newline.

          $ printf 'foo' > xxx
          $ groff -T ascii <<EOF
          The situation is
          .so xxx
          bar.
          EOF
              => The situation is foobar.

     'soquiet' works the same way, except that GNU 'troff' issues no
     warning diagnostic if FILE does not exist.

 -- Request: .pso ["]command
     Read the standard output from the specified COMMAND when passed to
     'popen(3)' and include it in place of the 'pso' request.

     It is an error to use this request in safer mode, which is the
     default.  Invoke GNU 'troff' or a front end with the '-U' option to
     enable unsafe mode.

     The cautionary note regarding a final newline in the stream read by
     the 'so' request applies to 'pso' as well.

 -- Request: .mso ["]file
 -- Request: .msoquiet ["]file
     As the 'so' and 'soquiet' requests, respectively, except that GNU
     'troff' searches for the specified FILE in the same directories as
     macro files; recall 'GROFF_TMAC_PATH' in Environment and '-m' in
     Groff Options.

 -- Request: .trf ["]file
 -- Request: .cf ["]file
     Break and copy the contents of FILE as "throughput" to GNU
     'troff''s output.  Each line of FILE is output as if preceded by
     '\!', but is not interpreted by the formatter.  If FILE does not
     end with a newline, 'trf' appends one.  Both requests break the
     line before reading FILE, unless invoked with the no-break control
     character.  If a diversion is in use, GNU 'troff' performs the copy
     only when the diversion is emitted.

     'cf' copies the contents of FILE completely unprocessed; it is
     therefore an error to use this request in safer mode, which is the
     default.  Invoke GNU 'troff' or a front end with the '-U' option to
     enable unsafe mode.

     'trf' discards invalid input characters; recall Input Format.

     For 'cf', within a diversion, "completely unprocessed" means that
     each line of a file to be inserted is handled as if it were
     preceded by '\!\\!'.

     *Caution:* Use of these requests can put syntactically invalid
     content into the formatter's output, which 'groff''s output drivers
     then fail to process.  One application is to pass instructions to a
     postprocessor that interprets FILE's contents and filters it out
     before sending it to the output driver.

     To define a macro 'x' containing the contents of file 'f', use

          .ev 1
          .di x
          .trf f
          .di
          .ev

     The calls to 'ev' prevent the partially collected output line from
     becoming part of the diversion; recall Diversions.

     In AT&T 'troff', 'cf' copies the contents of FILE to the output
     immediately even if a diversion is active; this behavior is so
     anomalous that it must be considered a bug.

 -- Request: .nx [["]file]
     Stop processing the input file.  If FILE is specified, read it;
     otherwise, read the next pending input file, if any.

 -- Request: .rd [prompt [arg1 arg2 ...]]
     Read from standard input, and include what is read as though it
     were part of the input file.  Text is read until a blank line is
     encountered.

     If standard input is a TTY input device (keyboard), write PROMPT to
     standard error, followed by a colon (or send BEL for a beep if no
     argument is given).

     Arguments after PROMPT are available for the input.  For example,
     the line

          .rd data foo bar

     with the input 'This is \$2.' prints

          This is bar.

   Using the 'nx' and 'rd' requests, it is easy to set up form letters.
The form letter template is constructed like this, putting the following
lines into a file called 'repeat.let':

     .ce
     \*(td
     .sp 2
     .nf
     .rd
     .sp
     .rd
     .fi
     Body of letter.
     .bp
     .nx repeat.let

When this is run, a file containing the following lines should be
redirected in.  Requests included in this file are executed as though
they were part of the form letter.  The last block of input is the 'ex'
request, which tells GNU 'troff' to stop processing.  If this were not
there, 'troff' would not know when to stop.

     Trent A. Fisher
     708 NW 19th Av., #202
     Portland, OR  97209

     Dear Trent,

     Len Adollar
     4315 Sierra Vista
     San Diego, CA  92103

     Dear Mr. Adollar,

     .ex

 -- Request: .pi ["]command
     Use the formatter's device-independent output as the input to the
     commands specified in PIPE and emit their output to the standard
     output stream instead of the formatter's usual output.  The
     formatter reads the remainder of the input line into COMMAND and
     passes it to 'popen(3)'.  The formatter does not capture output
     produced by the command(s).

     Multiple 'pi' requests construct a multi-stage pipeline in the same
     order as the formatter encounters the requests.

          .pi foo
          .pi bar

     is the same as '.pi foo | bar'.

     'pi' must be invoked before GNU 'troff' writes any nodes to its
     output.(2)  (see Host System Service Access-Footnote-2) The
     formatter reports an error and ignores the request if 'pi' is
     invoked "too late".  Roughly, this means you should set up your
     'pi' pipeline early in a document, before anything but register,
     string, and macro definitions (and/or sourcing of files that
     comprise these exclusively).

     Use of this request in safer mode (GNU 'troff''s default) is
     erroneous.  Invoke GNU 'troff' or a front end with the '-U' option
     to enable unsafe mode.

     *Caution:* Use of the 'pi' request can put syntactically invalid
     content into the formatter's output, which 'groff''s output drivers
     then fail to process.  The pipeline you construct is responsible
     for maintaining the validity of the input to the output driver.

 -- Request: .sy ["]command
 -- Register: \n[systat]
     Execute the specified shell command(s).  The formatter reads the
     remainder of the input line into a buffer and passes it to
     'system(3)'.  The formatter does not capture the output produced by
     the command(s).

     It is an error to use this request in safer mode; this is the
     default.  Give GNU 'troff' or a front end program the '-U'
     command-line option to enable unsafe mode.

     The writable register 'systat' contains the return value of the
     'system(3)' function executed by the most recent 'sy' request.

     Real-world (and non-malicious) applications of 'sy' are esoteric;
     the request interpolates neither the standard output nor the
     standard error streams of COMMAND into the document--worse, AT&T
     'troff' afforded no means of verifying that COMMAND operated as
     expected.  We therefore offer a silly example of its use, making a
     document refuse to format if the system user name running the
     formatter is 'branden'.(3)  (see Host System Service
     Access-Footnote-3)

          .ds user branden\"
          .sy test "$(id -un)" = \*[user]
          .if \n[systat]=0 .ab formatting refused for \*[user]
          Hello, world!

 -- Request: .open stream ["]file
 -- Request: .opena stream ["]file
     Open FILE for writing and associate a stream named IDENT with it,
     making it available for 'write' requests.

     The 'opena' request is like 'open', but appends to FILE if it
     already exists instead of overwriting it.

     It is an error to use these requests in safer mode; this is the
     default.  Give GNU 'troff' or a front end program the '-U'
     command-line option to enable unsafe mode.

     The 'pstream' request dumps the list of open streams to the
     standard error stream.(4)  (see Host System Service
     Access-Footnote-4)

 -- Request: .write stream ["]contents
 -- Request: .writec stream ["]contents
     Write CONTENTS to STREAM, which must previously have been the
     subject of an 'open' (or 'opena') request.  GNU 'troff' flushes the
     stream after writing to it.

     The 'writec' request is like 'write', but only 'write' appends a
     newline to CONTENTS.

 -- Request: .writem stream name
     Write the contents of the macro or string NAME to STREAM, which
     must previously have been the subject of an 'open' (or 'opena')
     request.  GNU 'troff' reads the contents of NAME in copy mode.
     That is, it ignores already formatted elements (nodes).
     Consequently, diversions must be unformatted with the 'asciify'
     request before calling 'writem'.  Usually, this means a loss of
     information.

 -- Request: .close stream
     Close the specified STREAM; the stream is no longer an acceptable
     argument to the 'write' request.

     Here a simple macro to write an index entry.

          .open idx test.idx
          .
          .de IX
          .  write idx \\n[%] \\$*
          ..
          .
          .IX test entry
          .
          .close idx

 -- Escape sequence: \Ve
 -- Escape sequence: \V(ev
 -- Escape sequence: \V[env]
     Interpolate the contents of the system environment variable ENV
     (one-character name E, two-character name EV) as returned by
     'getenv(3)'.  '\V' is interpreted even in copy mode; recall Copy
     Mode.

   (1) GNU 'troff' emits a warning in category 'file'.  See Warnings.

   (2) See GNU troff Internals.

   (3) POSIX command environments and 'roff' formatters employ different
integer-to-Boolean interpretation conventions; a POSIX command exits
with a zero status if it succeeds and a positive one if it fails,
whereas a 'roff' register tests "true" if it has a positive value.

   (4) See Debugging.

5.35 Postprocessor Access
=========================

Beyond the 'cf' and 'trf' requests (recall Host System Service Access),
two escape sequences and two requests enable documents to pass
information directly to a postprocessor.  These are useful for
exercising device-specific capabilities that the 'groff' language does
not abstract or generalize; examples include the embedding of hyperlinks
and image files.  Device-specific functions are documented in each
output driver's man page, such as 'gropdf(1)', 'grops(1)', or
'grotty(1)'.

 -- Request: .device ["]character-sequence
 -- Escape sequence: \X'contents ...'
     Embed CHARACTER-SEQUENCE into GNU 'troff' output as parameters to
     an 'x X' device extension command.(1)  (see Postprocessor
     Access-Footnote-1) The output driver or other postprocessor
     interprets CHARACTER-SEQUENCE as it sees fit.

     GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     CONTENTS, permitting initial embedded spaces in it, and reads it to
     the end of the input line in copy mode.  Recall Copy Mode.

     The 'groff' special character repertoire is unknown to output
     drivers outside of glyphs named in a device's fonts, and even then
     they may not possess complete coverage of the names documented in
     the 'groff_char(7)' man page.  Further, escape sequences that
     produce horizontal or vertical motions, hyphenation breaks, or that
     are dummy characters may appear in strings or be converted to
     nodes, particularly in diversions.(2)  (see Postprocessor
     Access-Footnote-2) These are not representable when interpolated
     directly into device-independent output, as might be done when
     writing out tag names for PDF bookmarks, which can appear in a
     viewer's navigation pane.

     So that documents or macro packages do not have to laboriously
     "sanitize" strings destined for interpolation in device extension
     commands, the '\X' escape sequence performs certain transformations
     on its argument.  For these transformations, character translations
     and definitions are ignored.

     GNU 'troff' converts several ordinary characters that typeset as
     non-basic Latin code points to code points outside that range so
     that they are used consistently whether they are formatted as
     glyphs or used in a device extension command argument.  These
     ordinary characters are ''', '-', '^', '`', and '~'; others are
     written as-is.

     Special characters that typeset as Unicode basic Latin characters
     are translated to basic Latin characters accordingly.  So that any
     Unicode code point can be represented in device extension commands,
     for example in an author's name in document metadata or as a
     usefully named bookmark or hyperlink anchor, GNU 'troff' maps other
     special characters to Unicode special character notation.  Recall
     Characters and Glyphs.

     GNU 'troff' does not write special characters without a Unicode
     representation and escape sequences that do not interpolate a
     sequence of ordinary and/or special characters as arguments to
     device extension commands.(3)  (see Postprocessor
     Access-Footnote-3)

   GNU 'troff' also permits the interpolation of macro or string
contents as a device extension command.

 -- Request: .devicem name
 -- Escape sequence: \Yn
 -- Escape sequence: \Y(nm
 -- Escape sequence: \Y[name]
     The 'devicem' request and '\Y' escape sequence correspond to
     '.device \*[NAME]' and '\X'\*[NAME]'' (one-character name N,
     two-character name NM), respectively.  They differ from their
     counterparts in that GNU 'troff' does not interpret the contents of
     the string or macro NAME; further, NAME may be a macro and thus
     contain newlines.  (There is no way to embed a newline in the
     arguments to 'device' or '\X'.)  The inclusion of newlines requires
     an extension to the AT&T 'troff' device-independent page
     description language, and their presence confuses drivers that do
     not know about it.(4)  (see Postprocessor Access-Footnote-4)

   Use of device extension commands early in a document (before the
first text is formatted) can interfere with processing of page location
traps.  If you experience problems when placing them early, precede the
first with a dummy character escape sequence '\&'; recall Dummy
Characters.

 -- Request: .tag name
 -- Request: .taga name
     Reserved for internal use.

   (1) See GNU troff Output.

   (2) See GNU troff Internals.

   (3) When encountered, these produce warnings in category 'char'.  See
Warnings.

   (4) See Device Control Commands.

5.36 Miscellaneous
==================

We document here GNU 'troff' features that fit poorly elsewhere.

 -- Request: .psbb file
 -- Register: \n[llx]
 -- Register: \n[lly]
 -- Register: \n[urx]
 -- Register: \n[ury]
     Retrieve the bounding box of the PostScript image found in FILE,
     which must conform to Adobe's "Document Structuring Conventions"
     (DSC), locate a '%%BoundingBox' comment, and store the (upper-,
     lower-, -left, -right) values into the registers 'llx', 'lly',
     'urx', and 'ury'.  If an error occurs (for example, if no
     '%%BoundingBox' comment is present), the formatter sets these
     registers to 0.

     Control the search path for FILE with the '-I' command-line option.

5.37 GNU 'troff' Internals
==========================

GNU 'troff' processes input in three steps.  It gathers one or more
input characters into a "token",(1) (see GNU troff Internals-Footnote-1)
the smallest meaningful unit of 'troff' input.  The process of
formatting translates tokens into nodes that populate a pending output
line (recall Manipulating Filling and Adjustment).  A "node" is a data
structure representing any object that may ultimately appear in the
output, like a glyph or motion on the page.  When the pending output
line breaks, the formatter applies any relevant adjustment, line number,
and margin character, and finally appends it to the current diversion.
Periodically, the formatter "flushes" accumulated output line(s) to the
output device, a process that translates each node into a
device-independent output language representation understood by all
output drivers.  Copy mode tokenizes but does not format; diversions
(apart from that at the top level) format but do not write output.

   For example, GNU 'troff' converts the input 'Gi\[:u]\%seppe' into a
character token for 'g', a character token for 'i', a special character
token for ':u' (representing 'u' with an umlaut), a token encoding a
hyphenation break point,(2) (see GNU troff Internals-Footnote-2) and
further character tokens.  You can observe this process by storing the
foregoing input into a string--which, because its contents are read in
copy mode, is only tokenized, not formatted--and dumping it with the
'pm' request.(3)  (see GNU troff Internals-Footnote-3) (Using
'printf(1)' requires us to double the '\' and '%' characters.)

     $ printf '.ds str Gi\\[:u]\\%%seppe\n.pm str\n' \
         | groff 2>&1 | jq

   Similarly, we can observe the details of the formatting process by
interpolating the string, or supplying its contents directly as input,
and invoking the 'pline' request.

     $ printf 'Gi\\[:u]\\%%seppe\n.pline\n' | groff -z 2>&1 | jq

   We now see a list of nodes, including an output line start node,
several glyph nodes, a discretionary break node containing a glyph node
for the special character ':u' _and_ a glyph node for the special
character 'hy' (hyphen), and a word space node at the end corresponding
to the newline at the end of input.(4)  (see GNU troff
Internals-Footnote-4)

   If we change 'G' to 'f', we see that the first two glyph nodes, for
'f' and 'i', become contained by a ligature node (provided the current
font has a glyph for this ligature).  All output glyph nodes are
"processed", which means that they are associated with a given font,
type size, advance width, and so forth.

   Macros, diversions, and strings collect elements in two chained
lists: a list of tokens that have been passed unprocessed, and a list of
nodes.  Consider the following diversion.

     .di xxx
     a
     \!b
     c
     .br
     .di

It contains these elements.

node list            token list   element number
                                  
line start node      --           1
glyph node 'a'       --           2
word space node      --           3
--                   'b'          4
--                   '\n'         5
glyph node 'c'       --           6
vertical size node   --           7
vertical size node   --           8
--                   '\n'         9

'troff' inserts elements 1, 7, and 8; the latter two (which are always
present) specify the vertical extent of the last line, possibly modified
by '\x'.  The 'br' request finishes the pending output line, inserting a
newline token, which is subsequently converted to a space when the
diversion is interpolated.  Note that the word space node has a fixed
width that isn't adjustable anymore.  To convert horizontal space nodes
back into tokens, use the 'unformat' request.

   Macros only contain elements in the token list (and the node list is
empty); diversions and strings can contain elements in both lists.

   The 'chop' request simply reduces the number of elements in a macro,
string, or diversion by one.  Exceptions are "compatibility save" and
"compatibility ignore" tokens, which are ignored.  The 'substring'
request also ignores those tokens.

   Some requests like 'tr' or 'cflags' work on glyph identifiers only;
this means that the associated glyph can be changed without destroying
this association.  This can be very helpful for substituting glyphs.  In
the following example, we assume that glyph 'foo' isn't available by
default, so we provide a substitution using the 'fchar' request and map
it to input character 'x'.

     .fchar \[foo] foo
     .tr x \[foo]

Now let us assume that we install an additional special font 'bar' that
has glyph 'foo'.

     .special bar
     .rchar \[foo]

Since glyphs defined with 'fchar' are searched before glyphs in special
fonts, we must call 'rchar' to remove the definition of the fallback
glyph.  Anyway, the translation is still active; 'x' now maps to the
real glyph 'foo'.

   Macro and request arguments preserve compatibility mode enablement.

     .cp 1     \" switch to compatibility mode
     .de xx
     \\$1
     ..
     .cp 0     \" switch compatibility mode off
     .xx caf\['e]
         => café

Since compatibility mode is enabled while 'de' is invoked, the macro
'xx' enables compatibility mode when it is called.  Argument '$1' can
still be handled properly because it inherits the compatibility mode
enablement status that was active at the point where 'xx' was called.

   After interpolation of the parameters, the compatibility save and
restore tokens are removed.

   (1) When not in copy mode, the formatter does not tokenize the escape
sequences '\f', '\F', '\H', '\m', '\M', '\R', '\s', and '\S', but
instead updates the environment.

   (2) GNU 'troff' encodes tokens that aren't Unicode Basic Latin
characters as code points in the C0 and C1 control ranges; we plan to
move them to the Unicode Private Use Area (PUA) or to code points
outside the Unicode encoding space in a future release.

   (3) Because GNU 'troff''s internals are subject to revision, we do
not show the output of these examples.  The names and structures of node
types may change over time.  The JSON interpreter 'jq(1)' is not
essential, but can be helpful in understanding the topology of the node
trees populating output lines and diversions in particular.

   (4) You may wonder why a glyph node for 'hy' exists when this example
doesn't produce one on the output.  That's because the break is
_discretionary_; at the time a word is formatted into nodes, GNU 'troff'
doesn't know where the output line will break.  Later, when processesing
a pending output line, GNU 'troff' has that knowledge, and iterates
through the output line's node list, using its discretion to discard
these hyphen glyph nodes everywhere except when hyphenating a word at
the end of the line.

5.38 Debugging
==============

          Standard troff voodoo, just put a power of two backslashes in
    front of it until it works and if you still have problems add a \c.
                                                         -- Ron Natalie

   The 'roff' language family is not the easiest to debug, in part
thanks to its design features of recursive interpolation and the use of
multi-stage pipeline processing in the surrounding system.  Nevertheless
there exist several features useful for troubleshooting.

   Preprocessors use the 'lf' request to preserve the identity of the
line numbers and names of input files.  GNU 'troff' emits a variety of
error diagnostics and supports several categories of warning; the output
of each category can be selectively enabled or suppressed.  A trace of
the formatter's input processing stack can be emitted when errors or
warnings occur by means of GNU 'troff''s '-b' option, or produced on
demand with the 'backtrace' request.  The 'tm' and related requests can
be used to emit customized diagnostic messages or for instrumentation
while troubleshooting.  The 'ex' and 'ab' requests cause early
termination with successful and error exit codes respectively, to halt
further processing when continuing would be fruitless.  Examine the
state of the formatter with requests that write lists of defined
names--macros, strings, and diversions--colors, composite character
mappings, environments, occupied font mounting positions, font
translations, automatic hyphenation codes and exceptions, registers,
open streams, and page location traps.  Requests can also disclose to
the standard error stream the internal properties and representations of
characters and classes, macros (and strings and diversions), and the
list of output nodes corresponding to the pending output line.  Recall
GNU troff Internals.

 -- Request: .lf input-line-number [["]file-identifier]
     Set the input line number (and, optionally, the file name) the
     formatter uses when reporting diagnostics.  The argument becomes
     the input line number of the _next_ line the formatter reads.
     FILE-IDENTIFIER is a sequence of ordinary characters and/or spaces.
     GNU 'troff' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from
     FILE-IDENTIFIER, permitting initial embedded spaces in it, and
     reads it to the end of the input line in copy mode.  Recall Copy
     Mode.

     'lf''s primary purpose is to aid the debugging of documents that
     undergo preprocessing.  Programs like 'tbl' that transform input in
     their own languages into 'roff' requests use it so that any
     diagnostic messages emitted by a subsequent preprocessor or by
     'troff' correspond to the source document.

 -- Request: .tm terminal-message
 -- Request: .tm1 ["]message
 -- Request: .tmc ["]message
     Send TERMINAL-MESSAGE to the standard error stream.  The formatter
     reads the argument to the end of the input line in copy mode
     (recall Copy Mode), but does _not_ remove a leading double quote;
     contrast 'tm1'.

     'tm1' removes a leading neutral double quote '"' from MESSAGE,
     permitting initial embedded spaces in it.

     'tmc' works as 'tm1', but does not append a newline.

 -- Request: .ab [terminal-message]
     Write any TERMINAL-MESSAGE to the standard error stream (like 'tm')
     and then abort the formatter; that is, stop processing and
     terminate with a failure status.  Aborting does not flush a
     partially collected line, a potentially significant fact if you're
     using 'ab' to "bisect" a troublesome document or macro definition;
     see the 'fl' request below.

 -- Request: .ex
     Exit the formatter; that is, stop processing and terminate
     successfully.  To stop processing only the current file, use the
     'nx' request; recall Host System Service Access.

   When doing something complicated, it is useful to leave the debugging
statements in the code and have them turned on by a command-line flag.

     .if \n[DB] .tm debugging output

To activate such statements, use the '-r' option to set the register.

     groff -rDB=1 file

   If you know in advance that there are many errors and no useful
output, or are interested _only_ in diagnostic output, you can suppress
GNU 'troff''s formatted output with its '-z' option.

 -- Request: .pchar c ...
     Report, to the standard error stream, information about each
     character (be it ordinary, special, or indexed) or character class
      C.  A character defined by a request ('char', 'fchar', 'fschar',
     or 'schar') reports its contents as a JSON-encoded string, but the
     output is not otherwise in JSON format.

 -- Request: .pcolor [col ...]
     Report, to the standard error stream, each defined color named COL,
     its color space identifier, and channel value assignments, or,
     without arguments, those of all defined colors.  A device's default
     stroke and/or fill colors, "default", are not listed since they are
     immutable and their details unknown to the formatter.

 -- Request: .pcomposite
     Report, to the standard error stream, the list of configured
     composite character mappings.  Recall the 'composite' request
     description in Characters and Glyphs.  The "from" code point is
     listed first, followed by its "to" mapping.

 -- Request: .pev
     Report the state of the current environment followed by that of all
     other environments to the standard error stream.

 -- Request: .pfp
     Report, to the standard error stream, the list of occupied font
     mounting positions.  Recall the 'fp' request description in
     Selecting Fonts.  Occupied mounting positions are listed, one per
     line, in increasing order, followed by the typeface name; if the
     name corresponds to an abstract style, the entry ends there.
     Otherwise, the name of the font description file and the font's
     "internal name" datum, the meaning of which varies by output
     device, follow.

 -- Request: .pftr
     Report, to the standard error stream, the list of font
     translations.  Recall the 'ftr' request description in Selecting
     Fonts.  The "from" font identifier is listed first, followed by its
     "to" translation.

 -- Request: .phw
     Report, to the standard error stream, the list of hyphenation
     exception words associated with the hyphenation language selected
     by the 'hla' request; recall Manipulating Hyphenation.  A '-' marks
     each hyphenation point.  A word prefixed with '-' is not hyphenated
     at all.  The report suffixes words to which automatic hyphenation
     applies (meaning those defined in a hyphenation pattern file rather
     than with the 'hw' request) with a tab and asterisk ('*').

 -- Request: .pline
     Report, in JSON syntax to the standard error stream, the list of
     output nodes corresponding to the pending output line.  In JSON, a
     pair of empty brackets '[ ]' represents an empty list.  A _pending_
     output line has not yet undergone adjustment, and lacks a line
     number and margin character (all as applicable).

 -- Request: .pm [name ...]
     Report, to the standard error stream, the JSON-encoded name and
     contents of each macro, string, or diversion NAME, or, without
     arguments, the names of all defined macros, strings, and diversions
     and their lengths in characters or nodes.

 -- Request: .pnr [reg ...]
     Report the name and value and, if its type is numeric, the
     autoincrement amount and assigned format of each register REG, or,
     without arguments, those of all defined registers, to the standard
     error stream.

 -- Request: .pstream
     Report, in JSON syntax to the standard error stream, the list of
     open streams, including the name of each open stream, the name of
     the file backing it, and its mode (writing or appending).  In JSON,
     a pair of empty brackets '[ ]' represents an empty list.

 -- Request: .pwh
     Report the names and positions of all page location traps to the
     standard error stream.  GNU 'troff' reports empty slots in the
     list, where a trap had been planted but subsequently (re)moved,
     because they can affect the visibility of subsequently planted
     traps.

 -- Request: .fl
     Break the line and flush any pending output line immediately.  The
     effect is the same as the 'br' request unless the no-break control
     character is used; ''br' does nothing, whereas ''fl' writes the
     pending output line without further updating the drawing position.
     However, the _reported_ horizontal drawing position is still
     reckoned from the start of the input line.

          foo \n(hp
          bar \c
          'fl
          \n(hp baz \n(hp
              => foo 96 bar 0 baz 144

     Flush timing is most easily perceived in device-independent output.

     Use of ''fl' may be desirable immediately prior to an 'ab' request
     when troubleshooting a document or macro definition line by line,
     because a significant number of formatting operations can
     accumulate on a partially collected output line, misleading you
     about "where" the abort "really" took place.

     Historically, 'fl' was used with 'rd' to produce interactive
     'nroff' documents.  GNU 'troff' does not easily support that mode
     of operation, because its output for terminals is first prepared in
     device-independent format, which 'grotty' renders a page at a time.

 -- Request: .backtrace
     Write the state of the input stack to the standard error stream.

     Consider the following in a file 'test'.

          .de xxx
          .  backtrace
          ..
          .de yyy
          .  xxx
          ..
          .
          .yyy
              error-> troff: backtrace: 'test':2: macro 'xxx'
              error-> troff: backtrace: 'test':5: macro 'yyy'
              error-> troff: backtrace: file 'test':8

     The '-b' option of GNU 'troff' causes a backtrace to be generated
     on each error or warning.  Some warnings have to be enabled; see
     Warnings.

 -- Register: \n[slimit]
     If greater than 0, sets the maximum quantity of objects on GNU
     'troff''s internal input stack.  If less than or equal to 0, there
     is no limit: recursion can continue until program memory is
     exhausted.  The default is 1,000.

 -- Request: .warnscale scaling-unit
     Set the scaling unit used in certain warnings (one of 'u', 'i',
     'c', 'p', and 'P'; default: 'i').  Ignored on 'nroff'-mode output
     devices, for which these diagnostics report the vertical page
     location in lines, and the horizontal page location in ens.

 -- Request: .spreadwarn [limit]
     Emit a 'break' warning if the additional space inserted for each
     space between words in an output line adjusted to both margins with
     '.ad b' is larger than or equal to LIMIT.  A negative value is
     treated as zero; an absent argument toggles the warning on and off
     without changing LIMIT.  The default scaling unit is 'm'.  At
     startup, 'spreadwarn' is inactive and LIMIT is 3m.

     For example,

          .spreadwarn 0.2m

     causes a warning if 'break' warnings are not suppressed and GNU
     'troff' must add 0.2m or more for each inter-word space in a line.
     See Warnings.

 -- Request: .warn [n]
 -- Register: \n[.warn]
     Select categories of warnings to be reported.  N is the sum of the
     numeric codes associated with each warning category that is to be
     enabled; all other categories are disabled.  The categories and
     their associated codes are listed in Warnings.  For example, '.warn
     0' disables all warnings, and '.warn 1' disables all warnings
     except those about missing glyphs.  If no argument is given, all
     warning categories are enabled.

     The read-only register '.warn' contains the sum of the numeric
     codes of enabled warning categories.

   GNU 'troff' has command-line options for reporting warnings ('-w'),
suppressing them ('-W'), and issuing backtraces ('-b') when a warning or
an error occurs.

5.38.1 Warnings
---------------

GNU 'troff' divides its warning diagnostics into named, numbered
categories.  The '-w' and '-W' options use the associated names.  A
power of two characterizes each category; the 'warn' request and the
'.warn' register respectively set and report the sum of enabled category
codes.  Warnings of each category are produced under the following
circumstances.

'char'
'1'
     No user-defined character of the requested name or index exists and
     no mounted font defines a glyph for it, or input could not be
     encoded for device-independent output.  This category is enabled by
     default.

'break'
'4'
     A filled output line could not be broken such that its length was
     less than or equal to, or adjusted such that its length was exactly
     equal to, the output line length '\n[.l]'.  GNU 'troff' reports the
     amount of overset or underset in the scaling unit configured by the
     'warnscale' request in 'troff' mode, and in ens ('n'; character
     cells) in 'nroff' mode.  See troff and nroff Modes.  This category
     is enabled by default.

'delim'
'8'
     The selected delimiter character was ambiguous because it is also
     meaningful when beginning a numeric expression, or the closing
     delimiter in an escape sequence was missing or mismatched.

     A future 'groff' release may reject ambiguous delimiters.  In
     compatibility mode, ambiguous delimiters are accepted without
     warning.

'scale'
'32'
     A scaling unit inappropriate to its context was used in a numeric
     expression.

'range'
'64'
     A numeric expression was out of range for its context.

'syntax'
'128'
     A self-contradictory hyphenation mode or character flags were
     requested; an empty or incomplete numeric expression was
     encountered; an operand to a numeric operator was missing; an
     attempt was made to format characters or spaces on an input line
     after an output line continuation escape sequence; a recognized but
     inapposite escape sequence or unprintable character code was used
     in a device extension command; an attempt was made to define a
     recursive, empty, or nonsensical character class; or a 'groff'
     extension escape sequence or conditional expression operator was
     used while in compatibility mode.

'di'
'256'
     A 'di', 'da', 'box', or 'boxa' request was invoked without an
     argument when there was no current diversion.

'mac'
'512'
     An undefined string, macro, or diversion was used.  When such an
     object is dereferenced, an empty one of that name is automatically
     created.  So, unless it is later deleted, GNU 'troff' issues at
     most one warning for each.

     GNU 'troff' also uses this category to warn of an attempt to move
     an unplanted trap macro; recall Page Location Traps.  In such
     cases, the unplanted macro is _not_ dereferenced, so it is not
     created if it does not exist.

'reg'
'1024'
     An undefined register was used.  When an undefined register is
     dereferenced, the formatter automatically defines it with a value
     of 0.  So, unless it is later deleted, GNU 'troff' issues at most
     one warning for each.

'tab'
'2048'
     A tab character appeared in a parameterized escape sequence, in an
     unquoted macro argument, or where a request expected a numeric
     expression argument.

'missing'
'8192'
     A request was invoked with a mandatory argument absent.

'input'
'16384'
     An invalid character occurred on the input stream.

'escape'
'32768'
     An unsupported escape sequence was encountered.

'space'
'65536'
     A space was missing between a request or macro and its argument.
     This warning is produced when an undefined name longer than two
     characters is encountered and the first two characters of the name
     constitute a defined name.  No request is invoked, no macro called,
     and an empty macro is not defined.  This category is enabled by
     default.  It never occurs in compatibility mode.

'font'
'131072'
     A non-existent font was selected.  This category is enabled by
     default.

'ig'
'262144'
     An invalid escape sequence occurred in input ignored using the 'ig'
     request.  This warning category diagnoses a condition that is an
     error when it occurs in non-ignored input.

'color'
'524288'
     An undefined color was selected, an attempt was made to define a
     color using an unrecognized color space, an invalid channel value
     in a color definition was encountered, or an attempt was made to
     redefine a default color.

'file'
'1048576'
     An attempt was made to read a file that does not exist, or a stream
     remained open at formatter exit.  This category is enabled by
     default.

   Two warning names group other warning categories for convenience.

'all'
     All warning categories except 'di', 'mac' and 'reg'.  This
     shorthand is intended to produce all warnings that are useful with
     macro packages written for AT&T 'troff' and its descendants, which
     have less fastidious diagnostics than GNU 'troff'.

'w'
     All warning categories.  Authors of documents and macro packages
     targeting 'groff' are encouraged to use this setting.

5.39 Implementation Differences
===============================

GNU 'troff' has a number of features that cause incompatibilities with
documents written for other versions of 'troff'.  Some GNU extensions to
'troff' have become supported by other implementations.

5.39.1 Safer Mode
-----------------

GNU 'troff' operates in "safer mode" by default; to mitigate risks from
untrusted input documents, it disables the 'cf', 'pi', and 'sy'
requests.  GNU 'troff''s '-U' option enables "unsafe mode", restoring
their function and enabling additional extension requests, 'open',
'opena', and 'pso'.  Recall Host System Service Access.

5.39.2 Compatibility Mode
-------------------------

Some syntactical and behavioral differences between GNU and AT&T
'troff's are thought too important to neglect; GNU 'troff' therefore
makes available a "compatibility mode" in an effort to keep documents
prepared for AT&T 'troff' rendering well.

   Identifiers of arbitrary length may be GNU 'troff''s most obvious
innovation.  AT&T 'troff' interprets '.dsabcd' as defining a string 'ab'
with contents 'cd'.  Normally, GNU 'troff' interprets this input as
calling a macro named 'dsabcd'.  AT&T 'troff' also interprets '\*[' and
'\n[' as interpolating a string or register, respectively, named '['.
GNU 'troff', however, normally interprets '[' as bracketing a long name
(with ']' at the distal end).  In compatibility mode, GNU 'troff'
interprets names in the traditional way; they thus can be two characters
long at most.

 -- Request: .cp [b]
 -- Register: \n[.C]
     Enable or disable AT&T 'troff' compatibility mode per Boolean
     expression B.  It is disabled by default, and enabled if B is
     omitted.  In compatibility mode, long names are not recognized, and
     the incompatibilities they cause do not arise.

     The read-only register '.C' interpolates 1 if compatibility mode is
     enabled, 0 otherwise.

     GNU 'troff''s '-C' command-line option causes it to start up in
     compatibility mode.

 -- Request: .do name [argument ...]
 -- Register: \n[.cp]
     Interpret the string, request, diversion, or macro NAME (along with
     any further arguments) with compatibility mode disabled.
     Compatibility mode is restored (only if it was active) when the
     interpolation of NAME is interpreted; that is, the restored
     compatibility state applies to the request or contents of the
     macro, string, or diversion NAME, its arguments, and data read from
     files or pipes if NAME is the 'so', 'soquiet', 'mso', 'msoquiet',
     or 'pso' request.

     The following example illustrates several aspects of 'do' behavior.

          .de mac1
          FOO
          ..
          .de1 mac2
          groff
          .mac1
          ..
          .de mac3
          compatibility
          .mac1
          ..
          .de ma
          \\$1
          ..
          .cp 1
          .do mac1
          .do mac2 \" mac2, defined with .de1, calls "mac1"
          .do mac3 \" mac3 calls "ma" with argument "c1"
          .do mac3 \[ti] \" groff syntax accepted in .do arguments
              => FOO groff FOO compatibility c1 ~

     The read-only register '.cp', meaningful only when dereferenced
     from a 'do' request, is 1 if compatibility mode was on when the
     'do' request was encountered, and 0 if it was not.  This register
     is specialized and may require a statement of rationale.

     When writing macro packages or documents that use GNU 'troff'
     features and which may be mixed with other packages or documents
     that do not--common scenarios include serial processing of man
     pages or use of the 'so' or 'mso' requests--you may desire correct
     operation regardless of compatibility mode enablement in the
     surrounding context.  It may occur to you to save the existing
     value of '\n(.C' into a register, say, '_C', at the beginning of
     your file, turn compatibility mode off with '.cp 0', then restore
     it from that register at the end with '.cp \n(_C'.  At the same
     time, a modular design of a document or macro package may lead you
     to multiple layers of inclusion.  You cannot use the same register
     name everywhere lest you "clobber" the value from a preceding or
     enclosing context.  The two-character register name space of AT&T
     'troff' is confining, but employing GNU 'troff''s more capacious
     one, as with '.nr _my_saved_C \n(.C', does not work in
     compatibility mode; the register name is too long.  Employing the
     'do' request is no help: '.do nr _my_saved_C \n(.C' always saves
     zero to the register, because 'do' turns compatibility mode _off_
     while it interprets its argument list.

     To robustly save compatibility mode before switching it off, use

          .do nr _my_saved_C \n[.cp]
          .cp 0

     at the beginning of your file, followed by

          .cp \n[_my_saved_C]
          .do rr _my_saved_C

     at the end.  As the C language exposes application programs'
     symbols to those defined by libraries, 'roff' documents share a
     name space with macro packages; choose a register name that is
     unlikely to collide with other uses.

   Normally, GNU 'troff' tracks the nesting depth of interpolations.  In
compatibility mode, it does not.

     .ds xx '
     \w'abc\*(xxdef'
         => 168 (not in compatibility mode on a terminal device)
         => 72def' (compatibility mode on a terminal device)

   The escape sequences '\f', '\H', '\m', '\M', '\R', '\s', and '\S' are
transparent to control character recognition at the beginning of a line,
or after the conditional expression of an 'if' or 'ie' request, only in
compatibility mode.  That is, upon interpreting them, GNU 'troff'
normally no longer recognizes a control character on the input line; but
in compatibility mode, it does, just like AT&T 'troff'.  Thus the next
example produces bold output in both modes, but the text differs.

     .de xx
     Hello!
     ..
     \fB.xx\fP
         => .xx (not in compatibility mode)
         => Hello! (in compatibility mode)

   Normally, the syntax form '\s'N accepts only a single character (a
digit) for N, consistently with other forms that originated in AT&T
'troff', like '\*', '\f', '\g', '\k', '\n', and '\z'.  In compatibility
mode only, a non-zero N must be in the range 4-39.  Legacy documents
relying upon this quirk of parsing(1) (see Compatibility
Mode-Footnote-1) should migrate to another '\s' form.

   In compatibility mode, the 'de', 'am', 'ds', and 'as' requests behave
as 'de1', 'am1', 'ds1', and 'as1', respectively: GNU 'troff' inserts a
compatibility save token at the beginning of the macro, string, or
appendment thereto as applicable and a compatibility restore token at
its end, enabling compatibility mode during its interpolation.(2)  (see
Compatibility Mode-Footnote-2) Thus they work as expected even if the
interpolation context disables compatibility mode.

   AT&T 'troff' recognized slightly varying sets of delimiters when
expecting numerical expressions (as with the '\h' escape sequence),
string expressions (as with the '\w' escape sequence and 'tl' request),
and output comparisons (as in '.if #foo#bar# .tm match').  GNU 'troff',
when not in compatibility mode, recognizes a single consistent set of
delimiters.  Compatibility mode emulates AT&T 'troff' only up to a
point.  GNU 'troff' accepts leaders and tabs as delimiters, as well as
<Control+D> (EOT or EOF), <Control+H> (BS or backspace), and <Control+L>
(FF or form feed), all of which, when used as delimiters, cause AT&T
'troff' to behave in ways difficult to predict.

   (1) The Graphic Systems C/A/T phototypesetter (the original device
target for AT&T 'troff') supported only a few discrete type sizes in the
range 6-36 points, so Ossanna contrived a special case in the parser to
do what the user must have meant.  Kernighan warned of this in the 1992
revision of CSTR #54 (§2.3), and more recently, McIlroy referred to it
as a "living fossil".

   (2) Recall Strings.

5.39.3 Other Differences
------------------------

GNU 'troff' does not emit output if it has nothing to format.  For
example, it treats an input document consisting solely of 'nr' and 'tm'
requests as empty, and produces nothing on its standard output stream.
AT&T 'troff' does, creating a blank page.

   Use of C0 control characters in identifiers is not portable; Solaris,
Plan 9, and Heirloom Doctools 'troff's accept <Control+B>, <Control+C>,
<Control+E>, <Control+F>, and <Control+G> (only); DWB 3.3 'troff' does
not.  GNU 'troff' rejects C0 controls in identifiers with an error
diagnostic.

   Formatters that don't implement GNU 'troff' extension request names
tend to ignore them, and if they don't support a GNU 'troff' extension
escape sequence, they are liable to format its function selector
character as text.  For example, the adjustable, non-breaking space
escape sequence '\~' is also supported by Heirloom Doctools 'troff'
050915 (September 2005), 'mandoc' 1.9.5 (2009-09-21), 'neatroff' (commit
1c6ab0f6e, 2016-09-13), and Plan 9 from User Space 'troff' (commit
93f8143600, 2022-08-12), but not by Solaris or Documenter's Workbench
'troff's, which both render it as '~'.  Recall Manipulating Filling and
Adjustment.  GNU 'troff''s features sometimes cause incompatibilities
with documents written assuming old implementations of 'troff'.

   AT&T 'troff' discards trailing spaces from input lines, like GNU
'troff', but when it does so, AT&T 'troff' also cancels end-of-sentence
detection.  Use of the dummy character escape sequence '\&' is more
portable.

   When adjusting output lines to both margins, AT&T 'troff' at first
adjusts spaces starting from the right; GNU 'troff' begins from the
left.  Both implementations adjust spaces from opposite ends on
alternating output lines in this adjustment mode to prevent "rivers" in
the text.

   GNU 'troff' does not always hyphenate words as AT&T 'troff' does.
The AT&T implementation uses a set of hard-coded rules specific to U.S.
English, while GNU 'troff' uses language-specific hyphenation pattern
files derived from TeX.  Some versions of 'troff' reserved meager
storage for hyphenation exception words (arguments to the 'hw' request);
GNU 'troff' has no such restriction.  When the 'hy' request is invoked
without an argument, GNU 'troff' sets the automatic hyphenation mode to
the value of the '.hydefault' register; the AT&T implementation sets it
to '1', which is not suitable in GNU 'troff' for some languages,
including English.

   Unlike GNU 'troff', AT&T 'troff' does not recognize an occurrence of
'\%' at the beginning of a word as suppressing its hyphenation; instead,
it (uselessly) marks the start of the word as a potential hyphenation
point, permitting output lines to end with hyphens that are not interior
to a word.

   GNU 'troff' handles the dummy character '\&' differently from AT&T
'troff' when it is followed by the hyphenation control escape sequence
'\%' at the beginning of a word.  GNU 'troff' does not regard the dummy
character as "starting" the word; AT&T 'troff' does.  Further, Heirloom
Doctools 'troff' does not honor an explicit hyphenation point marked
with '\%' after a word-initial one.(1)  (see Other
Differences-Footnote-1)

   GNU 'troff' interprets request arguments representing file names and
system commands in the same way it does the CONTENTS argument to the
'ds' and 'as' requests: it removes a leading neutral double quote '"'
from the argument to the 'cf', 'nx', 'pi', 'so', and 'sy' requests, and
the second argument (if present) to the 'lf' request, permitting initial
embedded spaces in it, and reads it to the end of the input line in copy
mode.  Recall Copy Mode.  This difference permits the formatter to
handle files with spaces in their names, but requires more care with
trailing comments, and doubling of an initial neutral double quote '"'
if the file name has one.

   The existence of the '.T' string is a common feature of
device-independent 'troff's--DWB 3.3, Solaris, Heirloom Doctools, and
Plan 9 'troff's all support it--but valid values are specific to each
implementation.

   The (read-only) register '.T' interpolates 1 if GNU 'troff' is run
with the '-T' option, and 0 otherwise.  In contrast, AT&T 'troff'
interpolated 1 only if 'nroff' was the formatter and was run with '-T'.

   AT&T 'troff' ignored attempts to remove read-only registers; GNU
'troff' honors such requests.  Recall Built-in Registers.

   The 'lf' request sets the number of the _current_ input line in AT&T
'troff' and the _next_ in GNU 'troff'.

   AT&T 'troff' had only environments named '0', '1', and '2'.  In GNU
'troff', any number of environments may exist, using any valid
identifiers for their names.  Recall Identifiers.

   As noted in Using Fractional Type Sizes, AT&T 'troff''s 'ps' request
ignores scaling units and thus '.ps 10u' sets the type size to
10 points, whereas in GNU 'troff' it sets the type size to 10 _scaled_
points, possibly a much smaller measurement.  AT&T's behavior also means
that '.ps 10p' and '.ps 10z' are portable.

   The 'ab' request differs from AT&T 'troff': GNU 'troff' writes no
message to the standard error stream if no arguments are given, and it
exits with a failure status instead of a successful one.

   The 'bp' request differs from AT&T 'troff': GNU 'troff' does not
accept a scaling unit on the argument, a page number; the former does
(uselessly).

   In AT&T 'troff', the 'pm' request reports macro, string, and
diversion sizes in units of 128-byte blocks, and an argument reduces the
report to a sum of the above in the same units.  GNU 'troff' reports
their lengths in characters or nodes if given no arguments, and
otherwise dumps the JSON-encoded name, contents, and other properties of
each named argument.

   AT&T 'troff' ignores the 'ss' request if the output is a terminal
device; GNU 'troff' rounds down the values of minimum inter-word and
additional inter-sentence space each to the nearest multiple of 12.

   GNU 'troff' distinguishes characters from glyphs.  Characters can be
ordinary, special, or indexed, and populate strings and macros.
Characters _per se_ have not (yet) been formatted.  Glyphs represent
graphemes (supplied by the output device) and populate diversions
(recall Diversions).  Formatting converts characters into (sequences of)
glyphs.  GNU 'troff' stores properties of the environment that affect
how a glyph is rendered with the glyph node's data.  Thus, subsequent
formatting operations do not affect it, including 'bd', 'cs', 'tkf',
'tr', and 'fp' requests.  Normally, a macro or string contains only a
list of characters and a diversion contains only a list of nodes.
However, applying the 'asciify' or 'unformat' requests to a diversion
converts some of its nodes back into characters.  Where the formatter
cannot recover the character representation of a node, it stores a null
character in the character list corresponding to a single node in the
node list.

   Consequently, a glyph node does not behave as a character does in
macro interpolation: it does not inherit special properties that the
character from which it was constructed might have had.  For example,
the input

     .di x
     \\\\
     .br
     .di
     .x

produces '\\' in GNU 'troff'.  Each pair of backslashes becomes one
backslash _glyph_; the resulting backslashes are thus not interpreted as
escape _characters_ when they are interpolated as the diversion is
output.  AT&T 'troff' _would_ interpret them as escape characters when
interpolating them and end up printing one '\'.

   One correct way to obtain a printable backslash in most documents is
to use the '\e' escape sequence; this always prints a single instance of
the current escape character,(2) (see Other Differences-Footnote-2)
regardless of whether it is used in a diversion; it also works in both
GNU 'troff' and AT&T 'troff'.

   The other correct way, appropriate in contexts independent of the
backslash's common use as a 'roff' escape character--perhaps in
discussion of character sets or other programming languages--is the
special character escape sequence '\(rs' or '\[rs]', for "reverse
solidus", from its name in the ECMA-6 and ISO 10646 standards.(3)  (see
Other Differences-Footnote-3)

   To store in a diversion an escape sequence that is interpreted when
the diversion is interpolated, either use the traditional '\!'
transparent output facility, or, if this is unsuitable, the new '\?'
escape sequence.  Recall Diversions and GNU troff Internals.

   Like AT&T 'troff', GNU 'troff' maintains a buffer of
device-independent output commands,(4) (see Other
Differences-Footnote-4) populating the buffer as formatted output
accumulates.  GNU 'troff' always flushes this buffer when processing a
break; AT&T 'troff' does so according to no obvious schedule.  (Perhaps,
if the buffer is of fixed size, the formatter performs the flush when
the buffer runs out of room.)

   In the somewhat pathological case where a diversion exists containing
a partially collected line and a partially collected line at the
top-level diversion has never existed, AT&T 'troff' outputs a partially
collected but otherwise empty line (as if '\c' were in the top-level
diversion) at the end of input; GNU 'troff' does not.

   (1) Thus,
     .ll 10n
     \%antidisestablishmen\%tarianism
     .br
     \&\%antidisestablishmen\%tarianism
     .pl \n(nlu
   produces different results with each of the three formatters.

   (2) Naturally, if you've changed the escape character, you need to
prefix the 'e' with whatever it is--and you'll likely get something
other than a backslash in the output.

   (3) AT&T 'troff''s font description files did not define the 'rs'
special character, but those of its descendant Heirloom Doctools 'troff'
do, as of its 060716 release (July 2006).

   (4) In GNU 'troff', node objects produce these commands; recall GNU
troff Internals.

6 File Formats
**************

All files that GNU 'troff' reads and writes are text files.(1)  (see
File Formats-Footnote-1) The next two sections describe their format.

   (1) GNU 'troff' also reads files that don't satisfy the strict POSIX
definition of a text file--for example, those lacking a final newline
character--and the 'cf' and 'trf' requests read arbitrary files.  Recall
Host System Service Access.

6.1 Device and Font Description Files
=====================================

The 'groff' font and output device description formats are slight
extensions of those used by AT&T device-independent 'troff'.  In
distinction to the AT&T implementation, 'groff' lacks a binary format;
all files are text files.(1)  (see Device and Font Description
Files-Footnote-1) The device and font description files for a device
NAME are stored in a 'devNAME' directory.  The device description file
is called 'DESC', and, for each font supported by the device, a font
description file is called 'F', where F is usually an abbreviation of a
font's name and/or style.  For example, the 'ps' (PostScript) device has
'groff' font description files for Times roman ('TR') and Zapf Chancery
Medium italic ('ZCMI'), among many others, while the 'utf8' device (for
terminals) has font descriptions for the roman, italic, bold, and
bold-italic styles ('R', 'I', 'B', and 'BI', respectively).

   Device and font description files are read both by the formatter, GNU
'troff', and by output drivers.  The programs delegate these files'
processing to an internal library, 'libgroff', ensuring their consistent
interpretation.

   (1) Plan 9 'troff' has also abandoned the binary format.

6.1.1 'DESC' File Format
------------------------

The 'DESC' file contains a series of directives; each begins a line.
Their order is not important, with two exceptions: (1) the 'res'
directive must precede any 'papersize' directive; and (2) the 'charset'
directive must come last (if at all).  If a directive name is repeated,
later entries in the file override previous ones (except that the paper
dimensions are computed based on the 'res' directive last seen when
'papersize' is encountered).  Spaces and/or tabs separate words and are
ignored at line boundaries.  Comments start with the '#' character and
extend to the end of a line.  Empty lines are ignored.

'family FAM'
     The default font family is FAM.

'fonts N F1 ... FN'
     Fonts F1, ..., FN are mounted at font positions M+1, ..., M+N where
     M is the number of 'styles' (see below).  This directive may extend
     over more than one line.  A font name of '0' causes no font to be
     mounted at the corresponding position.

'hor N'
     The horizontal motion quantum is N basic units.  Horizontal
     measurements round to multiples of N.

'image_generator PROGRAM'
     Use PROGRAM to generate PNG images from PostScript input.  Under
     GNU/Linux, this is usually 'gs', but under other systems (notably
     Cygwin) it might be set to another name.  The 'grohtml' driver uses
     this directive.

'paperlength N'
     The vertical dimension of the output medium is N basic units
     (deprecated: use 'papersize' instead).

'papersize FORMAT-OR-DIMENSION-PAIR-OR-FILE-NAME ...'
     The dimensions of the output medium are as according to the
     argument, which is either a standard paper format, a pair of
     dimensions, or the name of a plain text file containing either of
     the foregoing.

     Recognized paper formats are the ISO and DIN formats 'A0'-'A7',
     'B0'-'B7', 'C0'-'C7', 'D0'-'D7'; the U.S. paper types 'letter',
     'legal', 'tabloid', 'ledger', 'statement', and 'executive'; and the
     envelope formats 'com10', 'monarch', and 'DL'.  Matching is
     performed without regard for lettercase.

     Alternatively, the argument can be a custom paper format in the
     format 'LENGTH,WIDTH' (with no spaces before or after the comma).
     Both LENGTH and WIDTH must have a unit appended; valid units are
     'i' for inches, 'c' for centimeters, 'p' for points, and 'P' for
     picas.  Example: '12c,235p'.  An argument that starts with a digit
     is always treated as a custom paper format.

     Finally, the argument can be a file name (e.g., '/etc/papersize');
     if the file can be opened, the first line is read and a match
     attempted against each of the other forms.  No comment syntax is
     supported.

     More than one argument can be specified; each is scanned in turn
     and the first valid paper specification used.

'paperwidth N'
     The horizontal dimension of the output medium is N basic units
     (deprecated: use 'papersize' instead).

'pass_filenames'
     Direct GNU 'troff' to emit the name of the source file being
     processed.  This is achieved with the intermediate output command
     'x F', which 'grohtml' interprets.

'postpro PROGRAM'
     Use PROGRAM as the postprocessor.

'prepro PROGRAM'
     Use PROGRAM as a preprocessor.  The 'html' and 'xhtml' output
     devices use this directive.

'print PROGRAM'
     Use PROGRAM as a spooler program for printing.  If omitted, the
     '-l' and '-L' options of 'groff' are ignored.

'res N'
     The device resolution is N basic units per inch.

'sizes S1 ... SN 0'
     The device has fonts at S1, ..., SN scaled points (see below).  The
     list of sizes must be terminated by '0'.  Each SI can also be a
     range of sizes M-N.  The list can extend over more than one line.

'sizescale N'
     A typographical point is subdivided into N scaled points.  The
     default is '1'.  See Using Fractional Type Sizes.

'styles S1 ... SM'
     The first M mounting positions are associated with styles S1, ...,
     SM.

'tcommand'
     The postprocessor can handle the 't' and 'u' intermediate output
     commands.

'unicode'
     The output device supports the complete Unicode repertoire.  This
     directive is useful only for devices that produce character
     entities instead of glyphs.

     If 'unicode' is present, no 'charset' section is required in the
     font description files since the Unicode handling built into
     'groff' is used.  However, if there are entries in a font
     description file's 'charset' section, they either override the
     default mappings for those particular characters or add new
     mappings (normally for composite characters).

     The 'utf8', 'html', and 'xhtml' output devices use this directive.

'unitwidth N'
     Arbitrary basis with respect to which font metrics are
     proportionally scaled when rendering glyphs at a type size of one
     point.

'unscaled_charwidths'
     Make the font handling module always return unscaled character
     widths.  The 'grohtml' driver uses this directive.

'use_charnames_in_special'
     GNU 'troff' should encode special characters in arguments to device
     extension commands; see Postprocessor Access.  The 'grohtml' driver
     uses this directive.

'vert N'
     The vertical motion quantum is N basic units.  Vertical
     measurements round to multiples of N.

'charset'
     This line and everything following it in the file are ignored.  It
     is recognized for compatibility with other 'troff' implementations.
     In GNU 'troff', character set repertoire is described on a per-font
     basis.

   GNU 'troff' recognizes but ignores the directives 'spare1', 'spare2',
and 'biggestfont'.

   The 'res', 'unitwidth', 'fonts', and 'sizes' lines are mandatory.
Directives not listed above are ignored by GNU 'troff' but may be used
by postprocessors to obtain further information about the device.

6.1.2 Font Description File Format
----------------------------------

On typesetting output devices, each font is typically available at
multiple sizes.  While paper measurements in the device description file
are in absolute units, measurements applicable to fonts must be
proportional to the type size.  The font's unit width establishes a
numerical basis that permits all of its metrics to be expressed as
integers if rendered at one point.  When the formatter configures a type
size, it scales the metrics linearly relative to that basis.  The unit
width has no inherent relationship to the device resolution, and the
same division procedure applies to all font metrics.  Observe that
whatever unit might one select for the unit width, the division
operation implied by scaling cancels it out, leaving a dimensionless
quantity.

   For instance, 'groff''s 'lbp' device uses a 'unitwidth' directive
with an argument of 800.  Its Times roman font 'TR' has a 'spacewidth'
of 833; this is also the width of its comma, period, centered period,
and mathematical asterisk, while its 'M' has a width of 2,963.  Thus, an
'M' on the 'lbp' device is 2,963 ÷ 800 times the unit width, or
approximately 3.7.  At a type size of 10 points, a Times roman 'M' is
therefore 37 units wide.

     $ groff -T lbp
     .ps 10
     .nr Mw \w'M'
     .tm width of 'M' at 10 points=\n(Mw
         error-> width of 'M' at 10 points=37

   A font description file has two sections.  The first is a sequence of
directives, and is parsed similarly to the 'DESC' file described above.
Except for the directive names that begin the second section, their
ordering is immaterial.  Later directives of the same name override
earlier ones, spaces and tabs are handled in the same way, and the same
comment syntax is supported.  Empty lines are ignored throughout.

'name F'
     The name of the font is F.  'DESC' is an invalid font name.  Simple
     integers are valid, but their use is discouraged.(1)  (see Font
     Description File Format-Footnote-1)

'spacewidth N'
     The width of an unadjusted inter-word space is N, relative to the
     device's unit width.

   The directives above must appear in the first section; those below
are optional.

'slant N'
     The font's glyphs have a slant of N degrees; a positive N slants in
     the direction of text flow.

'ligatures LIG1 ... LIGN [0]'
     Glyphs LIG1, ..., LIGN are ligatures; possible ligatures are 'ff',
     'fi', 'fl', 'ffi' and 'ffl'.  For compatibility with other 'troff'
     implementations, the list of ligatures may be terminated with
     a '0'.  The list of ligatures must not extend over more than one
     line.

'special'
     The font is "special": when the document attempts to format a glyph
     that is not present in the formatter's currently selected font, the
     glyph is sought in any mounted fonts that bear this property.
     Often, such fonts are "unstyled", having no heavy (bold) or slanted
     (italic or oblique) variants.

   Other directives in this section are ignored by GNU 'troff', but may
be used by postprocessors to obtain further information about the font.

   The second section contains one to three subsections, which can
appear in any order, and any of which starts the second section.  Each
starts with a directive on a line by itself.  A 'charset' subsection is
mandatory unless the associated 'DESC' file contains the 'unicode'
directive.  Another subsection, 'kernpairs', is optional.

   The directive 'charset' starts the character set subsection.(2)  (see
Font Description File Format-Footnote-2) It precedes a series of glyph
descriptions, one per line.  Each such glyph description comprises a set
of fields separated by spaces or tabs and organized as follows.

     NAME METRICS TYPE INDEX [ENTITY-NAME] ['--' COMMENT]

NAME identifies the glyph: if NAME is a printable character C, it
corresponds to the 'troff' ordinary character C.  If NAME is a
multi-character sequence not beginning with '\', it corresponds to the
GNU 'troff' special character escape sequence '\[NAME]'.  A name
consisting of three minus signs, '---', is special and indicates that
the glyph is unnamed: such glyphs can be accessed only by the '\N'
escape sequence in 'troff'.  A special character named '---' can still
be defined using 'char' and similar requests.  The NAME '\-' defines the
minus sign glyph.  Finally, NAME can be the unbreakable one-sixth and
one-twelfth space escape sequences, '\|' and '\^' ("thin" and "hair"
spaces, respectively), in which case only the width metric described
below is interpreted; a font can thus customize the widths of these
spaces.

   The form of the METRICS field is as follows.

     WIDTH[','[HEIGHT[','[DEPTH[','[ITALIC-CORRECTION
       [','[LEFT-ITALIC-CORRECTION[','[SUBSCRIPT-CORRECTION]]]]]]]]]]

Spaces, tabs, and newlines are prohibited between these "subfields",
which are expressed as decimal integers (and have been split here into
two lines only for better legibility).  The unit of measure is that
established by the 'unitwidth' directive and scaled to the type size.
Unspecified subfields default to '0'.  Since there is no associated
binary format, these values are not required to fit into the C language
data type 'char' as they are in AT&T device-independent 'troff'.

   The WIDTH subfield gives the width of the glyph.  The HEIGHT subfield
gives the height of the glyph (upward is positive); if a glyph does not
extend above the baseline, give it a zero height, not a negative height.
The DEPTH subfield gives the depth of the glyph--that is, the distance
below the baseline to which the glyph extends (downward is positive); if
a glyph does not extend below the baseline, give it a zero depth, not a
negative depth.  Italic corrections apply when upright and slanted
(italic or oblique) styles are typeset adjacently.  The
ITALIC-CORRECTION is the amount of space to add after a slanted glyph to
be followed immediately by an upright glyph.  The LEFT-ITALIC-CORRECTION
is the amount of space to add before a slanted glyph to be preceded
immediately by an upright glyph.  The SUBSCRIPT-CORRECTION is the amount
of space to add after a slanted glyph to be followed by a subscript; it
should be less than the italic correction.

   For fonts used with typesetters, the TYPE field gives a featural
description of the glyph: it is a bit mask recording whether the glyph
is an ascender, descender, both, or neither.  When a '\w' escape
sequence is interpolated, these values are bitwise or-ed together for
each glyph and stored in the 'nr' register.  In font descriptions for
terminals, all glyphs might have a type of zero, regardless of their
appearance.

'0'
     means the glyph lies entirely between the baseline and a horizontal
     line at the "x-height" of the font; typical examples are 'a', 'c',
     and 'x';

'1'
     means the glyph descends below the baseline, like 'p';

'2'
     means the glyph ascends above the font's x-height, like 'A' or 'b';
     and

'3'
     means the glyph is both an ascender and a descender--this is true
     of parentheses in some fonts.

   The INDEX field is an integer that uniquely identifies a glyph within
the font; any integer is accepted as input,(3) (see Font Description
File Format-Footnote-3) but no practical font employs all possible
values.  An INDEX is limited to the range of the system's C language
data type 'int'.  In a 'troff' document, use the indexed character
escape sequence '\N' to specify a glyph by index.

   The ENTITY-NAME field defines an identifier for the glyph that the
postprocessor uses to print the GNU 'troff' glyph NAME.  This field is
optional; it was introduced so that the 'grohtml' output driver could
encode its character set.  For example, the glyph '\[Po]' is represented
by '&pound;' in HTML 4.0.  For efficiency, these data are now compiled
directly into 'grohtml'.  'grops' uses the field to build sub-encoding
arrays for PostScript fonts containing more than 256 glyphs.  Anything
on the line after the ENTITY-NAME field or '--' is ignored.

   A line in the 'charset' section can also have the form

     NAME "

identifying NAME as another name for the glyph mentioned in the
preceding line.  Such aliases can be chained.

   A 'charset-range' subsection works like the 'charset' directive
except that the glyph descriptions use a NAME of the form
'u'AAAA'..u'FFFF, where AAAA and FFFF are hexadecimal digit sequences;
the specified metrics then apply identically to all glyphs in the
designated range.

   The directive 'kernpairs' starts a list of kerning adjustments to be
made to adjacent glyph pairs from this font.  It contains a sequence of
lines formatted as follows.

     G1 G2 N

The foregoing means that when glyph G1 is typeset immediately before G2,
the space between them should be increased by N.  The unit of measure is
that established by the 'unitwidth' directive and scaled to the type
size.  Most kerning pairs should have a negative value for N.

   (1) 'groff' requests and escape sequences interpret non-negative
integers as mounting positions instead.  Further, a font named '0'
cannot be automatically mounted by the 'fonts' directive of a 'DESC'
file.

   (2) On typesetters, this directive is misnamed since it starts a list
of glyphs, not characters.

   (3) that is, any integer parsable by the C standard library's
'strtol(3)' function

6.2 GNU 'troff' Output
======================

We now describe the 'groff' device-independent page description language
produced by GNU 'troff'.

   As 'groff' is a wrapper program around GNU 'troff' and automatically
runs an output driver, users seldom encounter this format under normal
circumstances.  'groff' offers the option '-Z' to inhibit postprocessing
such that GNU 'troff''s output is sent to the standard output stream
just as it is when running GNU 'troff' directly.

   The purpose of device-independent output is to facilitate the
development of postprocessors by providing a common programming
interface to all devices.  It is a distinct, and much simpler, language
from that of the formatter, 'troff'.  The device-independent output can
be thought of as a "page description language".

   In the following discussion, the term "troff output" describes what
is output by GNU 'troff', while "page description" denotes the language
accepted by the parser that interprets this output for the output
drivers.  This parser handles whitespace more flexibly than AT&T
'troff''s implementation, recognizes a GNU extension to the language,
and supports a legacy compressed encoding of a subset of commands for
compatibility; otherwise, the formats are the same.(1)  (see GNU troff
Output-Footnote-1)

   When Brian Kernighan designed AT&T 'troff''s device-independent page
description language circa 1980, he had to balance readability and
maintainability against severe constraints on file size and transmission
speed to the output device.(2)  (see GNU troff Output-Footnote-2) A
decade later, when James Clark wrote 'groff', these constraints were no
longer as tight.

   (1) The parser for device-independent output can be found in the file
'GROFF-SOURCE-DIR/src/libs/libdriver/input.cpp'.

   (2) See "A Typesetter-independent TROFF", Bell Labs CSTR #97, 1982.

6.2.1 Language Concepts
-----------------------

The fundamental operation of the GNU 'troff' formatter is the
translation of the 'groff' input language into a series of instructions
concerned primarily with placing glyphs or geometric objects at specific
positions on a rectangular page.  In the following discussion, the term
"command" always refers to this device-independent output language, and
never to the language intended for direct use by document authors.
Device-independent output commands comprise several categories: glyph
output; font, color, and text size selection; motion of the drawing
position; page advancement; drawing of geometric objects; and device
control commands, a catch-all for other operations.  The last includes
directives to start and stop output, identify the intended output
device, and embed URL hyperlinks in supported output formats.

6.2.1.1 Syntax
..............

'roff''s page description language is a sequence of "tokens":
single-letter commands or their arguments.  Some commands accept a
subcommand as a first argument, followed by one or more further
arguments.

   AT&T device-independent 'troff' used whitespace minimally when
producing output.  GNU 'troff', in contrast, attempts to make its output
more human-readable.  The whitespace characters--tab, space, and
newline--are always meaningful.  They are never used to represent
spacing in the document; that is done with horizontal ('h', 'H') and
vertical ('v', 'V') positioning commands.  Any sequence of space and/or
tab characters is equivalent to a single space, separating commands from
arguments and arguments from each other.  Space is required only where
omitting it would cause ambiguity.  A line break separates commands.
The comment character is a pound/hash sign ('#'), and marks the
remainder of the line as a comment.  A line comprising only whitespace
after comment removal does nothing but separate input tokens.

   The positioning commands noted above, and the command to write one
glyph ('c'), each take a single argument; the former a signed integer,
and the latter a printable ISO 646/"ASCII" character.  A series of such
commands could validly occur without spaces on an input line, but GNU
'troff' follows each with a newline.

   Some commands have a more complex syntax; the GNU 'troff' extension
command for writing glyph sequences ('t') accepts a variable number of
arguments.  Those that draw geometric objects ('D') or control the
device ('x') furthermore recognize subcommand arguments.  Such commands
thus must end with a newline.  In GNU 'troff', the device extension
(sub)command 'x X' uniquely supports a line continuation syntax; a
single input line contains any other.

6.2.1.2 Argument Units
......................

Some commands take integer arguments that are assumed to represent
values in a measurement unit, but the letter for the corresponding
scaling unit is not written with the output command arguments.  Most
commands assume the scaling unit 'u', the basic unit of the device, some
use 'z', the scaled point unit of the device, while others, such as the
color commands, expect plain integers.

   Single characters can have the eighth bit set, as can the names of
fonts and special characters.  The names of characters and fonts can be
of arbitrary length.  A character that is to be printed is always in the
current font.

   A string argument is always terminated by the next whitespace
character (space, tab, or newline); an embedded '#' character is
regarded as part of the argument, not as the beginning of a comment
command.  An integer argument is already terminated by the next
non-digit character, which then is regarded as the first character of
the next argument or command.

6.2.1.3 Output Structure
........................

Device-independent 'troff' output is organized into three parts: a
header, a body, and a trailer.

   The task of the header is to set general device parameters.  GNU
'troff' guarantees that its header consists of the following three
lines:

     x T DEVICE
     x res N H V
     x init

with the parameters N, H, and V set as outlined in Device Control
Commands.  The parser for the device-independent page description
language format is able to interpret additional whitespace and comments
as well even in the header.

   The body contains the document's visible content.  Once an output
driver interprets 'x init', it prepares to handle commands in general.
Processing terminates when a 'x stop' command is encountered; the last
line of any GNU 'troff' page description output always contains such a
command.

   Semantically, the body is page-oriented.  The 'p' command starts a
new page.  Positioning, writing, and drawing commands are performed
within a page, so they cannot occur before the first 'p' command.  The
output driver reckons absolute positioning (by the 'H' and 'V' commands)
with respect to the current page's origin at the top left corner, and
all other positioning relative to the drawing position on the page.

   The trailer advances the drawing position to the bottom of the page
and informs the device that the document (or "job") has ended.

6.2.2 Command Reference
-----------------------

This subsection describes all page description output commands, both
from AT&T 'troff' as well as extension commands issued by GNU 'troff'.

6.2.2.1 Comment Command
.......................

'#ANYTHING<end of line>'
     Apply comment annotation.  Ignore any characters from the
     '#' character up to the next newline.

     Each comment can be preceded by arbitrary syntactical space, and
     every command can be terminated by a comment.

6.2.2.2 Simple Commands
.......................

The commands in this subsection have a command code consisting of a
single character, taking a fixed number of arguments.  Most of them are
commands for positioning and text writing.  These commands are tolerant
of whitespace.  Optionally, syntactical space can be inserted before,
after, and between the command letter and its arguments.  All of these
commands are stackable; i.e., they can be preceded by other simple
commands or followed by arbitrary other commands on the same line.  A
separating syntactical space is necessary only when two integer
arguments would clash or if the preceding argument ends with a string
argument.

'C ID<whitespace>'
     Typeset the glyph of the special character ID.  Trailing
     syntactical space is necessary to allow special character names of
     arbitrary length.  The drawing position is not advanced.

'c G'
     Typeset the glyph of the ordinary character C.  The drawing
     position is not advanced.

'f N'
     Select the font mounted at position N.  N cannot be negative.

'H N'
     Horizontally move the drawing position to N basic units from the
     left edge of the page.  N cannot be negative.

'h N'
     Move the drawing position right N basic units.  AT&T 'troff'
     allowed negative N; GNU 'troff' does not produce such values, but
     'groff''s output driver library handles them.

'm COLOR-SCHEME [COMPONENT ...]'
     Select the stroke color using the COMPONENTs in the color space
     SCHEME.  Each COMPONENT is an integer between 0 and 65535.  The
     quantity of components and their meanings vary with each SCHEME.
     This command is a 'groff' extension.

     'mc CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW'
          Use the CMY color scheme with components cyan, magenta, and
          yellow.

     'md'
          Use the default color (no components; black in most cases).

     'mg GRAY'
          Use a grayscale color scheme with a component ranging between
          0 (black) and 65535 (white).

     'mk CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW BLACK'
          Use the CMYK color scheme with components cyan, magenta,
          yellow, and black.

     'mr RED GREEN BLUE'
          Use the RGB color scheme with components red, green, and blue.

'N N'
     Typeset the glyph with index N in the current font.  N is normally
     a non-negative integer.  The drawing position is not advanced.  The
     'html' and 'xhtml' devices use this command with negative N to
     produce unbreakable space; the absolute value of N is taken and
     interpreted in basic units.

'n B A'
     Indicate a break.  No action is performed; the command is present
     to make the output more easily parsed.  The integers B and A
     describe the vertical space amounts before and after the break,
     respectively.  GNU 'troff' issues this command but 'groff''s output
     driver library ignores it.  See 'v' and 'V' below.

'p N'
     Begin a new page, setting its number to N.  Each page is
     independent, even from those using the same number.  The vertical
     drawing position is set to 0.  All positioning, writing, and
     drawing commands are interpreted in the context of a page, so a
     'p' command must precede them.

's N'
     Set type size to N scaled points (unit 'z' in GNU 'troff'.  AT&T
     'troff' used unscaled points 'p' instead; see Output Language
     Compatibility.

't XYZ<whitespace>'
't XYZ DUMMY-ARG<whitespace>'
     Typeset a word XYZ; that is, set a sequence of ordinary glyphs
     named X, Y, Z, ..., terminated by a space character or a line
     break; an optional second integer argument is ignored (this allows
     the formatter to generate an even number of arguments).  Each glyph
     is set at the current drawing position, and the position is then
     advanced horizontally by the glyph's width.  A glyph's width is
     read from its metrics in the font description file, scaled to the
     current type size, and rounded to a multiple of the horizontal
     motion quantum.  Use the 'C' command to emplace glyphs of special
     characters.  The 't' command is a 'groff' extension and is output
     only for devices whose 'DESC' file contains the 'tcommand'
     directive; see DESC File Format.

'u N XYZ<whitespace>'
     Typeset word XYZ with track kerning.  As 't', but after placing
     each glyph, the drawing position is further advanced horizontally
     by N basic units ('u').  The 'u' command is a 'groff' extension and
     is output only for devices whose 'DESC' file contains the
     'tcommand' directive; see DESC File Format.

'V N'
     Vertically move the drawing position to N basic units from the top
     edge of the page.  N cannot be negative.

'v N'
     Move the drawing position down N basic units.  AT&T 'troff' allowed
     negative N; GNU 'troff' does not produce such values, but 'groff''s
     output driver library handles them.

'w'
     Indicate an inter-word space.  No action is performed; the command
     is present to make the output more easily parsed.  Only inter-word
     spaces on an output line (be they breakable or not) are thus
     described; those resulting from horizontal motion escape sequences
     are not.  GNU 'troff' issues this command but 'groff''s output
     driver library ignores it.  See 'h' and 'H' above.

6.2.2.3 Graphics Commands
.........................

Each graphics or drawing command in the page description language starts
with the letter 'D', followed by one or two characters that specify a
subcommand; this is followed by a fixed or variable number of integer
arguments that are separated by a single space character.  A 'D' command
may not be followed by another command on the same line (apart from a
comment), so each 'D' command is terminated by a syntactical line break.

   GNU 'troff' output follows AT&T 'troff''s output conventions (no
space between command and subcommand, all arguments are preceded by a
single space character), but 'groff''s parser allows optional space
between the command letters and makes the space before the first
argument optional.  As usual, each space can be any sequence of tab and
space characters.

   Some graphics commands can take a variable number of arguments.  In
this case, they are integers representing a size measured in basic units
'u'.  The arguments called H1, H2, ..., HN stand for horizontal
distances where positive means right, negative left.  The arguments
called V1, V2, ..., VN stand for vertical distances where positive means
down, negative up.  All these distances are offsets relative to the
current location.

   Each graphics command directly corresponds to a 'troff' '\D' escape
sequence.  See Drawing Geometric Objects.

   Unknown 'D' commands are assumed to be device-specific.  Its
arguments are parsed as strings; the whole information is then sent to
the postprocessor.

   In the following command reference, the syntax element <line break>
means a syntactical line break as defined above.

'D~ H1 V1 H2 V2 ... HN VN<line break>'
     Draw B-spline from current position to offset (H1,V1), then to
     offset (H2,V2), if given, etc., up to (HN,VN).  This command takes
     a variable number of argument pairs; the current position is moved
     to the terminal point of the drawn curve.

'Da H1 V1 H2 V2<line break>'
     Draw arc from current position to (H1,V1)+(H2,V2) with center at
     (H1,V1); then move the current position to the final point of the
     arc.

'DC D<line break>'
'DC D DUMMY-ARG<line break>'
     Draw a solid circle using the current fill color with diameter D
     (integer in basic units 'u') with leftmost point at the current
     position; then move the current position to the rightmost point of
     the circle.  An optional second integer argument is ignored (this
     allows the formatter to generate an even number of arguments).
     This command is a GNU extension.

'Dc D<line break>'
     Draw circle line with diameter D (integer in basic units 'u') with
     leftmost point at the current position; then move the current
     position to the rightmost point of the circle.

'DE H V<line break>'
     Draw a solid ellipse in the current fill color with a horizontal
     diameter of H and a vertical diameter of V (both integers in basic
     units 'u') with the leftmost point at the current position; then
     move to the rightmost point of the ellipse.  This command is a GNU
     extension.

'De H V<line break>'
     Draw an outlined ellipse with a horizontal diameter of H and a
     vertical diameter of V (both integers in basic units 'u') with the
     leftmost point at current position; then move to the rightmost
     point of the ellipse.

'DF COLOR-SCHEME [COMPONENT ...]<line break>'
     Set fill color for solid drawing objects using different color
     schemes; the analogous command for setting the color of text, line
     graphics, and the outline of graphic objects is 'm'.  The color
     components are specified as integer arguments between 0 and 65535.
     The number of color components and their meaning vary for the
     different color schemes.  These commands are generated by GNU
     'troff''s escape sequences '\D'F ...'' and '\M' (with no other
     corresponding graphics commands).  No position changing.  This
     command is a GNU extension.

     'DFc CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW<line break>'
          Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the CMY color
          scheme, having the 3 color components CYAN, MAGENTA, and
          YELLOW.

     'DFd<line break>'
          Set fill color for solid drawing objects to the default fill
          color value (black in most cases).  No component arguments.

     'DFg GRAY<line break>'
          Set fill color for solid drawing objects to the shade of gray
          given by the argument, an integer between 0 (black) and 65535
          (white).

     'DFk CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW BLACK<line break>'
          Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the CMYK color
          scheme, having the 4 color components CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW,
          and BLACK.

     'DFr RED GREEN BLUE<line break>'
          Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the RGB color
          scheme, having the 3 color components RED, GREEN, and BLUE.

'Df N<line break>'
     The argument N must be an integer in the range -32767 to 32767.

     0 <= N <= 1000
          Set the color for filling solid drawing objects to a shade of
          gray, where 0 corresponds to solid white, 1000 (the default)
          to solid black, and values in between to intermediate shades
          of gray; this command is superseded by 'DFg'.

     N < 0 or N > 1000
          Set the filling color to the color that is currently being
          used for the text and the outline, see command 'm'.  For
          example, the command sequence

               mg 0 0 65535
               Df -1

          sets all colors to blue.

     No position changing.  This command is a GNU extension.

'Dl H V<line break>'
     Draw line from current position to offset (H,V) (integers in basic
     units 'u'); then set current position to the end of the drawn line.

'Dp H1 V1 H2 V2 ... HN VN<line break>'
     Draw a polygon line from current position to offset (H1,V1), from
     there to offset (H2,V2), etc., up to offset (HN,VN), and from there
     back to the starting position.  For historical reasons, the
     position is changed by adding the sum of all arguments with odd
     index to the actual horizontal position and the even ones to the
     vertical position.  Although this doesn't make sense it is kept for
     compatibility.  This command is a GNU extension.

'DP H1 V1 H2 V2 ... HN VN<line break>'
     Draw a solid polygon in the current fill color rather than an
     outlined polygon, using the same arguments and positioning as the
     corresponding 'Dp' command.  This command is a GNU extension.

'Dt N<line break>'
     Set the current line thickness to N (an integer in basic units 'u')
     if N>0; if N=0 select the smallest available line thickness; if N<0
     set the line thickness proportional to the type size (this is the
     default before the first 'Dt' command was specified).  For
     historical reasons, the horizontal position is changed by adding
     the argument to the actual horizontal position, while the vertical
     position is not changed.  Although this doesn't make sense it is
     kept for compatibility.  This command is a GNU extension.

6.2.2.4 Device Control Commands
...............................

Each device control command starts with the letter 'x', followed by a
space character (optional or arbitrary space or tab in GNU 'troff') and
a subcommand letter or word; each argument (if any) must be preceded by
a syntactical space.  All 'x' commands are terminated by a syntactical
line break; no device control command can be followed by another command
on the same line (except a comment).

   The subcommand is basically a single letter, but to increase
readability, it can be written as a word, i.e., an arbitrary sequence of
characters terminated by the next tab, space, or newline character.  All
characters of the subcommand word but the first are simply ignored.  For
example, GNU 'troff' outputs the initialization command 'x i' as
'x init' and the resolution command 'x r' as 'x res'.

   In the following, the syntax element <line break> means a syntactical
line break (see Syntax).

'xF NAME<line break>'
     The 'F' stands for FILENAME.

     Use NAME as the intended name for the current file in error
     reports.  This is useful for remembering the original file name
     when 'groff' uses its internal piping mechanism.  The input file is
     not changed by this command.  This command is a GNU extension.

'xf N S<line break>'
     The 'f' stands for FONT.

     Mount font position N (a non-negative integer) with font named S (a
     text word).  See Font Positions.

'xH N<line break>'
     The 'H' stands for HEIGHT.

     Set glyph height to N (a positive integer in scaled points 'z').
     AT&T 'troff' uses the unit points ('p') instead.  See Output
     Language Compatibility.

'xi<line break>'
     The 'i' stands for INIT.

     Initialize device.  This is the third command of the header.

'xp<line break>'
     The 'p' stands for PAUSE.

     Parsed but ignored.  The AT&T 'troff' manual documents this command
     as

          pause device, can be restarted

     but GNU 'troff' output drivers do nothing with this command.

'xr N H V<line break>'
     The 'r' stands for RESOLUTION.

     Resolution is N, while H is the minimum horizontal motion, and V
     the minimum vertical motion possible with this device; all
     arguments are positive integers in basic units 'u' per inch.  This
     is the second command of the header.

'xS N<line break>'
     The 'S' stands for SLANT.

     Set slant to N (an integer in basic units 'u').

'xs<line break>'
     The 's' stands for STOP.

     Terminates the processing of the current file; issued as the last
     command of device-independent 'troff' output.

'xt<line break>'
     The 't' stands for TRAILER.

     Generate trailer information, if any.  In GNU 'troff', this is
     ignored.

'xT XXX<line break>'
     The 'T' stands for TYPESETTER.

     Set the name of the output driver to XXX, a sequence of
     non-whitespace characters terminated by whitespace.  The possible
     names correspond to those of 'groff''s '-T' option.  This is the
     first command of the header.

'xu N<line break>'
     The 'u' stands for UNDERLINE.

     Configure underlining of spaces.  If N is 1, start underlining of
     spaces; if N is 0, stop underlining of spaces.  This is needed for
     the 'cu' request in 'nroff' mode and is ignored otherwise.  This
     command is a GNU extension.

'xX ANYTHING<line break>'
     The 'x' stands for X-ESCAPE.

     Send string ANYTHING uninterpreted to the device.  If the line
     following this command starts with a '+' character this line is
     interpreted as a continuation line in the following sense.  The '+'
     is ignored, but a newline character is sent instead to the device,
     the rest of the line is sent uninterpreted.  The same applies to
     all following lines until the first character of a line is not a
     '+' character.  This command is generated by the escape sequence
     '\X'.  Line continuation is a GNU extension.

6.2.2.5 Legacy Compressed Encoding
..................................

AT&T 'troff' primarily emitted glyphs by writing two digits (a motion)
followed by a single character corresponding to a glyph.  This syntax is
less a command itself than a compressed encoding of the 'c' and 'h'
commands.

DDG
     Move right DD (exactly two decimal digits) basic units 'u', then
     print glyph G (represented as a single character).

     In GNU 'troff', arbitrary syntactical space around and within this
     command is allowed.  Only when a preceding command on the same line
     ends with an argument of variable length is a separating space
     obligatory.  In AT&T 'troff', large clusters of these and other
     commands are used, mostly without spaces; this made such output
     almost unreadable.

   For modern high-resolution devices, this command is impractical
because the widths of the glyphs have a greater magnitude in basic units
than two decimal digits can represent.  In GNU 'troff', this
optimization is used only for the devices 'X75', 'X75-12', 'X100', and
'X100-12'.  For other devices, the commands 't' and 'u' produce more
readable output.

6.2.3 GNU 'troff' Output Examples
---------------------------------

This section presents the output GNU 'troff' generates from the same
input formatted for three different devices.  The input is the phrase
'hell world' piped to GNU 'troff' on the command line.

High-resolution device 'ps'

     We depict the standard output stream of GNU 'troff' in its default
     build configuration and in the absence of an explicit '-T' option.

          shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T ps

          x T ps
          x res 72000 1 1
          x init
          p1
          x font 5 TR
          f5
          s10000
          V12000
          H72000
          thell
          wh2500
          tw
          H96620
          torld
          n12000 0
          x trailer
          V792000
          x stop

     This output can be placed onto the standard input stream of 'grops'
     to produce its representation as a PostScript file.

Low-resolution device 'latin1'

     This is similar to the high-resolution device except that the
     positioning is done at a minor scale.  Some comments (lines
     starting with '#') were added for clarification; they were not
     generated by the formatter.

          shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T latin1

          # header
          x T latin1
          x res 240 24 40
          x init
          # begin a new page
          p1
          # font setup
          x font 1 R
          f1
          s10
          # initial positioning on the page
          V40
          H0
          # write text 'hell'
          thell
          # inform about space, and issue a horizontal jump
          wh24
          # write text 'world'
          tworld
          # announce line break, but do nothing because...
          n40 0
          # ...the end of the document has been reached
          x trailer
          V2640
          x stop

     This output can be placed onto the standard input stream of
     'grotty' to produce its representation as text file.

AT&T 'troff' output
     Since a video display has lower resolution than modern printers,
     GNU 'troff''s output for X11 devices can use the legacy compressed
     encoding.

          shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T X100

          x T X100
          x res 100 1 1
          x init
          p1
          x font 5 TR
          f5
          s10
          V16
          H100
          # write text in legacy compressed encoding
          ch07e07l03lw06w11o07r05l03dh7
          n16 0
          x trailer
          V1100
          x stop

     Place the foregoing into the standard input stream of 'xditview' or
     'gxditview' to display it in an X11 window.

     The legacy compressed encoding makes the content of formatted text
     in AT&T 'troff' output almost incomprehenible.

6.2.4 Output Language Compatibility
-----------------------------------

The page description language of AT&T 'troff' was first documented in "A
Typesetter-independent TROFF", by Brian Kernighan, and by 1992 the AT&T
'troff' manual was updated to incorporate a description of it.

   'groff''s page description language is compatible with this
specification except in the following aspects.

   * AT&T device-independent 'troff''s quasi-device independence is not
     yet implemented.

   * The printing hardware of the early 1980s differed from today's.
     'groff''s output device names also differ from those of AT&T
     'troff'.  For example, the PostScript device in AT&T 'troff',
     'post' (implemented by the driver command 'dpost'), has a
     resolution of only 720 units per inch, suitable for printers of
     decades past.  'groff''s 'ps' device has a resolution of 72000
     units per inch.  In principle, by implementing a rescaling
     mechanism, 'groff' could come to emulate AT&T's 'post' device.

   * While the B-spline command 'D~' is reliably interpreted by
     'groff''s page description language parser, some output drivers
     don't implement drawing routines for it.

   * In GNU 'troff', the argument to the commands 's' and 'x H' uses an
     implicit unit of scaled points 'z' whereas AT&T 'troff' uses
     spacing points 'p'.  This isn't an incompatibility, but a
     compatible extension, for both units coincide for any device
     without a 'sizescale' directive in its 'DESC' file, including all
     postprocessors from AT&T and 'groff''s text ('nroff'-mode) devices.
     'groff' devices that use 'sizescale' either do not exist for AT&T
     'troff', have a different name, or seem to have a different
     resolution.  So conflicts are very unlikely.

   * The drawing position after the commands 'Dp', 'DP', and 'Dt' are
     processed is illogical.  Since old versions of GNU 'troff' had this
     wart, we've retained it for compatibility, but may change it in the
     future.  Wrap these drawing commands with the '\Z' escape sequence
     to both overcome the illogical positioning and keep your input
     working consistently regardless of the wart's presence in the
     implementation.

Appendix A Copying This Manual
******************************

                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

     Copyright © 2000-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     <http://fsf.org/>

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
     be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You accept
     the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
     requiring permission under copyright law.

     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
     If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
     is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may
     contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify
     any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
     of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
     available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
     formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
     suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise
     Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
     been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
     readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not Transparent if
     used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that is not
     "Transparent" is called "Opaque".

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
     simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
     Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
     Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
     the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
     processors for output purposes only.

     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
     of the Document to the public.

     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
     conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
     each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
     network-using public has access to download using public-standard
     network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
     of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
     reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
     copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
     remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
     year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
     through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
     Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
     the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
          versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
          History section of the Document).  You may use the same title
          as a previous version if the original publisher of that
          version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
          Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
          Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
          publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
          an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
          previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
          "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a work
          that was published at least four years before the Document
          itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
          to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
          all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
          in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
          equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
     section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
     definition of a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
     the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
     in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
     document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
     storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
     permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
     same material does not give you any rights to use it.

  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     <http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/>.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
     Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
     decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

  11. RELICENSING

     "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
     A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
     site.

     "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
     published by that same organization.

     "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
     in part, as part of another Document.

     An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
     License, and if all works that were first published under this
     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
     to November 1, 2008.

     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
their use in free software.

Appendix B Request Index
************************

Request names appear without a leading control character; the defaults
are '.' for the regular control character and ''' for the no-break
control character.  See Invoking Requests.

* Menu:

* ab:                                    Debugging.         (line 12879)
* ad:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5850)
* af:                                    Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5615)
* aln:                                   Setting Registers. (line  5514)
* als:                                   Strings.           (line  9410)
* am:                                    Writing Macros.    (line  9975)
* am1:                                   Writing Macros.    (line  9976)
* ami:                                   Writing Macros.    (line  9977)
* ami1:                                  Writing Macros.    (line  9978)
* as:                                    Strings.           (line  9312)
* as1:                                   Strings.           (line  9313)
* asciify:                               Diversions.        (line 11818)
* backtrace:                             Debugging.         (line 13013)
* bd:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8578)
* blm:                                   Blank Line Traps.  (line 11448)
* box:                                   Diversions.        (line 11644)
* boxa:                                  Diversions.        (line 11645)
* bp:                                    Page Control.      (line  7430)
* br:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5806)
* break:                                 while.             (line  9838)
* brp:                                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5927)
* c2:                                    Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4883)
* cc:                                    Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4875)
* ce:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6000)
* cf:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* cflags:                                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8190)
* ch:                                    Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11187)
* char:                                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8285)
* chop:                                  Strings.           (line  9358)
* class:                                 Character Classes. (line  8412)
* close:                                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12509)
* color:                                 Colors.            (line  9091)
* composite:                             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8140)
* continue:                              while.             (line  9842)
* cp:                                    Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13259)
* cs:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8610)
* cu:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8569)
* da:                                    Diversions.        (line 11611)
* de:                                    Writing Macros.    (line  9863)
* de1:                                   Writing Macros.    (line  9935)
* defcolor:                              Colors.            (line  9102)
* dei:                                   Writing Macros.    (line  9957)
* dei1:                                  Writing Macros.    (line  9958)
* device:                                Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12556)
* devicem:                               Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12609)
* di:                                    Diversions.        (line 11610)
* do:                                    Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13272)
* ds:                                    ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1850)
* ds <1>:                                Strings.           (line  9212)
* ds1:                                   Strings.           (line  9213)
* dt:                                    Diversion Traps.   (line 11328)
* ec:                                    Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5151)
* ecr:                                   Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5179)
* ecs:                                   Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5178)
* el:                                    if-else.           (line  9660)
* em:                                    End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* eo:                                    Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5146)
* ev:                                    Environments.      (line 12020)
* evc:                                   Environments.      (line 12074)
* ex:                                    Debugging.         (line 12887)
* fam:                                   Font Families.     (line  7762)
* fc:                                    Fields.            (line  6970)
* fchar:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8286)
* fcolor:                                Colors.            (line  9162)
* fi:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5833)
* fl:                                    Debugging.         (line 12986)
* fp:                                    Font Positions.    (line  7848)
* fschar:                                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8287)
* fspecial:                              Special Fonts.     (line  8460)
* ft:                                    Selecting Fonts.   (line  7635)
* ftr:                                   Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* fzoom:                                 Selecting Fonts.   (line  7710)
* gcolor:                                Colors.            (line  9135)
* hc:                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6220)
* hcode:                                 Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6453)
* hla:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6501)
* hlm:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6518)
* hpf:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6382)
* hpfa:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6383)
* hpfcode:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6488)
* hw:                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6147)
* hy:                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6251)
* hydefault:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6374)
* hym:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6532)
* hys:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6547)
* ie:                                    if-else.           (line  9659)
* if:                                    if-then.           (line  9617)
* ig:                                    Comments.          (line  5348)
* in:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7195)
* it:                                    Input Line Traps.  (line 11339)
* kern:                                  Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8664)
* lc:                                    Leaders.           (line  6927)
* length:                                Strings.           (line  9334)
* lf:                                    Debugging.         (line 12850)
* lg:                                    Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8647)
* linetabs:                              Tabs and Fields.   (line  6884)
* ll:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7236)
* ls:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6658)
* lsm:                                   Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11458)
* lt:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7389)
* mc:                                    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10712)
* mk:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10331)
* mso:                                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12307)
* msoquiet:                              Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12308)
* na:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5917)
* ne:                                    Page Control.      (line  7462)
* nf:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* nh:                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6367)
* nm:                                    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10610)
* nn:                                    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10675)
* nop:                                   if-then.           (line  9636)
* nr:                                    ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1847)
* nr <1>:                                Setting Registers. (line  5407)
* nr <2>:                                Setting Registers. (line  5464)
* nr <3>:                                Auto-increment.    (line  5568)
* nroff:                                 troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7106)
* ns:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6728)
* nx:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12356)
* open:                                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12475)
* opena:                                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12476)
* os:                                    Page Control.      (line  7506)
* output:                                Diversions.        (line 11801)
* pc:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7406)
* pchar:                                 Debugging.         (line 12905)
* pcolor:                                Debugging.         (line 12912)
* pcomposite:                            Debugging.         (line 12919)
* pev:                                   Debugging.         (line 12925)
* pfp:                                   Debugging.         (line 12929)
* pftr:                                  Debugging.         (line 12939)
* phw:                                   Debugging.         (line 12945)
* pi:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12414)
* pl:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7345)
* pline:                                 Debugging.         (line 12954)
* pm:                                    Debugging.         (line 12961)
* pn:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7359)
* pnr:                                   Debugging.         (line 12967)
* po:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7170)
* ps:                                    Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8851)
* ps <1>:                                Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8853)
* psbb:                                  Miscellaneous.     (line 12648)
* pso:                                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12296)
* pstream:                               Debugging.         (line 12973)
* pvs:                                   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8974)
* pwh:                                   Debugging.         (line 12979)
* rchar:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8360)
* rd:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12360)
* return:                                Writing Macros.    (line 10012)
* rfschar:                               Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8361)
* rj:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6040)
* rm:                                    Strings.           (line  9402)
* rn:                                    Strings.           (line  9399)
* rnn:                                   Setting Registers. (line  5509)
* rr:                                    Setting Registers. (line  5500)
* rs:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6729)
* rt:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10332)
* schar:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* shc:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* shift:                                 Parameters.        (line 10060)
* sizes:                                 Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8917)
* so:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12265)
* soquiet:                               Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12266)
* sp:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6608)
* special:                               Special Fonts.     (line  8459)
* spreadwarn:                            Debugging.         (line 13046)
* ss:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6060)
* stringdown:                            Strings.           (line  9383)
* stringup:                              Strings.           (line  9384)
* sty:                                   Font Families.     (line  7803)
* substring:                             Strings.           (line  9366)
* sv:                                    Page Control.      (line  7505)
* sy:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12447)
* ta:                                    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6766)
* tag:                                   Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12630)
* taga:                                  Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12631)
* tc:                                    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6872)
* ti:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7217)
* tkf:                                   Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8684)
* tl:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7375)
* tm:                                    Debugging.         (line 12866)
* tm1:                                   Debugging.         (line 12867)
* tmc:                                   Debugging.         (line 12868)
* tr:                                    Character Translations.
                                                            (line  6995)
* trf:                                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12314)
* trin:                                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  6996)
* trnt:                                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7061)
* troff:                                 troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7098)
* uf:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8573)
* ul:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8547)
* unformat:                              Diversions.        (line 11850)
* vpt:                                   Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11047)
* vs:                                    Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8934)
* warn:                                  Debugging.         (line 13062)
* warnscale:                             Debugging.         (line 13040)
* wh:                                    Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11067)
* while:                                 while.             (line  9777)
* write:                                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12491)
* writec:                                Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* writem:                                Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12500)

Appendix C Escape Sequence Index
********************************

The escape character, '\' by default, is always followed by at least one
more input character, making an escape _sequence_.  Any token '\X' with
X not in the list below emits a warning and interpolates character X.
Note the entries for '\.', which may be obscured by the leader dots, and
for '\<RET>' and '\<SPC>', which are sorted alphabetically, not by code
point order.  See Using Escape Sequences.

* Menu:

* \:                                     Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5082)
* \ <1>:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8071)
* \_:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8185)
* \-:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8182)
* \,:                                    Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* \::                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6189)
* \!:                                    Diversions.        (line 11759)
* \?:                                    Diversions.        (line 11760)
* \.:                                    Copy Mode.         (line 10198)
* \':                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8175)
* \":                                    Comments.          (line  5288)
* \(:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8073)
* \):                                    Dummy Characters.  (line  8795)
* \[:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8073)
* \{:                                    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9695)
* \{ <1>:                                Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* \}:                                    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* \*:                                    Strings.           (line  9214)
* \/:                                    Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* \\:                                    Copy Mode.         (line 10171)
* \&:                                    Dummy Characters.  (line  8737)
* \#:                                    Comments.          (line  5328)
* \%:                                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6188)
* \`:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8179)
* \^:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10481)
* \|:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10476)
* \~:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5820)
* \$:                                    Parameters.        (line 10051)
* \$@:                                   Parameters.        (line 10073)
* \$*:                                   Parameters.        (line 10072)
* \$^:                                   Parameters.        (line 10074)
* \$0:                                   Parameters.        (line 10107)
* \0:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10486)
* \A:                                    Identifiers.       (line  4762)
* \a:                                    Leaders.           (line  6924)
* \B:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4667)
* \b:                                    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10949)
* \c:                                    Line Continuation. (line  7300)
* \C:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8132)
* \d:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10430)
* \D:                                    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10855)
* \e:                                    Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5138)
* \E:                                    Copy Mode.         (line 10258)
* \f:                                    Selecting Fonts.   (line  7636)
* \F:                                    Font Families.     (line  7764)
* \g:                                    Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5673)
* \H:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8487)
* \h:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* \k:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10554)
* \l:                                    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10782)
* \L:                                    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10807)
* \m:                                    Colors.            (line  9136)
* \M:                                    Colors.            (line  9163)
* \n:                                    Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5532)
* \n <1>:                                Auto-increment.    (line  5576)
* \N:                                    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* \newline:                              Line Continuation. (line  7271)
* \o:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10572)
* \O:                                    Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12125)
* \p:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5928)
* \R:                                    Setting Registers. (line  5408)
* \R <1>:                                Setting Registers. (line  5466)
* \r:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10428)
* \<RET>:                                Line Continuation. (line  7271)
* \S:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8524)
* \s:                                    Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8873)
* \space:                                Page Motions.      (line 10470)
* \<SPC>:                                Page Motions.      (line 10470)
* \t:                                    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* \u:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10429)
* \v:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10404)
* \V:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12525)
* \w:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10492)
* \x:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6681)
* \X:                                    Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12557)
* \Y:                                    Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12610)
* \z:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10577)
* \Z:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10582)

Appendix D Operator Index
*************************

See Numeric Expressions.

* Menu:

* -:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4505)
* - <1>:                                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4512)
* - (unary):                             Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4602)
* ;:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4535)
* !:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4571)
* (:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4591)
* ):                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4591)
* *:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4505)
* /:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4505)
* &:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4567)
* %:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4505)
* +:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4505)
* + <1>:                                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4512)
* + (unary):                             Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4602)
* <:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* <?:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4552)
* <=:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* <colon>:                               Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4567)
* =:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* ==:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* >:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* >?:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4552)
* >=:                                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4561)
* |:                                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                             (line 4616)

Appendix E Register Index
*************************

Where not used by the formatter itself, a register's associated macro
package or program appears in brackets after the register's name.

   Interpolate a register name of exactly one character 'x' with '\nx';
of exactly two characters 'xx' with '\n(xx'; or of any length 'xxx' with
'\n[xxx]'.  See Registers.

* Menu:

* .$:                                    Parameters.        (line 10043)
* .A:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5722)
* .a:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6682)
* .b:                                    Artificial Fonts.  (line  8580)
* .br:                                   Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4894)
* .c:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5726)
* .C:                                    Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13260)
* .cdp:                                  Environments.      (line 12100)
* .ce:                                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6001)
* .cht:                                  Environments.      (line 12099)
* .color:                                Colors.            (line  9092)
* .cp:                                   Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13273)
* .csk:                                  Environments.      (line 12101)
* .d:                                    Diversions.        (line 11673)
* .ev:                                   Environments.      (line 12021)
* .F:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5731)
* .f:                                    Font Positions.    (line  7849)
* .fam:                                  Font Families.     (line  7763)
* .fn:                                   Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* .fp:                                   Font Positions.    (line  7850)
* .g:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5734)
* .H:                                    Motion Quanta.     (line  4438)
* .h:                                    Diversions.        (line 11700)
* .height:                               Artificial Fonts.  (line  8490)
* .hla:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6502)
* .hlc:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* .hlm:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6519)
* .hy:                                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6252)
* .hydefault:                            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6375)
* .hym:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6533)
* .hys:                                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6548)
* .i:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7198)
* .in:                                   Line Layout.       (line  7220)
* .int:                                  Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* .itm:                                  Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* .j:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5851)
* .k:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10568)
* .kern:                                 Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8665)
* .L:                                    Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6659)
* .l:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7239)
* .lg:                                   Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8648)
* .linetabs:                             Tabs and Fields.   (line  6885)
* .ll:                                   Line Layout.       (line  7240)
* .lt:                                   Page Layout.       (line  7392)
* .m:                                    Colors.            (line  9139)
* .M:                                    Colors.            (line  9166)
* .n:                                    Environments.      (line 12116)
* .ne:                                   Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11238)
* .nm:                                   Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10612)
* .nn:                                   Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10676)
* .ns:                                   Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* .o:                                    Line Layout.       (line  7173)
* .O:                                    Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12178)
* .P:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5738)
* .p:                                    Page Layout.       (line  7348)
* .pe:                                   Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11260)
* .pn:                                   Page Layout.       (line  7362)
* .ps:                                   Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9015)
* .psr:                                  Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9043)
* .pvs:                                  Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8977)
* .R:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5742)
* .rj:                                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6041)
* .s:                                    Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8854)
* .slant:                                Artificial Fonts.  (line  8525)
* .sr:                                   Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* .ss:                                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6061)
* .sss:                                  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* .sty:                                  Font Families.     (line  7804)
* .T:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5748)
* .t:                                    Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11179)
* .tabs:                                 Tabs and Fields.   (line  6767)
* .trap:                                 Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11256)
* .trunc:                                Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11245)
* .U:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5752)
* .u:                                    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5834)
* .V:                                    Motion Quanta.     (line  4439)
* .v:                                    Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8937)
* .vpt:                                  Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11048)
* .w:                                    Environments.      (line 12098)
* .warn:                                 Debugging.         (line 13063)
* .x:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5756)
* .y:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5760)
* .Y:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5764)
* .z:                                    Diversions.        (line 11672)
* .zoom:                                 Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* %:                                     Page Layout.       (line  7406)
* % <1>:                                 Page Control.      (line  7433)
* $$:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* $$ <1>:                                Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* c.:                                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5727)
* ct:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10497)
* DD [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2135)
* DI [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2144)
* dl:                                    Diversions.        (line 11719)
* dn:                                    Diversions.        (line 11718)
* dw:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12206)
* dy:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12209)
* FF [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2075)
* FI [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2068)
* FM [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1895)
* FPD [ms]:                              ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2116)
* FPS [ms]:                              ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2102)
* FVS [ms]:                              ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2109)
* GROWPS [ms]:                           ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2033)
* GS [ms]:                               Differences from AT&T ms.
                                                            (line  3430)
* HM [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1888)
* HORPHANS [ms]:                         ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2044)
* hours:                                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12203)
* hp:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10564)
* HY [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1964)
* LL [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1869)
* llx:                                   Miscellaneous.     (line 12649)
* lly:                                   Miscellaneous.     (line 12650)
* ln:                                    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10611)
* lsn:                                   Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11459)
* lss:                                   Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11460)
* LT [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1878)
* MINGW [ms]:                            ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2157)
* minutes:                               Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12200)
* mo:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12212)
* nl:                                    Page Control.      (line  7516)
* opmaxx:                                Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12141)
* opmaxy:                                Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12141)
* opminx:                                Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12141)
* opminy:                                Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12141)
* PD [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1992)
* PI [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1984)
* PO [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1860)
* PORPHANS [ms]:                         ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2007)
* PS [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1950)
* PSINCR [ms]:                           ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2022)
* QI [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1999)
* rsb:                                   Page Motions.      (line 10496)
* rst:                                   Page Motions.      (line 10495)
* sb:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10494)
* seconds:                               Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12197)
* skw:                                   Page Motions.      (line 10499)
* slimit:                                Debugging.         (line 13034)
* ssc:                                   Page Motions.      (line 10498)
* st:                                    Page Motions.      (line 10493)
* systat:                                Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12448)
* TC-MARGIN [ms]:                        ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  2165)
* urx:                                   Miscellaneous.     (line 12651)
* ury:                                   Miscellaneous.     (line 12652)
* VS [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1957)
* year:                                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12215)
* yr:                                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12218)

Appendix F Macro Index
**********************

The package or program with which a macro is associated appears in
brackets after the macro's name.  They appear without a leading control
character (normally '.').  See Calling Macros.

* Menu:

* [ [ms]:                                ms Insertions.      (line 2941)
* ] [ms]:                                ms Insertions.      (line 2942)
* 1C [ms]:                               ms Multiple Columns.
                                                             (line 3195)
* 2C [ms]:                               ms Multiple Columns.
                                                             (line 3198)
* AB [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2234)
* AE [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2241)
* AI [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2217)
* AM [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3512)
* AU [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2211)
* B [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2533)
* B1 [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2824)
* B2 [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2825)
* BD [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2864)
* BI [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2546)
* BT [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1486)
* BX [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2554)
* CD [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2870)
* CT [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1501)
* CW [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1504)
* CW [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2550)
* DA [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2224)
* De [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1511)
* DE [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2879)
* Ds [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1508)
* DS [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2854)
* DS [ms] <1>:                           ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2858)
* DS [ms] <2>:                           ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2863)
* DS [ms] <3>:                           ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2869)
* DS [ms] <4>:                           ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2874)
* EE [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1518)
* EF [ms]:                               ms Headers and Footers.
                                                             (line 3139)
* EH [ms]:                               ms Headers and Footers.
                                                             (line 3137)
* EN [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2934)
* EQ [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2933)
* EX [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1514)
* FE [ms]:                               ms Footnotes.       (line 3009)
* FS [ms]:                               ms Footnotes.       (line 3008)
* G [man]:                               Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1521)
* GL [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1526)
* HB [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1531)
* I [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2543)
* ID [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2859)
* IP [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2340)
* KE [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2812)
* KF [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2811)
* KS [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2810)
* LD [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2855)
* LG [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2565)
* LP [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2333)
* MC [ms]:                               ms Multiple Columns.
                                                             (line 3201)
* MS [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1539)
* ND [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2229)
* NE [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1551)
* NH [ms]:                               Headings in ms.     (line 2407)
* NL [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2577)
* NT [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1544)
* OF [ms]:                               ms Headers and Footers.
                                                             (line 3138)
* OH [ms]:                               ms Headers and Footers.
                                                             (line 3136)
* P1 [ms]:                               ms Headers and Footers.
                                                             (line 3148)
* PE [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2925)
* PF [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2926)
* PN [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1554)
* Pn [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1558)
* PP [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2336)
* PS [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2924)
* PT [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1481)
* PX [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3251)
* QE [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2353)
* QP [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2348)
* QS [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2352)
* R [man]:                               Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1564)
* R [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2539)
* RD [ms]:                               ms keeps and displays.
                                                             (line 2875)
* RE [ms]:                               Indented regions in ms.
                                                             (line 2760)
* RN [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1567)
* RP [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2191)
* RS [ms]:                               Indented regions in ms.
                                                             (line 2756)
* SH [ms]:                               Headings in ms.     (line 2478)
* SM [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2571)
* TA [ms]:                               Tab Stops in ms.    (line 3173)
* TB [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1536)
* TC [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3256)
* TE [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2916)
* TL [ms]:                               ms Document Description Macros.
                                                             (line 2206)
* TS [ms]:                               ms Insertions.      (line 2915)
* UL [ms]:                               Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2560)
* VE [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1574)
* VS [man]:                              Optional man extensions.
                                                             (line 1570)
* XA [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3240)
* XE [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3241)
* XH [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3292)
* XH-REPLACEMENT [ms]:                   ms TOC.             (line 3301)
* XH-UPDATE-TOC [ms]:                    ms TOC.             (line 3306)
* XN [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3291)
* XN-INIT [ms]:                          ms TOC.             (line 3305)
* XN-REPLACEMENT [ms]:                   ms TOC.             (line 3300)
* XP [ms]:                               Paragraphs in ms.   (line 2359)
* XS [ms]:                               ms TOC.             (line 3239)

Appendix G String Index
***********************

The macro package or program with which a string is associated appears
in brackets after the string's name.  The formatter itself defines only
one string, '.T'.

   Interpolate a string name of exactly one character 'x' with '\*x'; of
exactly two characters 'xx' with '\*(xx'; or of any length 'xxx' with
'\*[xxx]'.  See Strings.

* Menu:

* _ [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3539)
* - [ms]:                                Typographical symbols in ms.
                                                             (line 2312)
* , [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3502)
* , [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3530)
* : [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3490)
* : [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3521)
* ! [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3551)
* ? [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3548)
* . [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3542)
* .T:                                    Strings.            (line 9201)
* .T <1>:                                Strings.            (line 9201)
* ' [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3484)
* ' [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3515)
* { [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2607)
* } [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2608)
* * [ms]:                                ms Footnotes.       (line 2999)
* / [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3533)
* ` [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3487)
* ` [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3518)
* ^ [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3493)
* ^ [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3524)
* < [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2611)
* > [ms]:                                Typeface and decoration.
                                                             (line 2612)
* ~ [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3496)
* ~ [ms] <1>:                            ms Legacy Features. (line 3527)
* 3 [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3560)
* 8 [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3554)
* ABSTRACT [ms]:                         ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3089)
* ae [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3575)
* Ae [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3578)
* C [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3499)
* CF [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1933)
* CH [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1912)
* d- [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3563)
* D- [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3566)
* FAM [ms]:                              ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1973)
* FR [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 2123)
* LF [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1926)
* LH [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1905)
* MONTH1 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3098)
* MONTH10 [ms]:                          ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3107)
* MONTH11 [ms]:                          ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3108)
* MONTH12 [ms]:                          ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3109)
* MONTH2 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3099)
* MONTH3 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3100)
* MONTH4 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3101)
* MONTH5 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3102)
* MONTH6 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3103)
* MONTH7 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3104)
* MONTH8 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3105)
* MONTH9 [ms]:                           ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3106)
* o [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3545)
* oe [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3581)
* OE [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3584)
* Q [ms]:                                Typographical symbols in ms.
                                                             (line 2315)
* q [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3557)
* REFERENCES [ms]:                       ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3084)
* RF [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1940)
* RH [ms]:                               ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 1919)
* SN [ms]:                               Headings in ms.     (line 2456)
* SN-DOT [ms]:                           Headings in ms.     (line 2454)
* SN-NO-DOT [ms]:                        Headings in ms.     (line 2455)
* SN-STYLE [ms]:                         ms Document Control Settings.
                                                             (line 2057)
* SN-STYLE [ms] <1>:                     Headings in ms.     (line 2453)
* th [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3569)
* Th [ms]:                               ms Legacy Features. (line 3572)
* TOC [ms]:                              ms language and localization.
                                                             (line 3094)
* U [ms]:                                Typographical symbols in ms.
                                                             (line 2316)
* v [ms]:                                ms Legacy Features. (line 3536)

Appendix H File Keyword Index
*****************************

See Device and Font Description Files.

* Menu:

* ---:                                   Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13870)
* #:                                     DESC File Format.  (line 13649)
* # <1>:                                 Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13821)
* biggestfont:                           DESC File Format.  (line 13780)
* charset:                               DESC File Format.  (line 13775)
* charset <1>:                           Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13863)
* charset-range:                         Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13959)
* family:                                Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* family <1>:                            DESC File Format.  (line 13653)
* fonts:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* fonts <1>:                             Special Fonts.     (line  8460)
* fonts <2>:                             DESC File Format.  (line 13656)
* hor:                                   DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* image_generator:                       DESC File Format.  (line 13666)
* kernpairs:                             Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13965)
* ligatures:                             Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13841)
* name:                                  Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13825)
* paperlength:                           DESC File Format.  (line 13672)
* papersize:                             DESC File Format.  (line 13676)
* paperwidth:                            DESC File Format.  (line 13703)
* pass_filenames:                        DESC File Format.  (line 13707)
* postpro:                               DESC File Format.  (line 13712)
* prepro:                                DESC File Format.  (line 13715)
* print:                                 DESC File Format.  (line 13719)
* res:                                   DESC File Format.  (line 13723)
* sizes:                                 DESC File Format.  (line 13726)
* sizescale:                             DESC File Format.  (line 13731)
* slant:                                 Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13837)
* spacewidth:                            Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13830)
* spare1:                                DESC File Format.  (line 13780)
* spare2:                                DESC File Format.  (line 13780)
* special:                               Artificial Fonts.  (line  8597)
* special <1>:                           Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13848)
* styles:                                Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* styles <1>:                            Font Families.     (line  7809)
* styles <2>:                            DESC File Format.  (line 13735)
* tcommand:                              DESC File Format.  (line 13739)
* unicode:                               DESC File Format.  (line 13743)
* unitwidth:                             DESC File Format.  (line 13757)
* unscaled_charwidths:                   DESC File Format.  (line 13762)
* use_charnames_in_special:              DESC File Format.  (line 13766)
* vert:                                  DESC File Format.  (line 13771)

Appendix I Program and File Index
*********************************

* Menu:

* an.tmac:                               man.               (line  1460)
* changebar:                             Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10755)
* chem:                                  Groff Options.     (line   515)
* composite.tmac:                        Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8140)
* cs.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* de.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* DESC:                                  Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* DESC <1>:                              Font Families.     (line  7809)
* DESC <2>:                              Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* DESC <3>:                              Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8164)
* DESC <4>:                              Special Fonts.     (line  8460)
* diffmk:                                Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10755)
* ec.tmac:                               Input Encodings.   (line  4156)
* en.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* eqn:                                   Groff Options.     (line   515)
* eqn <1>:                               ms Insertions.     (line  2909)
* es.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* fr.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* freeeuro.pfa:                          Input Encodings.   (line  4156)
* gdiffmk:                               Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10755)
* grn:                                   Groff Options.     (line   515)
* groff:                                 Groff Options.     (line   515)
* hyphen.cs:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.den:                            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.det:                            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.en:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.es:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.fr:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.it:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.pl:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.ru:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphen.sv:                             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphenex.cs:                           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphenex.en:                           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphenex.pl:                           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* it.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* ja.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* koi8-r.tmac:                           Input Encodings.   (line  4119)
* latin1.tmac:                           Input Encodings.   (line  4126)
* latin2.tmac:                           Input Encodings.   (line  4131)
* latin5.tmac:                           Input Encodings.   (line  4138)
* latin9.tmac:                           Input Encodings.   (line  4143)
* makeindex:                             Indexing.          (line  1380)
* man.local:                             Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1469)
* man.tmac:                              man.               (line  1460)
* man.ultrix:                            Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1495)
* nrchbar:                               Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10755)
* pic:                                   Groff Options.     (line   515)
* pic <1>:                               ms Insertions.     (line  2909)
* pl.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* post-grohtml:                          Groff Options.     (line   801)
* pre-grohtml:                           Groff Options.     (line   801)
* preconv:                               Groff Options.     (line   515)
* rap:                                   Groff Options.     (line   515)
* refer:                                 Groff Options.     (line   515)
* refer <1>:                             ms Insertions.     (line  2909)
* ru.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* soelim:                                Groff Options.     (line   515)
* soelim <1>:                            Debugging.         (line 12850)
* sv.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* tbl:                                   Groff Options.     (line   515)
* tbl <1>:                               ms Insertions.     (line  2909)
* trace.tmac:                            Writing Macros.    (line  9996)
* troff:                                 Groff Options.     (line   515)
* troffrc:                               Groff Options.     (line   737)
* troffrc <1>:                           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* troffrc <2>:                           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6502)
* troffrc <3>:                           troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7098)
* troffrc-end:                           Groff Options.     (line   737)
* troffrc-end <1>:                       Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6502)
* troffrc-end <2>:                       troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7098)
* tty.tmac:                              troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7106)
* tty.tmac <1>:                          Line Layout.       (line  7173)
* vtroff:                                Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9508)
* zh.tmac:                               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)

Appendix J Concept Index
************************

* Menu:

* -, and page motion:                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4602)
* -, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* ., as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5231)
* .h register, difference from nl:       Diversions.        (line 11713)
* .ps register, compared to .psr:        Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* .s register, compared to .sr:          Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* .S register, Plan 9 name for .tabs:    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6863)
* .t register, and diversions:           Diversion Traps.   (line 11328)
* .tabs register, Plan 9 name for (.S):  Tabs and Fields.   (line  6863)
* .V register, and vs:                   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8940)
* ', as a comment:                       Comments.          (line  5321)
* ', as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5203)
* ', at end of sentence:                 Sentences.         (line  3735)
* ', at end of sentence <1>:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* ", as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5203)
* ", at end of sentence:                 Sentences.         (line  3735)
* ", at end of sentence <1>:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* ", at the start of a request argument: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* ", embedding in a macro argument:      Calling Macros.    (line  5011)
* (, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* ), as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* ), at end of sentence:                 Sentences.         (line  3735)
* ), at end of sentence <1>:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* [, macro names starting with, and refer: Identifiers.     (line  4756)
* ], as part of an identifier:           Identifiers.       (line  4749)
* ], at end of sentence:                 Sentences.         (line  3735)
* ], at end of sentence <1>:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* ], macro names starting with, and refer: Identifiers.     (line  4756)
* *, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* *, at end of sentence:                 Sentences.         (line  3735)
* *, at end of sentence <1>:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* /, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* \_, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \_, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \_, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \- glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8215)
* \-, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \-, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \-, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \, disabling (eo):                     Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5146)
* \, embedding in a macro argument:      Calling Macros.    (line  5011)
* \,, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \:, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \:, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \!, and copy mode:                     Diversions.        (line 11767)
* \!, and output request:                Diversions.        (line 11800)
* \!, and trnt:                          Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7061)
* \!, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \!, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \!, in top-level diversion:            Diversions.        (line 11792)
* \!, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences. (line 13553)
* \?, and copy mode:                     Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9555)
* \?, and copy mode <1>:                 Diversions.        (line 11767)
* \?, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \?, in top-level diversion:            Diversions.        (line 11797)
* \?, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences. (line 13553)
* \?, interpretation in copy mode:       Diversions.        (line 11768)
* \., interpretation in copy mode:       Copy Mode.         (line 10197)
* \', and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \', as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \', as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \", interpretation in copy mode:       Comments.          (line  5289)
* \(, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \), as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \), in device extension commands:      Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* \[, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \{, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \{, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \}, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \}, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \*, and warnings:                      Warnings.          (line 13144)
* \*, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13248)
* \*, interpretation in copy mode:       Strings.           (line  9220)
* \/, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \/, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \\, as quotation character:            Copy Mode.         (line 10171)
* \\, interpretation in copy mode:       Copy Mode.         (line 10171)
* \&, and glyph definitions:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* \&, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7024)
* \&, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \&, at end of sentence:                Sentences.         (line  3719)
* \&, in device extension commands:      Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* \#, interpretation in copy mode:       Comments.          (line  5332)
* \%, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7013)
* \%, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \%, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \%, following \X or \Y:                Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6198)
* \%, in device extension commands:      Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* \`, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \`, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \`, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \^, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \<colon>, in device extension commands: Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* \|, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \~, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7013)
* \~, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \~, difference from \<SPC>:            Calling Macros.    (line  5003)
* \~, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences. (line 13420)
* \$, interpretation in copy mode:       Parameters.        (line 10056)
* \0, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \a, and copy mode:                     Leaders.           (line  6924)
* \a, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* \a, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \b, limitations of:                    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10957)
* \C, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \c, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \c, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \c, when filling disabled:             Line Continuation. (line  7315)
* \c, when filling enabled:              Line Continuation. (line  7307)
* \d, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \D, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \e, and glyph definitions:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* \e, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7011)
* \e, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \E, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \e, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \e, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences. (line 13553)
* \e, interpretation in copy mode:       Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5138)
* \f escape sequence, untokenized on input: Selecting Fonts.
                                                            (line  7692)
* \F escape sequence, untokenized on input: Font Families.  (line  7795)
* \F, and changing fonts:                Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* \f, and font translations:             Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* \f, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13353)
* \g, interpretation in copy mode:       Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5677)
* \H escape sequence, untokenized on input: Artificial Fonts.
                                                            (line  8505)
* \h, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \H, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \H, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13353)
* \H, using + and - with:                Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* \H, with fractional type sizes:        Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* \l, and glyph definitions:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* \L, and glyph definitions:             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* \l, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \L, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \m escape sequence, untokenized on input: Colors.         (line  9154)
* \M escape sequence, untokenized on input: Colors.         (line  9171)
* \N, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* \n, and warnings:                      Warnings.          (line 13156)
* \N, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \n, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13248)
* \n, interpretation in copy mode:       Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5538)
* \p, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \p, as delimiter <1>:                  Delimiters.        (line  5237)
* \R escape sequence, untokenized on input: Setting Registers.
                                                            (line  5422)
* \R, and warnings:                      Warnings.          (line 13156)
* \r, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \R, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \R, difference from nr:                Auto-increment.    (line  5568)
* \R, using + and - with:                Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* \<RET>, interpretation in copy mode:   Line Continuation. (line  7280)
* \S escape sequence, untokenized on input: Artificial Fonts.
                                                            (line  8534)
* \s escape sequence, untokenized on input: Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8909)
* \s, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \S, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \s, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13353)
* \S, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13353)
* \s, incompatibilities with AT&T troff <1>: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13368)
* \s, using + and - with:                Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* \s, with fractional type sizes:        Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* \<SPC>, as delimiter:                  Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \<SPC>, difference from \~:            Calling Macros.    (line  5003)
* \t, and copy mode:                     Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* \t, and translations:                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* \t, and warnings:                      Warnings.          (line 13163)
* \t, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \u, as delimiter:                      Delimiters.        (line  5211)
* \V, and copy mode:                     Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12527)
* \v, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \v, internal representation:           GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12737)
* \V, interpretation in copy mode:       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12529)
* \x, delimiters allowed by:             Delimiters.        (line  5220)
* \X, followed by \%:                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6198)
* \Y, followed by \%:                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6198)
* &, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* %, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* +, and page motion:                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4602)
* +, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* <, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* <colon>, as delimiter:                 Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* =, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* >, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* |, and page motion:                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4616)
* |, as delimiter:                       Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* |) operator, use with sp request:      Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6653)
* ab request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13501)
* abort (ab):                            Debugging.         (line 12879)
* absolute (sic) position operator (|):  Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4616)
* abstract font style:                   Using Fonts.       (line  7587)
* abstract font style, setting up (sty): Font Families.     (line  7804)
* accent marks [ms]:                     ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* access to postprocessor:               Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12546)
* accessing unnamed glyphs with \N:      Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13870)
* activating kerning (kern):             Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8665)
* activating ligatures (lg):             Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8648)
* activating track kerning (tkf):        Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8684)
* ad request, and hyphenation margin:    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6533)
* ad request, and hyphenation space:     Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6548)
* addition:                              Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* additional inter-sentence space:       Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6069)
* adjustment (introduction):             Basics.            (line  1115)
* adjustment and filling, manipulating:  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* adjustment mode register (.j):         Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5880)
* adjustment to both margins, difference from AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13434)
* adjustment, and break warnings:        Warnings.          (line 13097)
* Adobe Glyph List (AGL):                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8028)
* alias, diversion, creating (als):      Strings.           (line  9410)
* alias, diversion, removing (rm):       Strings.           (line  9445)
* alias, macro, creating (als):          Strings.           (line  9410)
* alias, macro, removing (rm):           Strings.           (line  9445)
* alias, register, creating (aln):       Setting Registers. (line  5514)
* alias, register, removing (rr):        Setting Registers. (line  5519)
* alias, string, creating (als):         Strings.           (line  9410)
* alias, string, removing (rm):          Strings.           (line  9445)
* aliasing fonts with third argument to fp request: Font Positions.
                                                            (line  7859)
* als request, and \$0:                  Parameters.        (line 10107)
* am, am1, ami requests, and warnings:   Warnings.          (line 13144)
* annotation, output line:               Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10605)
* appending to a diversion (da, boxa):   Diversions.        (line 11611)
* appending to a file (opena):           Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12476)
* appending to a macro (am):             Writing Macros.    (line  9978)
* appending to a string (as):            Strings.           (line  9313)
* approximation output register (.A):    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5722)
* arc, drawing (\D'a ...'):              Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10864)
* argument:                              Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3905)
* arguments to macros:                   Calling Macros.    (line  4987)
* arguments to macros, and tabs:         Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* arguments to requests:                 Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* arguments to requests, and tabs:       Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* arguments, and compatibility mode:     GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* arguments, file name, to requests, in other implementations: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* arguments, to escape sequences, delimiting: Delimiters.   (line  5203)
* arguments, to strings:                 Strings.           (line  9216)
* arithmetic operators:                  Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* artificial fonts:                      Artificial Fonts.  (line  8480)
* as and as1 requests, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Strings.
                                                            (line  9321)
* as request, and comments:              Strings.           (line  9236)
* as, as1 requests, and warnings:        Warnings.          (line 13144)
* as1 request, and comments:             Strings.           (line  9236)
* ASCII output encoding:                 Groff Options.     (line   782)
* asciify request, and writem:           Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12500)
* assertion (arithmetic operator):       Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* assign input line number request (lf): Debugging.         (line 12850)
* assign number format to register (af): Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5609)
* assignments, indirect:                 Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5534)
* assignments, nested:                   Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5534)
* AT&T ms, macro package differences:    Differences from AT&T ms.
                                                            (line  3346)
* AT&T troff bug, in cf request:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12351)
* AT&T troff bugs:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12351)
* attributes, character cell:            Using Fonts.       (line  7610)
* auto-incrementation of a register:     Auto-increment.    (line  5560)
* automatic font mounting:               Selecting Fonts.   (line  7654)
* automatic hyphenation:                 Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6131)
* automatic hyphenation parameters:      Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6238)
* auxiliary macro package:               Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* available glyphs, list of (groff_char(7) man page): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8015)
* available registers, number of, register (.R): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5742)
* background:                            Background.        (line   233)
* background color name register (.M):   Colors.            (line  9180)
* backslash glyph, formatting (\[rs]):   Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5141)
* backslash, embedding in a macro argument: Calling Macros. (line  5011)
* backslash, printing (\\, \e, \E, \[rs]): Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13553)
* backspace character:                   Page Motions.      (line 10459)
* backspace character, and translations: Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* backtrace of input stack (backtrace):  Debugging.         (line 13013)
* baseline rule special character(\[ru]): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10783)
* baseline, text:                        Page Geometry.     (line  4316)
* baseline, text <1>:                    Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* basic scaling unit (u):                Measurements.      (line  4378)
* basic units:                           Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* basic units, conversion to:            Measurements.      (line  4373)
* basics of macro package usage:         Basics.            (line  1105)
* bd request, and font styles:           Font Families.     (line  7804)
* bd request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* bd request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* beginning diversion (di, box):         Diversions.        (line 11611)
* beginning of conditional block (\{):   Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* blank line:                            Breaking.          (line  3820)
* blank line macro (blm):                Breaking.          (line  3820)
* blank line macro (blm) <1>:            Invoking Requests. (line  4955)
* blank line macro (blm) <2>:            Blank Line Traps.  (line 11448)
* blank line trap (blm):                 Invoking Requests. (line  4955)
* blank line traps:                      Blank Line Traps.  (line 11447)
* blank lines, disabling:                Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* block paragraphs:                      Paragraphs.        (line  1258)
* block, conditional, beginning (\{):    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* block, conditional, end (\}):          Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* blocks, conditional:                   Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9689)
* body, of a while request:              while.             (line  9776)
* boldface, imitating (bd):              Artificial Fonts.  (line  8580)
* bottom margin:                         Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* boundary-relative measurement operator (|): Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4616)
* boundary-relative measurement operator (|), use with sp request: Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6653)
* bounding box:                          Miscellaneous.     (line 12652)
* box (diversion operation):             Diversions.        (line 11640)
* box request, and warnings:             Warnings.          (line 13139)
* box rule special character (\[br]):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10808)
* box, boxa requests, and warnings:      Warnings.          (line 13144)
* boxa request, and dn (dl):             Diversions.        (line 11719)
* boxa request, and warnings:            Warnings.          (line 13139)
* boxes [ms]:                            ms keeps and displays.
                                                            (line  2821)
* bp request, and top-level diversion:   Page Control.      (line  7438)
* bp request, and traps (.pe):           Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11260)
* bp request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* bp request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13505)
* bp request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* br glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8227)
* br request, nilpotence with no-break control character: Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5779)
* brace escape sequences (\{, \}):       Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* break:                                 Breaking.          (line  3796)
* break <1>:                             Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* break (introduction):                  Basics.            (line  1115)
* break (introduction) <1>:              Basics.            (line  1128)
* break request, in a while loop:        while.             (line  9838)
* break, page:                           Page Geometry.     (line  4343)
* break, page <1>:                       Page Control.      (line  7425)
* break, page <2>:                       The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* break, page (introduction):            Basics.            (line  1227)
* break, page, final:                    End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11505)
* break, page, prevented by vpt:         Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11054)
* breaking file names (\:):              Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* breaking URLs (\:):                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* breaking without hyphens (\:):         Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* brp request, nilpotence with no-break control character: Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5779)
* bug, in AT&T troff cf request:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12351)
* built-in register, removing:           Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5708)
* built-in registers:                    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5704)
* bulleted list, example markup [ms]:    Lists in ms.       (line  2640)
* c scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4385)
* calling macros:                        Calling Macros.    (line  4987)
* calling macros (introduction):         Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3915)
* capabilities of GNU troff:             GNU troff Capabilities.
                                                            (line   299)
* case-transforming a string (stringdown, stringup): Strings.
                                                            (line  9384)
* categories, warning:                   Warnings.          (line 13088)
* ce request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* ce request, difference from .ad c:     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6010)
* cell, character, attributes:           Using Fonts.       (line  7610)
* centered text (filled):                Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5865)
* centered text (unfilled):              Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6001)
* centering lines (ce):                  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6001)
* centering lines (introduction):        Basics.            (line  1211)
* centimeter scaling unit (c):           Measurements.      (line  4385)
* cf request, and copy mode:             Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* cf request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* cf request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* cf request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* changing control characters:           Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4858)
* changing font family (fam, \F):        Font Families.     (line  7766)
* changing fonts (ft, \f):               Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* changing format, and read-only registers: Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5668)
* changing the font height (\H):         Artificial Fonts.  (line  8490)
* changing the font slant (\S):          Artificial Fonts.  (line  8525)
* changing the page number character (pc): Page Layout.     (line  7406)
* changing trap location (ch):           Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11187)
* changing type sizes (ps, \s):          Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8854)
* changing type sizes (ps, \s) <1>:      Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9056)
* changing vertical line spacing (vs):   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8937)
* char request, and comments:            Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* char request, and soft hyphen character: Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* char request, and translations:        Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* char request, used with \N:            Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* character:                             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* character cell attributes:             Using Fonts.       (line  7610)
* character class (class):               Character Classes. (line  8412)
* character class name space, shared with special characters: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* character classes:                     Character Classes. (line  8402)
* character mappings, composite, dumping (pcomposite): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12919)
* character properties (cflags):         Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8190)
* character translations:                Character Translations.
                                                            (line  6988)
* character, backspace:                  Page Motions.      (line 10459)
* character, backspace, and translations: Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* character, control (.):                Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* character, control, changing (cc):     Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4870)
* character, defining (char):            Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* character, defining fallback (fchar, fschar, schar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* character, distinguished from glyph:   Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* character, dummy (\&):                 Dummy Characters.  (line  8737)
* character, dummy (\&), as control character suppressor: Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3896)
* character, dummy (\&), effect on \l escape sequence: Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10778)
* character, dummy (\&), effect on kerning: Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8671)
* character, escape, changing (ec):      Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5151)
* character, escape, while defining glyph: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* character, field delimiting (fc):      Fields.            (line  6958)
* character, field padding (fc):         Fields.            (line  6958)
* character, horizontal tab:             Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* character, hyphenation (\%):           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6189)
* character, indexed, formatting (\N):   Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* character, leader:                     Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* character, leader repetition (lc):     Leaders.           (line  6927)
* character, leader, and translations:   Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* character, leader, non-interpreted (\a): Leaders.         (line  6924)
* character, margins (mc):               Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10712)
* character, named (\C):                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8132)
* character, newline, and translations:  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* character, no-break control ('):       Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* character, no-break control, changing (c2): Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4870)
* character, ordinary:                   Identifiers.       (line  4728)
* character, removing definition (rchar, rfschar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8361)
* character, soft hyphen, setting (shc): Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* character, special:                    Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* character, tab repetition (tc):        Tabs and Fields.   (line  6872)
* character, tab, and translations:      Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* character, tab, non-interpreted (\t):  Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* character, transparent:                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* character, transparent dummy (\)):     Dummy Characters.  (line  8795)
* characters, end-of-sentence:           Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8203)
* characters, end-of-sentence transparent: Sentences.       (line  3735)
* characters, hyphenation:               Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8208)
* characters, input, and output glyphs, compatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* characters, invalid for trf request:   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12323)
* characters, invalid input:             Input Format.      (line  4066)
* characters, overlapping:               Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* characters, special:                   Sentences.         (line  3735)
* characters, special, list of (groff_char(7) man page): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8015)
* characters, unnamed, accessing with \N: Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13870)
* circle, filled, drawing (\D'C ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* circle, outlined, drawing (\D'c ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* circle, solid, drawing (\D'C ...'):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* circle, stroked, drawing (\D'c ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* class of characters (class):           Character Classes. (line  8412)
* classes, character:                    Character Classes. (line  8402)
* clearing input line trap (it, itc):    Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* closing brace escape sequence (\}):    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* closing file (close):                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12509)
* code, hyphenation (hcode):             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6453)
* color name, background, register (.M): Colors.            (line  9180)
* color name, fill, register (.M):       Colors.            (line  9180)
* color name, stroke, register (.m):     Colors.            (line  9150)
* color, default:                        Colors.            (line  9126)
* color, fill:                           Colors.            (line  9082)
* color, stroke:                         Colors.            (line  9082)
* colors:                                Colors.            (line  9082)
* colors, defined, dumping (pcolor):     Debugging.         (line 12912)
* command prefix:                        Environment.       (line   876)
* command-line options:                  Groff Options.     (line   562)
* comments:                              Comments.          (line  5284)
* comments in device description files:  DESC File Format.  (line 13649)
* comments in font description files:    Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13821)
* comments, after character definitions: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* comments, after file name arguments:   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6429)
* comments, after file name or system command arguments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* comments, lining up with tabs:         Comments.          (line  5301)
* comments, with string definitions and appendments: Strings.
                                                            (line  9236)
* comments, with string length measurements: Strings.       (line  9333)
* common features:                       Common Features.   (line  1241)
* common name space of macros, diversions, and strings: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* common name space of special characters and character classes: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* comparison of strings:                 Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9547)
* comparison operators:                  Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4561)
* compatibility mode:                    Warnings.          (line 13181)
* compatibility mode <1>:                Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13243)
* compatibility mode, and parameters:    GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* complementation, logical:              Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4571)
* composite characters mappings, dumping (pcomposite): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12919)
* composite glyph names:                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8028)
* conditional block, beginning (\{):     Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* conditional block, end (\}):           Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* conditional blocks:                    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9689)
* conditional expressions:               Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9467)
* conditional output for terminal (TTY): Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9493)
* conditional page break (ne):           Page Control.      (line  7462)
* conditionals and loops:                Conditionals and Loops.
                                                            (line  9460)
* configuring control characters:        Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4858)
* configuring the page length (pl):      Page Layout.       (line  7348)
* consecutive hyphenated lines (hlm):    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* constant glyph spacing mode (cs):      Artificial Fonts.  (line  8610)
* contents, table of:                    Table of Contents. (line  1364)
* contents, table of <1>:                Leaders.           (line  6937)
* continuation, input line (\<RET>):     Line Continuation. (line  7271)
* continuation, output line (\c):        Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* continue request, in a while loop:     while.             (line  9838)
* continued output line register (.int): Line Continuation. (line  7326)
* continuous underlining (cu):           Artificial Fonts.  (line  8569)
* control character (.):                 Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* control character, changing (cc):      Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4870)
* control character, no-break ('):       Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* control character, no-break, changing (c2): Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4870)
* control characters:                    Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4858)
* control line:                          Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3901)
* control, line:                         Line Continuation. (line  7266)
* control, page:                         Page Control.      (line  7425)
* conventions for input:                 Input Conventions. (line  4182)
* conversion to basic units:             Measurements.      (line  4373)
* copy mode:                             Copy Mode.         (line 10151)
* copy mode <1>:                         Copy Mode.         (line 10151)
* copy mode, and \!:                     Diversions.        (line 11767)
* copy mode, and \?:                     Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9555)
* copy mode, and \? <1>:                 Diversions.        (line 11767)
* copy mode, and \a:                     Leaders.           (line  6924)
* copy mode, and \t:                     Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* copy mode, and \V:                     Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12527)
* copy mode, and cf request:             Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* copy mode, and device request:         Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12562)
* copy mode, and length request:         Strings.           (line  9334)
* copy mode, and macro parameters:       Parameters.        (line 10066)
* copy mode, and output request:         Diversions.        (line 11800)
* copy mode, and trf request:            Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* copy mode, and write request:          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* copy mode, and writec request:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* copy mode, and writem request:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12502)
* copying environment (evc):             Environments.      (line 12074)
* correction between upright and slanted glyph (\/, \,): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* correction, italic (\/):               Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* correction, left italic (\,):          Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* corrections between slanted and upright glyphs (\/, \,): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* cover page in [ms], example markup:    ms Document Description Macros.
                                                            (line  2243)
* cp request, and glyph definitions:     Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* cq glyph, at end of sentence:          Sentences.         (line  3735)
* cq glyph, at end of sentence <1>:      Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* creating alias of register (aln):      Setting Registers. (line  5514)
* creating alias, for diversion (als):   Strings.           (line  9410)
* creating alias, for macro (als):       Strings.           (line  9410)
* creating alias, for string (als):      Strings.           (line  9410)
* creating new characters (char):        Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* credits:                               Credits.           (line   498)
* cs request, and font styles:           Font Families.     (line  7804)
* cs request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* cs request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* cs request, with fractional type sizes: Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* CSTR #54 errata:                       Setting Registers. (line  5499)
* CSTR #54 errata <1>:                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* CSTR #54 errata <2>:                   Line Layout.       (line  7180)
* CSTR #54 errata <3>:                   Page Control.      (line  7440)
* CSTR #54 errata <4>:                   Artificial Fonts.  (line  8542)
* CSTR #54 errata <5>:                   Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8862)
* CSTR #54 errata <6>:                   Strings.           (line  9401)
* CSTR #54 errata <7>:                   Page Motions.      (line 10512)
* CSTR #54 errata <8>:                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12217)
* CSTR #54 erratum, \S escape:           Artificial Fonts.  (line  8542)
* CSTR #54 erratum, \s escape sequence:  Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8862)
* CSTR #54 erratum, bp request:          Page Control.      (line  7440)
* CSTR #54 erratum, po request:          Line Layout.       (line  7180)
* CSTR #54 erratum, ps request:          Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8862)
* CSTR #54 erratum, rm request:          Strings.           (line  9401)
* CSTR #54 erratum, rr request:          Setting Registers. (line  5499)
* CSTR #54 erratum, sb register:         Page Motions.      (line 10512)
* CSTR #54 erratum, ss request:          Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* CSTR #54 erratum, st register:         Page Motions.      (line 10512)
* CSTR #54 erratum, yr register:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12217)
* current directory:                     Macro Directories. (line   946)
* current input file name register (.F): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5731)
* current page number (%):               Page Control.      (line  7443)
* current time, hours (hours):           Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12203)
* current time, minutes (minutes):       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12200)
* current time, seconds (seconds):       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12197)
* customizing man package:               Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1465)
* customizing mdoc package:              mdoc.              (line  1598)
* da request, and dn (dl):               Diversions.        (line 11719)
* da request, and warnings:              Warnings.          (line 13139)
* da request, and warnings <1>:          Warnings.          (line 13144)
* date, day of the month register (dy):  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12209)
* date, day of the week register (dw):   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12206)
* date, month of the year register (mo): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12212)
* date, year register (year, yr):        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12215)
* day of the month register (dy):        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12209)
* day of the week register (dw):         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12206)
* dd glyph, at end of sentence:          Sentences.         (line  3735)
* dd glyph, at end of sentence <1>:      Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* de request, and while:                 while.             (line  9789)
* de, de1, dei requests, and warnings:   Warnings.          (line 13144)
* debugging:                             Debugging.         (line 12819)
* debugging page location traps:         Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11132)
* decimal point, as delimiter:           Delimiters.        (line  5231)
* decrementation, automatic, of a register: Auto-increment. (line  5560)
* default color:                         Colors.            (line  9126)
* default tab stops:                     Tabs and Fields.   (line  6771)
* default units:                         Default Units.     (line  4456)
* deferred output:                       Deferring Output.  (line 10978)
* defined colors, dumping (pcolor):      Debugging.         (line 12912)
* defining character (char):             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* defining character class (class):      Character Classes. (line  8412)
* defining fallback character (fchar, fschar, schar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* defining glyph (char):                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* defining symbol (char):                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* delimiters, for escape sequence arguments: Delimiters.    (line  5203)
* delimiting character, for fields (fc): Fields.            (line  6958)
* delimiting escape sequence arguments:  Delimiters.        (line  5203)
* depth, interpolation:                  Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* depth, interpolation <1>:              Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* depth, interpolation <2>:              Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* depth, nesting, of escape sequences in macro definitions: Copy Mode.
                                                            (line 10226)
* depth, nesting, of interpolations:     Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* depth, nesting, of interpolations <1>: Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* depth, nesting, of interpolations <2>: Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* depth, nesting, of macro definitions:  Writing Macros.    (line  9889)
* depth, of last glyph (.cdp):           Environments.      (line 12101)
* DESC file format:                      DESC File Format.  (line 13642)
* DESC file, and font mounting:          Font Positions.    (line  7893)
* description file, device, introduced:  Font Directories.  (line   972)
* description file, font:                Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* description file, font, introduced:    Font Directories.  (line   972)
* device description file, introduced:   Font Directories.  (line   972)
* device description files, comments:    DESC File Format.  (line 13649)
* device request, and copy mode:         Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12562)
* device request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12562)
* device resolution:                     Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* device resolution <1>:                 DESC File Format.  (line 13723)
* device resolution, obtaining in the formatter: Measurements.
                                                            (line  4375)
* devices for output:                    Output Device Intro.
                                                            (line   378)
* dg glyph, at end of sentence:          Sentences.         (line  3735)
* dg glyph, at end of sentence <1>:      Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* di request, and warnings:              Warnings.          (line 13139)
* di request, and warnings <1>:          Warnings.          (line 13144)
* differences in implementation:         Implementation Differences.
                                                            (line 13227)
* digit-width space (\0):                Page Motions.      (line 10486)
* digits, as delimiters:                 Delimiters.        (line  5231)
* dimensions, line:                      Line Layout.       (line  7120)
* directories for macro packages:        Macro Directories. (line   934)
* directory, current:                    Macro Directories. (line   946)
* directory, device and font description: Font Directories. (line   981)
* directory, for tmac files:             Macro Directories. (line   936)
* directory, home:                       Macro Directories. (line   949)
* directory, platform-specific:          Macro Directories. (line   952)
* directory, site-local:                 Macro Directories. (line   952)
* directory, site-local <1>:             Font Directories.  (line   996)
* disabling \ (eo):                      Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5146)
* disabling hyphenation (\%):            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6189)
* discardable horizontal space:          Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6089)
* displays:                              Displays and Keeps.
                                                            (line  1331)
* displays [ms]:                         ms keeps and displays.
                                                            (line  2846)
* displays, and footnotes [ms]:          ms Footnotes.      (line  3031)
* distance to next vertical position trap register (.t): Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11179)
* diversion:                             Deferring Output.  (line 10978)
* diversion name register (.z):          Diversions.        (line 11673)
* diversion name space, shared with macros and strings: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* diversion trap, setting (dt):          Diversion Traps.   (line 11328)
* diversion traps:                       Diversion Traps.   (line 11323)
* diversion, appending to (da, boxa):    Diversions.        (line 11611)
* diversion, beginning (di, box):        Diversions.        (line 11611)
* diversion, creating alias of (als):    Strings.           (line  9410)
* diversion, dumping (pm):               Debugging.         (line 12961)
* diversion, ending (di, box):           Diversions.        (line 11611)
* diversion, nested:                     Diversions.        (line 11673)
* diversion, removing (rm):              Strings.           (line  9402)
* diversion, removing alias of (rm):     Strings.           (line  9445)
* diversion, renaming (rn):              Strings.           (line  9399)
* diversion, stripping final newline:    Punning Names.     (line 11958)
* diversion, top-level:                  Diversions.        (line 11598)
* diversion, top-level, and \!:          Diversions.        (line 11792)
* diversion, top-level, and \?:          Diversions.        (line 11797)
* diversion, top-level, and bp:          Page Control.      (line  7438)
* diversion, unformatting (asciify):     Diversions.        (line 11818)
* diversion, vertical position in, register (.d): Diversions.
                                                            (line 11673)
* diversions:                            Diversions.        (line 11585)
* diversions <1>:                        Punning Names.     (line 11870)
* diversions, and traps:                 Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11280)
* division by zero:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4509)
* division, truncating:                  Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* dl register, and da (boxa):            Diversions.        (line 11719)
* dn register, and da (boxa):            Diversions.        (line 11719)
* document description macros, [ms]:     ms Document Description Macros.
                                                            (line  2178)
* document formats:                      Document Formats.  (line  1389)
* documents, multi-file:                 Debugging.         (line 12850)
* documents, structuring the source of:  Invoking Requests. (line  4938)
* dot, as delimiter:                     Delimiters.        (line  5231)
* double quote, at the start of a request argument: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* double quote, embedding in a macro argument: Calling Macros.
                                                            (line  5011)
* double-spacing (ls):                   Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6659)
* double-spacing (vs, pvs):              Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8968)
* down-casing a string (stringdown):     Strings.           (line  9384)
* drawing a filled circle (\D'C ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* drawing a filled ellipse (\D'E ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* drawing a filled polygon (\D'P ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* drawing a line (\D'l ...'):            Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10883)
* drawing a solid circle (\D'C ...'):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* drawing a solid ellipse (\D'E ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* drawing a solid polygon (\D'P ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* drawing a spline (\D'~ ...'):          Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10860)
* drawing a stroked circle (\D'c ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* drawing a stroked ellipse (\D'e ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* drawing a stroked polygon (\D'p ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* drawing an arc (\D'a ...'):            Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10864)
* drawing an outlined circle (\D'c ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* drawing an outlined ellipse (\D'e ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* drawing an outlined polygon (\D'p ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* drawing horizontal lines (\l):         Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10783)
* drawing position:                      Page Geometry.     (line  4322)
* drawing position, initial:             Page Geometry.     (line  4337)
* drawing position, vertical (nl):       Page Control.      (line  7516)
* drawing requests:                      Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10767)
* drawing vertical lines (\L):           Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10808)
* ds and ds1 request, and leading spaces: Strings.          (line  9262)
* ds and ds1 requests, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Strings.
                                                            (line  9262)
* ds request, and comments:              Strings.           (line  9236)
* ds, ds1 requests, and warnings:        Warnings.          (line 13144)
* ds1 request, and comments:             Strings.           (line  9236)
* dummy character (\&):                  Dummy Characters.  (line  8737)
* dummy character (\&), as control character suppressor: Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3896)
* dummy character (\&), effect on \l escape sequence: Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10778)
* dummy character (\&), effect on kerning: Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8671)
* dummy character, transparent (\)):     Dummy Characters.  (line  8795)
* dummy environment, used by \w escape sequence: Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10506)
* dumping composite character mappings (pcomposite): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12919)
* dumping defined colors (pcolor):       Debugging.         (line 12912)
* dumping environments (pev):            Debugging.         (line 12925)
* dumping font translations (pftr):      Debugging.         (line 12939)
* dumping hyphenation exception words (phw): Debugging.     (line 12945)
* dumping macros, strings, or diversions (pm): Debugging.   (line 12961)
* dumping occupied font mounting positions (pfp): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12929)
* dumping open streams (pstream):        Debugging.         (line 12973)
* dumping page location traps (pwh):     Debugging.         (line 12979)
* dumping pending output line node list (pline): Debugging. (line 12954)
* dumping registers (pnr):               Debugging.         (line 12967)
* dumping symbol table (pm):             Debugging.         (line 12961)
* ejection, page:                        Page Geometry.     (line  4343)
* ejection, page <1>:                    Page Control.      (line  7425)
* ejection, page <2>:                    The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* ejection, page, of final page:         End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11505)
* ejection, page, prevented by vpt:      Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11054)
* ellipse, filled, drawing (\D'E ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* ellipse, outlined, drawing (\D'e ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* ellipse, solid, drawing (\D'E ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* ellipse, stroked, drawing (\D'e ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* em glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8215)
* em scaling unit (m):                   Measurements.      (line  4413)
* embolding of special fonts:            Artificial Fonts.  (line  8597)
* empty line:                            Breaking.          (line  3820)
* en scaling unit (n):                   Measurements.      (line  4417)
* enabling vertical position traps (vpt): Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11048)
* encoding, input, ISO Latin-1 (8859-1): Input Encodings.   (line  4126)
* encoding, input, ISO Latin-2 (8859-2): Input Encodings.   (line  4131)
* encoding, input, ISO Latin-5 (8859-9): Input Encodings.   (line  4138)
* encoding, input, ISO Latin-9 (8859-15): Input Encodings.  (line  4143)
* encoding, input, KOI8-R:               Input Encodings.   (line  4119)
* encoding, output, ASCII:               Groff Options.     (line   782)
* encoding, output, ISO 646:             Groff Options.     (line   782)
* encoding, output, ISO Latin-1 (8859-1): Groff Options.    (line   786)
* encoding, output, UTF-8:               Groff Options.     (line   790)
* end of conditional block (\}):         Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* end-of-input macro (em):               End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* end-of-input trap, setting (em):       End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* end-of-input traps:                    End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11477)
* end-of-sentence characters:            Sentences.         (line  3691)
* end-of-sentence characters <1>:        Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8203)
* end-of-sentence detection, cancellation, on AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13429)
* end-of-sentence transparent characters: Sentences.        (line  3735)
* ending diversion (di, box):            Diversions.        (line 11611)
* endnotes:                              Footnotes and Endnotes.
                                                            (line  1354)
* environment:                           Deferring Output.  (line 10978)
* environment availability and naming, incompatibilities with: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13491)
* environment number/name register (.ev): Environments.     (line 12021)
* environment variables:                 Environment.       (line   864)
* environment, copying (evc):            Environments.      (line 12074)
* environment, dimensions of last glyph (.w, .cht, .cdp, .csk): Environments.
                                                            (line 12101)
* environment, dummy, used by \w escape sequence: Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10506)
* environment, previous line length (.n): Environments.     (line 12116)
* environment, switching (ev):           Environments.      (line 12021)
* environments:                          Environments.      (line 11980)
* environments, dumping (pev):           Debugging.         (line 12925)
* equality operator:                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4561)
* equation example [ms]:                 ms Insertions.     (line  2967)
* equations [ms]:                        ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* escape character, changing (ec):       Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5151)
* escape character, formatting (\e):     Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5137)
* escape character, while defining glyph: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* escape sequence:                       Formatter Instructions.
                                                            (line  4846)
* escape sequence argument delimiters:   Delimiters.        (line  5203)
* escape sequences:                      Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5080)
* escape sequences, brace (\{, \}):      Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* escaping newline characters, in strings: Strings.         (line  9271)
* ex request, use in debugging:          Debugging.         (line 12887)
* ex request, used with nx and rd:       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12393)
* example markup, bulleted list [ms]:    Lists in ms.       (line  2640)
* example markup, cover page in [ms]:    ms Document Description Macros.
                                                            (line  2243)
* example markup, glossary-style list [ms]: Lists in ms.    (line  2687)
* example markup, numbered list [ms]:    Lists in ms.       (line  2659)
* examples of invocation:                Invocation Examples.
                                                            (line  1049)
* exception words, hyphenation, dumping (phw): Debugging.   (line 12945)
* exiting (ex):                          Debugging.         (line 12887)
* expansion of strings (\*):             Strings.           (line  9216)
* explicit hyphen (\%):                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* explicit hyphenation:                  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6138)
* expression, limitation of logical not in: Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4571)
* expression, order of evaluation:       Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4591)
* expressions, and register format:      Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5680)
* expressions, and space characters:     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4684)
* expressions, conditional:              Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9467)
* expressions, numeric:                  Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4491)
* extra post-vertical line space (\x):   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8961)
* extra post-vertical line space register (.a): Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6694)
* extra pre-vertical line space (\x):    Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8953)
* extra spaces between words:            Adjustment.        (line  3848)
* extreme values representable with Roman numerals: Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5661)
* extremum operators (>?, <?):           Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4552)
* f scaling unit:                        Colors.            (line  9115)
* factor, zoom, of a font (fzoom):       Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* fallback character, defining (fchar, fschar, schar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* fallback character, removing definition of (rchar, rfschar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8361)
* fam request, and changing fonts:       Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* families, font:                        Font Families.     (line  7751)
* family, font:                          Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* fchar request, and comments:           Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* features, common:                      Common Features.   (line  1241)
* fi request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* field delimiting character (fc):       Fields.            (line  6958)
* field padding character (fc):          Fields.            (line  6958)
* fields:                                Fields.            (line  6958)
* fields, and tabs:                      Tabs and Fields.   (line  6759)
* figure space (\0):                     Page Motions.      (line 10486)
* figures [ms]:                          ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* file formats:                          File Formats.      (line 13607)
* file name arguments to requests, in other implementations: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* file names, breaking (\:):             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* file stream, writing to (write, writec): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* file, appending to (opena):            Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12476)
* file, closing (close):                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12509)
* file, device description, introduced:  Font Directories.  (line   972)
* file, font description:                Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* file, font description, introduced:    Font Directories.  (line   972)
* file, inclusion (so):                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12266)
* file, macro, search path:              Macro Directories. (line   936)
* file, next, read (nx):                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12356)
* file, opening (open):                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12476)
* files, font:                           Device and Font Description Files.
                                                            (line 13618)
* fill color:                            Colors.            (line  9082)
* fill color name register (.M):         Colors.            (line  9180)
* fill mode, and \c:                     Line Continuation. (line  7307)
* fill mode, disabling, request (nf):    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* fill mode, enabling, request (fi):     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5834)
* filled circle, drawing (\D'C ...'):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* filled ellipse, drawing (\D'E ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* filled polygon, drawing (\D'P ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* filling:                               Filling.           (line  3654)
* filling (introduction):                Basics.            (line  1115)
* filling and adjustment, manipulating:  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* filling of output, disabling request (nf): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* filling of output, enabling request (fi): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5834)
* filling, and break warnings:           Warnings.          (line 13097)
* filling, and inter-sentence space:     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6074)
* final newline, stripping in diversions: Punning Names.    (line 11958)
* fl request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* floating keep:                         Displays and Keeps.
                                                            (line  1342)
* flush pending output line (fl):        Debugging.         (line 12986)
* flushing of output, timing of, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13571)
* flushing, of an output line:           GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12665)
* font:                                  Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font aliasing with third argument to fp request: Font Positions.
                                                            (line  7859)
* font description file:                 Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* font description file format:          DESC File Format.  (line 13642)
* font description file, format:         Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13790)
* font description file, introduced:     Font Directories.  (line   972)
* font description files, comments:      Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13821)
* font directory:                        Font Directories.  (line   981)
* font families:                         Font Families.     (line  7751)
* font family:                           Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font family, changing (fam, \F):       Font Families.     (line  7766)
* font file, format:                     Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13790)
* font files:                            Device and Font Description Files.
                                                            (line 13618)
* font for underlining (uf):             Artificial Fonts.  (line  8573)
* font height, changing (\H):            Artificial Fonts.  (line  8490)
* font magnification request(fzoom):     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* font metrics:                          Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* font mounting positions, occupied, dumping (pfp): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12929)
* font mounting, automatic:              Selecting Fonts.   (line  7654)
* font path:                             Font Directories.  (line   981)
* font position register (.f):           Font Positions.    (line  7881)
* font positions:                        Font Positions.    (line  7838)
* font slant, changing (\S):             Artificial Fonts.  (line  8525)
* font style:                            Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font style, abstract:                  Using Fonts.       (line  7587)
* font style, abstract, setting up (sty): Font Families.    (line  7804)
* font styles:                           Font Families.     (line  7751)
* font translation (ftr):                Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* font translations, dumping (pftr):     Debugging.         (line 12939)
* font, mounting (fp):                   Font Positions.    (line  7850)
* font, optical size, setting (fzoom):   Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* font, previous, selecting (\f[], \fP): Selecting Fonts.   (line  7667)
* font, previous, selecting (ft):        Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* font, selection:                       Selecting Fonts.   (line  7630)
* font, special:                         Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font, text:                            Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font, unstyled:                        Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* font, zoom factor (fzoom):             Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* fonts, artificial:                     Artificial Fonts.  (line  8480)
* fonts, changing (ft, \f):              Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* fonts, searching for:                  Font Directories.  (line   981)
* fonts, special:                        Special Fonts.     (line  8444)
* footers:                               Page Layout.       (line  7370)
* footers <1>:                           Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* footers [ms]:                          ms Headers and Footers.
                                                            (line  3122)
* footnote mark [ms]:                    ms Footnotes.      (line  2994)
* footnotes:                             Footnotes and Endnotes.
                                                            (line  1354)
* footnotes [ms]:                        ms Footnotes.      (line  2994)
* footnotes, and displays [ms]:          ms Footnotes.      (line  3031)
* footnotes, and keeps [ms]:             ms Footnotes.      (line  3031)
* form letters:                          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12377)
* format of font description file:       DESC File Format.  (line 13642)
* format of font description files:      Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13790)
* format of font files:                  Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13790)
* format of register (\g):               Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5675)
* format, paper:                         Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* format, register:                      Registers.         (line  5395)
* format, troff output:                  GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* formats, file:                         File Formats.      (line 13607)
* formatter instructions:                Formatter Instructions.
                                                            (line  4835)
* formatting a backslash glyph (\[rs]):  Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5141)
* formatting a title line (tl):          Page Layout.       (line  7375)
* formatting the escape character (\e):  Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5137)
* fp request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* fp request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* fractional point sizes:                Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8990)
* fractional point sizes <1>:            Other Differences. (line 13495)
* fractional type sizes:                 Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8990)
* fractional type sizes <1>:             Other Differences. (line 13495)
* fractional type sizes in ms macros:    Differences from AT&T ms.
                                                            (line  3385)
* French spacing:                        Sentences.         (line  3691)
* fschar request, and comments:          Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* fspecial request, and font styles:     Font Families.     (line  7804)
* fspecial request, and font translations: Selecting Fonts. (line  7700)
* fspecial request, and glyph search order: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* fspecial request, and imitating bold:  Artificial Fonts.  (line  8597)
* ft request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* full-service macro package:            Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1440)
* geometry, page:                        Page Geometry.     (line  4296)
* GGL (groff glyph list):                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8028)
* GGL (groff glyph list) <1>:            Character Classes. (line  8429)
* glossary-style list, example markup [ms]: Lists in ms.    (line  2687)
* glyph:                                 Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* glyph mode, constant spacing (cs):     Artificial Fonts.  (line  8610)
* glyph names, composite:                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8028)
* glyph pile (\b):                       Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10949)
* glyph properties (cflags):             Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8190)
* glyph, defining (char):                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* glyph, distinguished from character:   Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* glyph, last, dimensions (.w, .cht, .cdp, .csk): Environments.
                                                            (line 12101)
* glyph, leader repetition (lc):         Leaders.           (line  6927)
* glyph, numbered (\N):                  Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* glyph, numbered, accessing (\N):       Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* glyph, removing definition (rchar, rfschar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8361)
* glyph, soft hyphen (hy):               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* glyph, tab repetition (tc):            Tabs and Fields.   (line  6872)
* glyphs, available, list of (groff_char(7) man page): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8015)
* glyphs, output, and input characters, compatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* glyphs, overstriking (\o):             Page Motions.      (line 10572)
* glyphs, unnamed:                       Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8164)
* glyphs, unnamed, accessing with \N:    Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13870)
* GNU troff capabilities:                GNU troff Capabilities.
                                                            (line   299)
* GNU troff, identification register (.g): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5734)
* GNU troff, PID register ($$):          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* GNU troff, process ID register ($$):   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* GNU-specific register (.g):            Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5734)
* graphic renditions:                    Using Fonts.       (line  7610)
* greater than (or equal to) operator:   Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4561)
* groff glyph list (GGL):                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8028)
* groff glyph list (GGL) <1>:            Character Classes. (line  8429)
* groff invocation:                      Invoking groff.    (line   508)
* GROFF_BIN_PATH, environment variable:  Environment.       (line   871)
* GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX, environment variable: Environment.  (line   876)
* GROFF_ENCODING, environment variable:  Environment.       (line   889)
* GROFF_FONT_PATH, environment variable: Environment.       (line   897)
* GROFF_FONT_PATH, environment variable <1>: Font Directories.
                                                            (line   994)
* GROFF_TMAC_PATH, environment variable: Environment.       (line   902)
* GROFF_TMAC_PATH, environment variable <1>: Macro Directories.
                                                            (line   944)
* GROFF_TMPDIR, environment variable:    Environment.       (line   906)
* GROFF_TYPESETTER, environment variable: Environment.      (line   915)
* groff--what is it?:                    What Is groff?.    (line   268)
* grohtml, the program:                  Groff Options.     (line   801)
* hair space (\^):                       Page Motions.      (line 10480)
* hcode request, and glyph definitions:  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* headers:                               Page Layout.       (line  7370)
* headers <1>:                           Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* headers [ms]:                          ms Headers and Footers.
                                                            (line  3122)
* headings, run-in:                      Sections and Chapters.
                                                            (line  1301)
* heavy (font stroke weight):            Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* height, font, changing (\H):           Artificial Fonts.  (line  8490)
* height, of last glyph (.cht):          Environments.      (line 12101)
* high-water mark register (.h):         Diversions.        (line 11700)
* home directory:                        Macro Directories. (line   949)
* horizontal discardable space:          Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6089)
* horizontal input line position register (hp): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10564)
* horizontal input line position, saving (\k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10556)
* horizontal line, drawing (\l):         Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10783)
* horizontal motion (\h):                Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* horizontal motion quantum:             DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* horizontal motion quantum register (.H): Motion Quanta.   (line  4437)
* horizontal output line position register (.k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10568)
* horizontal resolution:                 DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* horizontal resolution register (.H):   Motion Quanta.     (line  4437)
* horizontal space (\h):                 Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* horizontal space, unformatting:        Punning Names.     (line 11958)
* horizontal tab character:              Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* Host System Service Access:            Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12184)
* hours, current time (hours):           Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12203)
* hpf request, and comments:             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6429)
* hpf request, and hyphenation language: Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6502)
* hpfa request, and comments:            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6429)
* hw request, and hy restrictions:       Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6161)
* hw request, and hyphenation language:  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6502)
* hy glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8215)
* hyphen, explicit (\%):                 Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* hyphenated lines, consecutive (hlm):   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* hyphenating characters:                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8208)
* hyphenation:                           Hyphenation.       (line  3778)
* hyphenation character (\%):            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6189)
* hyphenation code (hcode):              Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6453)
* hyphenation consecutive line count register (.hlc): Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6527)
* hyphenation consecutive line limit register (.hlm): Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6527)
* hyphenation exception words:           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6146)
* hyphenation exception words, dumping (phw): Debugging.    (line 12945)
* hyphenation language register (.hla):  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6510)
* hyphenation margin (hym):              Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6533)
* hyphenation margin register (.hym):    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6543)
* hyphenation mode default register (.hydefault): Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6373)
* hyphenation mode register (.hy):       Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6250)
* hyphenation parameters, automatic:     Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6238)
* hyphenation pattern files:             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* hyphenation patterns (hpf):            Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6383)
* hyphenation space (hys):               Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6548)
* hyphenation space adjustment threshold: Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6548)
* hyphenation space adjustment threshold register (.hys): Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6560)
* hyphenation, automatic:                Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6131)
* hyphenation, disabling (\%):           Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6189)
* hyphenation, explicit:                 Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6138)
* hyphenation, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13440)
* hyphenation, manipulating:             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6131)
* hyphenation, manual:                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6138)
* i scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4382)
* identifiers:                           Identifiers.       (line  4724)
* identifiers, undefined:                Identifiers.       (line  4791)
* ie request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* ie request, operators to use with:     Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9467)
* if request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* if request, and the ! operator:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* if request, operators to use with:     Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9467)
* if-else:                               if-else.           (line  9658)
* if-then:                               if-then.           (line  9616)
* imitating boldface (bd):               Artificial Fonts.  (line  8580)
* implementation differences:            Implementation Differences.
                                                            (line 13227)
* implicit line break:                   Breaking.          (line  3796)
* implicit trap:                         The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* in request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* in request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* inch scaling unit (i):                 Measurements.      (line  4382)
* including a file (so):                 Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12266)
* incompatibilities with AT&T troff:     Implementation Differences.
                                                            (line 13227)
* increment value without changing the register: Auto-increment.
                                                            (line  5599)
* incrementation, automatic, of a register: Auto-increment. (line  5560)
* indentation (in):                      Line Layout.       (line  7137)
* indentation, of roff source code:      Invoking Requests. (line  4938)
* indented paragraphs:                   Paragraphs.        (line  1258)
* index, in macro package:               Indexing.          (line  1380)
* indexed character, formatting (\N):    Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* indicator, scaling:                    Measurements.      (line  4366)
* indirect assignments:                  Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5534)
* initial drawing position:              Page Geometry.     (line  4337)
* input and output requests:             Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12184)
* input characters and output glyphs, compatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* input characters, invalid:             Input Format.      (line  4066)
* input conventions:                     Input Conventions. (line  4182)
* input encoding, ISO Latin-1 (8859-1):  Input Encodings.   (line  4126)
* input encoding, ISO Latin-2 (8859-2):  Input Encodings.   (line  4131)
* input encoding, ISO Latin-5 (8859-9):  Input Encodings.   (line  4138)
* input encoding, ISO Latin-9 (8859-15): Input Encodings.   (line  4143)
* input encoding, KOI8-R:                Input Encodings.   (line  4119)
* input file name, current, register (.F): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5731)
* input level:                           Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* input level <1>:                       Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* input level <2>:                       Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* input line continuation (\<RET>):      Line Continuation. (line  7271)
* input line number register (.c, c.):   Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5727)
* input line number, assignment, request (lf): Debugging.   (line 12850)
* input line position, horizontal, saving (\k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10556)
* input line trap, clearing (it, itc):   Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* input line trap, setting (it, itc):    Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* input line traps:                      Input Line Traps.  (line 11338)
* input line traps and interrupted lines (itc): Input Line Traps.
                                                            (line 11367)
* input line, horizontal position, register (hp): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10564)
* input line, productive:                Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5970)
* input stack, backtrace (backtrace):    Debugging.         (line 13013)
* input stack, setting limit:            Debugging.         (line 13034)
* input stream, standard, interpolate from (rd): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12360)
* input token:                           GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12665)
* inserting horizontal space (\h):       Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* installation:                          Installation.      (line   389)
* instructing the formatter:             Formatter Instructions.
                                                            (line  4835)
* inter-sentence space:                  Sentences.         (line  3691)
* inter-sentence space size register (.sss): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* inter-sentence space, additional:      Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6069)
* inter-word spacing, minimum:           Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6067)
* interactive use of GNU troff:          Debugging.         (line 12986)
* intercepting requests:                 Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4900)
* intermediate output:                   GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* interpolating registers (\n):          Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5529)
* interpolation:                         Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3915)
* interpolation depth:                   Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* interpolation depth <1>:               Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* interpolation depth <2>:               Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* interpolation of strings (\*):         Strings.           (line  9216)
* interpretation mode:                   Copy Mode.         (line 10165)
* interrupted line:                      Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* interrupted line register (.int):      Line Continuation. (line  7326)
* interrupted lines and input line traps (itc): Input Line Traps.
                                                            (line 11367)
* introduction:                          Introduction.      (line   226)
* invalid characters for trf request:    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12323)
* invalid input characters:              Input Format.      (line  4066)
* invocation examples:                   Invocation Examples.
                                                            (line  1049)
* invoking groff:                        Invoking groff.    (line   508)
* invoking requests:                     Invoking Requests. (line  4916)
* ISO 646 output encoding:               Groff Options.     (line   782)
* ISO Latin-1 (8859-1) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4126)
* ISO Latin-1 (8859-1) output encoding:  Groff Options.     (line   786)
* ISO Latin-2 (8859-2) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4131)
* ISO Latin-5 (8859-9) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4138)
* ISO Latin-9 (8859-15) input encoding:  Input Encodings.   (line  4143)
* italic correction (\/):                Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* justifying text:                       Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* keep, floating:                        Displays and Keeps.
                                                            (line  1342)
* keeps (introduction):                  Displays and Keeps.
                                                            (line  1337)
* keeps [ms]:                            ms keeps and displays.
                                                            (line  2793)
* keeps, and footnotes [ms]:             ms Footnotes.      (line  3031)
* kerning and ligatures:                 Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8630)
* kerning enabled register (.kern):      Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8665)
* kerning, activating (kern):            Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8665)
* kerning, track:                        Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8677)
* KOI8-R, input encoding:                Input Encodings.   (line  4119)
* landscape page orientation:            Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* language [ms]:                         ms language and localization.
                                                            (line  3073)
* language, troff page description:      GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* last glyph, dimensions (.w, .cht, .cdp, .csk): Environments.
                                                            (line 12101)
* last-requested point size registers (.psr, .sr): Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* last-requested type size registers (.psr, .sr): Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4126)
* Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) output encoding:  Groff Options.     (line   786)
* Latin-2 (ISO 8859-2) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4131)
* Latin-5 (ISO 8859-9) input encoding:   Input Encodings.   (line  4138)
* Latin-9 (ISO 8859-15) input encoding:  Input Encodings.   (line  4143)
* layout, line:                          Line Layout.       (line  7120)
* layout, page:                          Page Layout.       (line  7342)
* lc request, and glyph definitions:     Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* leader:                                Table of Contents. (line  1368)
* leader character:                      Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* leader character <1>:                  Leaders.           (line  6918)
* leader character, and translations:    Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* leader character, non-interpreted (\a): Leaders.          (line  6924)
* leader repetition character (lc):      Leaders.           (line  6927)
* leaders:                               Leaders.           (line  6911)
* leading:                               Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8833)
* leading space macro (lsm):             Breaking.          (line  3828)
* leading space traps:                   Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11457)
* leading spaces:                        Breaking.          (line  3828)
* leading spaces in ds and ds1 argument: Strings.           (line  9262)
* leading spaces macro (lsm):            Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11460)
* left italic correction (\,):           Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* left margin (po):                      Line Layout.       (line  7141)
* length of a string (length):           Strings.           (line  9334)
* length of line (ll):                   Line Layout.       (line  7140)
* length of previous line (.n):          Environments.      (line 12116)
* length of the page, configuring (pl):  Page Layout.       (line  7348)
* length of title line, configuring (lt): Page Layout.      (line  7392)
* length request, and comments:          Strings.           (line  9333)
* length request, and copy mode:         Strings.           (line  9334)
* length request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Strings.
                                                            (line  9346)
* less than (or equal to) operator:      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4561)
* letters, form:                         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12377)
* level, input:                          Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* level, input <1>:                      Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* level, input <2>:                      Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* level, suppression nesting, register (.O): Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12178)
* lf request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Debugging.
                                                            (line 12850)
* lf request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* lf request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff <1>: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13488)
* ligature:                              Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* ligatures and kerning:                 Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8630)
* ligatures enabled register (.lg):      Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8648)
* ligatures, activating (lg):            Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8648)
* limitations of \b escape sequence:     Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10957)
* line annotation, output:               Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10605)
* line break:                            Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* line break (introduction):             Basics.            (line  1115)
* line break, output:                    Breaking.          (line  3796)
* line break, output (introduction):     Basics.            (line  1128)
* line control:                          Line Continuation. (line  7266)
* line dimensions:                       Line Layout.       (line  7120)
* line indentation (in):                 Line Layout.       (line  7137)
* line layout:                           Line Layout.       (line  7120)
* line length (ll):                      Line Layout.       (line  7140)
* line length register (.l):             Line Layout.       (line  7255)
* line length, previous (.n):            Environments.      (line 12116)
* line number, input, register (.c, c.): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5727)
* line number, output, register (ln):    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10634)
* line numbers, printing (nm):           Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10612)
* line space, extra post-vertical (\x):  Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8961)
* line space, extra pre-vertical (\x):   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8953)
* line spacing register (.L):            Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6663)
* line spacing, post-vertical (pvs):     Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8965)
* line thickness (\D't ...'):            Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10939)
* line-tabs mode:                        Tabs and Fields.   (line  6885)
* line, blank:                           Breaking.          (line  3820)
* line, drawing (\D'l ...'):             Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10883)
* line, horizontal, drawing (\l):        Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10783)
* line, input, continuation (\<RET>):    Line Continuation. (line  7271)
* line, input, horizontal position, register (hp): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10564)
* line, input, horizontal position, saving (\k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10556)
* line, interrupted:                     Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* line, output, continuation (\c):       Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* line, output, horizontal position, register (.k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10568)
* line, productive input:                Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5970)
* line, vertical, drawing (\L):          Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10808)
* lines, blank, disabling:               Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* lines, centering (ce):                 Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6001)
* lines, centering (introduction):       Basics.            (line  1211)
* lines, consecutive hyphenated (hlm):   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6520)
* lines, interrupted, and input line traps (itc): Input Line Traps.
                                                            (line 11367)
* lines, right-aligning (introduction):  Basics.            (line  1224)
* list of special characters (groff_char(7) man page): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8015)
* listing page location traps (pwh):     Debugging.         (line 12979)
* lists:                                 Paragraphs.        (line  1267)
* ll request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* localization:                          Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6417)
* localization [ms]:                     ms language and localization.
                                                            (line  3073)
* locating macro files:                  Macro Directories. (line   936)
* locating macro packages:               Macro Directories. (line   936)
* location, vertical, page, marking (mk): Page Motions.     (line 10332)
* location, vertical, page, returning to marked (rt): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10332)
* logical "and" operator:                Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* logical "or" operator:                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* logical complementation operator:      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4571)
* logical conjunction operator:          Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* logical disjunction operator:          Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* logical not, limitation in expression: Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4571)
* logical operators:                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* long names:                            Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13248)
* loops and conditionals:                Conditionals and Loops.
                                                            (line  9460)
* lowercasing a string (stringdown):     Strings.           (line  9384)
* ls request, alternative to (pvs):      Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8977)
* lt request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* m scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4413)
* M scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4425)
* machine units:                         Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* macro:                                 Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3915)
* macro arguments:                       Calling Macros.    (line  4987)
* macro arguments, and compatibility mode: GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* macro arguments, and tabs:             Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* macro file search path:                Macro Directories. (line   936)
* macro name register (\$0):             Parameters.        (line 10107)
* macro name space, shared with strings and diversions: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* macro names, starting with [ or ], and refer: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4756)
* macro package:                         Macro Packages.    (line  4041)
* macro package directories:             Macro Directories. (line   934)
* macro package search path:             Macro Directories. (line   936)
* macro package usage, basics of:        Basics.            (line  1105)
* macro package, auxiliary:              Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* macro package, full-service:           Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1440)
* macro package, introduction:           Macro Package Intro.
                                                            (line   334)
* macro package, major:                  Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1437)
* macro package, minor:                  Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* macro package, structuring the source of: Invoking Requests.
                                                            (line  4938)
* macro packages, search procedure for:  Macro Directories. (line   934)
* macro, appending to (am):              Writing Macros.    (line  9978)
* macro, creating alias of (als):        Strings.           (line  9410)
* macro, dumping (pm):                   Debugging.         (line 12961)
* macro, end-of-input (em):              End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* macro, parameters (\$):                Parameters.        (line 10066)
* macro, removing (rm):                  Strings.           (line  9402)
* macro, removing alias of (rm):         Strings.           (line  9445)
* macro, renaming (rn):                  Strings.           (line  9399)
* macros packages, tutorial for users of: Tutorial for Macro Package Users.
                                                            (line  1093)
* macros, recursive:                     while.             (line  9805)
* macros, writing:                       Writing Macros.    (line  9855)
* magnification, font, request (fzoom):  Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)
* major macro package:                   Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1437)
* major version number register (.x):    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5756)
* man macro package:                     man.               (line  1460)
* man macros, customizing headers and footers of: Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1477)
* man macros, Ultrix-specific:           Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1495)
* man pages:                             Conventions Used in This Manual.
                                                            (line   470)
* manipulating filling and adjustment:   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* manipulating hyphenation:              Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6131)
* manipulating spacing:                  Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6604)
* manipulating type size and vertical spacing: Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* manual hyphenation:                    Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6138)
* manual pages ("man pages"):            Conventions Used in This Manual.
                                                            (line   470)
* margin character (mc):                 Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10712)
* margin, bottom:                        Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* margin, hyphenation (hym):             Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6533)
* margin, left (po):                     Line Layout.       (line  7141)
* margin, right:                         Line Layout.       (line  7141)
* margin, top:                           Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* mark, footnote [ms]:                   ms Footnotes.      (line  2994)
* mark, high-water, register (.h):       Diversions.        (line 11700)
* marking vertical page location (mk):   Page Motions.      (line 10332)
* maximum operator:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4552)
* maximum value representable with Roman numerals: Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5661)
* mdoc macro package:                    mdoc.              (line  1595)
* me macro package:                      me.                (line  1606)
* measurements:                          Measurements.      (line  4366)
* measurements, specifying safely:       Default Units.     (line  4480)
* metrics, font:                         Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* minimum inter-word spacing:            Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6067)
* minimum operator:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4552)
* minimum value representable with Roman numerals: Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5661)
* minor macro package:                   Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* minor version number register (.y):    Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5760)
* minutes, current time (minutes):       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12200)
* mm macro package:                      mm.                (line  1617)
* mode, compatibility:                   Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13243)
* mode, compatibility, and parameters:   GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* mode, constant glyph spacing (cs):     Artificial Fonts.  (line  8610)
* mode, copy:                            Copy Mode.         (line 10151)
* mode, copy <1>:                        Copy Mode.         (line 10151)
* mode, copy, and \!:                    Diversions.        (line 11767)
* mode, copy, and \?:                    Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9555)
* mode, copy, and \? <1>:                Diversions.        (line 11767)
* mode, copy, and \a:                    Leaders.           (line  6924)
* mode, copy, and \t:                    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* mode, copy, and \V:                    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12527)
* mode, copy, and cf request:            Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* mode, copy, and device request:        Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12562)
* mode, copy, and length request:        Strings.           (line  9334)
* mode, copy, and macro parameters:      Parameters.        (line 10066)
* mode, copy, and output request:        Diversions.        (line 11800)
* mode, copy, and trf request:           Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* mode, copy, and write request:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* mode, copy, and writec request:        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* mode, copy, and writem request:        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12502)
* mode, fill, and \c:                    Line Continuation. (line  7307)
* mode, fill, and break warnings:        Warnings.          (line 13097)
* mode, fill, and inter-sentence space:  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6074)
* mode, fill, disabling, request (nf):   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* mode, fill, enabling, request (fi):    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5834)
* mode, interpretation:                  Copy Mode.         (line 10165)
* mode, line-tabs:                       Tabs and Fields.   (line  6885)
* mode, no-fill request (nf):            Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* mode, no-fill, and \c:                 Line Continuation. (line  7315)
* mode, no-space, enabling, request (ns): Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* mode, nroff:                           troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7079)
* mode, safer:                           Groff Options.     (line   745)
* mode, safer <1>:                       Macro Directories. (line   946)
* mode, safer <2>:                       Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5752)
* mode, safer <3>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12299)
* mode, safer <4>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12437)
* mode, safer <5>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12453)
* mode, safer <6>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12482)
* mode, safer <7>:                       Safer Mode.        (line 13234)
* mode, troff:                           troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7079)
* mode, unsafe:                          Groff Options.     (line   818)
* mode, unsafe <1>:                      Macro Directories. (line   946)
* mode, unsafe <2>:                      Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5752)
* mode, unsafe <3>:                      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12299)
* mode, unsafe <4>:                      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12437)
* mode, unsafe <5>:                      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12453)
* mode, unsafe <6>:                      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12482)
* modifying requests:                    Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4900)
* modulus by zero:                       Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4509)
* modulus operator:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* mom macro package:                     mom.               (line  1626)
* month of the year register (mo):       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12212)
* motion operators:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4602)
* motion quanta:                         Motion Quanta.     (line  4430)
* motion quantum, horizontal:            DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* motion quantum, horizontal, register (.H): Motion Quanta. (line  4437)
* motion quantum, vertical:              DESC File Format.  (line 13771)
* motion quantum, vertical, register (.V): Motion Quanta.   (line  4437)
* motion, horizontal (\h):               Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* motion, vertical (\v):                 Page Motions.      (line 10404)
* motions, page:                         Page Motions.      (line 10327)
* mounting a font (fp):                  Font Positions.    (line  7850)
* mounting position:                     Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* mounting position <1>:                 Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* mounting positions, occupied by fonts, dumping (pfp): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12929)
* mounting, font, automatic:             Selecting Fonts.   (line  7654)
* ms document structure:                 ms Document Structure.
                                                            (line  1795)
* ms macro package:                      ms.                (line  1648)
* ms macros, accent marks:               ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* ms macros, body text:                  ms Body Text.      (line  2277)
* ms macros, creating table of contents: ms TOC.            (line  3209)
* ms macros, displays:                   ms keeps and displays.
                                                            (line  2793)
* ms macros, document control settings:  ms Document Control Settings.
                                                            (line  1842)
* ms macros, document description:       ms Document Description Macros.
                                                            (line  2178)
* ms macros, equations:                  ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* ms macros, figures:                    ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* ms macros, footers:                    ms Headers and Footers.
                                                            (line  3122)
* ms macros, footnotes:                  ms Footnotes.      (line  2994)
* ms macros, fractional type sizes in:   Differences from AT&T ms.
                                                            (line  3385)
* ms macros, groff differences from AT&T: Differences from AT&T ms.
                                                            (line  3346)
* ms macros, headers:                    ms Headers and Footers.
                                                            (line  3122)
* ms macros, headings:                   Headings in ms.    (line  2398)
* ms macros, keeps:                      ms keeps and displays.
                                                            (line  2793)
* ms macros, language:                   ms language and localization.
                                                            (line  3073)
* ms macros, lists:                      Lists in ms.       (line  2632)
* ms macros, localization:               ms language and localization.
                                                            (line  3073)
* ms macros, margins:                    ms Margins.        (line  3179)
* ms macros, multiple columns:           ms Multiple Columns.
                                                            (line  3187)
* ms macros, naming conventions:         ms Naming Conventions.
                                                            (line  3589)
* ms macros, nested lists:               Indented regions in ms.
                                                            (line  2763)
* ms macros, obtaining typographical symbols: Typographical symbols in ms.
                                                            (line  2307)
* ms macros, page layout:                ms Page Layout.    (line  3115)
* ms macros, paragraph handling:         Paragraphs in ms.  (line  2323)
* ms macros, references:                 ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* ms macros, special characters:         ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* ms macros, strings:                    ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* ms macros, tables:                     ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* ms macros, text settings:              Text settings in ms.
                                                            (line  2285)
* mso request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* msoquiet request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* multi-file documents:                  Debugging.         (line 12850)
* multi-line strings:                    Strings.           (line  9271)
* multi-page table example [ms]:         ms Insertions.     (line  2950)
* multiple columns [ms]:                 ms Multiple Columns.
                                                            (line  3187)
* multiplication:                        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* n scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4417)
* name space, common, of macros, diversions, and strings: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* name space, common, of special characters and character classes: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* name, background color, register (.M): Colors.            (line  9180)
* name, fill color, register (.M):       Colors.            (line  9180)
* name, stroke color, register (.m):     Colors.            (line  9150)
* named character (\C):                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8132)
* names, long:                           Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13248)
* naming conventions, ms macros:         ms Naming Conventions.
                                                            (line  3589)
* ne request, and the .trunc register:   Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11245)
* ne request, comparison with sv:        Page Control.      (line  7506)
* need vertical space request (ne):      Page Control.      (line  7462)
* negating register values:              Setting Registers. (line  5476)
* negation:                              Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* nested assignments:                    Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5534)
* nested diversions:                     Diversions.        (line 11673)
* nested lists [ms]:                     Indented regions in ms.
                                                            (line  2763)
* nesting depth, of escape sequences in macro definitions: Copy Mode.
                                                            (line 10226)
* nesting depth, of interpolations:      Calling Macros.    (line  5065)
* nesting depth, of interpolations <1>:  Delimiters.        (line  5240)
* nesting depth, of interpolations <2>:  Compatibility Mode.
                                                            (line 13345)
* nesting depth, of macro definitions:   Writing Macros.    (line  9889)
* nesting level, suppression, register (.O): Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12178)
* new page request (bp):                 Page Control.      (line  7433)
* newline character, and translations:   Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* newline character, in strings, escaping: Strings.         (line  9271)
* newline, final, stripping in diversions: Punning Names.   (line 11958)
* next file, read (nx):                  Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12356)
* next free font position register (.fp): Font Positions.   (line  7892)
* next page number register (.pn):       Page Layout.       (line  7367)
* next page number, assignment request (pn): Page Layout.   (line  7362)
* next trap name register (.trap):       Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11256)
* nf request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* nl register, and .d:                   Diversions.        (line 11673)
* nl register, difference from .h:       Diversions.        (line 11713)
* nm request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* no-break control character ('):        Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* no-break control character, changing (c2): Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4870)
* no-fill mode request (nf):             Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* no-fill mode, and \c:                  Line Continuation. (line  7315)
* no-space mode, enabling, request (ns): Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* node:                                  GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12665)
* node list, of pending output line, dumping (pline): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12954)
* nodes, in device extension commands:   Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* non-printing break point (\:):         Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* normal (font stroke weight):           Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* nr request, and warnings:              Warnings.          (line 13156)
* nr request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* nroff mode:                            troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7079)
* number format, assigning to register (af): Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5609)
* number of available registers register (.R): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5742)
* number, input line, assignment request (lf): Debugging.   (line 12850)
* number, next page assignment request (pn): Page Layout.   (line  7362)
* number, next page, register (.pn):     Page Layout.       (line  7367)
* numbered glyph (\N):                   Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* numbered glyph, accessing (\N):        Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* numbered list, example markup [ms]:    Lists in ms.       (line  2659)
* numbers, line, printing (nm):          Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10612)
* numeral-width space (\0):              Page Motions.      (line 10486)
* numerals, as delimiters:               Delimiters.        (line  5231)
* numerals, Roman:                       Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5629)
* numeric expression, valid:             Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4667)
* numeric expressions:                   Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4491)
* nx request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* nx request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* object creation:                       Writing Macros.    (line 10003)
* oblique (font shape):                  Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* occupied font mounting positions, dumping (pfp): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12929)
* offset, page:                          Page Geometry.     (line  4331)
* offset, page (po):                     Line Layout.       (line  7135)
* open request, and safer mode:          Groff Options.     (line   745)
* open request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* open streams, dumping (pstream):       Debugging.         (line 12973)
* opena request, and safer mode:         Groff Options.     (line   745)
* opena request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* opening brace escape sequence (\}):    Conditional Blocks.
                                                            (line  9696)
* opening file (open):                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12476)
* operator, scaling:                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4535)
* operators, arithmetic:                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* operators, as delimiters:              Delimiters.        (line  5233)
* operators, comparison:                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4561)
* operators, extremum (>?, <?):          Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4552)
* operators, logical:                    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4567)
* operators, motion:                     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4602)
* operators, unary arithmetic:           Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* optical size of a font, setting the (fzoom): Selecting Fonts.
                                                            (line  7711)
* options:                               Groff Options.     (line   515)
* order of evaluation in expressions:    Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4591)
* ordinary character:                    Identifiers.       (line  4728)
* orientation, landscape:                Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* origin:                                Page Geometry.     (line  4337)
* orphan:                                Page Control.      (line  7498)
* orphan lines, preventing with ne:      Page Control.      (line  7462)
* os request, and no-space mode:         Page Control.      (line  7510)
* outlined circle, drawing (\D'c ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* outlined ellipse, drawing (\D'e ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* outlined polygon, drawing (\D'p ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* output and input requests:             Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12184)
* output comparison operator:            Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9518)
* output device name string (.T):        Groff Options.     (line   807)
* output device name string (.T) <1>:    Strings.           (line  9201)
* output device name string (.T), in other implementations: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13476)
* output device usage register (.T):     Groff Options.     (line   807)
* output device usage register (.T), incompatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13481)
* output devices:                        Output Device Intro.
                                                            (line   378)
* output encoding, ASCII:                Groff Options.     (line   782)
* output encoding, ISO 646:              Groff Options.     (line   782)
* output encoding, ISO Latin-1 (8859-1): Groff Options.     (line   786)
* output encoding, UTF-8:                Groff Options.     (line   790)
* output flushes, timing of, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13571)
* output format, troff:                  GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* output glyphs, and input characters, compatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* output line annotation:                Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10605)
* output line break:                     Breaking.          (line  3796)
* output line break (introduction):      Basics.            (line  1128)
* output line number register (ln):      Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10634)
* output line properties:                Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5793)
* output line, continuation (\c):        Line Continuation. (line  7301)
* output line, flush pending (fl):       Debugging.         (line 12986)
* output line, horizontal position, register (.k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10568)
* output line, node list of pending, dumping (pline): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12954)
* output node:                           GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12665)
* output request, and \!:                Diversions.        (line 11800)
* output request, and copy mode:         Diversions.        (line 11800)
* output, filling, disabling request (nf): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5841)
* output, filling, enabling request (fi): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5834)
* output, intermediate:                  GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* output, suppressing (\O):              Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12125)
* output, transparent (\!, \?):          Diversions.        (line 11760)
* output, transparent (cf, trf):         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* output, transparent, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13553)
* output, troff:                         GNU troff Output.  (line 13990)
* overlapping characters:                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* overstriking glyphs (\o):              Page Motions.      (line 10572)
* p scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4388)
* P scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4392)
* package, macro:                        Macro Packages.    (line  4041)
* package, macro, auxiliary:             Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* package, macro, full-service:          Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1440)
* package, macro, introduction:          Macro Package Intro.
                                                            (line   334)
* package, macro, major:                 Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1437)
* package, macro, minor:                 Major Macro Packages.
                                                            (line  1451)
* package, macro, search path:           Macro Directories. (line   936)
* package, package, structuring the source of: Invoking Requests.
                                                            (line  4938)
* packages, macro, tutorial for users of: Tutorial for Macro Package Users.
                                                            (line  1093)
* padding character, for fields (fc):    Fields.            (line  6958)
* page:                                  Page Geometry.     (line  4309)
* page break:                            Page Geometry.     (line  4343)
* page break <1>:                        Page Control.      (line  7425)
* page break <2>:                        The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* page break (introduction):             Basics.            (line  1227)
* page break, conditional (ne):          Page Control.      (line  7462)
* page break, final:                     End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11505)
* page break, prevented by vpt:          Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11054)
* page control:                          Page Control.      (line  7425)
* page description language, troff:      GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* page ejection:                         Page Geometry.     (line  4343)
* page ejection <1>:                     Page Control.      (line  7425)
* page ejection <2>:                     The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* page ejection status register (.pe):   Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11260)
* page ejection, of final page:          End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11505)
* page ejection, prevented by vpt:       Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11054)
* page footers:                          Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* page headers:                          Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* page layout:                           Page Layout.       (line  7342)
* page layout [ms]:                      ms Page Layout.    (line  3115)
* page length register (.p):             Page Layout.       (line  7356)
* page length, configuring (pl):         Page Layout.       (line  7348)
* page location traps:                   Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11062)
* page location traps, debugging:        Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11132)
* page location, vertical, marking (mk): Page Motions.      (line 10332)
* page location, vertical, returning to marked (rt): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10332)
* page motions:                          Page Motions.      (line 10327)
* page number character (%):             Page Layout.       (line  7375)
* page number character, changing (pc):  Page Layout.       (line  7406)
* page number register (%):              Page Control.      (line  7443)
* page number, next, assignment request (pn): Page Layout.  (line  7362)
* page number, next, register (.pn):     Page Layout.       (line  7367)
* page offset:                           Page Geometry.     (line  4331)
* page offset (po):                      Line Layout.       (line  7135)
* page orientation, landscape:           Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* page, geometry of:                     Page Geometry.     (line  4296)
* page, new request (bp):                Page Control.      (line  7433)
* paper format:                          Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* paper size:                            Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* paragraphs:                            Paragraphs.        (line  1258)
* parameter count register (.$):         Parameters.        (line 10043)
* parameters:                            Parameters.        (line 10035)
* parameters, and compatibility mode:    GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* parameters, macro (\$):                Parameters.        (line 10066)
* parentheses:                           Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4591)
* partially collected line:              Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5793)
* path, for font files:                  Font Directories.  (line   981)
* path, for tmac files:                  Macro Directories. (line   936)
* pattern files, for hyphenation:        Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6314)
* patterns for hyphenation (hpf):        Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6383)
* pending node list of output line, dumping (pline): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12954)
* pending output line:                   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5793)
* pending output line, flush (fl):       Debugging.         (line 12986)
* pi request, and safer mode:            Groff Options.     (line   745)
* pi request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* pi request, disabled by default:       Safer Mode.        (line 13234)
* pi request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* pica scaling unit (P):                 Measurements.      (line  4392)
* PID of GNU troff register ($$):        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* pile, glyph (\b):                      Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10949)
* pl request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* plain text approximation output register (.A): Groff Options.
                                                            (line   563)
* plain text approximation output register (.A) <1>: Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5722)
* planting a trap:                       Traps.             (line 11033)
* platform-specific directory:           Macro Directories. (line   952)
* pm request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13509)
* pn request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* PNG image generation from PostScript:  DESC File Format.  (line 13666)
* po request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* point scaling unit (p):                Measurements.      (line  4388)
* point size registers (.s, .ps):        Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8867)
* point size registers, last-requested (.psr, .sr): Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* point sizes, changing (ps, \s):        Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8854)
* point sizes, changing (ps, \s) <1>:    Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9056)
* point sizes, fractional:               Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8990)
* point sizes, fractional <1>:           Other Differences. (line 13495)
* point, scaled, scaling unit (s):       Measurements.      (line  4396)
* point, scaled, scaling unit (s) <1>:   Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* point, typographical, scaling unit (z): Measurements.     (line  4399)
* point, typographical, scaling unit (z) <1>: Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* polygon, filled, drawing (\D'P ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* polygon, outlined, drawing (\D'p ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* polygon, solid, drawing (\D'P ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* polygon, stroked, drawing (\D'p ...'): Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* position of lowest text line (.h):     Diversions.        (line 11700)
* position, absolute (sic) operator (|): Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4616)
* position, drawing:                     Page Geometry.     (line  4322)
* position, horizontal input line, saving (\k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10556)
* position, horizontal, in input line, register (hp): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10564)
* position, horizontal, in output line, register (.k): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10568)
* position, mounting:                    Using Fonts.       (line  7580)
* position, vertical, in diversion, register (.d): Diversions.
                                                            (line 11673)
* positions, font:                       Font Positions.    (line  7838)
* positions, font mounting, occupied, dumping (pfp): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12929)
* post-vertical line spacing:            Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8965)
* post-vertical line spacing register (.pvs): Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8977)
* post-vertical line spacing, changing (pvs): Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8977)
* postprocessor access:                  Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12546)
* postprocessors:                        Output Device Intro.
                                                            (line   378)
* PostScript, bounding box:              Miscellaneous.     (line 12652)
* PostScript, PNG image generation:      DESC File Format.  (line 13666)
* prefix, for commands:                  Environment.       (line   876)
* preprocessors:                         Preprocessor Intro.
                                                            (line   346)
* previous font, selecting (\f[], \fP):  Selecting Fonts.   (line  7667)
* previous font, selecting (ft):         Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* previous line length (.n):             Environments.      (line 12116)
* print current page register (.P):      Groff Options.     (line   708)
* print to the standard error stream (tm, tm1, tmc): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12868)
* printing backslash (\\, \e, \E, \[rs]): Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13553)
* printing line numbers (nm):            Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10612)
* printing, zero-width (\z, \Z):         Page Motions.      (line 10577)
* printing, zero-width (\z, \Z) <1>:     Page Motions.      (line 10582)
* process ID of GNU troff register ($$): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12188)
* productive input line:                 Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5970)
* properties of characters (cflags):     Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8190)
* properties of glyphs (cflags):         Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8190)
* properties of output lines:            Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5793)
* ps request, and constant glyph spacing mode: Artificial Fonts.
                                                            (line  8610)
* ps request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13495)
* ps request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* ps request, with fractional type sizes: Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* pso request, and safer mode:           Groff Options.     (line   745)
* pvs request, using + and - with:       Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* quanta, motion:                        Motion Quanta.     (line  4430)
* quantum, horizontal motion:            DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* quantum, vertical motion:              DESC File Format.  (line 13771)
* quoting the control character with \\: Copy Mode.         (line 10171)
* quoting the escape character with \\:  Copy Mode.         (line 10171)
* radicalex glyph, and cflags:           Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* ragged-left text:                      Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5872)
* ragged-right text:                     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5869)
* rc request, and glyph definitions:     Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* read (interpolate) from standard input stream (rd): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12360)
* read next file (nx):                   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12356)
* read-only register removal, incompatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13485)
* read-only register, changing format:   Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5668)
* recursive macros:                      while.             (line  9805)
* refer, and macro names starting with [ or ]: Identifiers. (line  4756)
* reference, troff:                      GNU troff Reference.
                                                            (line  3622)
* references [ms]:                       ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* register format:                       Registers.         (line  5395)
* register format, in expressions:       Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5680)
* register, assigning number format to (af): Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5609)
* register, built-in, removing:          Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5708)
* register, creating alias of (aln):     Setting Registers. (line  5514)
* register, format (\g):                 Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5675)
* register, read-only, removal, incompatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13485)
* register, removing (rr):               Setting Registers. (line  5500)
* register, removing alias of (rr):      Setting Registers. (line  5519)
* register, renaming (rnn):              Setting Registers. (line  5509)
* registers:                             Registers.         (line  5389)
* registers, available number of, register (.R): Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5742)
* registers, built-in:                   Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5704)
* registers, dumping (pnr):              Debugging.         (line 12967)
* registers, interpolating (\n):         Interpolating Registers.
                                                            (line  5529)
* registers, setting (nr, \R):           Setting Registers. (line  5403)
* removal of read-only registers, incompatibility with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13485)
* removing a built-in register:          Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5708)
* removing a register (rr):              Setting Registers. (line  5500)
* removing alias of register (rr):       Setting Registers. (line  5519)
* removing alias, for diversion (rm):    Strings.           (line  9445)
* removing alias, for macro (rm):        Strings.           (line  9445)
* removing alias, for string (rm):       Strings.           (line  9445)
* removing character definition (rchar, rfschar): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8361)
* removing diversion (rm):               Strings.           (line  9402)
* removing macro (rm):                   Strings.           (line  9402)
* removing request (rm):                 Strings.           (line  9402)
* removing string (rm):                  Strings.           (line  9402)
* renaming a register (rnn):             Setting Registers. (line  5509)
* renaming diversion (rn):               Strings.           (line  9399)
* renaming macro (rn):                   Strings.           (line  9399)
* renaming request (rn):                 Strings.           (line  9399)
* renaming string (rn):                  Strings.           (line  9399)
* renditions, graphic:                   Using Fonts.       (line  7610)
* request:                               Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3890)
* request <1>:                           Formatter Instructions.
                                                            (line  4840)
* request arguments:                     Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* request arguments, and compatibility mode: GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12774)
* request arguments, and tabs:           Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* request, removing (rm):                Strings.           (line  9402)
* request, renaming (rn):                Strings.           (line  9399)
* request, undefined:                    Comments.          (line  5306)
* requests for drawing:                  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10767)
* requests for input and output:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12184)
* requests handling file name arguments, in other implementations: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* requests, intercepting:                Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4900)
* requests, invoking:                    Invoking Requests. (line  4916)
* requests, modifying:                   Control Characters.
                                                            (line  4900)
* resolution, device:                    Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* resolution, device <1>:                DESC File Format.  (line 13723)
* resolution, device, obtaining in the formatter: Measurements.
                                                            (line  4375)
* resolution, horizontal:                DESC File Format.  (line 13662)
* resolution, horizontal, register (.H): Motion Quanta.     (line  4437)
* resolution, vertical:                  DESC File Format.  (line 13771)
* resolution, vertical, register (.V):   Motion Quanta.     (line  4437)
* <RET> (keycap notation):               Conventions Used in This Manual.
                                                            (line   415)
* returning to marked vertical page location (rt): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10332)
* revision number register (.Y):         Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5764)
* right margin:                          Line Layout.       (line  7141)
* right-aligning lines (introduction):   Basics.            (line  1224)
* right-aligning text (rj):              Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6041)
* rivers:                                Other Differences. (line 13434)
* rj request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* rn glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* roman glyph, correction after slanted glyph (\/): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* roman glyph, correction before slanted glyph (\,): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* Roman numerals:                        Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5629)
* Roman numerals, extrema (maximum and minimum): Assigning Register Formats.
                                                            (line  5661)
* rq glyph, at end of sentence:          Sentences.         (line  3735)
* rq glyph, at end of sentence <1>:      Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* rt request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* ru glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* run-in headings:                       Sections and Chapters.
                                                            (line  1301)
* running system commands:               Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12446)
* s scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4396)
* s scaling unit <1>:                    Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* safer mode:                            Groff Options.     (line   745)
* safer mode <1>:                        Macro Directories. (line   946)
* safer mode <2>:                        Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5752)
* safer mode <3>:                        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12299)
* safer mode <4>:                        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12437)
* safer mode <5>:                        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12453)
* safer mode <6>:                        Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12482)
* safer mode <7>:                        Safer Mode.        (line 13234)
* saturating arithmetic:                 Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4502)
* saving horizontal input line position (\k): Page Motions. (line 10556)
* scaled point scaling unit (s):         Measurements.      (line  4396)
* scaled point scaling unit (s) <1>:     Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* scaling indicator:                     Measurements.      (line  4366)
* scaling operator:                      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4535)
* scaling unit c:                        Measurements.      (line  4385)
* scaling unit f:                        Colors.            (line  9115)
* scaling unit i:                        Measurements.      (line  4382)
* scaling unit m:                        Measurements.      (line  4413)
* scaling unit M:                        Measurements.      (line  4425)
* scaling unit n:                        Measurements.      (line  4417)
* scaling unit p:                        Measurements.      (line  4388)
* scaling unit P:                        Measurements.      (line  4392)
* scaling unit s:                        Measurements.      (line  4396)
* scaling unit s <1>:                    Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* scaling unit u:                        Measurements.      (line  4378)
* scaling unit v:                        Measurements.      (line  4422)
* scaling unit z:                        Measurements.      (line  4399)
* scaling unit z <1>:                    Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* schar request, and comments:           Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* search path, font:                     Font Directories.  (line   981)
* search procedure for macro packages:   Macro Directories. (line   934)
* seconds, current time (seconds):       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12197)
* selecting the previous font (ft):      Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* sentence space size register (.sss):   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* sentence-ending punctuation:           Sentences.         (line  3691)
* sentence, cancelling detection of end of, on AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13429)
* sentences:                             Sentences.         (line  3679)
* sequence, escape:                      Formatter Instructions.
                                                            (line  4846)
* setting diversion trap (dt):           Diversion Traps.   (line 11328)
* setting end-of-input trap (em):        End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* setting input line trap (it, itc):     Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* setting registers (nr, \R):            Setting Registers. (line  5403)
* setting the page length (pl):          Page Layout.       (line  7348)
* setting up an abstract font style (sty): Font Families.   (line  7804)
* shc request, and translations:         Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7021)
* site-local directory:                  Macro Directories. (line   952)
* site-local directory <1>:              Font Directories.  (line   996)
* size of sentence space register (.sss): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* size of word space register (.ss):     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* size, optical, of a font, setting (fzoom): Selecting Fonts.
                                                            (line  7711)
* size, paper:                           Paper Format.      (line  1013)
* size, size:                            Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* sizes, fractional:                     Other Differences. (line 13495)
* sizes, fractional type:                Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8990)
* skew, of last glyph (.csk):            Environments.      (line 12101)
* slant, font, changing (\S):            Artificial Fonts.  (line  8525)
* slanted (font shape):                  Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* so request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* so request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* soft hyphen character, setting (shc):  Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* soft hyphen glyph (hy):                Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* solid circle, drawing (\D'C ...'):     Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10873)
* solid ellipse, drawing (\D'E ...'):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10880)
* solid polygon, drawing (\D'P ...'):    Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10914)
* soquiet request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH, environment variable: Environment.     (line   920)
* sp request, and no-space mode:         Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6730)
* sp request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* space between sentences:               Sentences.         (line  3691)
* space between sentences register (.sss): Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* space between words register (.ss):    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* space character, as delimiter:         Delimiters.        (line  5235)
* space characters, in expressions:      Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4684)
* space, between sentences:              Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6069)
* space, between words:                  Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6067)
* space, discardable, horizontal:        Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6089)
* space, hair (\^):                      Page Motions.      (line 10480)
* space, horizontal (\h):                Page Motions.      (line 10447)
* space, horizontal, unformatting:       Punning Names.     (line 11958)
* space, thin (\|):                      Page Motions.      (line 10475)
* space, trailing, on input lines, difference from AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13429)
* space, unbreakable (\~):               Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5820)
* space, unbreakable and unadjustable (\<SPC>): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10470)
* space, vertical, unit (v):             Measurements.      (line  4422)
* space, width of a digit (numeral) (\0): Page Motions.     (line 10486)
* space, word:                           Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* spaces in character definitions:       Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8284)
* spaces in ds and ds1 argument, leading: Strings.          (line  9262)
* spaces in file name arguments:         Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6429)
* spaces in file name or system command arguments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* spaces in string definitions and appendments: Strings.    (line  9236)
* spaces in string length measurement:   Strings.           (line  9333)
* spaces, in a macro argument:           Calling Macros.    (line  4992)
* spaces, leading and trailing:          Breaking.          (line  3828)
* spacing (introduction):                Basics.            (line  1190)
* spacing, manipulating:                 Manipulating Spacing.
                                                            (line  6604)
* spacing, vertical:                     Page Geometry.     (line  4317)
* spacing, vertical <1>:                 Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* spacing, vertical (introduction):      Basics.            (line  1177)
* <SPC> (keycap notation):               Conventions Used in This Manual.
                                                            (line   415)
* special character name space, shared with character classes: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* special characters:                    Sentences.         (line  3735)
* special characters <1>:                Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7007)
* special characters [ms]:               ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* special characters, in device extension commands: Postprocessor Access.
                                                            (line 12566)
* special characters, list of (groff_char(7) man page): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8015)
* special font:                          Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* special fonts:                         Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* special fonts <1>:                     Special Fonts.     (line  8444)
* special fonts <2>:                     Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13848)
* special fonts, emboldening:            Artificial Fonts.  (line  8597)
* special request, and font translations: Selecting Fonts.  (line  7700)
* special request, and glyph search order: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* spline, drawing (\D'~ ...'):           Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10860)
* springing a trap:                      Traps.             (line 11034)
* sqrtex glyph, and cflags:              Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* ss request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13516)
* stack:                                 Environments.      (line 11985)
* stacking glyphs (\b):                  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10949)
* standard error stream, write to (tm, tm1, tmc): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12868)
* standard input stream, interpolate from (rd): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12360)
* stops, tab:                            Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* stream, standard error, write to (tm, tm1, tmc): Debugging.
                                                            (line 12868)
* streams, open, dumping (pstream):      Debugging.         (line 12973)
* string arguments:                      Strings.           (line  9216)
* string comparison:                     Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9547)
* string expansion (\*):                 Strings.           (line  9216)
* string interpolation (\*):             Strings.           (line  9216)
* string name space, shared with macros and diversions: Identifiers.
                                                            (line  4802)
* string, appending (as):                Strings.           (line  9313)
* string, creating alias of (als):       Strings.           (line  9410)
* string, dumping (pm):                  Debugging.         (line 12961)
* string, length of (length):            Strings.           (line  9334)
* string, removing (rm):                 Strings.           (line  9402)
* string, removing alias of (rm):        Strings.           (line  9445)
* string, renaming (rn):                 Strings.           (line  9399)
* strings:                               Strings.           (line  9194)
* strings [ms]:                          ms Legacy Features.
                                                            (line  3474)
* strings, multi-line:                   Strings.           (line  9271)
* stripping final newline in diversions: Punning Names.     (line 11958)
* stroke color:                          Colors.            (line  9082)
* stroke color name register (.m):       Colors.            (line  9150)
* stroked circle, drawing (\D'c ...'):   Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10869)
* stroked ellipse, drawing (\D'e ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10876)
* stroked polygon, drawing (\D'p ...'):  Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10908)
* structuring source code of documents or macro packages: Invoking Requests.
                                                            (line  4938)
* sty request, and changing fonts:       Selecting Fonts.   (line  7639)
* sty request, and font translations:    Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* style, font:                           Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* style, font, abstract:                 Using Fonts.       (line  7587)
* style, font, abstract, setting up (sty): Font Families.   (line  7804)
* styles, font:                          Font Families.     (line  7751)
* substring (substring):                 Strings.           (line  9366)
* subtraction:                           Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* supplemental inter-sentence space:     Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6069)
* suppressing output (\O):               Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12125)
* suppression nesting level register (.O): Suppressing Output.
                                                            (line 12178)
* sv request, and no-space mode:         Page Control.      (line  7510)
* switching environments (ev):           Environments.      (line 12021)
* sy request, and safer mode:            Groff Options.     (line   745)
* sy request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* sy request, disabled by default:       Safer Mode.        (line 13234)
* sy request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13465)
* symbol:                                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7915)
* symbol table, dumping (pm):            Debugging.         (line 12961)
* symbol, defining (char):               Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* symbols (characters and glyphs), using: Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* system commands, running:              Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12446)
* system() return value register (systat): Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12457)
* tab character:                         Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* tab character encoding:                Tabs and Fields.   (line  6759)
* tab character, and translations:       Character Translations.
                                                            (line  7017)
* tab character, as delimiter:           Delimiters.        (line  5235)
* tab character, non-interpreted (\t):   Tabs and Fields.   (line  6763)
* tab repetition character (tc):         Tabs and Fields.   (line  6872)
* tab stop settings register (.tabs):    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6863)
* tab stops:                             Tabs and Leaders.  (line  3858)
* tab stops, default:                    Tabs and Fields.   (line  6771)
* tab, line-tabs mode:                   Tabs and Fields.   (line  6885)
* table of contents:                     Table of Contents. (line  1364)
* table of contents <1>:                 Leaders.           (line  6937)
* table of contents, creating [ms]:      ms TOC.            (line  3209)
* table, multi-page, example [ms]:       ms Insertions.     (line  2950)
* tables [ms]:                           ms Insertions.     (line  2908)
* tabs, and fields:                      Tabs and Fields.   (line  6759)
* tabs, and macro arguments:             Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* tabs, and request arguments:           Invoking Requests. (line  4924)
* tabs, before comments:                 Comments.          (line  5301)
* tagged paragraphs:                     Paragraphs.        (line  1267)
* tags, paragraph:                       Paragraphs.        (line  1267)
* terminal, conditional output for:      Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9493)
* text baseline:                         Page Geometry.     (line  4316)
* text baseline <1>:                     Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* text font:                             Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* text line:                             Requests and Macros.
                                                            (line  3902)
* text line, position of lowest (.h):    Diversions.        (line 11700)
* text, GNU troff processing of:         Text.              (line  3629)
* text, justifying:                      Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* text, right-aligning (rj):             Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6041)
* thickness of lines (\D't ...'):        Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10939)
* thin space (\|):                       Page Motions.      (line 10475)
* three-part title (tl):                 Page Layout.       (line  7375)
* ti request, causing implicit break:    Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* ti request, using + and - with:        Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4608)
* time, current, hours (hours):          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12203)
* time, current, minutes (minutes):      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12200)
* time, current, seconds (seconds):      Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12197)
* timing of output flushes, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13571)
* title length, configuring (lt):        Page Layout.       (line  7392)
* title line length register (.lt):      Page Layout.       (line  7403)
* title line, formatting (tl):           Page Layout.       (line  7375)
* titles:                                Page Layout.       (line  7370)
* tkf request, and font styles:          Font Families.     (line  7804)
* tkf request, and font translations:    Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* tkf request, with fractional type sizes: Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* tl request, and mc:                    Output Line Annotation.
                                                            (line 10716)
* tmac, directory:                       Macro Directories. (line   936)
* tmac, path:                            Macro Directories. (line   936)
* TMPDIR, environment variable:          Environment.       (line   906)
* token:                                 GNU troff Internals.
                                                            (line 12665)
* top margin:                            Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11081)
* top-level diversion:                   Diversions.        (line 11598)
* top-level diversion, and \!:           Diversions.        (line 11792)
* top-level diversion, and \?:           Diversions.        (line 11797)
* top-level diversion, and bp:           Page Control.      (line  7438)
* tr request, and glyph definitions:     Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8288)
* tr request, and soft hyphen character: Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6228)
* tr request, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13520)
* track kerning:                         Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8677)
* track kerning, activating (tkf):       Ligatures and Kerning.
                                                            (line  8684)
* trailing space, on input lines, difference from AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13429)
* trailing spaces on text lines:         Breaking.          (line  3828)
* translations of characters:            Character Translations.
                                                            (line  6988)
* translations, font, dumping (pftr):    Debugging.         (line 12939)
* transparent characters:                Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8232)
* transparent dummy character (\)):      Dummy Characters.  (line  8795)
* transparent output (\!, \?):           Diversions.        (line 11760)
* transparent output (cf, trf):          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* transparent output, incompatibilities with AT&T troff: Other Differences.
                                                            (line 13553)
* trap:                                  Deferring Output.  (line 10978)
* trap name, next, register (.trap):     Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11256)
* trap, changing location (ch):          Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11187)
* trap, distance to next vertical position, register (.t): Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11179)
* trap, diversion, setting (dt):         Diversion Traps.   (line 11328)
* trap, end-of-input, setting (em):      End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11478)
* trap, implicit:                        The Implicit Page Trap.
                                                            (line 11298)
* trap, input line, clearing (it, itc):  Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* trap, input line, setting (it, itc):   Input Line Traps.  (line 11343)
* trap, planting:                        Traps.             (line 11033)
* trap, springing:                       Traps.             (line 11034)
* traps:                                 Traps.             (line 11028)
* traps, and diversions:                 Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11280)
* traps, blank line:                     Blank Line Traps.  (line 11447)
* traps, diversion:                      Diversion Traps.   (line 11323)
* traps, end-of-input:                   End-of-input Traps.
                                                            (line 11477)
* traps, input line:                     Input Line Traps.  (line 11338)
* traps, input line, and interrupted lines (itc): Input Line Traps.
                                                            (line 11367)
* traps, leading space:                  Leading Space Traps.
                                                            (line 11457)
* traps, page location:                  Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11062)
* traps, page location, dumping (pwh):   Debugging.         (line 12979)
* traps, page location, listing (pwh):   Debugging.         (line 12979)
* traps, sprung by bp request (.pe):     Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11260)
* traps, vertical position:              Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11040)
* trf request, and copy mode:            Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12315)
* trf request, and invalid characters:   Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12323)
* trf request, arguments starting with double quote ", and comments: Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12254)
* trf request, causing implicit break:   Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5773)
* trin request, and asciify:             Diversions.        (line 11818)
* troff mode:                            troff and nroff Modes.
                                                            (line  7079)
* troff output format:                   GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* troff page description language:       GNU troff Output.  (line 14005)
* troff, GNU, interactive use of:        Debugging.         (line 12986)
* troff, GNU, reference:                 GNU troff Reference.
                                                            (line  3622)
* troff, interactive use of:             Debugging.         (line 12986)
* troff, output:                         GNU troff Output.  (line 13990)
* troff, reference:                      GNU troff Reference.
                                                            (line  3622)
* truncated vertical space register (.trunc): Page Location Traps.
                                                            (line 11245)
* truncating division:                   Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4505)
* TTY, conditional output for:           Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9493)
* tutorial for macro package users:      Tutorial for Macro Package Users.
                                                            (line  1093)
* type size:                             Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* type size registers (.s, .ps):         Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8867)
* type size registers, last-requested (.psr, .sr): Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9044)
* type sizes, changing (ps, \s):         Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8854)
* type sizes, changing (ps, \s) <1>:     Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  9056)
* type sizes, fractional:                Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8990)
* type sizes, fractional <1>:            Other Differences. (line 13495)
* typeface:                              Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* typographical point scaling unit (z):  Measurements.      (line  4399)
* typographical point scaling unit (z) <1>: Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* TZ, environment variable:              Environment.       (line   927)
* u scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4378)
* uf request, and font styles:           Font Families.     (line  7804)
* ul glyph, and cflags:                  Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8222)
* ul request, and font translations:     Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* Ultrix-specific man macros:            Optional man extensions.
                                                            (line  1495)
* unadjustable and unbreakable space (\<SPC>): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10470)
* unary arithmetic operators:            Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* unbreakable and unadjustable space (\<SPC>): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10470)
* unbreakable space (\~):                Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  5820)
* undefined identifiers:                 Identifiers.       (line  4791)
* undefined request:                     Comments.          (line  5306)
* underline font (uf):                   Artificial Fonts.  (line  8573)
* underlining (ul):                      Artificial Fonts.  (line  8547)
* underlining, continuous (cu):          Artificial Fonts.  (line  8569)
* unformatting diversions (asciify):     Diversions.        (line 11818)
* unformatting horizontal space:         Punning Names.     (line 11958)
* Unicode:                               Input Format.      (line  4058)
* Unicode <1>:                           Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8154)
* unit, scaling, c:                      Measurements.      (line  4385)
* unit, scaling, f:                      Colors.            (line  9115)
* unit, scaling, i:                      Measurements.      (line  4382)
* unit, scaling, m:                      Measurements.      (line  4413)
* unit, scaling, M:                      Measurements.      (line  4425)
* unit, scaling, n:                      Measurements.      (line  4417)
* unit, scaling, p:                      Measurements.      (line  4388)
* unit, scaling, P:                      Measurements.      (line  4392)
* unit, scaling, s:                      Measurements.      (line  4396)
* unit, scaling, s <1>:                  Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* unit, scaling, u:                      Measurements.      (line  4378)
* unit, scaling, v:                      Measurements.      (line  4422)
* unit, scaling, z:                      Measurements.      (line  4399)
* unit, scaling, z <1>:                  Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* units of measurement:                  Measurements.      (line  4366)
* units, basic:                          Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* units, basic, conversion to:           Measurements.      (line  4373)
* units, default:                        Default Units.     (line  4456)
* units, machine:                        Page Geometry.     (line  4303)
* unnamed glyphs:                        Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  8164)
* unnamed glyphs, accessing with \N:     Font Description File Format.
                                                            (line 13870)
* unsafe mode:                           Groff Options.     (line   818)
* unsafe mode <1>:                       Macro Directories. (line   946)
* unsafe mode <2>:                       Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5752)
* unsafe mode <3>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12299)
* unsafe mode <4>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12437)
* unsafe mode <5>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12453)
* unsafe mode <6>:                       Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12482)
* unstyled font:                         Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* untokenized escape sequence, \f:       Selecting Fonts.   (line  7692)
* untokenized escape sequence, \F:       Font Families.     (line  7795)
* untokenized escape sequence, \H:       Artificial Fonts.  (line  8505)
* untokenized escape sequence, \m:       Colors.            (line  9154)
* untokenized escape sequence, \M:       Colors.            (line  9171)
* untokenized escape sequence, \R:       Setting Registers. (line  5422)
* untokenized escape sequence, \S:       Artificial Fonts.  (line  8534)
* untokenized escape sequence, \s:       Changing the Type Size.
                                                            (line  8909)
* uppercasing a string (stringup):       Strings.           (line  9384)
* upright (font shape):                  Using Fonts.       (line  7565)
* upright glyph, correction after slanted glyph (\/): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8708)
* upright glyph, correction before slanted glyph (\,): Italic Corrections.
                                                            (line  8718)
* URLs, breaking (\:):                   Manipulating Hyphenation.
                                                            (line  6205)
* user's tutorial:                       Tutorial for Macro Package Users.
                                                            (line  1093)
* using escape sequences:                Using Escape Sequences.
                                                            (line  5080)
* using symbols (characters and glyphs): Characters and Glyphs.
                                                            (line  7903)
* UTF-8 output encoding:                 Groff Options.     (line   790)
* v scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4422)
* valid numeric expression:              Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4667)
* value, incrementing without changing the register: Auto-increment.
                                                            (line  5599)
* variables in environment:              Environment.       (line   864)
* vee:                                   Page Geometry.     (line  4317)
* vee scaling unit (v):                  Measurements.      (line  4422)
* version number, major, register (.x):  Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5756)
* version number, minor, register (.y):  Built-in Registers.
                                                            (line  5760)
* vertical drawing position (nl):        Page Control.      (line  7516)
* vertical line drawing (\L):            Drawing Geometric Objects.
                                                            (line 10808)
* vertical line spacing register (.v):   Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8937)
* vertical line spacing, changing (vs):  Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8937)
* vertical line spacing, effective value: Changing the Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8951)
* vertical motion (\v):                  Page Motions.      (line 10404)
* vertical motion quantum:               DESC File Format.  (line 13771)
* vertical motion quantum register (.V): Motion Quanta.     (line  4437)
* vertical page location, marking (mk):  Page Motions.      (line 10332)
* vertical page location, returning to marked (rt): Page Motions.
                                                            (line 10332)
* vertical position in diversion register (.d): Diversions. (line 11673)
* vertical position trap enable register (.vpt): Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11048)
* vertical position traps:               Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11040)
* vertical position traps, enabling (vpt): Vertical Position Traps.
                                                            (line 11048)
* vertical position, drawing (nl):       Page Control.      (line  7516)
* vertical resolution:                   DESC File Format.  (line 13771)
* vertical resolution register (.V):     Motion Quanta.     (line  4437)
* vertical space unit (v):               Measurements.      (line  4422)
* vertical spacing:                      Page Geometry.     (line  4317)
* vertical spacing <1>:                  Manipulating Type Size and Vertical Spacing.
                                                            (line  8827)
* vertical spacing (introduction):       Basics.            (line  1177)
* warning categories:                    Warnings.          (line 13088)
* warning level (warn):                  Debugging.         (line 13063)
* warnings:                              Debugging.         (line 13074)
* warnings <1>:                          Warnings.          (line 13081)
* what is groff?:                        What Is groff?.    (line   268)
* while request:                         while.             (line  9773)
* while request, and font translations:  Selecting Fonts.   (line  7700)
* while request, and the ! operator:     Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4512)
* while request, confusing with br:      while.             (line  9838)
* while request, operators to use with:  Operators in Conditionals.
                                                            (line  9467)
* widow:                                 Page Control.      (line  7498)
* width computation escape sequence (\w): Page Motions.     (line 10499)
* width, of last glyph (.w):             Environments.      (line 12101)
* word space:                            Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* word space size register (.ss):        Manipulating Filling and Adjustment.
                                                            (line  6062)
* word, definition of:                   Filling.           (line  3654)
* write request, and copy mode:          Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* writec request, and copy mode:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12492)
* writem request, and copy mode:         Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12502)
* writing macros:                        Writing Macros.    (line  9855)
* year, current, register (year, yr):    Host System Service Access.
                                                            (line 12215)
* z scaling unit:                        Measurements.      (line  4399)
* z scaling unit <1>:                    Using Fractional Type Sizes.
                                                            (line  8998)
* zero-width printing (\z, \Z):          Page Motions.      (line 10577)
* zero-width printing (\z, \Z) <1>:      Page Motions.      (line 10582)
* zero, division and modulus by:         Numeric Expressions.
                                                            (line  4509)
* zoom factor of a font (fzoom):         Selecting Fonts.   (line  7711)

